JP6641894B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which an effect of operating a decoration from a standby position to a predetermined operation position is performed by a player operating an operation means (effect button or the like) ( Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2005-097827

  However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine of the present invention comprises an operating means operable by a player, a signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operating means, A signal discriminating means for discriminating a signal output by the signal output means, a plurality of effect means capable of executing an effect, and a predetermined signal based on the signal discriminating means discriminating the predetermined signal; An effect execution means capable of causing at least two or more of the effect means of the plurality of effect means to execute a specific effect in the first effect pattern, and wherein the effect execution means comprises When the specific effect is performed by the effect means, a predetermined standby period, at least one of the two or more effect means is to cause the at least one of the effect means to wait for the execution of the effect, By the signal discriminating means during machine period in which to initiate the execution of the effect for at least 1 of the presentation means waiting based on the reception of the predetermined signal.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, operating means that can be operated by the player, signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operating means, and the signal output means Signal determining means for determining a signal output by the control unit, a plurality of effect means capable of executing an effect, and a predetermined first effect on the basis of the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determining means. An effect execution means capable of causing at least two or more of the effect means of the plurality of effect means to execute a specific effect in a pattern, wherein the effect execution means comprises at least two of the effect means In the case of executing the specific effect, in a predetermined standby period, at least one of the two or more of the effect means to cause the at least one of the effect means to wait for the execution of the effect, during the standby period It is intended to start the execution of the effect for at least 1 of the presentation means waiting based on the reception of the predetermined signal by the serial signal discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is the exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the operation unit which disassembled from the front. It is the exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the operation unit which disassembled from the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a swing operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rocking operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the swing operation unit, (b) is a rear view of the swing operation unit, and (c) is a bottom view of the swing operation unit. (A) to (d) is a partial front enlarged view of the swing operation unit on the base end side of the arm member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st slide operation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of a first slide operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first slide operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first slide operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st slide operation unit in the XXVII-XXVII line | wire of FIG.26 (a). It is a front perspective view of a reversal operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a reversing operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a reversing operation unit. (A) is a partial side view of the inversion operation unit, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the inversion operation unit along the line XXXXb-XXXXIb in FIG. 31 (a). 32A is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit, FIG. 32B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. 32A, and FIG. 32) is a partial cross-sectional view of the inversion operation unit taken along line XXXIIc-XXXIIc, and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the inversion operation unit taken along line XXXIId-XXXIId in FIG. 32 (b). (A) to (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit, and (d) to (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit. It is a partial side view of a reflection member and a transmission member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd slide operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the second slide operation unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the second slide operation unit. It is a partial rear view of the second slide operation unit. It is a front view of the drive gear in 2nd Embodiment, a transmission device, and an L-shaped lever. It is a front view of a drive gear, a transmission device, and an L-shaped lever. (A) And (b) is a front view of a swing operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a swing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first slide operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the second slide operation unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in a La-La cross section, (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of the first variable winning device. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters in the 1st example of control. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a second random number counter C4 in the first control example and a hit in an ordinary symbol, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM of the first control example, and FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press effect lottery table. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. (A)-(b) is an example of a notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device. (A)-(b) is an example of the long press effect displayed on the third symbol display device. (A)-(b) is an example of the long press effect displayed on the third symbol display device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an ending process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormality process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the long press effect process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device in the second control example, and (b) is an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device in the second control example. It is a block diagram showing, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a capture effect lottery table. (A)-(b) is an example of a capture effect display mode displayed on the third symbol display device. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed SW effect processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart showing a display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed SW effect display setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in a main control device in a third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process during the time reduction which is performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. (A)-(b) is an example of the display form of the temporary stop effect displayed on the third symbol display device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol temporary stop setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board 13 in the 5th control example. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of the V winning device in the fifth control example. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters in the 5th example of control. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device in the fifth control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of a first random number table in a fifth control example, and (b) is a first random number counter C1 in the fifth control example and a big hit determination in a first special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence relationship with a value, (c) has shown typically the correspondence relationship between the 1st random number counter C1 in a 5th control example, and the big hit determination value in a 2nd special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, (d) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd random number counter C4 in the 5th control example, and the hit in a normal symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first hit type selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a first hit type counter C2 and a first special symbol in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence relationship with the big hit type in (c), The (c) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the fifth control example and the big hit type in the second special symbol. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a small hit type counter C5 in the fifth control example and a small hit type in the first special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence relationship with a hit type, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence relationship between the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type in a 2nd special symbol. . (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the change pattern selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a correspondence between the change type counter CS1 and the change type at the time of the big hit in the fifth control example. FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the relationship, and FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of disconnection (normal) in the fifth control example; (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type in the time reduction in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the game flow in a 5th control example typically. (A) is a time chart showing from the winning of a game ball to the second winning opening to the occurrence of a jackpot based on the passing of the game ball to the V winning switch in the fifth control example, and (b) is the fifth control. It is a time chart showing from the winning of a game ball to the second winning opening to the occurrence of a big hit by a special symbol in an example. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a special figure 2 unchangeable state among the special figure 2 game states, and (b). FIG. 9 is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a special figure 2 fluctuating state in the special figure 2 gaming state. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a small hitting gaming state among the special figure 2 gaming states, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a second winning state; 5 is a schematic diagram showing a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, showing a state in which a big hit based on the passing of a game ball to a V winning switch has occurred in a special figure 2 game state; It is. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a state at the start of a big hit in the special figure 2 game state, and (b). FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, showing that a time-saving game is given after a big hit in the special figure 2 game state, c) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the state shifts to the special figure 1 game state after a big hit among the special figure 2 game states. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen displayed at the timing of FIG. 125 (b) and showing a state in which a big hit D has occurred, and (b) is a timing diagram of FIG. 125 (b). It is the display screen displayed, and is the schematic diagram which showed the state departure with the big hit C in hold. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows normal change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving fluctuation | variation start process performed by the MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in an audio ramp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in the 5th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows a round number command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit start command process. (A) is a flowchart showing the small hit end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a V entrance passage command process. (A) is a flowchart showing 3V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows 2V effect command processing. It is a flow chart which shows V production command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in the 5th example of control. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the modification in a 5th control example. It is a perspective enlarged view of the detour member in the 6th control example. It is a rear view of a part of the 1st variable winning device in the 6th example of control. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram illustrating a perspective view of a flow path opening device in a sixth control example. (A) to (c) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing a continuous chance effect execution system. (A) and (b) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of the display mode of the continuous chance effect. (A) and (b) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of the display mode of the continuous chance effect. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device in the seventh control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of the big hit in the seventh control example, and (b) is a time when it is out of the seventh control example (normal). FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type in (c), and (c) shows the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of departure (probable variation) in the seventh control example; FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the consecutive chance number of hits table in the seventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the consecutive chance number table at the time of departure in the seventh control example. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the latent number lottery table in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 7th control example. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in the 7th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. It is a flow chart which shows winning information processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 7th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the back precursor setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the 8th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main control device in an eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first hit type table in the eighth control example. FIG. FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in a main control device in an eighth control example. (A) and (b) show the relationship between the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is executed. It is a timing chart. (A) and (b) show the relationship between the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is continuously executed. 6 is a timing chart showing a relationship. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. It is a flow chart which shows external output processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in the 8th example of control. FIG. 19 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in a main control device in a ninth control example. (A) and (b) show the relationship between the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is executed. It is a timing chart. It is a flow chart which shows external output processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in the 9th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the accessory A in the tenth control example. (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the accessory B in the tenth control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the accessory C in the tenth control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory arrangement | positioning in a 10th control example. (B) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory operation | movement in the 10th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the waiting position of the accessory A in the tenth control example. (B) is a figure which showed operation | movement of the normal drive pattern of the accessory A in the 10th control example. (C) is a diagram showing the operation of the shortened drive pattern of the accessory A in the tenth control example. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the 10th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement during button continuous hitting production in the 10th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio ramp control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio ramp control device in the tenth control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a continuous-hit effect selection table in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of an operation scenario table in the tenth control example. It is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory A scenario table in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the accessory B scenario table in the tenth control example. FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory C scenario table in the tenth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the button timer subtraction process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 10th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the accessory B operation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the character lamp control device in the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory C operation setting process performed by MPU. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 10th control example. (A)-(c) is a figure which showed operation | movement of the delay process in 11th control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement during button continuous hit production in the 11th control example. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example. It is the flowchart which showed the delay timer subtraction process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory B operation setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory C operation setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed the flow of the repetition operation | movement in a 12th control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement during button continuous hit production in the twelfth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation setting process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the accessory B operation setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the inside of the voice lamp control device in the twelfth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a character C operation setting process 3 executed by the MPU. (A) And (b) is a figure which showed operation | movement of the accessory in the 13th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement during button continuous hitting production in a 13th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation setting process 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory B operation setting process 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory C operation setting process 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the weak motion of the accessory in the fourteenth control example. (B) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the strong motion of the accessory in the 14th control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement during button continuous hit production in the 14th control example. It is a block diagram showing in detail the drive motor in the 14th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the second operation scenario table in the fourteenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the accessory A second scenario table in the fourteenth control example. FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hitting button processing 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the interval timer subtraction process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 14th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation setting process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 14th control example. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the 15th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the solenoid drive circuit in the 15th control example. It is the timing chart which showed the operation | movement of the normal electric solenoid in the 15th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the contents of operation of the usual electric solenoid in the 15th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the main control apparatus in the 15th control example. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol control processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal power operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the electric power opening / closing process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 15th control example. It is a flow chart which shows the usual electricity timer subtraction processing performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 15th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a solenoid drive circuit in a modification of the fifteenth control example. (B) is a timing chart showing an output signal in a modification of the fifteenth control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of operation of the usual electric (electric accessory) 640a in the modification of a 15th control example. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of operation | movement of a driven part.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination units 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 includes a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on to display the balance as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of ball guide nails (not shown) and a windmill (movable member 310 are illustrated. (Not shown), rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device (not shown), a normal symbol start The mouth (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared with the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (start winning) as a trigger, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing a variable display, and a variable symbol display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball through a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that emits light. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. The variable display for alternately lighting for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is moved for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (opened).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during probable change and during working hours.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is mounted on the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the ball flowing down the right side of the game board. Are configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is retained up to a total of four times, the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol retaining lamp is displayed. (Not shown) is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to four, but is set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). You may. Further, the number of the normal symbol starting ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the position where the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67, 640a is in an open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (expanded) is increased. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, by passing a ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state. Since the winning is easy, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the normal symbol starting port (through gate) It is more advantageous for the player to make the electric accessory open by passing through 67) and aiming for a 15R probability change big win by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is provided on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol and Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening-hole solenoid (shown in FIG. Zu). The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position may be the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. The present invention is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is provided below the first winning port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided. In the present embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 13 in a front view, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive devices 340, 464, 560 and drive motors 441, 771, 772, 773, 774.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a description will be given of a structure for accommodating each of the units 300 to 700 in the rear case 210.

  5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 when the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front. FIG. 7 shows a state in which the second slide operation unit 700 is mounted on the rear case 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 is opened on one side (the front side in FIG. 6) from the bottom wall 211 and the outer wall 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall 211. And a rear case 210 formed in a box shape. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, in which the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the operation unit 200, the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, the reversing operation unit 500, the decoration operation unit 600, and the second slide operation unit 700 are accommodated in the internal space of the rear case 210, respectively. It is configured as a unit.

  Specifically, the second slide operation unit 700 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210, and abuts on the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212, (See FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5), the second slide operation unit 700 has a rectangular opening at a position corresponding to the opening 211a of the rear case 210 in a front view.

  7, the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, the reversing operation unit 500, and the decoration unit 600 are stacked on the front side of the second slide operation unit 700, respectively. It is arranged and accommodated in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 700) and another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 400) are stacked on the front side in a stacked state. Since it is provided, a predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in a front view.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, the predetermined operation unit Can be visually recognized by the player, and other parts can be shielded from the player by other operation units. Thus, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation units on the assumption that the entire effect member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, an outline of operation modes of the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, and the second slide operation unit 700 will be described. 8 to 10 refer to FIGS. 5 to 7 as appropriate.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the upright member 330 and the arm member 320 of the swing operation unit 300 are arranged at the extended position, and FIG. 9 shows a tilting member 460 and a suspension member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 (FIG. 22). FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit are disposed in the overhang position.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the swing operation unit 300 includes an arm member 320 whose base end is pivotally supported so as to be swingable, and a swing end side which is opposite to the base end of the arm member 320. The arm member 320 and the upright member 330 are rotatably supported between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 320 and the upright member 330 are retracted below the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 320 is lifted, and the upright member 330 is disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, at the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). .

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first sliding operation unit 400 swings by a hanging member 430 (see FIG. 22) that is slid and moved obliquely downward, and a bending arm 433 (see FIG. 22) of the hanging member 430. A tilting member 460 that is movably supported is provided, and the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are operated between the retracted position illustrated in FIG. 5 and the extended position illustrated in FIG. 9. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the suspension member 430 and the tilting member 460 are retracted to the right of the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 9, the suspension member 430 is disposed at the end in the sliding direction (leftward), and the tilting member 460 is located at the center of the opening 211 a of the rear case 210 (ie, the front of the third symbol display device 81). , See FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 10, the second slide operation unit 700 includes a pair of slide members 720 and 740, each of which is slidably formed, and the slide members 720 and 740 are retracted as shown in FIG. It is operated between the position and the overhang position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of first slide members 720 are retracted to the left and right of the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and the pair of second slide members 740 are moved up and down of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. It is evacuated outward and is made invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 10, the respective slide members 720 and 740 are arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

  The second slide operation unit 700 is formed such that the shape of the “heart” can be visually recognized in a front view in a state where the respective slide members 720 and 740 project.

  As will be described later, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a rectangular plate-shaped reflecting member 520 (see FIG. 28), and is formed such that the surface of the reflecting member 520 viewed from the player can be reversed (turned over). You. The reversing operation unit 500 does not have a member that is provided in the other operation units 300, 400, and 700 and that projects to the center of the opening 211 a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81). Therefore, the reversing operation unit 500 is always operated on the left side of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  These operation units 300 to 700 are formed so as to be operable independently of each other, and are arranged in a superimposed (laminated) state as described above. Can be operated at the same time even if the operating member extends inward of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 10, not only can each of the operation units 300 to 700 be operated alone, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. The operation units 300 to 600 are arranged in the same layer, and the operation units 300 to 600 and the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged in different layers (see FIG. 7).

  FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is arranged at the extended position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged at the extended position.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is disposed between the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display are displayed. A gap corresponding to the second slide operation unit 700 is generated between the apparatus and the device 81. Therefore, when only the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is disposed at the extended position, the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is partially shielded from being viewed from the front. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from viewing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by observing the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined leftward and rightward from the front view).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 and the respective slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are both arranged at the overhang position, so that the player Can be filled with each of the slide members 720 and 740. Accordingly, a part of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 can be reliably shielded so as not to be visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

  FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 12, the upright member 330 of the swing operation unit 300 is arranged at the extended position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged at the extended position.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is disposed between the swing operation unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the oscillation operation unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81 are arranged. A gap for the second slide operation unit 700 is generated between and. Therefore, when only the upright member 330 of the swing operation unit 300 is disposed at the extended position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded so as to be invisible when viewed from the front. Although it is possible, it is difficult to prevent the player from looking into the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined leftward and rightward from the front view) and viewing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the upright member 330 of the swing operation unit 300 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are both arranged at the extended position, so that the player can A gap that is viewed from an oblique direction can be filled with each of the slide members 720 and 740. Thereby, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be surely shielded so as not to be visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

  The swing operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 13A and 13B are front perspective views of the swing operation unit 300. FIG. In FIG. 13A, the arm member 320 and the upright member 330 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 13B, the arm member 320 and the upright member 330 are arranged at the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the arm member 320 of the swing operation unit 300 is swung about a swing shaft 312, and before and after the swing, the posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 changes. The more you stand toward the outgoing position). Next, the overall configuration of the swing operation unit 300 will be described.

  FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation unit 300, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the swing operation unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the swing operation unit 300 includes a base member 310 formed in a plate shape, an arm member 320 whose base end is pivotally supported by the base member 310, and the arm member 320. And a drive unit disposed on the back of the base member 310 at the lower right of the front view (see FIG. 14). 340, a transmission device 350 meshed with the driving gear 341 of the driving device 340 and connected to the arm member 320, a torsion spring 360 for applying an urging force to the arm member 320, and a lower right front view of the base member 310 And a cover member 370 attached to the front surface of the camera.

  The base member 310 is a member that matches the thickness direction with the front-rear direction and serves as a skeleton of the swing operation unit 300, and is fixed to the fitting hole 311 formed in the thickness direction and the fitting hole 311. A cylindrical swing shaft 312, a transmission shaft 313 projecting below the fitting hole 311 in the thickness direction, a drive gear insertion hole 314 drilled adjacent to the transmission shaft 313, and a fitting hole A guide hole 315, which is a pair of elongated holes extending concentrically with the guide hole 311 and is formed to the left of the guide hole 315 in a front view (see FIG. 14) and opposite to the left and right sides of the guide hole 315. The fitting hole 311 includes a standing hole 316 that is a long hole that is extended and extended, and a hook portion 317 that projects in a hook shape on the front side on the right side of the fitting hole 311 when viewed from the front.

  The arm member 320 is a member for projecting the swinging operation unit 330 inward of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210, and includes a main body 321 formed in a long plate shape, A penetrating cylindrical tubular portion 322 disposed on the base end side of the main body portion 321, a sliding ring portion 323 opened in the same direction as the cylindrical portion 322 on the swinging end side of the main body portion 321, A plate-shaped front contact portion 324 raised and arranged on the front side of the main body portion 321, an elongated release hole 325 extending along a straight line drawn radially from the cylindrical portion 322, A pair of sliding portions 326 formed on the back side of the portion 321 and projecting toward the base member 310, and projecting toward the front side on the left side of the tubular portion 322 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 14). And a protruding portion 327.

  The cylindrical portion 322 is a portion that is externally fitted to and supported by the swing shaft 312 of the base member 310. That is, the arm member 310 is swung about the cylindrical portion 322 supported by the swing shaft 312 as a fulcrum.

  The sliding ring portion 323 is a portion that supports the upright member 330 in a fitting manner. It is formed with a large diameter, and suppresses wobble of the upright member 330.

  The front contact part 324 is fastened and fixed to the main body part 321 near the base end side, and is not fastened near the swing end side. Therefore, a gap is formed between the front contact portion 324 and the main body portion 321, and in a state where the arm member 320 is located at the retracted position, the protruding end side portion of the upright member 330 is connected to the front contact portion 324 and the main body portion 321. 321 (see FIG. 16).

  The release hole 325 is an elongated hole that is connected to the restricting sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350, and regulates the swing of the arm member 320 based on the positional relationship among the transmission device 350, the cylindrical portion 322, and the release hole 325. , Which will be described later in detail.

  Since the pair of sliding portions 326 are respectively inserted into the pair of guide holes 315 of the base member, the pair of sliding portions 326 are slid by the pair of guide holes 315 while the arm member 320 swings. With this, the rattling of the arm member 320 is suppressed, and the swing of the arm member 320 is stabilized. Since a ring-shaped collar member is rotatably fastened and fixed to the tip of the sliding portion 326, the sliding portion 326 is prevented from dropping out of the guide hole 315, and the swing operation of the arm member 320 is stabilized. Can be done.

  The projecting portion 327 is a portion where the moving end side arm portion 362 of the torsion spring 360 is locked, and is a portion to which the urging force of the torsion spring 360 is transmitted.

  The upright member 330 is a member arranged on the front side of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210 by swinging the arm member 320 in the ascending direction, and includes a plate-shaped main body 331 and the main body. An overhang ring portion 332 projecting from the back side of the base 331 into a large-diameter ring shape, a variable sliding portion 333 projecting rearward at the base end side, and a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the overhang ring portion 332. And a retaining portion 334 which is formed in a disc shape and is fastened and fixed to the changing sliding portion 333.

  The main body 331 is formed in an elliptical plate shape having a major axis direction D1 (see FIG. 16) and a minor axis direction D2 (see FIG. 16).

  The overhang ring portion 332 is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the slide ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. For this reason, the upright member 330 is supported in a wide range (large area) on the outer surface of the extension ring portion 332 and the inner surface of the slide ring portion 323, and is pivotally supported. Therefore, even when the large upright member 330 is pivotally supported at one place, the wobbling of the upright member 330 due to the swing of the arm member 320 can be suppressed.

  The change sliding portion 333 is a portion that is inserted into the upright hole 316 of the base member 310 and has a role of changing the attitude of the upright member 330 as the arm member 320 swings, which will be described in detail later. Since a ring-shaped collar member is rotatably fastened and fixed to the tip of the changing sliding portion 333, the changing sliding portion 333 is prevented from dropping out of the upright hole 316 and the arm member 320 is swung. Can be stabilized.

  The retaining portion 334 has an outer shape slightly larger than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320, is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 331 of the upright member 330, and has a rear surface of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Abut on the side. Therefore, the upright member 330 can be formed so as not to be pulled out from the arm member 320 by the retaining portion 334.

  The driving device 340 is a motor that is disposed on the back side of the base member 310 and drives the arm member 320. The driving device 340 includes a driving gear 341 that is driven to rotate, and the driving gear 341 is inserted through the driving gear of the base member 310. It is disposed on the front side of the base member 310 through the hole 314 (see FIG. 20).

  The transmission device 350 is a member to which the driving force of the driving device 340 is transmitted first, and is supported on the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 on the base end side and is meshed with the driving gear 341 of the driving device 340. You. In addition, a swinging end, which is an end opposite to the base end, is provided with a regulating sliding portion 351 projecting toward the front side.

  The regulating sliding portion 351 is inserted into the releasing hole 325 of the arm member 320, and the regulating sliding portion 351 is slid into the releasing hole 325 of the arm member 320 during the swing operation of the arm member 320. In particular, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340 transmitted through the transmission device 350.

  The torsion spring 360 is an elastic spring that serves as a power source when the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the extended position in the swing operation of the arm member 320. A base end arm 361 supported (pressed downward) and a movable end arm 362 supported (pressed downward) by the projecting portion 327 of the arm member 320 are provided.

  Next, the swing operation of the swing operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 16 (a), 17 (a) and 18 (a) are front views of the oscillating operation unit 300 in which the oscillating operation of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the upright member 330 are illustrated in time series. 16 (b), 17 (b) and 18 (b) are rear views of the oscillating operation unit 300 in which the oscillating operation of the arm member 320 and the change in the attitude of the standing member 330 are illustrated in time series. FIG. 16 shows a state in which the arm member 320 is located at the retracted position, and FIG. 17 shows a state in which the changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is arranged at a point where the curvature of the upright hole 316 changes. At 18, the state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in a state where the arm member 320 is located at the retracted position, the upright member 330 takes a posture in which the major diameter direction D1 (the left-right direction in FIG. 16) is horizontally inclined. At this time, the protruding end side portion of the upright member 330 is housed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the front contact portion 324.

  That is, in a state where the arm member 320 is located at the evacuation position, the standing member 330 can be shielded from the player by utilizing a space necessary to shield the arm member 320 from the player. Therefore, a limited space outside the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used.

  Further, a pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 are arranged at the lower end of the guide hole 315, and the changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is arranged at a lower end of the upstanding hole 316. Thus, the pair of sliding portions 326 and the changing sliding portion 333 can function as stoppers when the arm member 320 swings downward.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the arm member 320 is swung toward the extended position, the upright member 330 is changed to a posture (upright posture) in which the major diameter direction D1 is directed vertically.

  The dimension (plate thickness) along the thickness direction of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 (the wall surface formed in the thickness direction of the base member 310) of the base member 310 is larger near the upper end than near the lower end of the guide hole 315. You. In the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the dimension of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 is formed to be slightly shorter than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. That is, the gap formed between the main body 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 and the base member 310 is larger near the lower end than the upper end of the guide hole 315. In the present embodiment, the gap is formed in such a manner that the gap is gradually changed.

  The gap formed between the base member 310 and the main body 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 is larger near the lower end than near the upper end of the guide hole 315. Therefore, the resistance that the arm member 320 receives from the guide hole 315 at the time of starting from the retracted position can be suppressed, and the high speed at the time of starting the arm member 320 can be secured.

  In the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is larger than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. It is formed with a slightly shorter dimension (the length of the sliding portion 326 is substantially equal to the plate thickness of the base member 310). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the arm member 320 disposed near the upper end of the guide hole 315 from wobbling in the thickness direction of the base member 310.

  In the present embodiment, the upright member 330 is disposed above the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320 in a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the arm member 320 falls forward due to the weight of the standing member 330 (falls toward the near side in FIG. 18A), the sliding portion 326 becomes a fulcrum of the forward falling. Here, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is formed to be slightly smaller than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be supported by being brought into contact with the base member 310 by a surface, and the resistance of the arm member 320 to the forward fall can be improved.

  Here, the upright hole 316 includes a posture changing part 316a formed near the lower end and a concentric part 316b formed near the upper end.

  The posture changing portion 316a is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed to the cylindrical portion 322 (see FIG. 14) which is the swing axis of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 slides on the posture changing portion 316a, the degree of the posture change of the upright member 330 with respect to the swing angle of the arm member 320 becomes maximum. This is because the posture changing section 316a is perpendicular to the circle formed by the movement trajectory of the sliding ring section 323.

  Thereby, the posture change of the standing member 330 can be completed in a short period of time from the start, and when the standing member 330 is visually recognized by the player, the posture change between the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 can be reduced. Therefore, the effect of allowing the upright member 330 and the arm member 320 to be integrally visible at the extended position can be improved while suppressing the vertical shielding space of the upright member 330 at the retracted position.

  Further, at the time of starting the arm member 320 from the retracted position, the resistance of the upright member 330 is suppressed. That is, when the upright member 330 is located at the retracted position, the direction in which the changing sliding portion 333 is rotated about the cylindrical portion 322 is orthogonal to the posture changing portion 316a. For this reason, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the work in which the rotational force about the cylindrical portion 322 is applied to the changing sliding portion 333 becomes zero (force × distance = 0). Therefore, the resistance applied to the arm member 320 at the time of starting from the retracted position can be suppressed. Thereby, the high speed at the time of starting the arm member 320 can be secured.

  The concentric portion 316b is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed in a direction along a circle centered on the cylindrical portion 322 of the arm member 320. When the changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 slides on the concentric portion 316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320 and the changing sliding portion 333 of the upstanding member 330 does not change. The posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained. Thereby, the upright member 330 and the arm member 320 can be visually recognized as one body, and it is possible to easily realize an effect of integrally forming the upright member 330 and the arm member 320.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is located at the extended position, the pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 is located at the upper end of the guide hole 315 and the changing sliding portion of the upright member 330 is provided. 333 is arranged at the upper end of the upright hole 316. Thereby, when the arm member 320 swings upward, the pair of sliding portions 326 can function as a stopper. In particular, as described later, since the arm member 320 is swung in the ascending direction by the urging force of the torsion spring 360, the necessity of the stopper at the end is greater than when driven by a motor or the like. Further, since the sliding portion 326 is formed as a pair, the force generated when the sliding portion 326 functions as a stopper can be dispersed. Thereby, the durability of the sliding portion 326 can be improved.

  The change sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 can function as a stopper. However, since the upright member 330 is a member that is supported by the arm member 320, there is a problem in strength. On the other hand, since the pair of sliding portions 326 are formed integrally with the arm member 320, they have sufficient strength. More suitable for use as a stopper.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the projecting position, the projecting end side (the upper side in FIG. 18) of the upright member 330 projects above the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Formed. Therefore, even if the swing angle of the arm member 320 is reduced, the function of projecting the upright member 330 toward the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be secured, and the swing of the arm member 320 can be ensured. The degree of freedom in designing the moving angle can be improved.

  Further, while the swing angle of the arm member 320 is kept small, a large moving distance on the projecting end side of the upright member 330 can be secured, so that the effect of increasing the moving speed of the upright member 330 can be improved. it can. Since this effect becomes remarkable in the vicinity of the retreat position (see FIG. 16) in which the degree of the posture change of the upright member 330 with respect to the swing of the arm member 320 is severe, the effect of increasing the speed at the time of starting the arm member 320 is remarkable. It can be.

  Next, a state immediately before the upright member 330 is stored between the arm member 320 and the front contact portion 324 will be described with reference to FIG. 19A is a front view of the swing operation unit 300, FIG. 19B is a rear view of the swing operation unit 300, and FIG. 19C is a bottom view of the swing operation unit 300. FIG. FIGS. 19A to 19C illustrate a state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at an intermediate position between the extended position and the retracted position. Specifically, FIGS. The state in which the protruding end side of the upright member 330 starts to be housed between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the front abutment portion 324 when the swinging member is swung from the retracted position to the retracted position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 19C, the front contact portion 324 is disposed on the front side of the upright member 330 (upper in FIG. 19C). Thus, even when the upright member 330 swings around the fulcrum about the sliding ring portion 323 when the arm member 320 swings (FIG. 19C, the upright member swings up and down), the upright member 330 is brought into contact with the front contact portion 324. In addition, the wobbling of the upright member 330 can be suppressed.

  Here, the position A at which the upright member 330 and the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 start to overlap in a front view is above the lower edge B of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81. Formed. Therefore, before the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the wobble of the upright member 330 is increased before the wobbling of the upright member 330 is performed (a stage arranged inside the display area P of the third symbol display device 81). Thus, the movement trajectory of the standing member 330 and the front contact portion 324 can be overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the standing member 330 is brought into contact with the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 to suppress the wobbling of the standing member 330. it can.

  FIGS. 20A to 20D are diagrams illustrating a process of swinging the arm member 320 of the swing operation unit 300 from the retracted position to the extended position in a time series. FIG. 5 is an enlarged partial front view of the swing operation unit 300 at an end side. FIG. 20B illustrates a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIG. 20C illustrates a state in which the arm member 320 is shifted from the state illustrated in FIG. The state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount toward the extended position is illustrated, and the illustration of the cover member 370 is omitted from FIGS. 20A to 20D.

  First, the case where the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position (change in posture from FIG. 20D to FIG. 20A) will be described. When the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 14) is rotated from the extended position of the arm member 320 shown in FIG. 20D, the transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 is rotated and transmitted. When the regulating sliding portion 351 of the device 350 pushes the release hole 325 of the arm member 320, the arm member 320 is moved through the state of FIGS. 20 (a)). That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340.

  In this case, since the arm member 320 is swung downward (see FIGS. 16 to 18), the required capacity of the driving device 340 can be suppressed. For example, with an electric motor, the motor capacity can be reduced.

  In a state where the arm member 320 is located at the extended position, the guide hole 315 and the upright hole 316 extend vertically downward (see FIG. 18B). Thereby, the resistance given to the arm member 320 and the upright member 330 from the guide hole 315 and the upright hole 316 at the time of starting the swing from the overhang position can be suppressed.

  Next, a case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position (posture change from FIG. 20A to FIG. 20D) will be described. The urging force of the torsion spring 360 acts on the arm member 320. In a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the proximal arm 361 of the torsion spring 360 is pressed by the hook 317 of the base member 310 from above, and the movable end Reference numeral 362 is pressed downward and to the right by the protrusion 327 of the arm member 320.

  As a result, the distance between the base end arm 361 and the moving end side arm 362 is reduced with the cylindrical portion 322 as a fulcrum, and the torsion spring 360 is elasticized in the direction of lifting the arm member 320 (upper left direction). Power is in the most accumulated state. The swing of the arm member 320 due to the elastic force is restricted by the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Hereinafter, the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 and the transmission device 350 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the direction X connecting the cylindrical portion 322 as the rotation axis of the arm member 320 and the regulating sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350 is changed. The direction Y is orthogonal to the direction Y connecting the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 that pivotally supports the transmission device 350 and the regulating sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350.

  In this case, the regulating sliding portion 351 can be located at the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Thereby, even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is unnecessary, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held at the retracted position, so that the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, even when the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position, the regulating sliding portion 351 is located at the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Thereby, even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is unnecessary, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held at the extended position, so that the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

  An operation mode of the driving device 340 when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position will be described. First, from the state where the arm member 320 is located at the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the driving device 340 is used to release the regulating sliding portion 351 from the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Is rotated (ON state) clockwise in a front view by a predetermined amount. Then, the transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 is also rotated, and the regulating sliding portion 351 is released from the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 (see FIG. 20B).

  Here, in a state where the arm member 320 is located at the retracted position, the torsion spring 360 is configured such that the distance between the proximal end arm 361 and the moving end side arm 362 is reduced with the cylindrical portion 322 as a fulcrum. The elastic force in the direction in which the member 320 is lifted (upper left direction) is in a state where it is most accumulated.

  In this state, when the regulating sliding portion 351 is released from the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350, the arm member 320 is swung by the elastic force of the torsion spring 360. Thereby, the arm member 320 can be swung at a high speed from the start.

  For example, in a mode in which the driving force is gradually increased like a driving motor, it is difficult to apply a large driving force to the arm member 320 from the beginning, and the starting speed of the arm member 320 tends to be slow. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since a large elastic force can be applied from the time of starting, a large acceleration of the arm member 320 at the time of starting can be ensured. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be swung at a high speed from the start.

  When the drive gear 341 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the drive device 340 is stopped (OFF state), and the drive gear 341 is made to be able to run idle. The arm member 320 is swung in the ascending direction by the elastic force accumulated in the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20C).

  When the arm member 320 reaches the vicinity of the extended position (see FIG. 20C), the driving gear 341 of the driving device 340 is again rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount (ON state) as viewed from the front, and the regulating sliding portion 351 is moved to the arm. It is arranged at the dead center in the relationship between the member 320 and the transmission device 350.

  That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, the driving force of the driving device 340 is not always generated in the arm member 320, but the arm member 320 is moved near the retracted position and the extended position. The driving device 340 is driven (ON state) only in the case where the driving device 340 is arranged at the position (1), and is stopped (OFF state) between the retracted position and the extended position. Accordingly, the period during which the driving device 340 is driven can be reduced as compared with the case where the driving force of the driving device 340 is constantly applied to the arm member 320, so that the life of the driving device 340 can be improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20D, when the arm member 320 is located at the retracted position or the extended position, the arm member 320 connects the regulating sliding portion 351 and the transmission shaft 313 that supports the transmission device 350. The direction orthogonal to the straight line and the direction in which the release hole 325 extends are aligned with each other.

  Accordingly, at the time of starting rotation for rotating the arm member 320 from the state where the arm member 320 is rotated from the retracted position or the extended position, the rotation direction of the regulating sliding portion 351 and the extending direction of the release hole 325 coincide with each other. Sometimes, the resistance that the regulating sliding portion 351 receives from the release hole 325 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the start of the operation requiring the largest force.

  Next, the first slide operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 21A and 21B are front perspective views of the first slide operation unit 400. FIG. Note that FIG. 21A illustrates a state where the suspension member 430 and the tilting member 460 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 21B illustrates a state where the suspension member 430 and the tilting member 460 are disposed at the extended position. The illustrated state is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the suspension member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 is slid from the retracted position in a diagonally downward direction (from upper right to lower left in front view), and during the slide movement, the posture of the tilting member 460 is changed. Change (tilt toward the overhang position). Next, the overall configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 will be described.

  FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the first slide operation unit 400 includes a base member 410 formed in an L shape in a front view, a cover member 420 attached to the base member 410 from the front side, and a cover member A substantially T-shaped suspension member 430 that is sandwiched between the base member 420 and the base member 410 and slides along the front side surface of the base member 410, and a drive that slides the suspension member 430 A driving device 440 for generating a force, a long plate-shaped auxiliary member 450 having one end pivotally supported on the base end side of the suspension member 430 and the other end connected to the base member 410, A tilting member 460 pivotally supported on the projecting end side, which is an end opposite to the base end side of the suspension member 430, and a connecting member 470 for connecting the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 are mainly provided. Composed of Te.

  The base member 410 is a member that is formed in an L-shaped plate shape as viewed from the front and forms a skeleton of the first slide operation unit 400, and includes a plate-shaped main body horizontally long portion 411 and a right end portion of the main body horizontally long portion 411. A vertically extending plate-shaped main body portion 412 extending vertically downward from the main body, and a guide rib portion extending in front of the horizontally long main body portion 411 with a slight inclination with respect to the left-right direction and projecting in a linear rib shape. 413, an insertion hole 414 that is drilled at a substantially central portion of the horizontally long main body, and through which a drive shaft of the driving device 441 is inserted, and a lower portion of the vertically long main body 412 from the lower right to the upper left in front view. It mainly includes a guide hole 415 formed in an elongated hole shape and a pair of rotating shafts 416 on which various gears of the driving device 440 are supported.

  The main body horizontally long portion 411 includes an outer frame 411a protruding in a wall shape toward the front side at the upper and left and right edges. The outer frame 411a is a portion where the cover member 420 abuts on the front side, and is slightly longer than the length in the thickness direction of the slide body 431 of the suspension member 430 (perpendicular to the slide plane of the suspension member 430). Formed long.

  Note that the slide plane of the suspension member 430 refers to a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member 410.

  The guide hole 415 extends from the lower right to the upper left of the base member 410.

  The cover member 420 is attached from the front side of the base member 410 and forms a gap between the cover member 420 and the base member 410. The cover member 420 is formed in a plate shape having substantially the same shape as the main body horizontally long portion 411 in a front view. It mainly includes a portion 421 and a communication hole 422 formed in a long hole shape along the direction in which the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 extends.

  Since the main body portion 421 is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body horizontally long portion 411 of the base member 410, even if the hanging member 430 is slid in the front-back direction when slid, the hanging member 430 is moved in the front-back direction. Irrespective of this, the contact area between the main body laterally elongated portion 411 of the base member 410 and the main body portion 421 of the cover member 420 can be uniformly secured.

  The suspension member 430 is a member that is provided in a gap formed by the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and that is slid along the guide rib 413 of the base member 410. A horizontally elongated plate-shaped slide body portion 431, a recessed groove 432 formed in a groove shape on the back side of the slide body portion 431 and abutting on a guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410; A plate-shaped bending arm 433 that is suspended from a substantially central portion of the main body 431 and is bent toward the projecting position in the middle, and a slide body 431 at a portion where the bending arm 433 of the slide body 431 starts to be suspended. A swing shaft 434 protruding from the front to the front side, and a cylindrical suspension tube 435 extending toward the front side at the tip (extended end) of the bent arm 433 are mainly provided.

  The slide main body 431 is formed to be slightly thinner than a gap formed by the base member 410 and the cover member 420. Therefore, the suspension member 430 can slide between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and is prevented from moving in the thickness direction (the direction in which the cover member 420 is fastened to the base member 410).

  The recessed groove 432 is a groove formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the guide rib 413, and the suspension member 430 slides the guide rib 413 diagonally downward as the recessed groove 432 slides. Be moved.

  The bent arm portion 433 extends along the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 when the suspension member 430 is located at the extended position, and the base member 410 when the suspension member 430 is located at the retracted position. A thickened portion 433a formed by increasing the thickness on the front side is provided in a portion formed below the main body horizontally long portion 411. The thickness of the bent arm portion 433 on the slide main body portion 431 side from the thickened portion 433a is formed to be thinner than the slide main body portion 431 and the thickened portion 433a. Accordingly, the bending arm portion 433 is formed in such a manner that the deformation in the thickness direction is locally generated in the bending arm portion 433 closer to the slide body portion 431 than the thickened portion 433a. The thickness direction of the bent arm 433 is formed perpendicular to the direction in which the rack gear is engraved (sliding direction).

  The swing shaft 434 is a shaft that penetrates through the communication hole 422 of the cover member 420 and protrudes toward the front side of the cover member 420, and is inserted into the swing hole 452 of the auxiliary member 450.

  The suspension cylinder 435 extends beyond the thickness of the auxiliary member 450. Accordingly, when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIGS. 21A and 25A), the auxiliary member 450 can be stored between the suspension member 430 and the tilting member 460. Become.

  The driving device 440 is a device in which each member is formed so as to sandwich the base member 410 from the front and back, and generates driving force necessary for movement of the suspension member 430. The driving device 440 is inserted into the insertion hole 414 of the base member 410 from the rear side. A drive motor 441 having a drive shaft therethrough, a drive gear 442 pivotally supported by the drive shaft of the drive motor 441 and disposed in front of the base member 410, and meshed with the drive gear 442 And a pair of transmission gears 443 that are respectively supported by the pair of rotating shafts 416.

  One of the pair of transmission gears 443 is meshed with a rack gear engraved on the upper surface of the slide body 431 of the suspension member 430 (see FIG. 25). Therefore, when the driving gear 442 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 441, the suspension member 430 meshed with the transmission gear 443 is slid.

  The auxiliary member 450 is a member disposed on the front side of the cover member 420, and has one end pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 and the other end slidably moved to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. A main body 451 formed to be long and plate-like, a swing hole 452 formed at one end, and a slide shaft 453 protruding rearward at the other end; And a suspension shaft 454 protruding rearward from an intermediate position of the main body 451.

  The auxiliary member 450 is supported by the suspension member 430 and the other end is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410, so that the auxiliary member 450 cannot move in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper of FIG. 25). Formed. In addition, the auxiliary member 450 is formed in such a manner that the auxiliary member 450 gets closer (swings) to the tip of the thickened portion 433a of the bent arm portion 433 as the suspension member 430 slides to the retreat position. Thereby, even if the suspension member 430 is wobbled in the thickness direction, the suspension member 430 can suppress the wobble of the suspension member 430 by abutting on the auxiliary member 450.

  The swing hole 452 is externally fitted to the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430. Thus, the auxiliary member 450 is formed so as to be able to swing around the swing shaft 434. That is, as the suspension member 430 is slid, the auxiliary member 450 is swung (tilted) about the swing shaft 434.

  The slide shaft 453 is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. Accordingly, the other end (the lower right end in the front view) of the auxiliary member 450 is slid along the extending direction of the guide hole 415. When the suspension member 430 is located at the extended position (see FIG. 26), the slide shaft 453 is disposed at the upper end (upper left end) of the guide hole 415, and the suspension member 430 is at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). In this case, the slide shaft 453 is arranged at the lower end (lower right end) of the guide hole 415.

  The tilting member 460 is a member that is pivotally supported by the suspension cylinder 435 of the suspension member 430 and has an independent drive source (drive device 464). A first cover member 462 that is fastened to a lower portion of the base member 461 from the front side and forms a gap between the base member 461 and the first cover member 462 and the base member A transmission device 463 disposed in a gap formed between the base member 461 and a transmission device 463 that generates a driving force transmitted to the transmission device 463. Moving base member 465 formed to be slidable in the direction, and a second cover disposed on the front side of moving base member 465 and fastened and fixed to moving base member 465. And wood 466, a mainly includes.

  The base member 461 is a member formed in the shape of a long plate, and has a suspension shaft 461 a projecting from the rear side in a columnar shape and supported by a suspension cylinder 435 of the suspension member 430. A connection shaft 461b provided in parallel with the suspension shaft 461a, a box-shaped storage portion 461c adjacent to the connection shaft 461b and having an opening directed to the rear side, and a front surface above the storage portion 461c. It mainly includes a pair of rotating shafts 461d protruding from the side, and a plurality of elongated slide holes 461e provided in parallel along the longitudinal direction of the base member 461.

  The storage portion 461c forms a space for storing the driving device 464, and has a hole formed at the bottom thereof to allow the driving shaft 464a of the driving device 464 to pass therethrough.

  The transmission device 463 includes a drive gear 463a supported by a drive shaft 464a, a pair of transmission gears 463b meshed with the drive gear 463a and supported by a pair of rotation shafts 461d, and a pair of transmission gears Of the 463b, a crank pin 463c protruding at a position eccentric from the transmission gear 463b disposed on the movable base member 465 side is mainly provided.

  The crank pin 463c is rotated about the rotation shaft 461d by rotating the drive gear 463a and rotating the transmission gear 463b.

  The moving base member 465 is a member formed in a long plate shape, and is provided with a plurality of (three in this embodiment) projecting from the back side and a posture maintaining pin 465a inserted into the plurality of slide holes 461e. And an elongated slide hole 465b extending and drilled in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, and a pair of raised portions 465c protruding from the front side.

  Since the slide pin 465b is connected to the crank pin 463c of the transmission gear 463b, as the transmission gear 463b is rotated and the position of the crank pin 463c is changed, the moving base member 465 moves along the extending direction of the slide hole 461e. The slide is moved.

  The second cover member 466 includes a pair of fastening portions 466a that are fastened and fixed to the pair of raised portions 465c. Therefore, in a state where the second cover member 466 is fastened to the movable base member 465, the second cover member 466 is also slid as the movable base member 465 is slid.

  The connecting member 470 is a member that connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 and is formed of a resin material. The connecting member 470 is formed at the upper end and swingably attached to the suspension shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450. There is provided a hanging hole 471 to be supported, and a cylindrical portion 472 which is formed in a cylindrical shape at the lower end and which is externally supported so as to be swingable on the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 460.

  Next, a driving mode of the tilting member 460 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. The state where the first cover member 466 is slid obliquely upward is illustrated by a broken line, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

  When the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is slid and the second cover member 466 is slid and the tilting member 460 is viewed from the front (see FIG. 24). Can be performed.

  Here, since the tilting member 460 is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430, vibration and wobbling are likely to occur when the outer shape of the tilting member 460 changes. In the present embodiment, since there are a plurality of configurations for suppressing the vibration and wobble, these will be described below.

  Referring to FIG. 25, the configuration of first slide operation unit 400 in a state where suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 21A) will be described in detail. FIG. 25A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 25B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. 25 (a) and 25 (b) show a state in which the suspension member 430 is arranged at the upper end position (retreat position) of the moving path in which the suspension member slides, and the cover member 420 is partially illustrated. Omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 that are pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 move to the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) to the right outside of the display area P.

  At this time, the auxiliary member 450 is stored at a position on the front side of the suspension member 430 and on the back side of the tilting member 460. That is, since the suspension member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are stacked and arranged in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 25A), the suspension member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are viewed in the thickness direction. Can be more compactly arranged than the total area of the individual members. Therefore, the space on the right outside of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be suppressed, and a large display area P can be secured.

  As shown in FIG. 25, most of the bending arm 433 of the suspension member 430 is housed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and the base on the back side of the protruding end side (tip side). The main body vertical portion 412 of the member 410 is provided. Thereby, the wobble in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 at the retreat position can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary member 450 is supported by a swing shaft 434 formed near where the bending arm 433 of the suspension member 430 hangs down, and the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. In this case, the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 is formed along the extending direction of the bending arm portion 433, and the auxiliary member 450 increases the bending arm portion 433 as the suspension member 430 slides from the retracted position to the extended position. It is formed in a manner of approaching (swinging) the tip of the thick portion 433a.

  Therefore, compared to the case where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, it is better to arrange the suspension member 430 at the evacuation position to extend from the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the thickened portion 433a of the bending arm portion 433 (extension length). Is shortened. Accordingly, even when the suspension member 430 is loosened due to the driving of the tilting member 460, the length from the contact position between the suspension member 430 and the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the suspension member 430 is short. Therefore, wobble in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 at the evacuation position (wobble at the tip of the bent arm portion 433) can be suppressed.

  Here, the sliding movement of the suspension member 430 will be described. Since the suspension member 430 sandwiches the guide rib 413 of the base member 410 with the concave groove 432 (see FIG. 23) formed on the back side, the suspension member 430 is slid along the extension direction of the guide rib 413. As described above, the guide rib portion 413 extends straight and diagonally downward (from the upper right in FIG. 25A to the lower left in FIG. 25A).

  The sliding movement of the suspension member 430 is generated by transmitting the driving force of the driving device 440. For example, when the suspension member 430 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position, the driving gear 442 is driven by the driving force of the drive motor 441 from the state in which the suspended member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). Is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the rotation rotates a pair of transmission gears 443, and a rack gear meshed with one of the pair of transmission gears 443 (the left side in FIG. 25A) is moved. Then, the suspension member 430 provided with the rack gear on the upper surface side is slid to the extended position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 21B) will be described in detail. 26A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 26B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. 26 (a) and 26 (b) show a state in which the suspension member 430 is arranged at the lower end position (extended position) of the movement path in which the suspension member slidably moves, and the cover member 420 is partially illustrated. Is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, the lower end (the lower left end in FIG. 26A) of the movement direction of the slide main body 431 is set to the outer frame of the base member 410 in a state where the suspension member 430 is located at the extended position. 411a. Further, as described above, since the suspension member 430 moves downward toward the projecting position, even if the transmission of the driving force of the driving device 440 to the suspension member 430 is released, the position of the suspension member 430 is changed. The extended position can be reliably maintained.

  For example, when the direction of the sliding movement of the hanging member 430 is the horizontal direction, gravity is not applied to the direction of the sliding movement even if the hanging member 430 is disposed at the projecting position. A separate force must be added to maintain the position.

  On the other hand, according to the suspension member 430 of the present embodiment, even if the transmission of the driving force of the driving device 440 to the suspension member 430 is released, the component force of gravity acts in the direction of the sliding movement. The lower member 430 can be maintained in the extended position. Therefore, power consumption of the driving device 440 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 26, when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the portion where the bent arm 433 is stored between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 is retracted by the suspension member 430. It is smaller than when it is arranged at the position (see FIG. 25B). Therefore, it is difficult for the base member 410 and the cover member 420 to suppress the wobble of the bending arm 433 in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430.

  On the other hand, the root side of the bent arm portion 433 is extended in the extending direction (the lower left direction in FIG. 26B) of the auxiliary member 450 in a state where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extended position. Accordingly, when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the overlapping area of the auxiliary member 450 and the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 is widened.

  As described above, the auxiliary member 450 is formed so as to be separated from the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 by the thickness of the cover member 420 and the bent arm portion 433 moves in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430. It is formed so that it can contact. In the state where the suspension member 430 is located at the extended position, the thin portion of the bent arm portion 433 (the portion closer to the slide main body portion 431 than the thickened portion 433a) is formed to protrude from the base member 410 and the cover member 420. In addition, wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 due to the driving of the tilting member 460 can be easily caused in the thickness direction (wobbling in the thickness direction becomes dominant). Thereby, the wobbling of the suspension member 430 in the sliding direction can be suppressed.

  In addition, a thin portion of the bent arm portion 433 (a portion closer to the slide main body portion 431 than the thickened portion 433a) is moved in the short direction (sliding direction) of the slide main body portion 431 that is slid and moved between the base member 410 and the cover member 420. (Perpendicular to the direction). This allows the wobble caused by the driving of the tilting member 460 to be absorbed by the bending of the bending arm portion 433, and suppresses the wobble of the slide body portion 431 in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 26). it can. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the slide main body 431 from being pressed against the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and to suppress the wear of the slide main body 431 in the thickness direction.

  For example, it is conceivable that an arm portion having the same thickness as the slide body portion 431 is extended toward the short direction of the slide body portion 431, and the tip side of the arm portion is formed to be thin. However, in this case, even if the thin portion absorbs the bending, the wobble of the arm is transmitted to the slide body 431 by the wobble of the tip of the arm having the same thickness as the slide body 431. As a result, the slide body 431 may be loosened.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the thickness of the bent arm portion 433 extending from the slide body portion 431 is made thinner, wobbling generated at the tip of the bent arm portion 433 is used for bending of the thinner portion, and The effect of preventing the portion 431 from wobbling can be remarkable.

  FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the first slide operation unit 400 taken along line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, since the bending arm portion 433 has the thickened portion 433a which is increased in thickness toward the auxiliary member 450, when the bending arm portion 433 wobble in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430, the wobbling occurs. Can be easily brought into contact with the auxiliary member 450 from the time when the amplitude is small.

  Returning to FIG. Since the auxiliary member 450 is connected to the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430 and the guide hole 415 of the base member 410, the movement in the thickness direction is restricted. Therefore, the auxiliary member 450 plays a role of a stopper that blocks the bent arm 433 of the suspension member 430 from moving toward the front side. Thereby, wobbling in the thickness direction of the suspending member 430 when the suspending member 430 is arranged at the extended position can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the lower end of the tilting member 460 is higher than the lower end of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is located slightly above. Here, when the tilting member 460 does not change its posture with respect to the suspension member 430 (when it is fixed), the suspension member 430 is slid while descending and tilting toward the extended position. Therefore, in order to dispose the lower end of the tilting member 460 at the same position as the lower end of the tilting member 460 of the present embodiment in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the suspending member 430 is disposed at the retracted position. In this case, the tilting member 460 needs to be disposed at a position offset upward by the distance L1 corresponding to the downward tilt.

  Therefore, an extra space is required outside the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) on the right side, or the degree of freedom in designing the size of the tilting member 460 is reduced.

  However, in the present embodiment, as the suspending member 430 moves toward the extended position, the posture of the tilting member 460 is changed in a manner of being lifted by the connecting member 470 connected to the auxiliary member 450, and the lower end of the tilting member 460 is suspended. The member 430 is lifted. Accordingly, the lower end position of the tilting member 460 when the suspension member 430 is located at the retracted position (see FIG. 25A) and the case where the suspension member 430 is located at the extended position (see FIG. )) Is located at substantially the same height (vertical direction in FIGS. 25 and 26).

  Therefore, when the suspension member 430 is located at the retracted position, it is not necessary to dispose the tilting member 460 at a position offset upward by a distance L1 corresponding to the downward inclination, and the right side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 is not required. The outer space can be effectively used, and the degree of freedom in designing the size of the tilting member 460 can be improved.

  Here, the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed on the lower end side where the driving device 464 is disposed. Therefore, the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is lifted and tilted, so that the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is moved upward. Therefore, the distance from the upper edge of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which is the fulcrum of the wobbling of the hanging member 430, to the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is shortened. The wobble of the bent arm 433 in the thickness direction of the 430 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed in the vicinity of the driving device 464 (see FIG. 22), a force R in the rotation direction about the suspension cylinder 435 is applied downward by gravity. With this force R, the auxiliary member 450 is pulled by the connecting member 470. At this time, the slide shaft 453 of the auxiliary member 450 receives a force in a direction along the width direction of the guide hole 415. Therefore, the frictional force between the slide shaft 453 and the guide hole 415 can be improved, and the sliding movement of the auxiliary member 450 can be prevented, so that the wobble of other members connected to the auxiliary member 450 can be suppressed. it can.

  As described above, the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is connected to the connecting member 470 supported by the auxiliary member 450. Accordingly, the resistance against the wobble generated when the tilting member 460 is driven is generated from the suspension member 430 and the auxiliary member 450, so that the wobbling of the tilting member 460 can be suppressed. That is, when the tilting member 460 is connected only to the suspension member 430, all the vibrations and wobble generated by the tilting member 460 are transmitted to the suspension member 430. In the present embodiment, the vibration and wobble of the tilting member 460 are reduced. The transmission can be performed separately for the suspension member 430 and the connection member 470. Accordingly, it is not necessary to set the rigidity of the suspension member 430 or the connection member 470 to be excessive, and the degree of freedom in designing the suspension member 430 or the connection member 470 can be improved.

  Next, the inversion operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500. FIG. 28 shows a closed state in which the reflecting members 520 are in contact with each other in the rotation direction. The reversing operation unit 500 is configured to be able to form a closed state (see FIG. 28) and an open state (see FIG. 33B) by rotating the reflection member 520. Next, the overall configuration of the reversing operation unit 500 will be described.

  FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a frame-shaped base member 510 forming a skeleton, a reflecting member 520 supported by the supporting grooves 512 a and 513 a of the base member 510, and a reflecting member 520. A first lid member 530 having a shaft support hole 531 into which the rotation shaft 522 of the member 520 is fitted; a second lid member 540 attached to the second wall 513 of the base member 510 on the drive unit side of the reflection member 520; A transmission member 550 in which a first rack gear 553 meshed with the rotating gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is engraved, a driving device 560 for generating a driving force for moving the transmission member 550, and transmission of the driving device 560 And a cover member 570 that is disposed on the rear side of the gear group 562 and that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510.

  The base member 510 has a rectangular opening in the center and is formed in a flat frame shape, and extends vertically from the right end of the bottom portion 511 toward the front side and the back side of the bottom portion 511. And a second wall portion 513 extending vertically from the left end of the bottom portion 511 toward the front side of the bottom portion 511. The opening of the bottom portion 511 is an opening for disposing a base (not shown) having a light source such as an LED, and light is emitted from the light source toward the reflecting member 520 in an assembled state (see FIG. 28). You.

  The bottom surface portion 511 extends vertically in a right side portion of the bottom surface portion 511 when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 30), and includes an elongated slide hole 511 a for guiding the transmission member 550.

  The slide holes 511a are formed by arranging a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) vertically in the bottom surface portion 511 (vertical direction in FIG. 30) in such a manner that the extending direction coincides with a straight line. The slide hole 511a is a long hole extending from the lower end thereof in the direction in which the slide hole 511a extends, and is a narrow hole narrower than the slide hole 511a and guides the rib 555 of the transmission member 550. A rib slide hole 511b is formed.

  The bottom surface portion 511 includes a plurality of rotating shafts 511c projecting downward from the opening toward the rear surface and supporting the transmission gear group 562 of the driving device 560.

  The first wall portion 512 is a groove cut in a U-shape from the front side to the back side, and has a plurality of shaft support grooves 512a having a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft portion of the reflection member. Note that the arrangement intervals of the shaft support grooves 512a are equal, and are formed at intervals shorter than the width dimension (the longitudinal dimension in the rotation axis direction) of the reflection member 520.

  The second wall portion 513 is disposed to face the shaft support groove 512a and is formed in the same manner as the shaft support groove 512a, and a plurality of shaft support grooves 513a and an adjacent shaft support among the plurality of shaft support grooves 513a. An extending portion 513b formed between the grooves 513a and extending from the outer wall surface of the second wall portion 513 toward the front side (the front side in FIG. 29).

  The extension portion 513b is formed in a step shape in which the width dimension (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 29) decreases toward the front side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), the positioning projection 543 of the second lid member 540. Is fitted to.

  The reflecting member 520 is a member that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source, and is a long plate-shaped main body 521 formed of an opaque resin material, and a straight line from both left and right ends of the main body 521. A pair of rotating shafts 522 protruding from the pair of rotating shafts 522, and a rotating gear 523 that is fastened and fixed so that the shafts of the pair of rotating shafts 522 are aligned with the rotating shaft 522 on the side where the transmission member 550 is disposed. Prepare.

  The main body 521 includes a chamfered portion 521a (see FIG. 34) formed by chamfering the end surface in the width direction.

  The rotation shaft 522 is formed at the center position of the main body 521 in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29). In addition, the rotation shaft 522 of the pair of rotation shafts 522 on the side where the transmission member 550 is disposed is extended to be longer, so that the second wall portion is provided between the rotation gear 523 and the main body 521. 513 are formed so as to be arranged.

  The rotating gear 523 includes expansion teeth 523a to which teeth engraved adjacent to each other are connected and whose diameter from the center of rotation is longer than other teeth. The expansion teeth 523a can prevent the reflection member 520 from over-rotating.

  The first lid member 530 is a long plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed in the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 29), and includes a plurality of shafts through which the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 is inserted. The support hole 531 and a portion vertically extending toward the first wall portion 512 along the front surface (the front surface in FIG. 29) of the first lid member 530 and the front side of the plurality of shaft support holes 531. And an extended lid portion 532 (see FIG. 31) having an end surface circumscribing the edge of the extended lid portion 532.

  Here, for example, when the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed from the front side of the first wall portion 512, the first wall portion 512 needs to be thicker than the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. In this case, if the reversing operation unit 500 is adjacent to the outer edge of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 with the first wall portion 512 interposed therebetween, as in the present embodiment, the first wall will be described. The thickness of the portion 512 is an obstacle, and it is difficult to visually recognize the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 integrally.

  On the other hand, since the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed in the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29), the thickness of the right wall of the reflecting member 520 is determined regardless of the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. Can be thin. Therefore, the thickness of the first wall portion 512 does not become an obstacle, and it becomes easy to visually recognize the reversal operation unit 500 and the effect in the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 integrally. The effect can be improved.

  It should be noted that at least two types of assembling methods of the base member 510, the reflecting member 520, and the first lid member 530 can be performed. For example, first, there is a method in which the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 in a state where the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 is fitted into the shaft support grooves 512a and 513a of the base member 510. With this method, the reflecting member 520 can be inserted into the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 at a time.

  Second, in a state where the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 first, the rotating shaft 522 on the opposite side to the drive unit side of the reflection member 520 is connected to the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530. After that, the rotary shaft 522 on the drive unit side is fitted into the shaft support groove 513a of the second wall 512 after being inserted in an oblique direction (a direction from the front side to the oblique right back).

  With reference to FIG. 31, a description will be given of a fitting relationship between the shaft support groove 512 a of the first wall portion 512, the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520. FIG. 31A is a partial side view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 31B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 along the line XXXXb-XXXIb in FIG. FIG. 31A illustrates a side surface on which the first lid member 530 is fastened.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the depth of the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 is formed to be substantially the same as the diameter of the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520. Therefore, for example, even when the shaft support hole 531 is not formed in the first cover member 530, the reflection member 520 is connected to the shaft support groove 512 a of the first wall portion 512 and the extension cover portion 532 of the first cover member 530. And is supported between them.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the depth of the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the diameter of the shaft support hole 531 of the first cover member 530 are formed to be the same. Therefore, the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 is supported between the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall 512 and the extended cover 532 of the first cover member 530 as described above, and the first cover It is also supported by the shaft support hole 531 of the member 530 (see FIG. 31B).

  Therefore, a large area for supporting the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 can be ensured. This is particularly effective in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed by fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 to the first wall portion 512 from the right.

  That is, since the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed, it may be difficult to sufficiently secure the area of the shaft support groove 512a that supports the reflection member 520 as it is. Therefore, a shaft support hole 531 is formed in the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520 is also supported by the shaft support hole 531. Accordingly, the space occupied by the first lid member 530 and the first wall portion 512 in the axial direction of the reflecting member 520 can be effectively used, and a sufficient area for supporting the reflecting member 520 can be secured.

  Referring back to FIG. The second lid member 540 is a member for pivotally supporting the drive unit side of the reflection member 520 to the base member 510, and includes a long plate-shaped base member 541 disposed on the most front side, and the base member 541. An extended shaft support portion 542 protruding from the rear side and extending in the up-down direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30), and is protruded in a manner to connect the extended shaft support portion 542 and the base member 541. And a positioning projection portion 543.

  With reference to FIG. 32, the engagement between the second lid member 540 and the base member 510 will be described. FIG. 32A is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 32B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. FIG. 32C is a partial cross-sectional view of the inversion operation unit 500 along the line XXXIIc-XXXIIc in FIG. 32B, and FIG. 32D is a portion of the inversion operation unit 500 along the line XXXIId-XXXIId in FIG. It is sectional drawing.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the plurality of positioning projections 543 of the second lid member 540 are fitted between the adjacent extensions 513b of the base member 510, respectively. Thereby, the second lid member 540 can be accurately positioned with respect to the base member 510 in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 32B).

  Here, since the second wall portion 513 is formed in a long plate shape, the rigidity in the thickness direction tends to be low, and when the second wall portion 513 bends in the thickness direction, the reflection member 520 is axially moved. Is applied, and the rotation of the reflecting member 520 may be hindered.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), in the present embodiment, the extended shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 contacts from the thickness direction of the extended portion 513b of the base member 510 (left and right direction in FIG. 32 (c)). Touched. Thereby, the rigidity of the second wall portion 513 in the thickness direction can be improved.

  The end of the extending shaft support portion 542 in the extending direction of the second lid member 540 is in contact with the end of the base member 510 where the shaft support groove 513a is formed, and the open end of the shaft support groove 513a is closed ( FIG. 32 (d)). Thus, the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 is supported by the hole formed by the support groove 513a and the extended support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 (see FIG. 32B).

  Returning to FIG. The transmission member 550 is a member for transmitting the driving force of the driving device 560 to the reflection member 520, and is formed in a long plate shape and is in contact with the back surface of the bottom portion 511 of the base member 510. 551, a long plate-shaped extending wall portion 552 extending from the end surface (the left end surface in FIG. 29) of the main body portion 551 to the front side, and the front end surface of the extending wall portion 552 intermittently. A first rack gear 553 that is carved and meshed with the rotating gear 523 of the reflection member 520, and a plurality of (four in this embodiment) are disposed on the front side of the main body 551 and the base member 510 slides. A slide shaft 554 connected to the hole 511a and a rib slide hole 511b of the base member 510 extending downward from the upper and lower slide shafts 554 of the slide shaft 554 (see FIG. 30). It includes a rib portion 555 which is protruded in a small width dimension slightly larger than the width dimension, a second rack gear 556 which is meshed with the transmission gear group of the driving device 560 while being engraved on the side surface of the main body portion 551, a.

  In the first rack gear 553, a plurality of teeth groups in which four teeth are continuously provided are arranged at intervals slightly shorter than the interval when one tooth is omitted. This spaced space can prevent the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 from over-rotating, which will be described in detail later.

  The driving device 560 is a device that generates a driving force, and is meshed with a driving gear 561 supported by a driving shaft, a gear meshed with the driving gear 561, and a second rack gear 556 of the transmission member 550. And a transmission gear group 562 meshed with the plurality of rotation shafts 511c.

  When the driving gear 561 of the driving device 560 is rotated, the transmission gear group 562 is rotated, and the driving force of the driving device 560 is transmitted to the transmitting member 550 via the second rack gear 556. The transmission member 550 is slid in the extending direction of the slide hole 511a of the base member 510 by the driving force of the driving device 560. Since the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 meshes with the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520, the reflection member 520 is rotated about the rotation shaft 522 by sliding the transmission member 550.

  FIGS. 33 (a), 33 (b) and 33 (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit 500 illustrating the rotation operation of the reflection member 520 in time series. 33 (e) and FIG. 33 (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit 500 illustrating the rotation operation of the reflecting member 520 in a time series. FIG. It is a partial side view of the transmission member 550.

  33, the illustration of the second lid member 540 is omitted, and FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d) show a state (closed state) in which the main body parts 521 of the reflection member 520 are in contact with each other. 33 (b) and 33 (e) show a state (open state) in which the reflecting member 520 has been rotated by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d), and FIG. 33) and FIG. 33 (f), the surface of the reflection member 520 opposite to the surface facing the front side in FIG. 33 (a) and FIG. A state (closed state) in which the 521 abut each other is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 33D, in the closed state, the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 meshes with the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550, and the rotation is restricted.

  The rotation operation of the reflection member 520 will be described. When the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is slid upward (to the left in FIG. 33D) by the driving device 560 (see FIG. 29) from the state of FIG. 33D, the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is slid. Is rotated, the main body 521 of the reflection member 520 is rotated (see FIG. 33E). Further, when the first rack gear 553 is slid to the left, the reflection member 520 is rotated until the surfaces in the thickness direction abut against each other, and the transmission member 550 is stopped (see FIG. 33 (f)).

  Here, at the end position of the sliding movement of the transmission member 550, the reflection member 520 is brought into contact at the end to correct the posture (see FIG. 34). Therefore, even if the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520 and the first rack gear 553 of the transmitting member 550 are not accurately meshed, the attitude of the reflecting member 520 in a state where the transmitting member 550 is arranged at the end position of the sliding movement. Can be stabilized.

  When the reflecting member 520 is in the closed state, the end of the main body 521 is abutted in the thickness direction. At this time, since the region between the first wall portion 512 and the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 is closed by the reflection member 520, the light emitted from the light source can be blocked by the reflection member 520. it can.

  Here, the suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, sliding a plate-shaped shutter member and disposing the shutter member between the light emitted to the player and the player. In this case, if the shutter member is fully opened, the player can visually recognize the entire light emitted to the player. However, when the shutter member slides from a state where the shutter member is disposed between the light emitted to the player and the player, the light overlapping the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, the period until the player visually recognizes the entire light becomes longer.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the reflection member 520 allows light emitted to the player to pass by rotating the reflection member 520 from the closed state while suppressing light leakage in the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflecting members 520 may have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, each of the reflection members 520 can be formed smaller than the shutter members. Therefore, compared to the case where the shutter member is slid, the time required for the player to visually recognize the entire light can be shortened when the reflecting member 520 is rotated.

  In this embodiment, the light source formed on the back side of the reflecting member 520 is reduced by rotating the reflecting member 520 to reduce the area occupied by the reflecting member 520 in a front view (see FIG. 32A). Light can be visually recognized. Therefore, the space for disposing the reflection operation unit 500 can be saved.

  In the reflecting member 520, the chamfered portions 521a are in contact with each other in the closed state (see FIG. 34). Thereby, the interval in the thickness direction between the reflection members 520 in the thickness direction can be shortened, and the surface formed by the plurality of reflection members 520 can be made flatter.

  For example, when a pattern that is recognized as a unit on the surface in the thickness direction of the plurality of reflection members 520 is formed on the surface in the thickness direction of the plurality of reflection members 520, the boundary between the adjacent reflection members 520 is made inconspicuous, and Deviation can be suppressed. Therefore, the pattern can be more clearly recognized.

  The distance from the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 to the outer end of the inflatable teeth 523a is longer than the distance from the rotation shaft 522 to the main body 551 of the transmission member 550. Therefore, when the rotation gear 523 is to be rotated in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 33D from the state of FIG. 33A, the expansion teeth 523a are blocked by the main body 551 and cannot be rotated. Thereby, the reflection member 520 can be prevented from being over-rotated, and it is possible to prevent the reflection member 520 from being damaged due to excessive pressure at the contact surface of the reflection member 520.

  Further, as described above, since the first rack gear 553 is disposed with a slightly shorter interval than the interval in the case where one tooth is omitted from the tooth group in which four teeth are continuously provided, FIG. 33), when the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is to be rotated clockwise in FIG. 33F, the distance between the teeth of the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is changed. Get stuck in. In this case, the rotation gear 523 cannot be further rotated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflection member 520 from being damaged by the chamfered portion 521a, which is the contact surface, due to excessive rotation of the reflection member 520.

  Next, the second slide operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 35A and 35B are front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. FIG. Note that FIG. 35A illustrates a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 35B illustrates a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are disposed. A state is shown in which the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged at the extended position (the front side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

  The second slide operation unit 700 is configured such that the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 project toward the front side of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the display area. P is formed so that it can be divided into a lattice shape. Next, the overall configuration of the second slide operation unit 700 will be described.

  36 and 37 are exploded front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are exploded rear perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. FIGS. 36 and 38 show the base member 710 and a state in which the members provided on the front side of the base member 710 are disassembled, and FIGS. 37 and 39 show the back surface of the base member 710 and the base member 710. The state where the member disposed on the side is disassembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, the second sliding operation unit 700 is a rectangular plate-shaped base member having a rectangular opening that forms a display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 in the center. 710, a first slide shaft S1 fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the base member 710 and having a longitudinal direction coinciding with the horizontal direction, and a slide along the first slide shaft S1. A pair of first slide members 720 to be moved, and a front side cover member 730 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the front side of the pair of first slide members 720 and formed as a pair of upper and lower parts. Prepare.

  In addition, the second slide operation unit 700 is fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the back surface of the base member 710, and has a second slide shaft S2 whose longitudinal direction coincides with the vertical direction, and a second slide shaft thereof. A pair of second slide members 740 slid along the rod S2, a transmission device 750 provided with a plurality of gears meshed with the second slide members 740, and a pair of second slide members 740; And a rear cover member 760 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the rear side of the transmission device 750 and is formed on the left, right and upper portions, and is disposed on the rear side cover member 760 and the first slide member 720 and And a driving device 770 for generating a driving force for slidingly moving the second slide member 740.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the first slide member 720 is constituted by a pair of members having substantially the same shape, so that only one of them (left side in FIG. 36) will be described here, and the other will not be described.

  The first slide member 720 has a main body 721 formed in an L-shaped plate shape in front view, a bogie 722 fastened and fixed to the main body 721, and extends downward from a lower end of the bogie 722. A decoration unit 723.

  The main body portion 721 is formed in a long plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a rack portion 721a in which a rack gear is engraved on the upper surface. The main body portion 721 is provided below the rack portion 721a and connected to the rack portion 721a. And a plate-shaped carriage receiving portion 721b disposed on the left side when viewed from the front.

  The bogie portion 722 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the bogie receiving portion 721b such that the left end coincides with the left end of the bogie receiving portion 721b. The bogie portion 722 is provided inside a bogie main portion 722a having a U-shaped cross section formed by projecting walls from upper and lower ends of a plate-like bottom surface toward the front side, respectively, and a U-shaped main body portion 722a. And a rotating body group 722b in which a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies formed with a rotating axis perpendicular to the bottom surface are arranged in a pair of left and right.

  In the rotating body group 722b, a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are arranged in parallel to the left and right, and the length of the up and down interval is formed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the first slide shaft S1. The rotating body group 722b is disposed so as to slightly protrude outward from the longitudinal side surface (the left and right side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the bogie main body 722a.

  The first slide shaft S1 includes a pair of fastening plate portions S1a fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends, and is formed of a metal material such as stainless steel.

  The arrangement of the first slide member 720 on the base member 710 will be described. First, the slide shaft S1 is inserted between the rotating body group 722a of the first slide member 720, and the fastening plate S1a is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 in this state. As a result, the bogie portion 722a is disposed between the base member 710 and the first slide shaft S1. In addition, the base member 710 is reinforced by the rigidity of the first slide shaft S1.

  Next, the bogie receiving portion 721b of the main body 721 and the bogie portion 722 are fastened and fixed. Accordingly, the first slide member 720 is slidably supported by the first slide shaft bar S1.

  In this state, the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 720 is meshed with the transmission gear meshed with the drive gears 711a and 712a. Therefore, the driving force of the driving device 770 (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the first slide member 720 via the drive gears 711a and 712a and the transmission gear, so that the first slide member 720 is slid left and right.

  During the sliding movement of the first slide member 720, the rotating body group 722b sandwiches the first slide shaft S1, so that the contact area between the first slide member 720 and the first slide shaft S1 can be reduced, and the friction is reduced. In addition, since a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are arranged in a pair on the left and right and abut on the first slide shaft S1, wobbling of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the first slide member 720 with respect to the first slide shaft S1 can be stabilized.

  The front cover member 730 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 after the first slide member 720 is disposed on the base member 710. The lower cover member 730 is disposed on the front side of the lower end of the decorative portion 723. Accordingly, when the first slide member 720 fluctuates in the front-rear direction (the left front direction in FIG. 36) about the first slide shaft S1, the wobble of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the base member 710 is provided to penetrate in the front-rear direction and is formed to be rotatable with respect to the shaft. A fixed gear portion 713 that extends along the vertical direction and has a gear carved on the wall surface facing inward (to the right in FIG. 38). The fixed gear portion 713 meshes with the fixed gear portion 713 and the rack gear 754 (see FIG. 39), and a guide wall 715 protruding from the rear surface of the base member 710 and extending vertically in the right side as viewed from the rear side. And mainly comprising.

  The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 include drive gears 711a and 712a (see FIG. 36) on the front side of the base member 710, respectively. The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 are members to which the driving shafts of the driving motors 771 and 772 of the driving device 770 are fixed, and are members that transmit the driving force of the driving device 770 to the first slide member 720.

  The guide wall portion 715 includes a receiving gear portion 715a engraved on a wall surface facing inward (to the left in FIG. 38).

  As shown in FIG. 37, since the second slide member 740 is constituted by a pair of members having substantially the same shape, only one (upper part in FIG. 37) will be described here, and the other will not be described.

  The second slide member 740 extends from the left end of the bogie portion 742 in a front view of the bogie portion 742 to a main body portion 741 formed in a long plate shape, a bogie portion 742 fastened and fixed to the main body portion 741. A decorative portion 743.

  The main body 741 is formed in a long plate shape extending in the up-down direction, and a rack gear is engraved on the right surface.

  The bogie unit 742 is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the main body 741 so that the upper end matches the upper end of the main body 741. The bogie portion 742 includes a bogie main body portion 742a having a U-shaped cross section formed by projecting walls from the left and right ends of the plate-shaped bottom surface to the front side, and a vertical inside of the bogie main body portion 742a and the bottom surface. And a rotating body group 742b in which a pair of left and right rotating bodies formed with a suitable rotating shaft are arranged in a pair of upper and lower bodies.

  The rotating body group 742b has a pair of left and right rotating bodies vertically arranged in parallel, and the length of the left-right space is formed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the second slide shaft S2.

  The decorative portion 743 includes a pair of upper and lower deflection suppressing gears 743a supported on a shaft protruding toward the rear at the left end in front view.

  The second slide shaft S2 has a pair of fastening plate portions S2a fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends.

  The arrangement of the second slide member 740 on the base member 710 will be described. First, the slide shaft bar S2 is inserted between the rotating body groups 742a of the second slide member 740, and the main body part 741 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the bogie part 742. Thus, the second slide member 740 is slidably supported by the second slide shaft bar S2. In addition, the base member 710 is reinforced by the rigidity of the second slide shaft S2.

  Next, the fastening plate portion S2a of the second slide shaft S2 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710. Accordingly, the main body 741 is disposed between the base member 710 and the second slide shaft S2.

  Here, the rack gear engraved from the main body 741 of the second slide member 740 meshes with the rolling gear 714 of the base member 710. Therefore, when the rolling gear 714 is rotated, the second slide member 740 is slid up and down.

  During the sliding movement of the second slide member 740, the rotating body group 742b sandwiches the second slide shaft S2, so that the contact area between the second slide member 740 and the second slide shaft S2 can be reduced, and the friction is reduced. In addition, since a pair of left and right rotating bodies is disposed in a pair at the top and bottom, and they are in contact with the second slide shaft S2, the wobble of the second slide member 740 can be suppressed at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the second slide member 740 with respect to the second slide shaft S2 can be stabilized.

  Here, the main body portion 741 having the rack gear meshed with the rolling gear 714 (drive unit side) and the bogie portion 742 sandwiching the second slide shaft S2 are the same in the extending direction of the second slide member 740. Formed at the end. Therefore, the degree to which the bending of the second slide member 740 about the second slide shaft S2 as a fulcrum affects the meshing state between the rack gear and the rolling gear 714 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the second slide member 740 receives due to the shift of the meshing state.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the transmission device 750 is a device that transmits the driving force of the driving device 770 to the second slide member 740, and has a long plate-shaped main body 751 and a rear side of the main body 751. A drive gear 752 that is provided and to which the drive shafts 773a and 774a of the drive device 770 are fixed, a transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752, and And a rack gear 754 that is a long plate-shaped member extending in the direction and that is slid up and down along a long slide hole 751a of the main body 751.

  In the description of the configuration of the transmission device 750, only one (upper) of a pair of upper and lower portions (see FIG. 39) will be described, and the other description will be omitted.

  The main body portion 751 includes a slide long hole 751a formed in a long hole shape whose longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 39).

  The rack gear 754 includes a column-shaped shaft support 754a (see FIG. 37) which is vertically protruded from the front and penetrates through the elongated slide hole 751a of the main body 751. The shaft support 754a is inserted into a shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714.

  Here, the manner of transmitting the driving force to the second slide member 740 will be described. First, when the drive shaft 773a of the drive device 773 is rotated, the drive gear 752 fixed to the drive shaft 773a is rotated, and the rack gear 754 is rotated via the rotation of the transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752. It is slid up and down along the longitudinal direction of the slide slot 751a.

  Since the shaft support 754a (see FIG. 37) of the rack gear 754 is inserted into the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714, the rack gear 754 slides up and down, so that the rolling gear 714 also slides up and down. .

  At this time, the rolling gear 714 meshes with the teeth of the fixed gear portion 713 of the base member 710, and also meshes with the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 that is arranged to face the fixed gear portion 713. That is, a double rack and pinion mechanism is formed by the fixed gear portion 713, the rolling gear 714, and the main body portion 741, and the second slide member 740 is moved at a double speed relative to the rack gear 754.

  The rear-side cover member 760 includes a rear-side drive unit cover member 761 disposed on the side of the drive unit of the second slide member 740, a rear-side upper cover member 762 disposed on the upper side, and a rear-side drive unit cover member 761. And a rear-side retaining cover member 763 that is disposed to face in the direction.

  The rear drive unit cover member 761 is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the transmission device 750, and among the drive motors of the drive device 770, the drive motors 773 and 774 for driving the second slide member 740 are fastened and fixed to the rear surface.

  The upper back cover member 762 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710, and the drive motors 771 and 772 for driving the first slide member 720 among the drive motors of the drive device 770 are fastened and fixed to the back surface.

  The back-side retaining cover member 763 is formed on the back side on the extension end side of the decorative portion 743, and prevents the second slide member 740 from rotating around the second slide shaft S2 as a fulcrum and coming out.

  The driving device 770 mainly includes drive motors 771 and 772 for driving the first slide member 720 and drive motors 773 and 774 for driving the second slide member 740. The drive motors 771, 772, 773, and 774 have drive shafts 771a, 772a, 773a, and 774a, respectively.

  With reference to FIG. 40, an example of a movement mode of the pair of first slide members 720 will be described. FIG. 40 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 illustrating an example of a change in the arrangement of the first slide member 720 in chronological order.

  In FIG. 40 (a), the state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are disposed at the retracted positions is shown. In FIG. 40 (b), the main body 721, the bogie section 722, and the carriage 722 of the pair of first slide members 720 are arranged. FIG. 40 (c) shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are moved from the position shown in FIG. 40 (b) to the right by a predetermined amount in the front view. 40 (a) to 40 (c), the illustration of the upper front side cover member 730 of the pair of upper and lower front side cover members 730 is omitted.

  Here, transmission of the driving force to the driving gears 711a and 712a during the sliding movement of the pair of first sliding members 720 will be described. When the drive gears 711a and 712a are rotated from the retracted position shown in FIG. 40A (the drive gear 711a is clockwise in front view and the drive gear 712a is counterclockwise in front view), the pair of first slide members 720 is rotated. Are slid toward the overhang position, and are brought into contact at the overhang position (see FIG. 40B).

  A drive motor 772 (see FIG. 35) that generates a driving force to slide the first slide member 720 disposed on the right side of the pair of first slide members 720 when viewed from the front is in the state of FIG. 40B. Control is performed so as to stop the generation of the driving force immediately before reaching. In the present embodiment, since the abutment of the pair of first slide members 720 occurs between the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main portion 722a of the bogie portion 722, it is not necessary to consider bending of the decorative portion 723 in the sliding direction. Thus, the contact positions of the pair of first slide members 720 can be accurately calculated.

  The pair of first slide members 720 are arranged such that the rotating body group 722b slightly protrudes outward from the longitudinal side surface (the left and right side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the bogie main body 722a, so that the pair of first slide members 720 abut. In this case, the rotating bodies of the rotating body group 722b that protrude outward from the contact surface side are first brought into contact with each other, and then the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main body portion 722a of the bogie portion 722 are pressed against each other. Can be That is, while the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main body 722a are in contact with each other, pressure is applied to the rotating bodies of the rotating body group 722b that protrude outward from the contact surface side. Accordingly, the rotation of the rotating body group 722b can be braked in a state where the pair of slide members 720 are in contact with each other, so that the impact at the time of contact between the pair of first slide members 720 can be reduced.

  After the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other, a drive motor 771 that generates a driving force for slidingly moving the first slide member 720 disposed on the left of the pair of first slide members 720 when viewed from the front. A pair of first slides (by pressing the first slide member 720 disposed rightward in the front view by the first slide member 720 disposed leftward in the front view) by the driving force (see FIG. 35). The member 720 is slid rightward (see FIG. 40 (c)).

  That is, after the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other, the pair of first slide members 720 can be slid without moving the drive motors 771 and 772 in a coordinated manner. Thus, the power consumption of the entire drive motors 771, 772 (see FIG. 35) can be suppressed.

  Further, for example, when the pair of first slide members 720 is driven only by the drive motor 771 (see FIG. 35), the motor load increases as compared with the case where only one of the first slide members 720 is driven. However, since the first slide member 720 is moved in the horizontal direction, it is not necessary to consider the gravitational load as in the case where the first slide member 720 is moved in the up and down direction, and the amount of increase in the motor load is the drive motor 771, 772 (see FIG. 35). It occurs equally in each case.

  Therefore, the motor life of the drive motors 771, 772 (see FIG. 35) can be easily adjusted, and the adjustment of the replacement time of the drive motors 771, 772 can be easily performed. Thus, the number of maintenances of the drive motors 771, 772 can be reduced.

  An example of the movement of the pair of second slide members 740 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 illustrating an example of a change in the arrangement of the second slide member 720 in chronological order.

  In FIG. 41A, the state in which the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged at the retracted position is shown. In FIG. 41B, the main body parts 741 of the pair of second slide members 740 are in the extended position. 41 (c) shows a state where the pair of second slide members 740 have been moved upward by a predetermined amount from the position shown in FIG. 41 (b) when viewed from the front, respectively.

  Here, transmission of the driving force to the drive gear 752 (see FIG. 39) when the pair of second slide members 740 slides will be described. From the retracted position shown in FIG. 41A, the drive gear 752 is rotated by the drive motors 773 and 774 (see FIG. 35) (the drive motor 773 rotates clockwise in front view, and the drive motor 774 rotates counterclockwise in front view). Then, the pair of second slide members 740 are respectively slid toward the projecting position and come into contact at the projecting position (see FIG. 41B).

  A drive motor 773 (see FIG. 35) for generating a driving force for slidingly moving the second slide member 740 disposed above the front view of the pair of second slide members 740 reaches the state shown in FIG. 41B. Control is performed to stop the generation of the driving force immediately before.

  After being brought into contact with each other, the pair of second slide members 740 are driven by a drive motor 774 that generates a driving force for slidingly moving the second slide member 740 that is disposed below the pair of second slide members 740 when viewed from the front. The pair of second slide members 740 is driven by the driving force (see FIG. 35) (by the second slide members 740 disposed below in front view being pressed by the second slide members 740 disposed below in front view). It is slid upward (see FIG. 41 (c)).

  That is, after the pair of second slide members 740 are brought into contact with each other, the pair of second slide members 740 can be slid without moving the drive motors 773 and 774 (see FIG. 35) in a cooperative manner. Thus, the power consumption of the entire drive motors 773 and 774 can be reduced.

  Here, when the member that moves downward changes its moving direction upward, there is a possibility that the load on the drive motor increases due to the influence of gravity, thereby shortening the life of the motor. Further, since it takes a long deceleration time for the direction change, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom of the effect is reduced.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the upper member of the pair of second slide members 740 changes the moving direction from the downward movement to the upward direction, the lower member of the pair of second slide members 740 rises. The movement momentum can be used. Accordingly, the motor load generated when the direction of the second slide member 740 changes due to the influence of gravity can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended. In addition, the deceleration time for changing the direction of the second slide member 740 can be reduced, and the degree of freedom of the effect can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the operation of the bending suppression gear 743a of the second slide member 740 will be described. FIG. 42 is a partial rear view of the second slide operation unit 700. Note that the illustration of the back cover 763 (see FIG. 39) of the back cover member 760 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the second slide member 740 has an end opposite to the end supported by the second slide shaft S2 abutting against the receiving gear 715a of the base member 710 via a bending suppression gear 743a. Touched.

  Here, when the second slide member 740 is started, the meshing relationship between the deflection suppressing gear 743a and the receiving gear portion 715a is optimized and the deflection suppressing gear 743a rotates smoothly, so that the second sliding member 740 and the receiving gear are rotated. The resistance generated between the portion 715a is suppressed. Therefore, the driving force required at the time of starting the second slide member 740 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the pair of second slide members 740 abut on each other between the cart portions 742, the impact at the time of abutment is transmitted to the decoration portion 743, and the side on which the deformation suppressing gear 743a of the decoration portion 743 is disposed. Is inclined with respect to the guide wall 715. As a result, the load on the receiving gear portion 715 from the deflection suppressing gear 743a increases. More specifically, for example, when the decorative portion 743 of the second slide member 740 is inclined downward (downward in FIG. 42) with the bogie portion 742 as a fulcrum, the upper bending restraining gear 743a of the pair of bending restraining gears 743a receives the receiving gear. Pressed against part 715.

  As a result, a force in the direction of returning the inclination of the second slide member 740 is applied to the second slide member 740, so that the inclination of the orientation of the decorative portion 743 caused by the contact of the pair of second slide members 740 is suppressed. can do.

  Further, since the contact between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 is constituted by the meshing of the gear, the contact surface can be increased. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a slip between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 when the pair of second slide members 740 abut, so that the inclination of the orientation of the decorative portion 743 is suppressed. Effect can be improved.

<About the first variable winning device in the first embodiment>
The details of the first variable winning device 65 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. The first variable winning device 65 is, as shown in FIG. 49, combined with an opening forming member 65b protruding from the front side of the game board 13 and a back side of the opening forming member 65b to form a first variable winning device. A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13; and a LED disposed on the back side of the base member 65c to turn on the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. LED board 65d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e for holding the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and opening and closing for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. An opening / closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and a flow path A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the cover body 65g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i locked by the switching member 65h, and a switching member 65i disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. A back cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back side of the back cover body 65j and operating the link member 65i, and covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side with screws on the back cover body 65j. And a fixing cover body 65m for fixing.

  FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. FIG. 50 (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 50 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 along Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined left lower so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided leftward in FIG. 50 (b). A bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 51 (b).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an opening / closing door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism which can come and go from the game board 13 side, and a non-entry state. The state is changed to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the open / close door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper portion of the open / close door. In the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves to the second winning opening 640 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, even during the time reduction game (including during the probability change game), it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 with the right-handed state, and immediately after the big hit game, the game method is changed to the left-handed. The trouble of changing can be reduced. Therefore, a game can be played more easily.

  In the open state, a surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can efficiently enter the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 50A is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 50A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c such that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 51, a configuration will be described in which the game balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2 described later.

  FIG. 51 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted, and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding a game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g Is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the passage cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the flow path cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 disposed diagonally below and to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by the positive change switch 65e3, which is provided with the special discharge port 65e2 and is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the high-probability game state (the probability change state) by the passing of the game ball through the above-mentioned probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. (Game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for providing a probability change game state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or a certain-variable gaming state.

  As described above, since the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball that has won the first variable winning opening 65 during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. Can be. The minimum time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is at least one second. . The operation timing and operation time of the operation of the switching member 65h are set according to the type of big hit. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the thirteenth round. When the big hit B is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the thirteenth round.

  Therefore, at the big hit A, it is configured that the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the positive change switch 65e3, but at the big hit B, it is impossible to pass through the positive change switch 65e3. Have been. Therefore, it is possible to control the probability change giving ratio depending on the jackpot type, and it is possible to configure so as not to cause excessive advantage and disadvantage.

  A case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the opening of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 is blocked by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h, and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, there is provided a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been ejected, based on the sum of the ejection confirmation switch 65e4 and the positive change switch 65e3.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which a game ball won before the thirteenth round is won in the thirteenth round in a state where the gaming ball has not been ejected, and even if it is a big hit B, a win in the probability change switch 65e3.

  In this manner, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on the detected game ball, a prize ball is given to the player as a privilege (in the present embodiment, one ball is won). 15 prize balls). In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass the probability change switch 65e3, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not to give the probability change game state. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving a certain-variable gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, the relationship between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 640 will be described with reference to FIG. An opening through which one game ball can pass is formed on the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, and a game ball passing through the opening is provided below the first variable winning device 65. A guide path is formed to guide the player to the general winning opening 65b1. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 65b1, ten game balls are paid out to the upper plate as prize balls for the player. Here, when the game ball is played by right-handed, which is a game method fired so as to pass on the right side of the liquid crystal display unit 80, the game ball does not roll on the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. In addition, all the game balls rolling on the right side of the first variable winning device 65 pass through this opening and are configured to win the general winning opening 65b1. In the upper part of the first variable winning device 65, a plurality of game nails for changing the rolling direction of the game ball are provided.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 110, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is in the open state, the angle of the gaming nails K2, K3 is adjusted as means for adjusting the ratio to the specific winning opening 65a, and the interval therebetween is reduced. And can be made wider. Here, the amusement shop will increase the profit by reducing the number of game balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a at the time of the jackpot, thereby increasing the number of game balls to be fired in order to enter 10 balls in one round. It is conceivable that However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the gaming nail K2 is tilted to the left and adjusted so that it is difficult to win the specific winning opening 65a, the interval between the adjusting nails K1 and K2 is increased, and the gap between the adjusting nails K1 and K2 is increased. It becomes easy to enter the ball. Further, if the game nail K1 is made narrower in order to reduce the interval between the game nails K1 and K2, the flow path on the right side of the game nail K1 becomes wider, and the game ball enters from the flow path through the right opening of the opening / closing door 65f1. It becomes easy to ball. Therefore, even when the jackpot game is not being played, the ratio of winning in the general winning opening 65b1 increases, and the loss of the gaming store increases, so that the game winning ratio in the specific winning opening 65a is reduced. Adjustment of the nail can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the interest of the game is significantly reduced due to the adjustment of the game store.

  When the game nail K1 is tilted rightward to reduce the interval between the game nails K2 and K3 and reduce the winning rate to the specific winning opening 65a, the game ball moves to the second winning opening 640 side. Is easy to flow down. As a result, the winning rate of the second winning opening 640 increases, and the rate of winning in the second winning opening 640 increases during a time-saving game or a probable change game state, and the damage to the gaming store increases. In addition, it is possible to prevent the winning rate of the specific winning opening 65a from being set low. A plurality of game nails are arranged between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 640, and a game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 in the left direction. All are configured to be able to reach the second winning opening 640. The gaming nails disposed between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 640 are arranged such that all game balls are guided to the second winning opening 640 even if adjusted.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, a swing operation unit 2300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the transmission device 350 and the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 are always meshed has been described. However, the swing operation unit 2300 according to the second embodiment includes the transmission device 2350 and the drive device A state in which the drive gear 2341 meshes (engaged state) and a state in which the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 are disengaged (non-engaged state) can be formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 43 and 44 are front views of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 illustrating the swinging operation of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 in time series according to the second embodiment. FIG.

  Note that the main body 321 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIG. 43 (a) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position, and FIG. FIG. 43 (c) shows a state in which the arm 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the extended position to the retreat position, and FIG. 43 (a) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged in the retreat position. FIG. 44 (b) shows a state immediately before the transmission device 2350 is pulled by the L-shaped lever 2380 from the state of FIG. 44 (c), and FIG. 44 (c) shows a state where the arm member 320 is extended to just before the extended position. In (), the state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position by the transmission device 2350 being pulled by the L-shaped lever 2380 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 are formed to be meshable.

  The drive gear 2341 includes a main body 2341a formed in a fan shape as viewed from the axis of the drive shaft and in a front view, and an extrusion pin 2341b protruding toward the front side near a peripheral surface of the main body 2341a.

  The transmission device 2350 includes a release pin 2352 protruding toward the front side at the end opposite to the front side of the regulation sliding portion 351 when viewed from the front.

  The base member 2310 includes a swing shaft 2318 projecting to the front side at the lower right of the support position of the drive gear 2341 when viewed from the front.

  The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed in a long rod shape, and has one end pivotally supported at one end by a swing shaft 2318 of a base member 2310, and one end of the first body 2381. A second main body portion 2382 which is pivotally supported at the other end on the opposite side and is formed in a long rod shape, and is formed in a long hole shape along the extending direction of the second main body portion 2382. And a pull slide hole 2383 to which the release pin 2352 is connected. The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed so as to be able to swing on the front side of the drive gear 2341 and to be able to contact the push-out pin 2341b when the drive gear 2341 rotates.

  A case where the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position will be described. When the transmission device 2350 connected by the release hole 325 is swung by the rotation of the drive gear 2341 to the state shown in FIG. 43C, the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position. At this time, the L-shaped lever 2380 is pulled in the pull slide hole 2383 by the release pin 2352 of the transmission device 2350, and is inclined toward the transmission device.

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 43 (c), the engagement between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 is released (see FIG. 44 (a)). Next, a case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

  In a state where the arm member 320 is located at the retracted position (see FIG. 43 (c)), the regulating sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead point. The arm member 320 is maintained at the retracted position even when the engagement between the arm member 320 and the drive gear 2341 is released.

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 44A and the L-shaped lever 2380 is pushed outward (to the right in FIG. 44), the transmission device 2350 is inserted into the pulling slide hole 2383 of the L-shaped lever 2380. Is released, and the transmission device 2350 is slightly rotated counterclockwise in front view.

  By slightly rotating the transmission device 2350, the dead center formed by the regulating sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 is released, and the arm member 320 is released from the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20). ) To the projecting position (see FIG. 44 (b)).

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated and the push pin 2341b is disposed to the right of the rotation axis, the L-shaped lever 2380 pulls the release pin of the transmission 2350 again. Thereby, the regulating sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead point, and the arm member 320 can be maintained at the extended position (see FIG. 44C).

  That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, the engagement between the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 connected to the arm member 320 can be released. Can reduce the resistance applied. Therefore, by starting the arm member 320 with the urging force of the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20), the effect of swinging the arm member 320 at high speed from the start can be remarkable.

  Here, the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 mesh only when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position. Therefore, the change in resistance generated between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 affects the swing of the arm member 320 only when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, and the arm member 320 Does not affect the swing of the arm member 320 when the arm is swung from the retracted position to the extended position.

  Therefore, by setting the elastic force of the torsion spring 360 to be large, a large force is required when swinging the arm member 320 from the extended position to the retracted position. In addition, it is possible to secure a high speed at the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position.

  FIGS. 45 (a), 45 (b), 46 (a) and 46 (b) show a second embodiment in which the operation in which the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position is shown in time series. It is a front view of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit 2300 in a form. Note that FIG. 45A illustrates a state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 45B illustrates a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position. In FIG. 46 (a), a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state in FIG. 45 (b) is illustrated, and in FIG. 46 (b), a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position is illustrated. Is done.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the upright member 330 is gently raised has been described. However, in the swing operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment, the upright member 330 is rapidly raised.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), the upright hole 2316 of the base member 2310 includes a posture changing portion 2316a formed above a bending point and a concentric portion 2316b formed near the lower end.

  The posture changing portion 2316a is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed to the cylindrical portion 322 which is the swing axis of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 slides the posture changing portion 2316a, the degree of change in the posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the swing angle of the arm member 320 becomes maximum (FIGS. 45 (b) and 46). (A)). This is because the posture changing portion 2316a is perpendicular to the circle formed by the movement trajectory of the sliding ring portion 323 (see FIG. 17B).

  The concentric portion 2316b is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed in a direction along a circle around the cylindrical portion 322 of the arm member 320. When the changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 slides on the concentric portion 2316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320 and the changing sliding portion 333 of the upstanding member 330 does not change. The posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained.

  In the present embodiment, since the concentric portion 2316b is formed at the lower end of the upright hole 2316, the arm member 320 stands upright from the retracted position to the position shown in FIG. The relative orientation of member 330 is maintained.

  Since the posture changing portion 2316a is formed above the bending point of the upright hole 2316 (that is, near the upper portion of the concentric portion 2316b), the posture changing portion 2316a is shown in FIG. 46 (a) from the arrangement shown in FIG. 45 (b). When the arm member 320 is swung to the position shown in FIG.

  Thereby, the posture change after the standing member 320 is visually recognized by the player can be made sharp. Therefore, the speed of the operation of the swing operation unit 2300 felt by the player can be further improved.

  The first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the connecting member 470 is formed from a resin material has been described. However, in the first sliding operation unit 2400 according to the second embodiment, the connecting member 2470 is formed from an elastic rubber material. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 47A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 2400. Note that FIG. 47 illustrates a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the second cover member 2466 of the tilting member 2460 includes a mass portion 2466m disposed at an upper end.

  The mass portion 2466m is a portion having a mass necessary for the center of gravity of the tilting member 2460 to be formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a in a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. Therefore, the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a.

  The connection shaft 461b of the tilting member 2460 is connected to the suspension shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450 by the connection member 2470.

  The connecting member 2470 is a long member formed of a rubber-like elastic body, and is formed to be expandable and contractable by the swing of the tilting member 2460.

  Here, in a state where the suspension member 430 is located at the extended position, the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a, so that the tilting member 2460 is formed unstable. Therefore, when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven and the tilting member 2460 performs the expanding / contracting operation in a state where the hanging member 430 is located at the extended position, the tilting member 2460 swings around the hanging shaft 461a. Be moved.

  In this case, since the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 2460 expands and contracts the connecting member 2470, an elastic force is applied to the tilting member 2460. As a result, a force in a direction opposite to the swing direction of the tilting member 2460 is applied to the tilting member 2460. In this case, the time required for the tilting member 2460 to swing back is reduced, and the operation of the tilting member 2460 is accelerated. Therefore, the speed of the swinging operation of the tilting member 2460 generated when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven can be increased, and the effect by the swinging (vibration) of the tilting member 2460 is effectively performed. be able to.

  The second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where one of the pair of first slide members 720 is stopped and comes into contact with the other first slide member 720 has been described. However, the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment. The position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected, and control is performed so that one of the first slide members 2720 runs backward according to the detection result. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 48 is a partial front view of the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment illustrating an example of an operation in which the first slide member 2720 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position in a time series. In FIG. 48, the illustration of the upper front cover member 730 is omitted, and in FIG. 48 (a), a state in which the pair of first slide members 2720 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated. 48 shows a state in which the right first slide member 2720 of the pair of first slide members 2720 has been slid by a predetermined amount. In FIG. 48 (c), the left first slide member 2720 is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 48 (b). A state where the member 2720 is slid by a predetermined amount is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the main body 2721 of the first slide member 2720 is formed to extend in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48) and extend in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 48). A hole-like detection hole 2721c is provided.

  The base member 2710 is a transmissive optical sensor disposed on the front side, and is a detection device disposed at a position where transmitted light can pass through the detection hole 2721c by sliding the first slide member 2720. 2716. The detecting device 2716 is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the base member 2710 (see FIG. 48A).

  As shown in FIG. 48B, the right first slide member 2720 is slid from the state of FIG. 48A, and when the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 reaches a position penetrating the detection hole 2721c, the right side slide member 2720 is moved to the right side. The first slide member 2720 is controlled to stop.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (c), when the left first slide member 2720 is slid and reaches the position where the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 penetrates the detection hole 2721c, the right slide member 2720 becomes the left slide member. Control is performed so that the sheet is reversely fed (sliding to the right) at a speed at which it can abut at the same speed as 2720.

  That is, while the left first slide member 2720 slides, the light transmitted through the detection device 2716 is blocked by the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 2720, but the light transmitted through the detection device 2716 passes through the detection hole 2721c. When reaching the penetrating position, the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is detected, and the position information of the left first slide member 2720 is output to the main control device. Further, since the detection hole 2721c is formed in a long hole shape, the speed information of the left first slide member 2720 is output to the main control device by detecting the length of the detection device 2716 at which the transmitted light is detected. You.

  Based on the position information and the speed information of the left first slide member 2720, the reverse feed acceleration required for the right first slide member 2720 to contact the left first slide member 2720 at a constant speed is determined. The calculated value is controlled so that the right first slide member 2720 moves with the acceleration.

  Thereby, the impact at the time of contact between the pair of first slide members 2720 can be reduced, and the durability of the first slide members 2720 can be improved.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the change sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid in the upright holes 316 and 2316 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotatable roller may be provided in the changing sliding portion 333, and the roller may roll in the upright holes 316 and 2316. Thereby, the resistance generated when the posture of the upright member 330 changes can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the dimension of the gap formed between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 is gradually reduced from near the lower end to near the upper end of the guide hole 315. Although the case of formation is described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size of the gap formed between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 may be changed abruptly at a part of the guide hole 315. That is, at least two types of change in the gap may be formed. In this case, the degree of change in the slide resistance of the arm member 320 can be changed (increased or loosened).

  In each of the above embodiments, the dimension of the gap formed between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 is gradually reduced from near the lower end to near the upper end of the guide hole 315. Although the case of formation is described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size of the gap formed between the base member 310 and the main body portion 331 of the upright member 330 and the base member 310 may be gradually reduced from the vicinity of the lower end to the vicinity of the upper end of the upright hole 316. Good. In this case, the resistance applied to the upright member 330 when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position to the overhang position is suppressed, and the wobbling of the upright member 330 is suppressed when the arm member 320 is arranged at the overhang position. can do.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the size of the gap formed between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 is changed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the width of the groove orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 may be reduced from the lower end to the upper end. In this case, the degree of reduction of the diameter orthogonal to the direction in which the guide hole 315 extends may be different from the center of the sliding portion 326.

  That is, the right side surface (the right side in FIG. 18A) of the guide hole 315 is a portion formed above the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320, and the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the extended position. When the arm member 320 is slightly moved in the plane direction of the base member 310 (direction perpendicular to the surface thickness direction) due to play with the swing shaft, the arm member 320 is actively contacted. By greatly reducing the degree of reduction of the groove width from a stage close to the retracted position, the swing of the arm member 320 in the projecting direction can be made smooth.

  On the other hand, the left side surface of the guide hole 315 (the left side in FIG. 18A) is where the arm member 320 contacts when the arm member 320 swings from the extended position to the retracted position and when the arm member 320 falls forward. Therefore, the degree of contraction of the groove is made gradual until it reaches the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, and is formed sharply near the upper end, so that the resistance received when the arm member 320 is swung toward the retreat position is reduced. Can be suppressed. That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, or when the arm member 320 falls forward, the sliding portion 326 can be prevented from contacting the left side surface of the guide hole 315. The resistance generated when the member 320 swings from the extended position to the retracted position can be suppressed. Thus, the driving force required for the driving device 340 can be reduced, and the size of the driving device 340 can be reduced.

  The same effect can be obtained by changing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 to the guide hole 315 by the portion of the guide hole 315 without changing the groove width of the guide hole 315. For example, by increasing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 in the vicinity of the lower end of the guide hole 315 as compared with the vicinity of the upper end, from the start when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, The sliding portion 326 can be easily brought into contact with the upper side surface of the guide hole 315. Thereby, the swing of the arm member 320 can be made smooth.

  In addition, by increasing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 near the upper end of the guide hole 315 as compared with the vicinity of the lower end, the arm can be moved from the upper side surface of the guide hole 315 in a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position. A downward force acts on the sliding portion 326 of the member 320. Thereby, the driving force required at the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position can be reduced.

  In the above embodiments, the case where all the reflecting members 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 are simultaneously rotated has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timing of rotation may be shifted for each reflecting member 520, or the speed of rotation may be shifted. Accordingly, the direction of reflection of light emitted from the light source and reflected by the reflection member 520 can be set in various ways, and the front side of the reversing operation unit can be brilliantly produced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 meshes with the first rack gear 553 of the transmitting member 550 to rotate the reflecting member 520 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the transmission member 550 may be formed of a rotating belt, and the rotating gear 523 may be formed of a roller. In this case, even if the rotating belt is further rotated in a state where the reflecting members 520 are in contact with each other, slippage occurs between the rotating belt and the roller, and further rotation of the reflecting member 520 is suppressed. Therefore, breakage of the reflection member 520 can be prevented.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the expansion teeth 523a are formed on the rotating gear 523 of the reversing operation unit 500 and the first rack gears 553 of the transmission member 550 are formed at intervals, but are not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the expansion teeth 523a may be formed on the transmission member 550, and the spacing between the teeth may be formed on the rotary gear 523.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the reflection member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 is formed from an opaque resin material has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reflection member 520 may be formed from a transparent resin material. In this case, regardless of whether the reflecting member 520 is in the closed state or the open state, the light emitted from the light source can be visually recognized by the player, and the effect of the light emitted from the light source can be visually recognized by the player for a long time. Can be.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which one of the pair of first slide members 720 of the second slide operation unit 700 is slid by being pushed by the other slide member 720, but is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, each of the pair of first slide members 720 may be formed so as to be always driven by an independent drive motor.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the pair of second slide members 740 directly contact the main bodies 741 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, elastic members such as rubber and coil springs may be provided on the surfaces of the main body 741 that are in contact with each other. In this case, since the impact can be reduced as compared with the case where the main bodies 741 are directly contacted with each other, the durability of the second slide member 740 can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the “heart” can be visually recognized in a front view in a state where the slide members 720 and 740 are overhanging is described. It is not limited. For example, the shape to be visually recognized is not limited to “heart”, and may be, for example, “star”, “fish”, “car”, or the like. Further, when the degree of overhang of each of the slide members 720 and 740 is different, a different shape may be formed so as to be visible. In this case, the effect of the second slide operation unit 700 can be improved.

  In the above embodiments, the case where one of the pair of second slide members 740 pushes and moves the other second slide member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, by attaching a magnet to the contact position of the second slide member 740, it can be moved in the pulling direction. In this case, the pair of slide members 740 can be reciprocated by the drive motor 773 that slides one second slide member 740. Therefore, for example, when one drive motor 773 is newer than the other drive motor 774, the motor to be driven can be switched according to the situation, such as driving the second slide member 740 using only the drive motor 773. Therefore, the life of the pair of drive motors 773 and 774 can be adjusted.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main body portion 722a of the bogie portion 722 are in contact with each other when the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other has been described. Absent. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may be abutted on the lower end side of the decorative portion 723, that is, the lower end side opposite to the upper end side to which the driving force is transmitted, of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the decorative portion 723. . In this case, the impact on the upper end side of the first slide member 720 when the pair of first slide members 720 abuts can be reduced, so that the load on the drive motors 771 and 772 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the bogie receiving portion 721b and the bogie main body portion 722a of the bogie portion 722 are in contact with each other when the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other has been described. Absent. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may be in contact with both the upper end side and the lower end side of the decorative portion 723. In this case, since the contact area between the pair of first slide members 720 can be increased, the load applied per unit area when the pair of first slide members 720 abut can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the movement of one of the pair of first slide members 720 is reliably transmitted to the other, when the pair of first slide members 720 are slid in a contact state, the pair of slide members 720 are moved. The effect of being visually recognized as one can be remarkable. At this time, if the contact points on both sides are hidden by the front-side cover member 730, the pair of slide members 720 separated from each other are visually recognized in a cooperative operation, so that the effect of the pair of slide members 720 can be improved. .

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotating body group 722b of the bogie section 722 is formed with the same diameter has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the diameter of the rotating body group 722b may be formed large in one first slide member 720 and small in the other first slide member 720. In this case, the small-diameter rotator group 722b can be sandwiched between the large-diameter rotator group 722b and the first slide shaft S1. Thus, the effect of braking the rotating body group 722b by bringing the rotating body group 722b into contact with each other can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed at one place in the first slide member 2720 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection hole 2721c is formed at a plurality of locations (for example, one end, the center, and the other end of the main body 2721 of the first slide member 2720), so that the first slide member 2720 stops. A plurality of positions can be formed. At this time, by changing the lengths of the detection holes 2721c in the longitudinal direction, the position of the first slide member 2720 can be detected at a plurality of positions according to the detection period of the detection device 2716.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed in the shape of a long hole has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection hole 2721c may be formed in a circular shape. In this case, the processing cost of the detection hole 2721c can be suppressed. Even when the detection hole 2721c is circular, a plurality of the detection holes 2721c are continuously formed along the sliding direction of the first slide member 2720, so that the detection device 2716 is moved during the movement of the first slide member 2720. The moving speed of the first slide member 2720 can be determined based on the time interval at which the transmitted light is blocked. Further, by changing the number of circular detection holes 2721c to be provided for each position (for example, both ends and the center) in the longitudinal direction of the first slide member 2720, the transmission of the detection device 2716 during the movement of the first slide member 2720 is performed. The position of the first slide member 2720 can be detected based on the number of times light is blocked.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected based on the positional relationship between the detection device 2716 and the detection hole 2721c after one slide member 2720 is stopped at the overhang position is described. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when only the position or speed of the other first slide member 2720 is detected, the relative speed difference between the pair of first slide members 720 is suppressed by causing at least one of the first slide members 2720 to run backward. And the impact at the time of contact can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the position and speed of the pair of second slide members 740 are detected by one detection device 2716 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of detection devices 2716 may be provided corresponding to a pair of second slide members 740, respectively. In this case, the position and speed of the other second slide member 740 can be detected regardless of the arrangement of the one second slide member 740.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection device 2716 is provided on the base member 2710 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection device 2716 may be provided on at least one of the pair of second slide members 740. In this case, the relative speed of the pair of second slide members 740 can be detected.

<About the first control processing example>
Next, a first control processing example in the control processing of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), the first winning symbol 64 or the second winning symbol 640 is used as a trigger to trigger a first special symbol or a second special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In the third symbol, the variable display is performed in common with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, the second special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner in preference to the first special symbol, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Have been.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed and displayed at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be changed and displayed simultaneously. A possible configuration may be adopted. With this configuration, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the games can be improved.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols consisting of numbers “0” to “9”.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after it is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, symbol columns having three main symbols are displayed. In each symbol row, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. The symbol row is displayed as a left symbol row displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol row displayed on the right of the left symbol row, and a right symbol row displayed on the right of the middle symbol row.

  In addition, a third symbol is displayed in three rows of upper, middle, and lower for each symbol row. The middle part of the third symbol is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1 in the order of left symbol row → right symbol row → middle symbol row. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64, is the reserved ball number. One identification symbol (reserved symbol) of “black circle” is displayed for one, and the player is notified. The player can determine the current number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved symbols.

  In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the third symbol and the reserved symbol, character symbols, characters, and the like are displayed as a preview display mode displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Is done. When the game is not performed for a predetermined period, a standby display image such as a model name of the pachinko machine 10 or a digest of a reach display mode is displayed.

  If the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of the ball is increased. Up to four times are reserved, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and the retained symbol is also displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the balls entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 72). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a second winning port 640 corresponding to winning in the first winning port 64 including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). And a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning of the game is provided in each of these areas, in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, in accordance with the timing of entering the ball. Each value of the random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the normal starting ports (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 72).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by a first random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is If it matches the value of the random number to be a big hit set by the random number per hit table, it is determined that the big hit is a special symbol. In addition, the first random number table is used when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in the low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of being a big hit in the special symbol (the special symbol is higher than the low probability). ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The first random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbol and the first random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbol are stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. Specifically, when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is any one of “0 to 9”. It is determined whether or not there is, and if any of “0 to 9”, it is determined to be a big hit. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “9”. If the value is “9”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is reserved at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a special symbol big hit, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is out of the range, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol big hit, the first symbol display device is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. In the first random number counter C1, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol have a low probability, there is one large random number value of the special symbol, and the random number value “9” is set as described above. It is stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is 300 and the total number of the random numbers to be the big hit is 1, so the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random hit values of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are the first random numbers for the high probability. It is stored in the table 202a. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300 out of the total number of random numbers, and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 10, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/30”.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any one of “0 to 49”, the big hit type is “big hit A”. When the random number is any one of “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”. In the present embodiment, two types of jackpots are used. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and one type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first hit type counter C2, different big hit types may be selected. With this configuration, for example, in the case of a big hit in the second special symbol, by setting a big hit type that is executed with a larger number of rounds, the hit in the second special symbol is more given to the player. Can be expected. Therefore, the winning in the high-probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that he wants to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer time.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, super reach, and the like. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 72) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 55A) storing a random value for determining one variation time of the symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Is provided.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202b, for example, “variation (for long time)”, “variation (for short time)”, various types of “normal reach”, and various “variance of super reach” are defined as variation patterns for deviation. , A variety of “normal reach” and various “super reach” are defined as the variation pattern of the jackpot A. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). Although not shown, a variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the audio ramp control device 113, and a more detailed variation corresponding to the type of the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the ball passes through the normal starting port (through gate) 67 on the left or right. This is acquired when it is detected, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the symbol is set by a second random number table 202c (see FIG. 53 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. Is the same as the winning random number set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). The second random number table 202c is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability (normal symbol) in which the probability of hitting the symbol is higher than the low probability. ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  FIG. 53A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c described above. In the second random number table 202c, there are twenty-four random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol when the probability of the ordinary symbol is low, and the range is "5-28". These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202C for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of 240 in the total number of random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the ordinary starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variation of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202C for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the second winning port 640 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the opening period of the second winning opening 640 is further reduced. Is extremely long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, so that the ball easily enters the first winning opening 64. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened by “1 second × 2 times” when the ordinary symbol is hit, And the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 72).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 52, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 72), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 71). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the input is made, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (c), the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball counter 203f, probability variable flag 203g, probability variable setting flag 203h, probability variable passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, It has a remaining ball timer 203o, a probability change enable flag 203p, a probability change enable timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a medium time counter 203t, and a memory area 203z.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (first hold area to fourth hold area). , The respective values of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 acquired based on the winning in the first winning opening 64 are stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning opening 64, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that counter values obtained for winning in the second winning opening 640 are stored, respectively. Are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. ). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 on either the left or right, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In the vacant areas of the (area), the areas are sequentially stored in ascending order of the area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the order of winning is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prize stored in the other reserved areas is the same as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first winning port 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 66). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is decremented by one each time a special symbol change display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 64).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 64, FIG. 66). See S405). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 changes the variation retained in the main control device 110 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of retained balls displayed. As a result, the number of change display reserved balls managed by the special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is increased by the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls retained and stored in the second winning opening 640 is stored. Therefore, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f sets the maximum number of holding balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal starting port 67 to a maximum of four. This is a counter that counts up to the number of times. The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of retained balls in the fluctuation display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S704 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 of FIG. 68).

  When the ball passes through the right or left normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of changing display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter C4. Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the right or left normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c ( S703 in FIG. 69: No).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is the probability change game state (probability change game state). When the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is the probability change game state, and when OFF, it indicates that the game state is the low probability game state (including the time saving game state). In the present embodiment, when the probability change setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to ON at the end of the big hit game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (see S1213 in FIG. 75). On the other hand, when the big hit game is started, it is set to off. In the initialized state, the power supply is set to off, and when a normal power-off occurs, the state immediately before the power-off is backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probable change game state is determined by whether or not a game ball has passed the probable change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 51A) during the jackpot game. Here, when a game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1242 in FIG. 77). On the other hand, the probable change setting flag 203h is set off based on the probable change flag 203g being set on (S1213 in FIG. 75). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, the probability change switch 65e3 determines whether or not the power has been passed before the power is turned off. 203h may be configured to be officially set to ON and return. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the power has passed through the certainty switch 65e3 before the power is turned off, based on whether or not a certainty variable passage counter 203i described later has a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to judge whether or not the power is turned off and the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203h in a state where the power is turned off, thereby reducing damage to the game store. it can.

  The probability change passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability change switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all of the game balls that have won the first variable prize device 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability-change passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variable passage counter 203i is incremented by one each time the probability variable switch 65e3 is passed and updated (S1241 in FIG. 77). In addition, after performing a process of checking whether the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1271 in FIG. 78). Note that the probability change passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j indicates the number of gaming balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round of the jackpot game (that is, the number of gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65). This is a counter for counting. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 49) provided in the first variable winning device 65, it is incremented by one and updated (see FIG. 77). S1233). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the first variable prize device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged (the total value of the discharged number counter 203s and the positive variable passing counter 203i) Are determined (S1267 in FIG. 78), and then reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probable change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, at the big hit A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and at the big hit B, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. Is set. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 13 rounds in the big hit A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the big hit B (S1202 in FIG. 74). On the other hand, in the process of S1239 of the winning process (S1112 in FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by one and updated. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1243 in FIG. 77: Yes), the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in an initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning to the positive change switch 65e3 according to the type of big hit.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in this embodiment, a voice saying “look at the liquid crystal”) to attract the player's attention. In the present embodiment, a notification counter 203m corresponding to one second is set at the end timing of the twelfth round (10 balls or 30 seconds have elapsed in the first variable winning device 65). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by 1 by the process of S1224 of the notification process (S1111 in FIG. 76) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, a notification command output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the sound ramp control device 113 executes the above-described processing for outputting the sound.

  With this configuration, the sound “look at the liquid crystal” is output before the start of the thirteenth round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Gaze at 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the twelfth round of the jackpot game, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. Is displayed, which is a notification that prompts the player to look at. In the thirteenth round, the flow path solenoid 65k operates, and if the operation is watched by the player, the type of the jackpot being executed is determined based on the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. In order to keep the player having the expectation that the probability change game state will be provided until the end of the jackpot game, the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 51 (a)) is notified so that the player becomes difficult to see. Direction is being performed. However, when the twelfth round is completed, there is a possibility that the player may look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is notified by voice during the interval. Is performed. Thereby, after the interval effect is executed, the player can be attracted to the displayed content displayed, and the player can be distracted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is notified so as to be shown so as to divert the player's attention from the switching member 65h. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand by notifying the variable prize device 65 by holding the player's hand. Further, the present invention is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured to distract the player's attention by informing the player to look at the decorative lamp 34 and the like. Furthermore, during the 12th round, a three-dimensional code or the like may be displayed to notify the user of reading with a mobile phone, thereby distracting the player's attention. In the present embodiment, the effect of distracting the attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 13th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a problem that it is determined whether the hit is the big hit A or the big hit B based on the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 has been closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 has been set from the open state to the closed state in the first round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1264 in FIG. 78). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether or not the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter to perform.

  The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the game ball that has won the first variable prize device 65 is discharged when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. Is a counter for determining whether the time necessary for the operation has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the game ball winning the first variable winning device 81 is discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance by the remaining ball timer 203o. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged coins match. (S1267 in FIG. 78). If they do not match, an error command is set and that effect is reported. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game ball is clogged in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game balls are left illegally in the first variable winning device 65, and a shock or the like is given at the start timing of the 13th round, and the game balls reach the switching member 65h earlier than the actual one. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the probable change switch 65e3.

  If the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the certain change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the certain change switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be turned on. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improper provision of the certain game state.

  The probability change valid flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when a game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability change enable flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 51A) is switched to the probability change switch 65e3 based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. It is less than the time required to pass through. In other words, the period during which the probability change valid flag 203p is ON indicates that the game ball normally passes through the probability change switch 65e3.

  The probable change valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time from when the above-described probable change valid flag 203p is set to ON. After the probable change valid timer 203r turns off the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to determine (measure) a period necessary for normally passing the probable change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probable change switch 65e3 is one second. The upper limit value of the probability change valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even after passing through the probability change switch 65e3, it is determined to be illegal and not to pass.

  Thereby, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the game ball is illegally entered into the special discharge port 65e2 to allow a game ball to pass through the positive change switch 65e3, or a game is played from below the positive change switch 65e3 with a piano wire or the like. Damage due to fraud, such as pushing a ball up and passing it or erroneously detecting a magnetic sensor as passing by a radio wave or the like, can be suppressed.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 51A) in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203s is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1271 in FIG. 78).

  The time reduction counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols change in the time reduction gaming state. If the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the big hit game, 100 is set in the time reduction counter 203t. That is, in the present embodiment, when the probability change game state is not set after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of 100 times.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a long press effect lottery table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game. I have.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation pattern of each variation pattern type (outside, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set in a variation value selection counter value (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed change pattern based on the change pattern type indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various kinds of change modes while strictly observing rough information such as the change time and the type of the change pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  The long press effect lottery table 222b displays, as one of the variation patterns described later, when a SW variation pattern in which a display mode in which the display mode is changed by pressing the frame button 22 is selected, the frame button 22 is displayed. 9 is a selection table for selecting a notification mode for notifying an operation timing or the like. FIG. 55 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press effect lottery table 222b. In the long press effect lottery table 222b, the notification mode type of the operation method related to the long press operation for continuously pressing the frame button 22 for a certain period or more is set as the long press navigation type. As the long press navigation type, three types of long press navigation A, long press navigation B, and long press navigation C are set.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62, each long-press navigation type will be described. FIGS. 61A and 61B are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the long-press navigation B. FIG. When the SW variation pattern is selected and the long press effect B is selected, the character “Let a big hit by long press!” Is displayed as shown in FIG. Is performed, a notification mode that expects a jackpot is provided.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the characters "Predict the long press start timing in the period meter!" Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the color changes from the left side to the right side with time below it below. An indicator that changes sequentially in the direction is displayed. Based on this notification, the player predicts a correct long press start period and starts pressing the frame button 22 at an arbitrary timing until all the indicator colors change. When the pressing of the frame button 22 is started, the timing of releasing the long press (the timing of releasing the pressing of the frame button 22) is notified as shown in FIG. 61 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), a character "Release at count 0!" Is displayed, and an indicator that changes color from left to right is displayed below the character. In the upper right corner of the indicator, the character “3.2.1.0. Release!” Is displayed, and when the color of the indicator changes to just below the character “0”, press the frame button 22. You are navigating to unlock. In this case, the countdown may be displayed in characters, and the frame button 22 may be released at the timing when the character “release!” Is displayed.

  As described above, in the notification mode of the long press navigation B, the timing of the start of the long press is made to be predicted by the player, and the timing of the release of the long press is clearly notified, so that the navigation with the medium difficulty is configured. are doing.

  When the timing of the long press start coincides with the start timing set in advance in the SW fluctuation pattern, if the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the player is notified of the big hit. Thereby, the player can know that the jackpot has been hit at an early stage.

  FIG. 62A is a diagram illustrating a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the long-press navigation A is selected. In the notification mode of the long-press navigation A, the player expects that the character "GET THE BIG WIN AT THE LONG PRESS TIME" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the big hit is given by the long press timing. The notification mode to be displayed is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), an indicator is displayed, and after a long press for an arbitrary period while the color of the indicator is changed, a predetermined length is set for an arbitrary period of the player. The message "Let's hit the long press period!" That prompts to hit the press period is displayed.

  As described above, the long press navigation A is a notification mode in which the player must predict both the start timing of the long press and the release timing of the long press, and is configured in the navigation notification mode having the highest difficulty. ing.

  FIG. 62B is a diagram illustrating a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the long-press navigation C is selected. When the long-press navigation C is selected, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the character "Get a jackpot in the specified long-press period!" Is displayed, and the long press is performed at the specified timing and period. A notification prompting the player to execute is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), an indicator is displayed, characters of “start” and “end” are displayed below the indicator, and a long press is performed at a timing when the color of the indicator changes to the start. After starting, it is notified that the long press is released at the timing of “end”.

  As described above, the long-press navigation C has the lowest difficulty navigation content among the long-press navigation types. As described later, the long press navigation C is a notification mode that is selected only when the result is a jackpot. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the long press effect lottery table 222b, a value (range of 0 to 198) of an effect counter 223f, which will be described later, is set for each long press navigation type for each hit determination result. I have. When the result of the hit determination is a hit, the setting is made such that the long-press navigation type having a lower difficulty level is more easily selected than in the case of the departure. This makes it possible to change the sense of expectation of the jackpot depending on the displayed long-press navigation type. In addition, it is possible to make the player feel that the jackpot is given or not depending on the operation method of the player, and it is possible to provide the player with a game with fresh taste.

  If the long press operation is not executed even after the elapse of the predetermined period, the long press effect may be terminated halfway and switched to a predetermined main symbol variation effect. With such a configuration, a player who does not operate the frame button 22 can enjoy the game.

  The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a change start flag 223d, At least a stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a long press flag 223g, a long press counter 223h, a SW valid time storage area 223i, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the result of the lottery of the reserved ball before the start of the change.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ) Is a counter for counting up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the retained ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b causes the reserved ball of the first special symbol to be counted. It is designed to manage numbers.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main When the number of balls has been subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 25). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball count after the storage. In order to notify the value of the counter 223 b to the display control device 114, a display pending ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, the reserved ball count value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is used. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol on the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. However, the detailed description is omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 81), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 82). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 81), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1706 in FIG. 82). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for a notice effect and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

  The long-press flag 223g is a flag indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed for more than 3 seconds and held for a long time. The time during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is counted by a long press counter 223h described later, and when the count value is equal to or more than a count value indicating 3 seconds, the long press flag 223g is set to ON. .

  The long press counter 223h is a counter for counting the time when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. In the present embodiment, if the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 3 seconds or longer, it is determined that a long press is performed, and an operation different from the state in which the frame button 22 is pressed in a normal short time is performed (S1810 in FIG. 83). ) Is configured as follows. The long press counter 223h can determine whether the long press is executed.

  The SW valid time storage area 223i is a storage area for storing a period in which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern selected by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is the above-described SW variation pattern, the frame is determined when the frame button 22 set in the variation pattern is determined to be off. The period (time) that is set to OFF when the button 22 is valid (S1807: No in FIG. 83) is set in the SW valid time storage area 23i as the SW valid time. When the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time storage area 223i, the value is decremented and updated by one based on the elapse of the SW valid time (see S1806 in FIG. 83).

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 81) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays a variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a notice effect. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different type having different lottery probabilities of special symbol jackpots and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply unit 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a later-described second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a bad data block. Performs the data address translation of

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the defective data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different defective data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page including data corresponding to the specified address (for example, 2 kilobytes). Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c includes two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” has been designated to the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR-type ROM 234d. , Read the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d are included in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S2001 in FIG. 84) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 59) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 86B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image in which a result of a lottery performed in the main control device 110 is displayed by a fluctuation effect.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 84).

  The power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81 (“O” and “X” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81).

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “○” at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “x” at the same position as the symbol “○” are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and when it is "special symbol jackpot", the image is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and when it is "missing the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user must wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area From the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instructed. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. If a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning opening 64, the variable effect is not immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, even though the variable effect is started on the first symbol display device 37. The occurrence of such a state can be suppressed.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and for each sub-area, the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Accordingly, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. At least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k are provided.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, for example, a variable effect, a round effect A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, a stop symbol indicating the departure is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol. The longer the time-saving period of this ordinary symbol is, the more opportunities for the ball to pass through the second entrance 67, the more chances are for the ordinary symbol to be drawn, and the more chances of hitting the ordinary symbol Become. Therefore, the chance of opening a motorized accessory as a normal symbol jackpot increases, so that the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640, and a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, which can be given to the player, so that the motivation of the player to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, so that the electric accessory is usually opened as a jackpot of a symbol and the ball is turned into the second winning opening. When the player easily enters 640, the number of prize balls increases. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce, or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced, even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain a sense of period in which the special symbol jackpot can be obtained without the condition. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Also, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the held special symbol lottery results in a special symbol jackpot, the player can make a special symbol lottery in the held special symbol lottery. Can be recognized, so that the player can surely have the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. When the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is displayed with a smaller size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In the case of specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the immediately preceding variable effect stopped symbol is switched to the offset information of the variable effect stopped symbol performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 57) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer is set in accordance with the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is stored for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why the effect can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, the display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effects defined in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  Note that if all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 58). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 15 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 58, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2005 in FIG. 84). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S2305 in FIG. 86 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 86 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 86 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 86 (b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 86 (b) (see S2309). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 87 to 90) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 94A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 94B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 59) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction for, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 59) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 59) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 86 (b) )), A pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 93) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 59), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 86 (b) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3007 in FIG. 91). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite in which no image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 46). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 95). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process (see FIG. 86 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switches are read (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random number counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 299, 99 and 239), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is performed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display and the third symbol performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game is included. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. If the mode is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203e (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol N2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 72) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are stored.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command is set by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is performed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), whether the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it is (S214). The variation time of the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuating time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is set (S215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Will be More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be a big hit A, a small hit, or a miss.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, if it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result). Is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of jackpot A is set (for example, 16 rounds). A jackpot setting is executed (S218).

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is off (S216: No),
It is determined whether the value of the counter 203t during time saving is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221).

  Next, the special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 64) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63). Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is performed (whether the ball is hit or not), and the first is determined. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are obtained (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302).

  If the probability change flag 203g is ON (S302: Yes), the special symbol jackpot based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. The result of the lottery is obtained from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 53B) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random numbers set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 53B). As described above, as the random number value of the special symbol which is a big hit, ten “0 to 9” are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for determining a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random numbers may be used. With such a configuration, the random number value determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the big hit can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be a large jackpot. May be set differently. With this configuration, the probability of the jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have the expectation of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the counter 203g during the time reduction is 0 (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low-probability game state), and thus the first pachinko machine acquired in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the first random number table for low probability 202a (see FIG. 53 (b)), a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value of the special symbol jackpot, one of "9" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of the special symbol, the special symbol jackpot is set. Is determined. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is (S305: Yes), The display mode at the time of the big hit indicating the big hit A is set (S306).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A). The big hit type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 55A) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol is out of the way (S305: No), a display mode when the special symbol is out of place is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined departure. Next, the variation pattern at the time of departure is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). After that, this processing ends.

  Although not shown, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined fluctuation pattern is generated. When this process ends, the process returns to the special symbol changing process.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the start winning is determined. If there is, a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process of the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 66, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning port 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than four. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 72) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing of S407 to S412, the same processing as that of the processing of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same, so that the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the processing of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), the pre-read processing is executed after the processing of S412 (S413). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 67, the prefetching process (S413), which is one of the start winning processes (see S105 in FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413).

  In this pre-reading process (FIG. 67, S413), it is first determined whether there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). If the result of the determination is that there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501; No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is a certain change (S502). Is positive (S502: Yes), a lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S502, if the gaming state is not certain (S502: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table 202a for the low probability case (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. In the processing of S505, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processing of S503 and S504 is set (S505), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). The normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the second symbol change display performed on the second symbol display device and the electric winning combination attached to the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 68, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), during the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the first winning opening 64 is performed. In the middle. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602). If the display mode is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of suspended display of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S608).

  If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game is included. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, and thus is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the second random number per symbol table 202c for a high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second symbol random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  In the processing of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S608: No), the processing shifts to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is set to the low value. Based on the second random number table 202c for probabilities, a lottery result is obtained as to whether or not a normal symbol has been won (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and when it is determined that the lottery result is the hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “○” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S614). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S614: Yes), the special symbol is now being hit. It is determined whether or not it is (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even if it hits the normal symbol, similarly to the case where the normal symbol comes off. , The number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not during the special symbol jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the processing of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time reduction state (S614: No), the processing shifts to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S618). In the processing of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the processing of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S619). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is performed. Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602). S622). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or S621 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 72) is next executed, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variation display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 68, S106) is changed to the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 72) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the processing of S625 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 63), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, this is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending it.

  In the through gate passage processing (FIG. 69, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol start-up port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is retained) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the number of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not changed. If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), the processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the ordinary symbol is used. The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not, the RAM 203 is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also shifts to S912 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S912 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 72), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to the sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 64) and the start winning process (see FIG. 66) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 73) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). 1) A jackpot control process for opening or closing a specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 72), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

  Next, an electric auditors product opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric auditors product 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 68). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the ordinary symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display updating process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. It starts in the devices 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the LED of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is a red LED until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started. Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The variable display executed in 37B is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65). , 37B (stop display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 68), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. I do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 68), the variation executed in the second symbol display device is performed. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 68). ).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1008, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 70 has been executed, the processing at S1012 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to game state changes performed in S1001 to S1007 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). The jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 72). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or specific prize winning is performed. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 73, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 64) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when a special symbol big hit is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1103). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot is displayed. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the process of S1103, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1103: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1103 that the special symbol is a big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). In the process of S1104, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the big hit operation setting process is executed (S1105).

  Here, the jackpot operation setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (S1105). FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 74, S1105), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set based on the data read in the process of S1201. After that, this processing ends. In the process of S1202, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the operation of the open / close door 65f1 are set for each round.

  As described above, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power-off occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such defects can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the process of S1104, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (positive change solenoid) 65k (S1106). If it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1106: Yes), the opening solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1107). Thereafter, the flow path solenoid (probable change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1108). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1106 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1109). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when 15 rounds have been completed, the opening / closing door 65f1 has been closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed. Is determined. If it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing (S1109: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1110). After that, this processing ends.

  Here, the ending process (S1110) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1110 in FIG. 75). In the ending process (FIG. 75, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the sound lamp control device 113 (S1211). It is determined whether the probable change setting flag 203h is on (S1212). The probable change flag 203g is set to ON (S1213). Although not shown, the probable variable setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probable variable flag 203g being set to on. After that, this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit game, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probable change flag 203g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has passed the certainty change switch 65e3 and set the certainty change. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable change game state until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed to the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game. Play games with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification processing (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification processing (S1111).

  In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is a value greater than 0 (S1221). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1221: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the twelfth round (S1222). The determination of the end timing of the twelfth round is made based on the detection of winning of 10 balls or the determination that 30 seconds have elapsed in the twelfth round. If it is determined that the end timing of the twelfth round has been reached (S1222: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1222 that the timing is not the end timing of the twelfth round (S1222: No), the process ends. Here, the counter of 2 seconds is set in S1223, so that the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball elapse time after 12 rounds, and the sound of looking at the liquid crystal is heard. Is output. Accordingly, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the thirteenth round, but since the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of the twelfth round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is identified. Thus, it is possible to prevent the jackpot type from being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game until the end of the big hit game, expecting the certain change game state to be given.

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal over the thirteenth round from one second before the end of the interval time is performed. It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1221, if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1221: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by subtracting -1 (S1224). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m after the update is 0 (S1225). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1225: Yes), a notification command is set (S1226). After that, this processing ends. In response to this notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the output of the sound “look at the liquid crystal”.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 76, S1111) is executed, a winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process (S1112).

  In the winning process (S1112 in FIG. 77), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1231). The round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round validity period (S1231: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S1231: Yes), it is determined whether the vehicle has passed the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has passed (S1232: Yes), the winning counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1233). After that, the process of S1234 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the signal does not pass through the detection switch 65c1 (S1232: No), the process of S1234 is executed.

  In the process of S1234, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1236). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1237). After that, the process of S1238 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown since the door 203n is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1234 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1235). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1235: Yes), the process of S1236 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1235: No), the process of S1238 is executed.

  In the process of S1238, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S1238). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1238: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is updated by subtracting -1 (S1239). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the certainty change switch 65e3 (S1240). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the certain-variable passing switch 65e3 (S1240: Yes), the value of the certain-variable passing counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1241). The probable change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1242). After that, the process of S1243 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1240 that the game ball has not passed through the probable change switch 65e3 (S1240: No), the processing of S1243 is executed. In the process of S1243, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1243). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S1244). The probable change valid flag 203p is set to ON (S1245). After that, this processing ends. Here, by setting the probable change valid flag 203p to be on, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes through the probable change switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probable change game is performed. Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1238, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1238: No), it is determined whether or not the probable change valid flag 203p is on (S1246). If the probability change valid flag 203p is off (S1246: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change validity flag 203p is ON (S1246: Yes), 1 is added to the probability change validity timer 203r and updated (S1247). It is determined whether the value of the probable change valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S1248). If it is determined that the probable change valid timer 203r is at the upper limit (S1248: Yes), the probable change valid flag 203p is set to off (S1249). The probable change valid timer 203r is reset to 0 which is an initial value. After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1248 that the probability change valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1248: No), the processing of S1240 is executed.

  Thus, if the probability change valid timer 203r is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change game state can be set in consideration of the ball elapse time. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability that the game ball is passed through the probability change switch 65e3 from being improperly assigned to the probability change game state.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1112 in FIG. 77) is performed, an abnormal process is performed (S1113). After that, this processing ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormal processing (S1113). In the abnormal process (S1113), a process is performed to monitor whether the probable change switch 65e3 has been illegally passed.

  In the abnormality process (FIG. 78, S1113), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is the round valid period (S1261). If it is out of the round validity period (S1261: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current time is within the round valid period (S1261: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is added and updated (S1263). After that, the process of S1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1262: No), the process of S1264 is executed.

  In the process of S1264, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1264: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1264: Yes), the ball is being thrown, and the remaining ball timer 203o is updated by adding 1 (S1265). The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1266). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (S1266: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1266: Yes), the number of discharged pieces (the total value of the positive variable passage counter 203i and the number of discharged pieces counter 203s) matches the number of winning pieces (the value of the winning number counter 203j). It is determined whether it is (S1267).

  If it is determined that they match (S1267: Yes), the process of S1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1267: No), an error command is set (S1268). After that, the process of S1269 is executed. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game balls in the first variable prize device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the game balls to the probability change switch 65e3 even in the case of the big hit B.

  In the process of S1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1269), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1270). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the number-of-discharges counter 203s, and the variable probability passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values, respectively (S1271), and thereafter, the process ends.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 79, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1514 (see FIG. 80). ) Is determined (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, upon receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1513 in FIG. 80), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1514. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1514 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1402: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S1514 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process moves to S1408.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1404. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after a momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1516 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the processing is started by the user, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1516, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1404 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1406). By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1516 (see S1515 in FIG. 80). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1516 is executed, the process starting at S1408 with the power-off flag turned on is the instantaneous start-up process. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1516 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1409), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410). The permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of steps S1404 to S1406 passes through step S1408. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and interruption permission is set. Then (S1411), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1409 is skipped is that when the process from S1404 to the process of S1408 is performed via the process of S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1501 was executed (S1501). If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1512 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processes in S1502 to S1510 are mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , S1512, and the command determination process in S1511 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1508 to be described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1504). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1505, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect, and responds when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. The details of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1509, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1509 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, a variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1513). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1513 (S1513: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1515), and the power-off processing is executed (S1516). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process-in-progress flag is turned off (S1517), and then the process is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Also, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1514), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1514: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1514: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In addition, in this process, when receiving the number-of-retained-balls command from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and analyzed. It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1603). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 82) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 82) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. , The value contained in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of times N1 of the variable display is held in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved-ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1608). In the processing of S1608, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the end of the process in S1608, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, or a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is touched, every time a winning start is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the sound lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1608. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is detected when detecting a start winning or drawing a special symbol. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1608 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. Is set. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1607, if the command of the number of pending balls has not been received (S1607: No), it is then determined whether a notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1609). When it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1609: Yes), the notification voice (“look at the liquid crystal” in this embodiment) corresponding to the received command is selected, and the display command for notification is set. (S1610).

  Next, in the processing of S1609, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1609: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Then (S1619), and returns to the main processing. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223. The command is set so that the command is transmitted.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1512). The variable display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then, in the process of S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 81), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  In the process of S1705, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1705). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1705: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1705: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1706), and then, in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 81), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1707). The stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S1708), and the process proceeds to S1709. In the process of S1709, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1507) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1507). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1507) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is used to enhance the effect in the third symbol display device 81. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to make the player execute an effect according to the operation of the player.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507 in FIG. 83), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the long press effect has been started (S1801). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the long press effect has not been started (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the long press effect has been started (S1801: Yes), an effect counter is acquired (S1802), and the long press effect lottery table 222b (see FIG. 55 (b)) is long pressed. A navigation pattern is selected (S1803). Next, the display command indicating the selected long-press pattern is set (S1804), and the process proceeds to S1805.

  In the processing of S1805, it is determined whether or not the SW effective time of the SW effective time storage area 223i is larger than 0 (S1805). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1805: No), the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 83, S1507) ends, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 80). On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effective time is greater than 0 (S1805: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1806), and it is determined whether or not the frame button is ON (S1807). Here, the subtraction of the SW effective time is for subtracting the elapsed time (in the present embodiment, the counter value is subtracted by 1).

  If it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (the frame button 22 is pressed), 1 is added to the long press counter 223h (S1808), and it is determined whether the long press flag 223g is on (S1808). S1809). If it is determined that the long-press flag 223g is ON (S1809: Yes), the frame button input monitoring / production process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long press flag 223g is off (S1809: No), it is determined whether the long press counter 223h is equal to or longer than 3 seconds (S1810).

  If it is not determined that the value of the long press counter 223h is equal to or longer than 3 seconds (S1810: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1810: Yes), the long press flag 223g is turned on (S1811), and a display command indicating that the long press is being performed is set (S1812). Return to main processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is off (the frame button 22 is not pressed) in the process of S1807 (S1807: No), it is determined whether the long-press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1807: No). S1813). If it is determined that the value of the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1813: Yes), a display command indicating long press off is set (S1814), and the process proceeds to S1815. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the long press counter 223h is equal to or longer than 3 seconds (S1813: No), the process of S1814 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1815. In the process of S1815, the long press counter 223h is reset (the counter value is set to 0 in the present embodiment) (S1815), then the long press flag 223g is set to off (S1816), and the process returns to the main process.

<Control processing executed by display control device in first control processing example>
Next, each control performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 of the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2302, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data of the remaining control programs which have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2303). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  After executing other processes required for the boot process (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 84) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S2002 in FIG. 84) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S2001) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. The remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 85, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2102. May be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the leading part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2102, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, upon starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed by detecting the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 94A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 94A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 86 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown) which are the power-on images are drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 86B) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 86B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first winning port 64, and the main control device 110 issues an instruction to start a variable effect to the sound lamp control device. If it is through 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period to perform a simple variation effect. Can be. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S2005, interruption permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S2006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86A is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and a processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 (b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 86 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the type of the fluctuation effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interruption process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the sound lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2506). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2305) are determined from the task processing (S2304). The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As the counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, reach, complete out, chance The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to the eye are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display a power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then a simple display setting process (S2309) is executed. Move on to processing.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 87, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), and returns to the process of S2401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 88A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is used. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in fact, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process of S2501 is turned on, and other variation table data The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2506), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2505, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S2502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S2504, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 88B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, complete out, and chance) indicated by the stop type command for display Is determined (S2601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 86 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S2603), terminates the stop type command processing, and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602. In the above-described task processing (S2304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, but before the drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal ROM is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of step S2601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely off and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S2602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set, and in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete disconnection is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). If there is an image change command (S2408: Yes), a rear image change command process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear image change command process, first, a rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2701). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2702), the back image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S2701 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S2702. . When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back surfaces A to C according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image determination flag set in S2702 is used. The type of the back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2408, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2410). If it is (S2410: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2802). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S2801, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S2802 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2802, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2410, when it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2410: No), it is determined whether there is a command indicating a long press among unprocessed commands (S2412). If there is a command indicating pressing (S2412: Yes), a long press effect process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to S2401. Here, the command indicating a long press is a display command indicating a long press navigation pattern set in the processing of S1804, a display command indicating a long press is set in the processing of S1812, and a processing command of S1814. And a display command indicating a long-press-off set in.

  Here, the details of the long press effect process (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the long press effect process. This long press effect process executes a process corresponding to a command indicating a long press received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the long press effect process (S2413 in FIG. 90), first, it is determined whether the command is a long press navigation effect command (see S1804 in FIG. 83) (S2901). In the process of S2901, when it is determined that the long press navigation effect is provided (S2901: Yes), display data corresponding to the long press navigation is set (S2902), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined to be the long press navigation effect (S2901: No), it is determined whether the command is a long press command (see S1812 in FIG. 83) (S2903). If it is determined in step S2903 that the command is a long press command (S2903: Yes), display data indicating the start of long press is set (S2904), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the command is the long press command (S2903: No), display data corresponding to long press off is set (S2905), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2412, if it is determined that there is no command indicating a long press (S2412: No), then a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S2419), and the process returns to S2401.

  In the processing of S2401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S2402 to S2413 and S2419 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2401 to S2413 and S2419 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this processing is performed. The command determination processing ends.

  The simple command determination processing (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 86 (b)) is similar to the command determination processing. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary to display an image at power-on (not shown), that is, a display variation pattern command and a display variation pattern command, is selected from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the stop type command is extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 88 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 88 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. With respect to this command, the processing corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 88A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 91, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and then S3003 to S3004. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters are determined.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, a pointer update process is performed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In the pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 91, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting processing is ended and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S3009: Yes), the effect of the confirmed display has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3015 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S3009: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, so that the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended. Therefore, the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 86B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation image at power-on ends, the fluctuation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (FIG. (Not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 94A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3402). In the process of S3402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3402 (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3403, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 86 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 86 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 86 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 87 to 89) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) (see S3301: No in FIG. 94A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update processing (S3005) of the previously executed display setting processing (S2303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

  Also, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3505). If the transfer has been completed (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in step S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the processing of S3505, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S3505: No), the processing shifts to the processing of S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various kinds of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S3516), and the flow shifts to the process of S3517.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3517 (S3517: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3517, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3518). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S3518, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the rear image is changed. , Image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, details of the above-described drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), to generate a drawing list shown in FIG. 59 (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image rendered on one frame buffer is developed, so that the rendering process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 86B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example, the contents of the SW fluctuation pattern are changed from those in the first control example. In the first control example described above, the effect of long-pressing the frame button 22 has been described to be executed in the SW fluctuation pattern. However, in the second control example, the effect of catching fish at the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is described. Is executed. The other configuration is the same, and the other configuration is omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example>
The second control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are changed. The other points are the same as those in the first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 97 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, the long press effect lottery table 222b is deleted and a capture effect lottery table 222c is added to the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The capture effect lottery table 222c is a data table in which the moving directions of the fish and the net displayed in the SW variation pattern in the second control example are set. Here, with reference to FIG. 98, an example of a display mode displayed in the SW fluctuation pattern displayed in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 98A and 98B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the SW fluctuation pattern in the second control example. In the second control example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), a fish and a net are displayed, respectively, and furthermore, characters "press a button in accordance with the fish !!" are displayed. By pressing the frame button 22 at a position where the fish has entered the net, a display mode is displayed such that the player can obtain the fish. Further, on the right side of the display area, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed, and the color can be changed vertically (for example, from blue to red) at high speed (for example, at a speed of one space every 0.5 seconds). Variable). There are six scales, and "GET" is displayed on the third and sixth scales from the bottom. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed down in a state where the color of the scale is variable, the display timing is set so that the fish is in the net.

  On the other hand, the fish and the net are controlled so as to move in the moving direction set by the SW effect type selected in the capture effect lottery table 222c and to be displayed. The fish and the net move to irregular positions, but at the timing when the position of the indicator scale “GET” is changed, the display is controlled so that the fish is positioned in the net.

  This makes it easier for the player to understand the timing of pressing the frame button 22 more easily, relying not only on the positional relationship between the fish and the net, but also on the timing at which the indicator changes, and participate in the production of the SW fluctuation pattern. And make it easier to play. Therefore, the player can play the game while predicting the timing at which the fish is displayed at the position of the net by the indicator. In this embodiment, the indicator is always displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The indicator may be displayed when the jackpot is highly expected, and may not be displayed when the expected jackpot is low. With such a configuration, the indicator is displayed, thereby increasing the expectation of the jackpot, and the jackpot can be performed in a state where the fish can be captured by the player.

  FIG. 97 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the capture effect lottery table 222c. In the capture effect lottery table 222c, the value of the effect counter 223f is assigned and set to each of the capture effects A to C when the result of determination is a hit, and to the capture effects D to F when the result is off. Have been. The capture effects A to C are configured so that the frame button 22 can be pressed at a timing when the fish is in the net, and are set as effects that can capture the fish. On the other hand, in the capture effects DF, the timing (period) when the fish enters the net is shorter than the period required for detecting that the frame button 22 is pressed and the frame button 22 is pressed. Because it is set, it is set to be impossible to capture.

  Although not shown in the present embodiment, if the result of the determination is incorrect, even if the frame button 22 is accidentally pressed at the timing when the net matches the fish, the display is shifted. That is, the effect that the fish could be captured was not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At the timing when the fish and the net match, control is performed by excluding from the effective period of the frame button 22 instantaneously (for example, a display period of 0.2 s matching). It is possible to reduce the load of performing the control of shifting the display.

  In the capture effect A and the capture effect D, a display mode is set in which the fish and the net move at a high speed to random positions in the horizontal direction and are displayed. The capture effect B and the capture effect E are display modes in which the fish and the net move to random positions and are displayed. The capture effects C and F are display modes in which the fish and the net move to random positions in a diagonal direction and are displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the result of the hit determination is a hit, it is set to be easier to select than when the capture effect A and the capture effect B are out of alignment. Therefore, the player can predict the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the moving direction of the fish and the net (that is, the type of the capture effect). Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the effect of the SW fluctuation pattern will be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the capture effect is determined by lottery based on the selection of the SW fluctuation pattern, but may be set in advance to the selected SW fluctuation pattern. . In the present control example, the moving direction between the fish and the net is configured to be set according to the type of the capture effect. However, the moving direction is not set in advance, and the display position is updated each time the display position between the fish and the net is updated. May be determined by lottery and updated. In this case, when the display is updated from the display position of the currently displayed fish and net, the moving direction and the moving distance may be determined by lottery and displayed. With such a configuration, the positions of the fish and the net can be made more random, and the player can perform an effect with freshness.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example. The second control example is different from the RAM 223 of the first control example (see FIG. 54B) in that the long press flag 223g and the long press counter 223h are deleted. The other configuration is the same, and a detailed description is omitted.

<Regarding control processing in second control example>
In the control processing in the second control example, the contents of the control processing in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are changed from those in the first control example. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. The second control example is different from the first control example in that the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1507 in FIG. 83) is changed to the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1520 in FIG. 99). I do. The other configurations are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1520) in the second control example.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 99, S1520), first, it is determined whether or not the capture effect variation pattern, which is the SW variation pattern, is selected (S1821). Here, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern selected based on the variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is a SW variation pattern (capture effect variation pattern). When it is determined that the pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the capture effect (S1821: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1822). The type of the capture effect is selected based on the effect counter 223f that has acquired the content of the capture effect from the capture effect lottery table 222c (see FIG. 97 (c)) and the result of the determination as to whether or not the selected SW variation pattern is selected ( S1823). A display command indicating the selected capture effect is set (S1824). When the display command is output to the display control device 113, the display mode corresponding to the selected capture effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. The SW effective time set in the SW variation pattern is set in the SW effective time storage area 223i (S1825). After that, the process of S1826 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1821 that the fluctuation pattern of the capture effect has not been selected (S1821: No), the processing of S1826 is executed. In the process of S1826, it is determined whether the counter value stored in the SW valid time storage area 223i is greater than 0, that is, whether the SW valid time is set (S1826). If it is determined that the SW valid time has been set (S1826: Yes), the SW valid time is subtracted (S1827), and it is determined whether the frame button 22 is on (pressed) (S1828). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1828: Yes), a display command indicating that the SW has been pressed is set (S1829). The SW valid time is reset to 0 which is an initial value. As a result, the SW effective time is reset together with the operation of the frame button 22, so that it is possible to suppress the player from being confused due to the variable effects. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1826 that the SW effective time is 0 (S1826: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S1828 that the frame button 22 is off (S1828: No), this processing is performed. To end.

  In the present control example, in the capture effect, the frame button 22 is set to be pressed once, but is not limited thereto, and may be set a plurality of times.

<Control Process Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Second Control Example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example, the command determination process (FIG. 87, S2302) is different from the first control example in the command determination process 2 (S2320 in FIG. 100), and the display setting process (S2303) in FIG. 2 (FIG. 102, S2330). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 100, the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320). The command determination process 2 (S2320 in FIG. 100) in the second control example is different from the command determination process (S2302 in FIG. 87) in the first control example in that the processes in S2412 to S2413 are deleted, and the processes in S2414 to S2415 are performed. Are added to each other. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S2410, when it is determined that the error command has not been received (S2410: No), it is determined whether a command indicating that it is related to the SW effect has been received (S2414). The command related to the SW effect corresponds to a display command indicating the selected capture effect (see S1824 in FIG. 99), a display command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed, and the like.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2414 that a command related to the SW effect has been received (S2414: Yes), the SW effect processing is executed (S2415). This SW effect processing (S2415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect processing (S2415). In the SW effect processing, based on a command of the SW effect (capture effect) received from the audio lamp control device 113 or a command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed, a process of setting corresponding display data and the like is performed. .

  In the SW effect processing (FIG. 101, S2415), first, it is determined whether the command is any one of the capture effects A to F, which are the SW effects (S2911). If the command indicates any of the capture effects A to F (S2911: Yes), display data corresponding to the capture effect is set in the display data table. After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2911, if it is determined that the command is not a command indicating any of the capture effects A to F (S2911: No), it is determined whether the command is a command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2913). When it is determined that the command indicates that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2913: Yes), the stop of the displayed content of the capture effect is set (S2914). After that, this processing ends.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed, the positions of the capture effect net and the fish are fixed at the displayed positions and fixed for a certain period (in this control example, the initially set SW effective time elapses). Until the end of the period). Thereafter, when the fish has been stopped at a position where the fish is in the net, a display mode (for example, the character “Get !!”) indicating that the fish has been captured is displayed. On the other hand, when the fish stops at a position other than the position where the fish is in the net, a display mode indicating that the fish could not be caught (for example, the character “capture failed!”) Is displayed.

  Next, a display setting process 2 (S2330) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display setting process 2 (S2330). In the display setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S2330) in the second control example, the SW effect display setting process (FIG. 103, S3030) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. Is different. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. After the processing of S3005 is executed, a SW effect display setting processing is executed (S3030). This SW effect display setting process (S3030) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect display setting process (S3030). In the SW effect display setting process (S3030), first, it is determined whether the SW effect (capture effect) is being displayed (S3031). Here, whether or not the capture effect is being displayed is a period during which the indicator is variably displayed, that is, during the SW valid time, and the indicator before the frame button 22 is pressed is variably displayed at high speed. Indicates whether it is a period.

  If it is determined that the capture effect is not being displayed (S3031: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the capture effect is being displayed (S3031: Yes), it is determined whether the indicator is variably displayed in the scale color corresponding to “Get” (S3032). If the indicator is displayed with the Get scale variably (S3032: Yes), display data in which the display positions of the fish data and the net data are matched is set (S3033). After that, this processing ends. Here, the display coordinates of the net data are set in accordance with the display coordinates at which the fish data is displayed. With this configuration, the display positions of the fish and the net can be matched with each other in accordance with the timing at which the scale of the indicator is changed. In the present control example, in the capture effects A to C, the period in which the indicator is displayed on the Get is set to a period longer than the period required to press the frame button 22, and the frame button is displayed with good timing. It is set so that a fish can be caught when 22 is pressed. On the other hand, in the capture effects D to F, the period in which the indicator is displayed on the Get is set shorter than the period required to press the frame button 22, so that the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed at any timing is set. It is configured so that it cannot be captured.

  In the present embodiment, the capture enabled state and the non-capable state are set by changing the time at which the indicator is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When is pressed, the positions of the fish and the net may be forcibly shifted and displayed so as not to be captured.

  Further, in the present control example, the success of the capture is configured to be notified of the jackpot of the determination result. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By the successful capture, a point to be used in the game is given to the player as a game privilege. Alternatively, a URL from which a standby image used by a mobile phone can be downloaded, a three-dimensional code may be displayed, or a special background image may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect of successfully capturing even if the result of the determination is incorrect. Therefore, the player can be more entertained with the SW effect.

  In the process of S3032, when the scale other than the position corresponding to the Get of the indicator is variably displayed (S3032: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the next scale of the indicator is variably displayed. (S3034). When it is determined that the indicator is the timing at which the next scale is variably displayed (S3034: Yes), the coordinate data at which the fish is displayed and the coordinate data at which the net is displayed are selected. It is set by moving in the moving direction set in the capture effect (S3035). Here, a predetermined counter (not shown) is obtained and the number of moving coordinates is determined and set by lottery. It is determined whether or not the updated display coordinates of the fish and the net match (S3036). If it is determined that they match (S3036: Yes), the same processing as S3035 is executed again (S3037). Thereby, when the indicator is not at the scale of Get, the display position of the fish and the net coincide with each other, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the fish is displayed in the net. On the other hand, if it is not the timing at which the scale of the indicator changes in the processing of S3034 (S3034: No), or if it is determined that the position data does not match in the processing of S3036 (S3036: No), this processing ends. .

  As described above, although the moving direction set in the capture effect is determined, the display positions of the fish and the net are randomly set by lottery, so that the display of the fish and the net can be made irregular. . On the other hand, the variable of the indicator is set in advance in the display data table corresponding to the SW variation pattern. Therefore, the display of the indicator can be configured to be regularly changed and displayed.

  In this control example, the display position of the fish and the net is configured to be determined by lottery every time the display position is updated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position may be set in advance in the display data table similarly to the indicator. May be.

  Further, in the present control example, the configuration is such that the moving direction of the fish is defined by the type of the selected capture effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the position of the fish and the net may be randomly set by lottery. Good.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, the timing at which the special symbol starts to change when the reserved ball is not stored is configured to be constant regardless of the game state (probable change game state, time saving game state, and the like). However, the second control example is different in that the process is executed such that the timing of the start of the change differs depending on the game state. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
The electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. The third control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 113 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example. In the third control example, a weight counter 203u is added to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 53C) in the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The weight counter 203u counts a delay time for delaying the change start timing of the second special symbol when the number of reserved balls is 0 when the time is being reduced (when the game is in the probable change game state or the time reduction game state). It is a counter.

  When it is determined that the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 when the working hours are reduced, a counter value corresponding to one second is set to the weight counter 203u (S314 in FIG. 106). reference). When the counter value is set in the weight counter 203u, the value is decremented and updated by one each time the during-time-hour fluctuation process (FIG. 106, S231) is executed.

  As described above, when it is determined that the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 during the time reduction, and the change of the special symbol is not executed, the game ball is thereafter entered into the second winning opening 640. If so, the start of the fluctuation is delayed by one second. Here, the second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a, and when the electric accessory 640a is opened, a game ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. In this case, two or more game balls can be easily won in one open state. However, even if a plurality of game balls enter by opening once with no reserved balls, the change start of the second special symbol is set immediately at the timing when the first game ball enters. However, the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is determined to be 0, and a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is easily selected. As a result, the efficiency of the game is reduced in spite of the reduced working hours, which makes the player uncomfortable.

  However, in the characteristic configuration of the present control example, the timing of the start of the fluctuation is delayed by one second by the weight counter 203u. Therefore, when the electric accessory 640a is opened during that time, a plurality of game balls are continuously played. In the case where the ball is thrown in after that, it is possible to suppress a problem that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is determined to be zero and the first variation is started.

  In the present control example, in a state where the ball is stopped during fluctuations during the working hours, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, a delay time of 1 second is set. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. You may be comprised so that the delay time (for example, 4 seconds) longer than 3 seconds which is the fluctuation | variation time of the normal symbol during the time saving may be set. With this configuration, the start of the change of the second special symbol can be delayed until the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened, and the timing when the gaming ball wins the second winning opening 640 can be delayed. . Further, the delay time may be set in accordance with the timing when the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set. In this case, even if the delay time is short, it is possible to suppress the selection of a relatively long variation pattern from being effectively determined as having no reserved balls. Further, the present invention is not limited to working hours, and is not limited to the second winning opening 640.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the variation pattern selection table 202b, when the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, a relatively long variation pattern is set to be easily selected. I have. Therefore, it is preferable to set a delay time for delaying until a period in which three or more balls are retained.

  Further, in the present control example, in the time-saving game state, the variation start of the second special symbol is configured to be delayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the delay may be configured to be delayed when the number of reserved balls is equal to or less than a certain value (for example, one). Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to the second special symbol, but may be configured to delay the first special symbol. In addition, by delaying the change start timing of the second special symbol at the end timing of the big hit game, it is configured to suppress a problem that it is determined that there is no reserved ball number of the second special symbol and the change is started. Is also good.

  In the present control example, the timing of the start of the fluctuation is configured to be delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination time of the special symbol during the fluctuation (the period from the elapse of the fluctuation time until the fluctuation is determined to be stopped, That is, when the symbol is fixed and stopped, the period from when the symbol is determined to be stopped in the process of S202 in FIG. 64) is set to be variable, and when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not stored, , The period may be set longer.

  In the present control example, the delay is set when the working hours are reduced. However, at the start of the change of the second special symbol, a period until the start of the change is set every time (the setting of the start of the change is performed by discriminating the reserved ball). May be set to be longer. Further, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state regardless of the gaming state, the timing for setting the start of the change of the second special symbol may be delayed.

<Control Process in Third Control Example>
Next, a control process in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The third control example is different from the first control example in that the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 105, S111). Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the content of the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example. In the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 105, S111) in the third control example, processes from S231 to S233 are added to the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) in the first control example. As for the other processes, the same processes as those in the first control example are executed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S202, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not fluctuating (S202: No), it is determined whether the time is reduced (S231). It is determined whether it is in the time-saving game state or the time-saving game state when it is during working hours. If it is determined that the working hours are reduced (S231: Yes), the processing for changing the working hours is performed (S232).

  Here, the details of the time-shorting fluctuation process (S232) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time-shortage variation process (S232). In the time reduction process (S232 in FIG. 106), first, it is determined whether the value of the weight counter 203u is greater than 0 (S311). If the value of the weight counter 203u is larger than 0, it means that the delay time has already been set to start the change of the second special symbol. If it is determined that the value of the weight counter 203u is larger than 0 (S311: Yes), the value of the weight counter 203u is subtracted by -1 and set (S312). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S311 that the weight counter 203u is 0 (S311: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e that is the reserved ball number of the second special symbol is 0. It is determined whether it is (S313). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 (S313: Yes), a counter value corresponding to one second is set to the weight counter 203u (S314). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S313 that the number of retained balls of the second special symbol is not 0 (S313: No), this processing is ended.

  Here, returning to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. After executing the processing of the fluctuation processing during time reduction (FIG. 106, S232), the processing of S233 is executed. In the process of S233, it is determined whether the value of the weight counter 203u is greater than 0 (S233). If the counter value has been set in the weight counter 203u, this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the weight counter 203u is 0 (S233: No), the processing of S203 is executed.

  As described above, since the start of the change of the special symbol is not set until the weight counter 203u is executed, it is suppressed that the change of the second special symbol is determined to be from 0 to 2 on hold during the time saving and executed. it can. In this control example, the value set in the weight counter 203u is set to 1 second. However, the value is not limited to 1 second, and is a time longer than the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol during the time reduction (3 seconds in this control example). You may be comprised so that a second may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to control so that the start of change of the second special symbol is set after the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is more reliably set to three or more. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a disadvantage that the game efficiency is deteriorated during the time reduction due to being determined as a state in which the number of reserved balls is small (0 to 2) and a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth control example, as compared with the first control example, the third symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped by swinging and varying) a plurality of times during the fluctuation period of one special symbol, and the special symbol is varied a plurality of times. The difference is that the effect to show a pseudo appearance is set. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 107, an example of a display mode in the pseudo continuous effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth control example will be described. Pseudo continuous production is to temporarily stop the third symbol at least once in one special symbol variation and display it again to display the variation, so that one variation is a multiple variation. This is a production to show to the player.

  FIG. 107 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed in the pseudo continuous effect. When the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous production is started, the fluctuation is a low-speed fluctuation that is a speed fluctuation (dynamic display) capable of identifying a symbol from the start of the fluctuation, and thereafter, a fluctuation in which the type of the symbol is difficult to identify. High-speed fluctuation, which is fluctuation of the speed (dynamic display), is suddenly displayed as a temporary stop as shown in FIG. 107 (b). FIG. 107 (b) is an example of a display mode when a temporary stop is displayed in the pseudo continuous production. The third symbol fluctuates slightly up and down, and a character is displayed on the front side thereof. A stationary symbol is displayed overlapping each third symbol. This stationary symbol is set smaller than the size of each third symbol, and a part of the third symbol on the back side is configured to be visible. In addition, the stationary symbol is attached and displayed at the timing of the fluctuation display immediately before the third symbol is temporarily stopped from the state in which the third symbol is rapidly changing before the third symbol is temporarily stopped. Specifically, when the image is displayed at high speed, the third symbol is displayed translucently, and the background image can be seen through. Immediately before the temporary stop display, specifically, 0.5 seconds before, the translucent display is released and the image is displayed in an opaque state. At that display timing, a static symbol is attached and displayed. In addition, since the stationary symbol is not displayed while swinging and fluctuating as in the third symbol, the stationary symbol is displayed in a stationary manner. Therefore, the player does not stop temporarily but determines whether or not the third symbol is definitely stopped. You can feel like that.

  Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the temporary stop in the pseudo continuous effect is a fixed stop, and it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display is performed a plurality of times.

  In the present control example, the static symbol is the same symbol for each third symbol, but may be a different symbol or shape. Further, the luminance of the third symbol displayed on the back may be displayed lower than the luminance of the stationary symbol. By displaying in this manner, the stationary symbol can be made more conspicuous, and the player can be made to feel as if it has definitely stopped.

  In the present control example, only characters are displayed as stationary symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an identification number of a third symbol displayed on the back side (for example, 7 for 7 symbols) is added. May be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make an illusion that the stationary symbol is the third symbol, and to make it appear as if the player has definitely stopped.

<Regarding Control Processing in Fourth Control Example>
Next, a control process in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth control example, the display setting processing (FIG. 91, S2303) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed to the display setting processing 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) in the first control example. Differs in that Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating the content of the display setting process 3 (S2340) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fourth control example. In the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) in the fourth control example, a symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. Is different. For other configurations, the same processes as those in the first control example are performed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 109, the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040), which is one of the display setting processes 3 (FIG. 108, S2340), will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040). In the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040), a process of temporarily stopping and displaying symbols is executed when the pseudo continuous effect is set. In the pseudo continuous effect, the timing for temporarily stopping the symbols is set in advance in a variation pattern, and is automatically set by defining a display data table.

  In the symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect fluctuation pattern is being displayed. If it is determined that the variation pattern is a pseudo continuous effect variation pattern (S3041: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the temporary stop of the third symbol (S3042). If it is determined that the timing is not the temporary stop timing of the third symbol (S3042: No), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing of the symbol temporary stop (S3043: Yes), the still image data is set at the symbol position where the symbol is temporarily stopped (S3043). After that, this processing ends.

  Here, the still image data is set so as to overlap the symbol information in the display data table. As described above, by executing the still image data to be superimposed and displayed at the temporary stop display timing of the third symbol, the type of the still image data and the like can be changed by the operation of the frame button 22 of the player, and other lottery, It can be set to be variable in accordance with a notice display or the like, and various still images can be obtained.

  In the present control example, in the pseudo continuous production, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed for the number of times set in advance in the variation pattern, and thereafter, the third symbol is always in the reach display mode, and the super reach display mode is displayed. Is done. A still symbol is temporarily displayed on the third symbol to be temporarily stopped, and the color of the still image is green, 2 in the first temporary stop so that the player can identify the number of temporary stops. At the third time, the color is set to yellow, at the third time, to red, and at the fourth time, to gold. Actually, if the still image is displayed without fluctuation, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the number as the number of times of actual fluctuation display instead of temporary stop. Therefore, the player expects that when a static symbol indicating a continuous number of times is displayed in a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, a fluctuation display of a super reach is displayed in the subsequent special symbol fluctuation display. Can be. In the present control example, the larger the number of temporary stops, the higher the expectation of the jackpot (they are more likely to be selected when the result of the hit determination is a jackpot), and four temporary stops are executed. This is composed only of a pseudo continuous production in which the result of the hit determination is a big hit. Therefore, when the red stationary symbol indicating the third time is displayed, the player can expect the still image to be displayed even in the next fluctuation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this control example, the still image is set to non-display at the timing when the third symbol is dynamically displayed again after the temporary stop. This makes it possible for the player to easily see the change in the third symbol.

  The still image is not limited to the character of the present control example, but may be a character, or may be displayed in a size that hides the fluctuation of the third symbol on the back. Actually, since it is a temporary stop, the third symbol on the rear surface may be visible through the still image so that the third symbol on the rear surface is slightly fluctuated. .

<Fifth control example>
The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 151. In each control example described above, it is determined whether or not the probable variable game state is given by the operation of the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 65k in the first variable winning device 65 in which the game ball can enter during the jackpot game. Was configured to be. On the other hand, in the fifth control example, it is determined whether or not the big hit game state is given by the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k in the V prize device 900 in which the game ball can enter during the small hit game. It is different in that it is configured as follows. Other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, and the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, a first variable prize device 65 is provided at the lower center in place of the second prize port 640, and a V prize device 900 is provided instead of the first variable prize device 65 for each of the above control examples. The difference is that the second winning opening 640 is provided at the lower portion and is provided at the upper portion of the V winning device 900, and an electric accessory 640 a is provided on the right side of the second winning opening 640. Other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, and thus the same portions are denoted by the same reference characters and description thereof will be omitted.

  As will be described in detail later, the first variable winning device 65 has the same structure as the second winning opening in each control example described above. Further, the V winning device 900 is different in that a staying member 900n is provided in the first variable winning device 65 in each control example described above, and the other points have the same structure.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, differences between the game board 13 and the present control example will be described. FIG. 112 is a partially enlarged view of the lower right part of the game board 13.

  In the lower right part of the game board 13 in the present control example, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is provided, and a game ball passing through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 enters by natural fall. A second winning opening 640 is provided at a position where the player does not play (lower left position). Also, nails are provided from the left part to the upper right part of the second winning opening 640, and the nails are provided at a predetermined interval (interval at which game balls cannot pass) to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67. It is provided in. Further, an electric accessory 640a is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (or a right side thereof) can be guided to enter the second winning port 640.

  Here, the electric accessory 640a operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (one of the other solenoids 209z) not shown. The electric accessory 640a performs a forward operation (opening operation) to guide a game ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, by performing the evacuation operation (closing operation) backward, the game ball functions to not guide (do not enter the ball) the second winning opening 640.

  That is, the second winning opening 640 is configured such that the game ball does not enter unless the electric accessory 640a performs an opening operation. Further, even if the electric accessory 640a performs the opening operation, if the opening operation time (opening time) is short, the opening operation ends while the gaming ball is being guided, so that the game ball is placed in the third position. No ball will be entered into the second winning opening 640.

  In the present embodiment, by providing a nail from the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 to the second winning port 640, a game ball flowing down the left side of the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 can be a second winning port. Although the configuration is made such that the ball does not enter the 640, the configuration is not limited to this, and a similar configuration may be adopted by covering with a case body. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an improper act of changing the interval between the nails so that the game balls can pass. Further, the case body, the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 and the second winning port 640 may be integrated into a case body, or a part thereof may be integrated.

  Further, a shielding member interlocking with the electric accessory 640a is provided, and the second winning opening 640 is closed when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (retreat state), and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (advance state). The second winning opening may be opened. Thereby, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 640 even though the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state.

  Furthermore, although the game ball which passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is configured to change whether or not to enter the second winning port 640 based on the operation of the electric accessory 640a, The present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area (for example, a game ball that has passed through a passage, a game ball that has just been fired, etc.) is sent to the second winning port 640 based on the operation of the motorized accessory 640a. You may comprise so that it may change whether it enters a ball.

  The V winning device 900 is provided below the above-described second winning opening 640, the electric accessory 640a, and the like. The V winning device 900 is provided with a V winning hole 900a, and when a game ball enters the V winning hole 900a, a predetermined game ball (for example, three balls) is paid out to the player. It is. In addition, when a game ball that has entered the V winning opening 900a passes through a V winning switch 900e3 described later, a big hit game is provided.

  In the upper part of the V winning opening 900a, there is provided an opening / closing door 900f1, which is constituted by a shutter mechanism which can come and go from the game board 13 side, similarly to the above-described first control example, and the opening / closing door 900f1 is opened. As a result, the game ball can enter the V winning opening 900a, and the opening / closing door 900f1 is closed so that the game ball cannot enter the V winning opening 900a. Details of the V winning device 900 will be described later with reference to FIG. The opening / closing door 900f1 is opened / closed by a V inlet solenoid (not shown) (one of other solenoids 209z).

  In addition, the structure which suppresses the momentum of the game ball which rolls is provided in the upper surface of the opening / closing door 900f1 and the game ball rolling surface above the V winning device 900 (not shown). Specifically, the rolling speed is reduced by using a material having a high coefficient of friction (eg, rubber, a material having unevenness), the rolling speed is reduced by using a structure in which rolling game balls collide, There is a structure in which balls are guided in the depth direction of the board to increase the rolling distance. This is a configuration for allowing a large number of game balls to collectively enter the V prize device when the opening / closing door 900f1 is opened.

  A first winning opening 64 is provided on the left side of the V winning device 900 at the lower center of the gaming board, and a first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first winning opening 64. The first variable prize device 65 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times in a jackpot game (for example, 16 times in the case of the big hit C), and a predetermined ball is entered when a game ball enters the first variable prize device 65a. Game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out. In this control example, since the device having the same structure as the second winning opening 640 described above in the first control example is handled as the first variable winning device 65, the reference numerals of the same portions are changed from 640 to 65. The detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a description will be given of a configuration in which a game ball guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 900e in the V winning device 900 is distributed to a normal discharge channel 900e1 and a special discharge channel 900e2 described later. I do. The V prize device 900 in this control example is different from the first control example in that the stagnation member 900n is provided on the special discharge flow path 65e2 of the first variable prize device 65, and the V switch 900e3 is used instead of the probability change switch 65e3. Are provided, and are the same in other points. In this control example, since the device having the same structure as the first variable winning device 65 described in the first control example is treated as the V winning device 900, the same reference numerals are changed from 65 to 900 for the same portions. The detailed description is omitted.

  FIG. 113 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 900e showing a state in which the switching member 900h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 900e2.

  As described above, when the switching member 900h is operated, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 is distributed to the special discharge channel 900e2. In this control example, a stagnation member 900n is provided in the special discharge channel 900e2. With this staying member 900n, only one game ball can stay in the distribution destination area 900h3, which is the area where the switching member 900h distributes the game ball to the special discharge channel 900e2 side. As a result, when one game ball stays in the distribution destination area 900h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 is not discharged to the special discharge channel 900e2 and is normally discharged. It will flow down to the flow path 900e1.

  The staying member 900n is configured by a shutter mechanism that can come and go from the game board 13 side. The staying member 900n operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a staying solenoid 209a (not shown). The staying member 900n can cause one game ball to stay in the distribution destination area 900h3 by performing an advance operation (closing operation) forward. On the other hand, by performing the evacuation operation (opening operation) backward, the game balls staying in the distribution destination area 900h3 flow down to the special discharge flow path 900e2.

  Here, the V prize device 900 allows the game ball to enter by opening the open / close door 900f1 during the small hit game. In addition, the staying member 900n is closed during a small hit game (when it is possible to enter the V-prize device 900), and after the small-hit game ends (when a new ball is not entered into the V-prize device 900). The opening operation is performed after a lapse of a predetermined period of time (after being enabled) (after three seconds in this control example). That is, in the present control example, even if the switching member 900h is operated, the number of the game balls flowing into the V winning device 900 is limited to one ball flowing down to the special discharge channel 900e2. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an excessive amount of game balls flowing down to the special discharge channel 900e2.

  The game ball that has flowed down to the special discharge channel 900e2 passes through the V switch 900e3. In the first control example, the probable change game is provided based on the passage of the probable switch 65e3, but in the present control example, the jackpot game is provided based on the passage of the V switch 900e3 ( S4603 and S4607 in FIG. 138 to be described later and S4904 in FIG. 142).

  In this control example, the number of game balls flowing down to the special discharge channel 900e2 is limited to one ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Two or more game balls can stay in the distribution destination area 900h3. Alternatively, the number of game balls to be restricted may be appropriately changed by causing the staying member to operate a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small hitting game.

  With reference to FIG. 113 (b), a case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 900e2 will be described. FIG. 113 (b) is a view showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 900k is inactive and the opening of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 900e2 is blocked by the guide piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h.

  In this control example, the stagnation member 900n provided in the special discharge channel 900e2 is configured to operate even when the channel solenoid 900k is inactive. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the processing depending on whether the flow path solenoid 900k is operated or not, so that the design cost and the program capacity can be reduced.

  When the flow path solenoid 900k is inactive, all game balls that have passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 flow down to the normal discharge flow path 900e1. On the other hand, since there is no game ball flowing down to the special discharge channel 900e2, there is no influence of the newly provided stagnation member 900n in this control example, and the operation is the same as that of the first control example described above. Is omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 127. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example is electrically different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 and the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are different from each other. And a part of the ROM 234 (effect) in the display control device 114 are changed (added), and a staying solenoid 209 a is added as a solenoid 209 connected to the main control device 110. And the same in other respects. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example.

  This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a stay solenoid 209a is provided as the solenoid 209. As described above, the staying solenoid 209a is used to operate the staying member 900n in the V winning device 900. In addition, the solenoid (for example, the flow path solenoid 900k) described in each control example described above is handled as a part of the other solenoid 209z.

  As other changes, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the ROM 234 (production) in the display control device 114 are changed (added). This will be described later with reference to FIGS. 115 to 127. Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

  Next, each counter in this control example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This control example is different from the first control example in that a small hit type counter C5 is added in addition to the counters in the first control example.

  The small hit type counter C5 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present control example), and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). The small hit type counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special value of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the small hitting type is selected based on the value of the small hitting type counter C5. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Other counters are the same as those in the first control example described above, and therefore, are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 of this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 116 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110. .

  The ROM 202 in this control example has at least a small hit type selection table 202e in addition to the ROM 202 in the first control example (see FIG. 116A). The small hit type selection table 202e is used for selecting the small hit type when a small hit is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, the RAM 203 in this control example is different from the RAM 203 in the first control example in that the big hit start flag 203v1, the big hit flag 203v2, the small hit start flag 203w1, the small hit flag 203w2, the V-hit big hit type value 203x1, and the V flag 203x2, and at least a normal symbol time reduction first flag 203y. In the present control example, the probability change flag 203e is not shown because it is unnecessary.

  The jackpot start flag 203v1 is a flag used to determine whether or not it is a jackpot start timing. The jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see S241 in FIG. 129), and is referred to in the jackpot control process 2 to determine whether it is the start timing of the jackpot. It is set to OFF (see S4701 in FIG. 140) when it is determined in the big hit control process 2 that it is the timing to start the big hit (see S4701 in FIG. 140). Thereby, it is possible to execute the processing according to the big hit start timing. Although not shown in each of the above control examples, the jackpot start timing is similarly determined.

  The big hit flag 203v2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a big hit is being performed, that is, whether or not a big hit game is being executed. Like the big hit start flag 203h, the big hit flag 203v2 is set to ON when the lottery result is a big hit in the special symbol change process (see S241 in FIG. 129). Then, in the jackpot control process 2, it is referred to determine whether or not a jackpot is in progress (see S4704 in FIG. 140). In the jackpot control process 2, when it is determined that it is the timing of jackpot termination, It is set to off (see S4712 in FIG. 140).

  The small hit start flag 203w1 is a flag used to determine whether it is a small hit start timing. The small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol change process (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process to determine whether or not it is a small hit start timing (see S4801 in FIG. 141), and when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the small hit start timing. Is set to off (see S4802 in FIG. 141).

  The small hit flag 203w2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a small hit is being performed, that is, whether or not a small hit game is being executed. The small hitting flag 203w2 is turned on in the small hitting start setting process, similarly to the small hitting start flag 203w1 described above (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process to determine whether or not a small hit is being made (S4807 in FIG. 141). If the small hit control process determines that it is the small hit end timing, it is turned off. This is set (S4812 in FIG. 141).

  The V-passing jackpot type value 203x1 is used to set a jackpot type to be given when a game ball passes the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900. The V-passing big hit type value 203x1 is set according to the small hit type in the small hit start setting process (S4305 or S4306 in FIG. 133). Then, the set V-passing jackpot type value 203x1 is acquired in the V-pass process (S4601 in FIG. 138), and the V flag 203x2 is set based on the acquired value (S4603, S4607 in FIG. 138). The big hit type value 203x1 at the time of passing V is cleared in the small hit end processing executed at the end of the small hit game (S4908 in FIG. 142).

  The V flag 203x2 is a flag for storing that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900, and determines the big hit type based on the value of the V flag 203x2 at the end of the small hit. is there. The V flag 203x2 is set based on the value of the big hit type value 203x1 at the time of V passing in the V passing process (S4603 and S4607 in FIG. 138), and is referred to in the small hit ending process (S4902 and S4904 in FIG. 142). After being referred to, it is set to off (S4906 in FIG. 142).

  The normal symbol time reduction initial flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the time reduction game is the first time. This normal symbol time reduction first time flag 203y is set to ON when the big hit type is C at the big hit end timing in the big hit control process 2 (see S4715 in FIG. 140), and is referred to in the normal symbol variation process. (See S642 in FIG. 136). Although details will be described later, the electric symbol 640a is referred to in the ordinary symbol variation process, and if it is determined that the ordinary symbol time reduction first flag 203y is ON (S641: Yes in FIG. 136), the electric accessory 640a is held for a long time (5 seconds). It is set so that it can be opened and many game balls can enter the second winning opening 640 (S642 in FIG. 136), and then turned off (S643 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol time-saving first time flag 203y is off (S641: No in FIG. 136), a small game is played to the second winning opening in which the electric auditorium is opened for a short time (0.5 second). It is set so that the ball can enter the ball (S644 in FIG. 136).

  Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 117 (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the first random number table 202a indicates whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained when a game ball enters the first winning port 64 is a big hit. To determine whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 is a big hit, and the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining the Special symbol 2 random number table 202a2.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 stores a random number value determined to be a hit in the first special symbol lottery based on a ball entering the first winning port 64. This is a table in which (determination values) are set. In the first special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0". If the value is "0", it is determined that a large hit has occurred. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained is "1 to 3". If the value is "1 to 3", it is determined that the small hit has occurred. In addition, if it is determined that the value is “4-399”, it is determined that the value is out of range.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 has a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the second special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Is set in the table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0”. If the value is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 398”. If the value is “1 to 398”, it is determined that the small hit has occurred. In addition, when it is determined to be “399”, it is determined to be out of place.

  Thus, the first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, at the time of drawing the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64, the first special symbol has one large random number, and the total number of random numbers is 400 In some cases, the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 1, so the probability of a big hit of the first special symbol is “1/400”. In addition, since the total number of random numbers to be the small hit is 3, the probability of the small hit of the first special symbol is “3/400”.

  On the other hand, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the random number value which is the jackpot of the second special symbol is one. Since the total number of such random numbers is 11, the probability of the jackpot for the second special symbol being “1/400”. In addition, since the total number of random numbers to be the small hit is 398, the probability of the small hit of the second special symbol is “398/400”.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 117 (d)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 117 (d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, if the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 204, the normal symbol hit is determined. It is determined (see S640 in FIG. 136).

  As in the above control examples, when it is determined that a normal symbol has been hit, a symbol "O" is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed. At the same time, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  Here, the electric accessory 640a in the present control example operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of the solenoid (not shown, one of the solenoids 209z) as described above with reference to FIG. 112 and the like. The electric accessory 640a performs a forward operation (opening operation) to guide a game ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, by performing the evacuation operation (closing operation) backward, the game ball functions to not guide (do not enter the ball) the second winning opening 640.

  Although details will be described later, the electric accessory 640a in the present control example is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the working hours are not working, but is opened only for 0.2 seconds when the working hours are not working. In addition, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a of 0.2 seconds is shorter than the time required for the game ball to be guided to the second winning opening 640. Therefore, even if the value of the second random number counter C4 is a hit when the working hours are not shortened, the game ball cannot be made to win the second winning opening. Thus, it is possible to suppress a game in which the player tries to make the ball enter the second winning opening despite the fact that he is not working on a time reduction (the jackpot with the time saving is not shown).

  Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a game ball falling area a (a in FIG. 112) for receiving a game ball naturally dropped on the electric accessory 640a during the opening operation, and a position where the game ball does not fall naturally. And a game ball guiding area b for guiding the game ball rolling from the game ball falling area a to the second winning opening 640.

  That is, the length of the game ball guiding area b (the rolling distance of the game ball) is set to at least the distance that the game ball rolls during the opening time (0.2 seconds) when the electric accessory 640a is not in the working hours. By designing the game ball to be longer and shorter than the rolling distance of the game ball during the opening time (0.5 seconds) during the working hours, the playing ball that has fallen on the electric accessory 640a during the opening operation during the working hours is surely first. It is possible to prevent the game ball that has been guided to the second winning opening 640 and falls on the electric accessory 640a from winning in the second winning opening in the opening operation when the working hours are not reduced.

  Next, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 118A to 118C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b.

  The first hit type selection table 202b selects a special symbol 1 big hit selection table 202b1 for selecting a big hit and a big hit type based on the first winning opening 64, and a big hit type of the big hit based on the second winning opening 640. And a special symbol big hit selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 118 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 118 (b), at the time of the big hit based on the first winning opening 64, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”, the big hit C (16R time-saving big hit) is selected, In the case of "50 to 99", the big hit D (16R short time no big hit) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), at the time of the big hit based on the second winning opening 640, regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C2 (when the value is “0 to 99”), the big hit C (16R time reduction) Big win) is selected.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

  The small hit type selection table 202e includes a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 for selecting a small hit type based on the first winning opening 64, and a small hit based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting a type (see FIG. 119 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 119 (b), at the time of the small hit based on the first winning opening 64, if the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 1", the small hit C (V passing possible) is selected, In the case of “2 to 99”, the small hit E (V passing impossible) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), at the time of the small hit based on the second winning opening 640, if the value of the first hit type counter C5 is "0 to 49", the small hit C (V passing possible). Is selected, and in the case of "50 to 99", the small hit D (V passing possible) is selected.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is set according to the small hit type. Specifically, in the small hit game with the small hits C and D, the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 operates, and the game ball can enter the special discharge flow path 900e2. On the other hand, in the small hit game with the small hit E, the channel solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is not operated. Game balls cannot enter the special discharge channel 900e2. That is, the small hits C and D are small hits to which a big hit is given after the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3, and the small hit E is a small hit to which no big hit is given.

  In the present control example, the type of the jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of the small hit, and the big hit given after the small hit C is the big hit C (16R short hit big hit). The jackpot given after D is configured to be a jackpot D (16R time-saving no jackpot).

  In the present control example, the type of the jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of the small hit. However, as another specification, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the type of the jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and in the subsequent small jackpot game, the jackpot for which the right has been acquired is executed by passing the game ball through the V winning switch 900e3. It may be. By doing so, the player can select the small hit that passes through the V winning switch 900e3, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern table 202d is a data table used to determine the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. A plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined in the variation pattern table 202d.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (a), a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 67 (b)), a miss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 67 (c)), At least a time-saving variation pattern table 202d4 is defined. In this control example, since the probability variation state is not provided, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is omitted. The contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 and the out-of-office (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the time-saving variation pattern table 202d4, the variation pattern during the time reduction is defined as shown in FIG. Specifically, during the working hours, in the case of deviation, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the variation pattern is a short deviation (0.5 seconds), and in the case of a small hit, a long / small hit (10 seconds), In the case of a big hit, it is defined to be a long hit (20 seconds). In addition, the variation pattern in the case of a deviation during the time reduction may be a deviation pattern (10 seconds), and may be the same length as the small hit.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 in this control example has at least a V entrance passage counter 223j, a round number accumulation counter 223k, and a continuation determination counter 223m in addition to the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 124 (b)). . Since the ROM 222 is the same as the ROM 222 in the first control example, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The V entrance passage counter 223j is a counter for counting game balls that have passed through the detection opening 900a1 of the V winning device 900. This V entrance passage counter 203j is incremented by 1 when a V entrance passage command transmitted when a game ball passes through the detection opening 900a1 is received (S5014 in FIG. 144). This V entrance passage counter 203j is referred to when setting a display effect command in the V pass process (S5103 in FIG. 145), and is initialized to 0 after the display effect command is set in the V pass process. (S5106 in FIG. 145).

  The round number accumulation counter 223k is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of rounds in the big hit game when the big hit or the small hit continues. This round number accumulation counter 223k is incremented by one when a round number command indicating the start of a new round is received (S5004 in FIG. 144), and when a big hit end command is received, the continuation determination counter 223m is turned on. If it is 0, it is initialized (S5009 in FIG. 144). By setting the display round number command based on the round number accumulation counter 203k in the sound lamp control device 113 (S5005 in FIG. 144), the effect based on the value of the round number accumulation counter 203k is displayed in the third symbol display. It will be displayed on the device 81.

  The continuation determination counter 223m is a counter used to determine whether a big hit or a small hit is continuing, and is used to determine whether to initialize the above-described round number accumulation counter 223k. The continuation determination counter 223m is set to 2 when the small hit start command of the small hit C is received (see S5013 in FIG. 144), and is decremented by 1 when the small hit start command of the small hit D is received. (See S5015 in FIG. 144). The continuation determination counter 223m is referred to when the jackpot end command is received (see S5008 in FIG. 144). If the continuation determination counter is 0, that is, if the small hit D is repeated twice, the big hit and the small hit are determined. It is determined that the continuation of the winning has ended, and the round number accumulation counter 203k is initialized to 0 (see S5009 in FIG. 144).

  The other memory area 223z further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main controller 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs , The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the flow of the jackpot in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, the game state is divided into a special state 1 (hereinafter also referred to as special 1) game state (left-handed game) and a special figure 2 (hereinafter also referred to as special 2) game state (right-handed game). Can be The special figure 1 game state is a normal game state in which a game ball is fired aiming at the first winning port 64. When the lottery of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 64, and the jackpot type of the lottery result is the jackpot C, the winning in the second winning opening 640 after the end of the jackpot. A time-saving gaming state that facilitates the game is provided (in FIG. 122, described as time-saving medium). When shifting to the time-saving game state, a right-handed game is performed in which a right-handed shot of firing a game ball to the right side of the game board 13 to aim at the second winning port 640 provided on the right side of the game board 13 is performed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type in the lottery result of the first special symbol is the jackpot D, the time-saving game state is not given after the end of the jackpot, so that the special figure 1 game state is performed again. Further, in this control example, there is a route in which when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit and the small hit type is the small hit C, the big hit (V winning) is obtained. In this case, the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit.

  Next, in the lottery of the second special symbol performed based on the winning of the game ball in the second winning opening 640, the probability of the jackpot to be in a state more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is set higher. ing. In the present control example, a holding function for holding the right to receive a lottery based on the second special symbol is provided, and during the change of the second special symbol (specifically, the change display of the second special symbol is started. If the game ball wins in the second winning opening 640 from the time the stop display is performed until the final display is performed), the second special symbol, which is currently changing the right to perform a lottery based on the winning, is displayed. It is possible to hold (upper limit of hold = 1) until it is confirmed and displayed.

  Next, among the special figure 2 gaming states, the flow of a jackpot in a time-shortage game will be described. In this state, the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly performed. As described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 119, most of the lottery contents of the second special symbol are allocated to small hits. This is to increase the probability of occurrence of a jackpot (V winning) via a small hit in order to increase the jackpot probability of the second special symbol. Here, when the small hit type of the lottery result of the second special symbol is the small hit C, the time-saving gaming state is given again after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, when the small hit type is the small hit D, since the time saving game state is not given after the end of the big hit, the game shifts to the non-time saving period in which the time saving game in the special figure 2 gaming state is not given.

  Next, the flow of the jackpot in the non-time saving medium game in the special figure 2 game state will be described. In this state, the lottery of the second special symbol held and stored by the second special symbol holding storage function is executed as described above. As a result of the lottery, when the small hit type is the small hit C, since the time-saving game is given after the end of the big hit, the game shifts to the time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the small hit type is the small hit D, since the time saving game state is not given after the end of the big hit and there is no hold storage, the game shifts to the special figure 1 game state. In this state, a new hold memory cannot be obtained because the state is not working.

  In the present control example, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the symbol hit with the big hit type of the big hit C may be selected.

  In other words, the lottery based on the second special symbol, which is an advantageous lottery for the player, is designed to be performed at least twice using the above-mentioned holding function, and after entering the special figure 2 game state, the small hit type is determined. As long as the small hit D is not selected twice in succession, the special figure 2 game state can be looped.

  FIG. 123 is a time chart for explaining the flow from the winning of the second winning opening 640 to the occurrence of the jackpot game in the present control example. FIG. 123A shows a small lottery result based on the winning of the second winning opening 640. The win is a win (V winning) due to passing through the special discharge route 900e2, and (b) illustrates a case where the lottery result based on the winning at the second winning opening is a big hit (symbol per symbol). is there. The details of the operation control of various devices will be described later.

  First, description will be made with reference to FIG. Based on the winning of the game ball in the second winning opening 640, the main control device 110 performs the variation control of the second special symbol. At that time, the display control device 114 executes a second special symbol change effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing. Note that the time of the second special symbol fluctuation effect performed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the main control device 100 starts the small hit control, the V inlet solenoid, the flow passage solenoid 900k, and the staying solenoid 209a provided in the V winning device 900 are turned on ( FIG. 113 (a)). In this state, since the player is shooting game balls aiming at the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900, a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 900, one of which is retained by the staying member 900n. The game ball stays (900h in FIG. 113), and the other game balls flow down the normal discharge channel 900e1. In addition, the time of the small hit effect performed by the display control device 114 will be described later.

  Next, the flow of small hit control by main controller 110 will be described. Here, the entire time of the small hit control is set to 10 seconds. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the small hit control, the V inlet solenoid of the plurality of solenoids described above is turned off, and the opening / closing door 900f1 closes. By closing the opening / closing door 900f1, a new game ball does not win in the V winning device 900. Next, the set time t2 (9 seconds) elapses, the staying solenoid 209a is turned off, the staying member 900n is opened (retracted), and the game ball staying by the staying member 900n flows down to the special discharge path 900e2. I will do it. The set time t2 is set to a time sufficient for the game balls existing in the V winning device 900 at the time of the elapse of the set time t1 to flow down the normal discharge flow path 900e1. Only the game balls stayed by the staying member 900n in the device 900 flow down the special discharge channel 900e2. Next, after the set time t3 (1 second) has elapsed, the flow path solenoid 900k is turned off, and the guide piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 900e2. The set time t3 is set to a time sufficient to cause the game balls flowing down the special discharge channel 900e2 to flow downstream of the movable range of the guide piece 900h2 after the set time t2 has elapsed.

  By driving the staying solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 900k with a time difference as described above, even if the game ball is stayed by the staying member 900n within the movable range of the guide piece 900h2, the guide piece 900h2 and the staying member 900n As a result, it is possible to reliably flow down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 without interfering with the retained game balls, so that the size of the apparatus can be reduced.

  Finally, based on the game ball flowing down the special discharge channel 900e2 passing through the V winning switch 900e3, the main control device 110 ends the small hitting game control, performs the big hitting game control, and the specific winning opening is opened. Is done.

  Next, differences from FIG. 123A will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 123 (b), since the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the winning in the second winning port 640 is a big hit (symbol hit), the operation of the V winning device 900 is not performed. That is, after the variation control of the first special symbol by the main control device 110 ends, the big hit control is started. In the meantime, the display control device 114 executes a second special symbol change effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing.

  Here, the relationship between the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 123A and the time of the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 123B will be described. In FIG. 123 (a), the total of the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the second special symbol and the small hit effect time (10 seconds) is set to 20 seconds, and in FIG. 123 (b), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. Is set to 20 seconds. This is the timing at which the jackpot game is started even if the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the above-mentioned V winning or the symbol winning, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a). ) Is to adjust the opening timing. With this configuration, the player is prevented from grasping the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the effect performed by the display control device is enjoyed to the end. Can be.

  Next, the effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 124 (a) is an effect image at the start of the time-saving game in this control example. On the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, a variable display area showing a variable display (dynamic display) of the second special symbol is displayed, and on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81, the number of lottery reservations of the second special symbol is displayed. The reserved display area shown is provided with a comment area for guiding a comment display and a right-handed game on the lower side of the third symbol display device 81, and an effect area for developing a story as the game progresses is provided in the center. Have been. FIG. 124 (a) shows a state in which the game ball does not enter the second winning opening 640, so that the display indicating that the variable display area is not changing is displayed in the hold display area. In the comment area, the current mode name and right-handed notification are displayed.

  FIG. 124 (b) is an effect image in which the second special symbol is changing. The points different from FIG. 124 (b) are that a display indicating that the second special symbol is changing is displayed in the change display area, and that a forked road is displayed in the effect area. In the effect area, during the second special symbol change, the effect that the character proceeds deep into the cave is performed, and when the game ball wins at the second winning opening 640, that is, when the display of the holding area is displayed. Continue on one side of the fork. As described above, the development of the story displayed in the rendering area of the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the winning in the second winning opening 640, so that the game ball during the change of the second special symbol is changed. Of the second special symbol can be surely secured. In this control example, the control for selecting and proceeding to one of the forked roads based on the display indicating that there is a hold is shown, but the forked road may be advanced each time a game ball wins in the second winning opening. May select a road to be advanced by operating a predetermined operation means, and may control to proceed to the selected road due to winning of a game ball to the second winning opening 640 generated after completion of the selection. . Further, the color and design of the forked road may be changed based on the result of the lottery of the second special symbol during the change or the result of the lottery of the reserved second special symbol. By doing so, the player can participate in the development of the story progressed in the production area and can enjoy the production suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol. Stopping the launch of the ball can be further prevented.

  Next, FIG. 125 (a) is an effect image after the fluctuation stop when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. In the effect area, the door is displayed, in the variable display area, a fixed display indicating a small hit is displayed, in the hold display area, a display indicating that there is a hold is displayed, and in the comment area, a right notification display is displayed. When the present effect image is displayed, the V prize device 900 is open at the lower right side of the game board, and a comment is displayed so that the player hits right to aim at the V prize device 900, and the V prize is won. In the effect area, an effect in which the character destroys the door is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the device 900. Further, the color tone and design of the door displayed in the effect area are changed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the lottery result of the reserved second special symbol.

  In addition, even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the same effect image is displayed at the same timing. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 123, since the second special symbol is still changing, the changing display area is displayed as changing. Therefore, by making the display area smaller or providing it in places other than the third symbol display device 81, it becomes more difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit. Can be.

  Further, if the variation pattern in the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is off is 10 seconds (0.5 seconds in this control example), an effect image in which the door does not come out at this timing may be displayed.

  Next, FIG. 125 (b) shows an effect image when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e4 provided in the special discharge channel 900e2 in the V winning device 900, and FIG. A monster appears from the door displayed in the production area. The types of characters appearing in the door will be described later with reference to FIG. When a monster appears, the process proceeds to a jackpot effect shown in FIG. FIG. 126 (a) is an effect image during a big hit. Since the effect image during the big hit is mainly a battle effect performed in the effect area, the variable display area and the hold display area are moved to an inconspicuous place or an appropriate position outside the third symbol display device 81. Instead, a jackpot round number display and a jackpot payout display (not shown) are displayed. FIG. 126 (b) is an effect image when a monster is defeated in a battle effect during a jackpot. When the monster is defeated in the battle effect, there is at least one more jackpot (a state where the lottery result of the reserved second special symbol is a jackpot or a time-saving game is given after the jackpot). On the other hand, FIG. 126 (c) is an effect image when a monster is defeated in a battle effect during a jackpot. When the monster is defeated in the battle effect, the game shifts to the normal game state (the state in which the second special symbol is not held and the time-saving game is not given after the big hit). Note that a so-called resurrection effect may be provided in which after displaying an effect image for defeat in a battle, the monster is revived to defeat the monster. If no V prize is won during the small hit, the effect is that the door does not open (not shown).

  Next, a character appearing from the door displayed in FIG. 125A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 (a) is displayed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (the first random number counter value C1 in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is “0”).

  FIG. 127 (b) shows that both the lottery result of the second special symbol and the lottery result of the reserved second special symbol are both time saving small wins (the small hit type counter value C5 is "0" in the special symbol 2 random number table 202e2). 49 "). In other words, it is a premier effect in which a jackpot is provided at least three more times.

  The effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 has been described above. However, as shown in FIG. 123, any jackpot based on the lottery of the second special symbol starts the jackpot state. Since the same timing is set and the timing of displaying the type of jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 is also the same as shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and 127, the second special symbol lottery is provided to the player. The result can be made difficult to grasp.

  Further, by performing the display of FIG. 124 (b) and FIG. 125 (a), it is possible to suppress the stop of the game ball firing by the player, to surely obtain the holding of the second special symbol, and to win the V winning device. Can be performed reliably.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device in Fifth Control Example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The fifth control example is different from the first control example in that the V entrance passage process and the V passage process are executed in the timer interruption process, the special symbol variation process in the timer interruption process, the start winning process, and the normal symbol. The difference is that a part of the fluctuation processing is changed and that the big hit control processing 2 and the small hit control processing are executed in the main processing. Since other points are the same, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 128, the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process in the fifth control example. Of the timer interrupt processing, in the processing of S101 to S103, S107, and S108 to S109, the processing of S101 to S103, S107, and S108 to S109 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63) in the first control example, respectively. Since the same processing as described above is executed, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the fifth control example, the special symbol change process of S104 (see FIG. 129) executed in the timer interrupt process, the start winning process of S105 (see FIG. 134), and the normal symbol change process of S106 (see FIG. 136) ) Is different from the first control example in that V entry passage processing in S140 (see FIG. 137) and V passage processing in S141 (see FIG. 138) described later are performed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 129, differences from the first control example of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change process (S104) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128). The processes of S240 to S244 are different from those of the first control example. Other processes are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special symbol change start process 2 of S240 is performed instead of the special symbol change start process of the first control example (S213, see FIG. 64). The details of the special symbol change start process 2 (S240) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The processing of S241 to S242 is performed instead of the processing of S219 of the first control example. Specifically, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot after the elapse of the fluctuation time (S214: Yes), a specific winning opening opening scenario is set based on the jackpot type (S216: Yes). (S217), the start of the jackpot is set (S218). Next, the big hit start flag 203v1 and the big hit flag 203v2 are set to ON (S241), the time saving counter 203f is set to 0, and the process is terminated.

  By setting the big hit start flag 203v1 and the big hit flag 203v2 to ON in the process of S241, in the big hit control process 2 (FIG. 140) to be described later, it is determined whether it is a big hit start timing, and whether a big hit game is being performed. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  Also, by setting the time-saving mid-counter 203f to 0 in the process of S242, the time-saving game is ended when the big hit game is started.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S243).

  In the process of S243, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S243: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S244), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S243 that the current lottery result is not a small hit, the processes of S220 to S221 are executed as in the first control example described above, and the present process ends.

  In the present control example, as described above, since a small win is made in the lottery of each special symbol, a small win game is started when the lottery result is determined to be a small win in the processing of S243 to 244. It is configured to be. Details of the process of S244 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the special symbol change start process 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process 2 executed in place of the special symbol change start process of S213 of the first control example. In the special symbol change start process 2 (S240), first, it is determined whether or not the time is reduced (S4001). When it is not during the working hours reduction (S4001: No), the normal fluctuation start processing (S4002) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the time reduction (S4001: Yes), the time reduction start process (S4003) is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, the normal fluctuation start processing (S4002) and the time reduction fluctuation start processing (S4003), which are executed in the above-described special symbol fluctuation start processing 2 (S240), will be described.

  First, the normal fluctuation start processing (S4002) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the normal variation start process (S4002) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see S240 in FIG. 130).

  In the normal fluctuation start processing, first, the data of the execution area in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is acquired (S4101). After that, the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S4102). Specifically, in the case of the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entry into the first winning opening 64, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (refer to FIG. 117 (b)) is used to determine the big hit or the small hit. In the case of a lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the big hit or the small hit is determined with reference to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 117 (c)). .

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot (S4103). If the lottery result is a big hit (S4103: Yes), the display mode at the time of the normal big hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S4104). Thereafter, the normal jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter (S4105), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a big hit (S4103: No), it is further determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S4106). When the lottery result is a small hit (S4106: Yes), the display mode at the time of the normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S4107). After that, the normal small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S4108), and this processing ends.

  If the lottery result is not a small hit (S4106: No), a display mode at the time of normal departure corresponding to the special symbol is set (S4109). After that, the variation pattern at the time of the normal departure is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S4110), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the time reduction start process (S4003) will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the time reduction start process (S4003) executed in the special symbol change start process 2 (S240, see FIG. 130). This time saving variation start process (S4003) is different from the above-described normal variation start process (S4002) in that a display mode and a variation pattern for time saving are set (determined), and the other points are the same. , And a detailed description thereof will be omitted. The variation pattern for time saving determined in S4105, S4108, and S4110 is determined based on the variation pattern table 202d4 for time reduction as described above (see FIG. 120 (d)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a small hit start setting process which is a process added in the fifth control example described above will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S244) executed in the special symbol change start process 2 (S240).

  In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, an opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid is set (S4301). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the hit type is C or D (S4302). If it is not the small hit type C or D (S4302: No), the process of S4303 to S4306 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4307.

  If it is the small hit type C or D (S4302: Yes), an open scenario of the flow path solenoid 900k is set (S4303). Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is C (S4304). When the small hit type is C (S4304: Yes), the big hit type D is set to the big hit type value at the time of passing V, and the process shifts to S4307.

  On the other hand, if the small hit type is not C (S4304: No), the big hit type D is set as the big hit type value at the time of passing V, and the process shifts to S4307.

  When the processing of S4302, S4305 or S4306 is completed, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S4307). Next, the small hit start flag 203w1 and the small hit flag 203w2 are set to ON (S4308), and this processing ends.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128) in the fifth control example.

  In this start winning processing (S105), the processing of S401 to 405 is executed as in the first control example described above. When the processing of S405 is completed, various counter values are obtained, and the obtained values are stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area (S406). In S406, the value of the small hit type counter C5 newly provided in this control example is also acquired and stored.

  Next, the processing of S407 to S408 is executed. After finishing the process of S408, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter is smaller than 1 (S409). In the process of S409, in the present control example, the upper limit of the number of holdings in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to 1, and thus the configuration is made.

  In the process of S409, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter is smaller than 1 (S409: Yes), the processes of S410 to S411 are executed as in the first control example. When the process of S411 is completed, various counter values are acquired, and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 2 holding sphere storage area (S412). In S412, the value of the small hit type counter C5 newly provided in the present control example is also acquired and stored, similarly to the processing of S406 described above.

  When the processing of S407, S409 or S412 is completed, the pre-reading processing 2 (S440) is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the prefetching process 2 (S440) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 shows a prefetch process 2 (S440) executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 134) instead of the prefetch process of S413 executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 66) of the first control example. It is a flowchart shown.

  In the pre-reading process 2, it is first determined whether or not a new prize has been won (S4401). If there is no new winning (S4401: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when there is a new winning (S4401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning is a winning of the first special symbol (S4402).

  In the process of S4402, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S4402: Yes), based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table. The lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S4403), and the process shifts to S4405.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4402, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S4402: No), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table and the special symbol 2 small hit selection table are set. Based on the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S4404), and the flow shifts to the process of S4405.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128). In the ordinary symbol variation process (S106), the process of S640 is performed instead of the processes of S608 to S611 because the change of the lottery probability in the ordinary symbol lottery is eliminated in the first control example described above. The difference is that the processing of S641 to S644 is executed instead of the processing of S616, and that the change in the fluctuation time due to whether or not the employee is during working hours is eliminated (the processing of S619 and S621 is deleted). Since other points are the same, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the normal symbol variation process (S106) in this control example, the processes of S601 to S607 are executed as in the first control example. When the process of S607 is completed, a lottery result is acquired based on the second random number table (S640). In this control example, there is no distinction between the high probability state and the low probability state in the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the probability of winning the ordinary symbol is always constant.

  When the process of S640 is completed, the processes of S612 to S615 are executed as in the first control example. In the processing of S614, it is determined that the time is reduced (S614: Yes), and in the processing of S615, it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No). It is determined whether or not there is (S641).

  In the process of S641, if it is determined that the normal symbol time reduction first time flag 203y is ON (S641: Yes), the first normal symbol variation process is executed in the awarded time reduction game. In order to allow a large number of game balls to win in the second winning opening 640, the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a are set to “5 seconds × 1 time” (S642). As a result, the electric accessory 640 is opened for a long time (5 seconds), during which the game ball passing through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is guided to the second winning port 640. Therefore, when the first ordinary symbol variation process in the time-saving game is executed, many game balls enter the second winning opening 640, and the lottery based on the second winning opening 640 (lotting of the second special symbol) is suspended. The number of balls can be stored up to the upper limit (1 in this control example).

  When the process of S642 is completed, the normal symbol time reduction first flag 203y is set to OFF (S643), and the process proceeds to S620.

  On the other hand, in the process of S641, when it is determined that the normal symbol time reduction first time flag 203y is off (S641: No), it is after the first normal symbol variation process has been executed, and is based on the second winning opening 640. Since the number of reserved balls in the lottery (the lottery of the second special symbol) is the upper limit (1 in this control example), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a are set to “0.5 seconds × 2 times”. Is set (S644), and the process proceeds to S620. As a result, the electric accessory is released for a short period (0.5 second), during which only a portion of the game balls passing through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are the second winning ports. 640. Therefore, when the normal symbol fluctuation process is executed after the first time in the time-saving game, many game balls do not enter the second winning opening 640, but can enter the V winning device 900 arranged thereunder. Therefore, during a time-saving game, it is possible to suppress a problem that a game ball enters only the second winning opening 640 and the game ball does not enter the V winning device 900.

  Also, during the opening time (0.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S644, the game ball that normally passes through the symbol start port (through gate) 67 cannot enter the second winning port 640. The time is not the time, but the time when a part of the game balls passing through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 can enter. Thereby, even when the game ball is not fired at the time of executing the first ordinary symbol variation process, the lottery based on the second winning port 640 (the second special symbol of the second special symbol) is performed during the subsequent ordinary symbol variation process. The number of reserved balls in the lottery) can be stored up to the upper limit (1 in this control example). On the other hand, during the opening time (0.2 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S617, the game ball that has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 may enter the second winning port 640. It is impossible time. Thereby, when the time-saving game is not provided, it is possible to realize the gaming property that the game ball is not allowed to enter the second winning port 640.

  When the processing of S617, 643 or S644 is completed, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. As a result, in the present control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is fixed to 3 seconds regardless of whether or not the working hours are reduced.

  Note that the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is not limited to this, and the time reduction function may be provided in conjunction with the time reduction function of the special symbol. For example, the fluctuation time may be set to 2 seconds during working hours. Further, in the present control example, the condition for ending the operation of the electric accessory 640a is only the passage of time. The operation of 640a may be ended. By doing in this way, when the reserved memory reaches the upper limit number, the electric accessory 640a immediately closes, and the first ordinary symbol time saving operation ends. Then, the second and subsequent ordinary symbol time reduction operations are started. Therefore, at the start of the small hit game in which the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900 is opened, it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 640a from being in the open state for a long time, and the small hit game can be smoothly performed. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the V entrance passage process (S140) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S140) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128).

  In the V entrance passage process (S140), it is first determined whether or not a small hit is being made (S4501). In the process of S4501, if it is determined that the small hit is occurring (S4501: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S4502), and this process ends. If it is not during the small hit (S4502: No), an error command is set (S4503) because a game ball has entered the V-prize device 900 despite not being a small hit game. finish.

  The V-entrance passage command set in the processing of S4502 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the V-entrance passage command, the sound ramp control device 113 counts the game balls that have passed through the V-entrance and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V-entrance passage to the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the ball entry into the V winning device 900 (see FIG. 122).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the V passing process (S141) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S141). The V passing process (S141) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  In the V passing process, first, a big hit type value at the time of V passing is acquired (S4601). Next, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the big hit C (S4602). If it corresponds to the big hit C (S4602: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the big hit C is set to ON (S4603), and the process shifts to S4604.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4602 that the game does not correspond to the big hit C (S4602: No), it is determined whether the big hit D is satisfied (S4606). In the process of S4606, when it is determined that the game corresponds to the big hit D (S4606: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the big hit D is set to ON (S4607), and the process shifts to S4604. When the processing of S4603 or S4607 is completed, the V passing command is set (S4604), the counter 203f during time saving is set to 0 (S4605), and this processing ends. In the process of S4605, the time-saving game is ended by setting the during-time-time counter 203f to 0.

  In the process of S4606, when it is determined that the hit does not correspond to the jackpot D (S4606: No), an error command is set (S4608), and the process ends. In this control example, it is the small hit C or the small hit D that the game ball can pass through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900, and the big hit C or the big hit D is set as the big hit type value when V passes. Only if you have. Therefore, if the V-passing jackpot type value is not the jackpot C or the jackpot D, the V passing process (S141) executed based on the passing of the game ball through the V winning switch 900e3 is incorrectly performed. This is considered to be the case where a game ball is won to the V winning switch 900e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S4608, an error is output and an illegal action can be found.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the main process in the fifth control example. In this main process, the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (S1004) in the first control example, and the small jackpot control process (S1041) is executed after execution of the jackpot control process 2 (S1040). Is different.

  The other processes in S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 are the same as the processes in S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 72) in the first control example, respectively. Detailed description is omitted.

  The big hit control process 2 (S1040) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). The jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and first variable operation are performed. This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65.

  In the jackpot control process 2, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S4701). Specifically, if the big hit start flag 203v1 is set to ON by the process of S241 of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 129), it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S4701, if a special symbol big hit is started (S4701: Yes), the big hit start flag 203v1 is set to off (S4702), an opening command is set (S4703), and this process ends. .

  The jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the sound ramp control device 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. When the display jackpot start command is received by the display control device 114, an effect of starting a jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started (S4701: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S4704). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot is displayed. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. Specifically, it is determined based on whether or not the big hit flag 203v2 is on. In the process of S4704, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S4704: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4704, if a special symbol is in a big hit (4704: Yes), it is determined whether it is a start timing of a new round (S4705). If it is the start timing of a new round (S4705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S4706), and a round number command indicating the newly started round number is set (S4707). . After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, when a continuous jackpot is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continuous big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to recognize that the big hit has continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4705, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S4705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S4708). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) When a prize is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S4708, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S4708: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of ending the big hit (S4710). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to end the big hit.

  In the process of S4710, if it is the timing of ending the big hit (S4710: Yes), the big hit end command is set (S4711), and the big hit flag is set to off (S4712).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was the big hit C (S4713). In the process of S4713, when it is determined that it is the big hit C (16R time-saving big hit) (S4713: Yes), the time-saving medium counter 203f is set to 99 (S4714), and the ordinary symbol time-saving first time flag 203y is set to ON. Then (S4715), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4713, when it is determined that the hit is the big hit D (16R time short hit big hit) (S4713: No), the processes of S4714 and S4715 are skipped, and this process ends.

  The jackpot end command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot end command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects a jackpot end effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a big hit end command for display corresponding to the selected big hit end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display jackpot end command is received by the display control device 114, the effect of the jackpot end is started in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in the processing of S4710, if it is not the timing of ending the jackpot (S4710: No), this processing ends.

  Next, the small hit control process (S1041) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1041) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). The small hit control process (S1041) is executed in the main process (refer to FIG. 139). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol small hit state, execution of various effects according to the small hit and V This is a process for opening or closing the opening / closing door 900f1 of the winning device 900.

  In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON by the processing of S4308 of the small hit start setting processing (see FIG. 133), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S4801, when the special symbol small hit is started (S4801: Yes), the small hit start flag 203w1 is set off (S4802), and the small hit start command is set (S4803).

  The small hit start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the small hit start command, the sound ramp control device 113 transmits a small hit start command for display to the display control device 114. When the display small hit start command is received by the display control device 114, an effect of starting small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S4803 is completed, the V inlet solenoid and the flow path solenoid 900k are turned on based on the opening scenario (S4804), the operation of the staying member is started (S4805), and this processing ends.

  The opening scenario referred to in the process of S4804 is set in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 133), and the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid is set regardless of the small hit type, and the flow path solenoid is set. The 900k release scenario is set only when the small hit type is C or D. Therefore, in all the small hit games, the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is opened, and it becomes possible to cause the V winning device 900 to enter a game ball. On the other hand, only at the small hit C or D at which the channel solenoid 900k is turned on, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 900 can flow down to the special discharge channel 900e2. That is, the small hit C or D is a small hit type to which a big hit is given, and the small hit type C is a small hit type to which no big hit is given.

  In addition, in the process of S4805, the operation of the staying member is started (the stay solenoid 209a is turned on), so that one game ball can stay in the distribution destination area 900h3.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4801, if it is not the timing to start the special symbol small hit (S4801: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is a small hit (S4806). During the special symbol small hit, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol small hit (including a special symbol small hit game), and During the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol small hit game. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the small hitting flag 203w2 is on. In the processing of S4804, if it is not during the small hit of the special symbol (S4804: No), this processing ends as it is.

  In the process of S4806, when it is determined that the special symbol is being hit (S4806: Yes), it is then determined whether the V inlet closing condition is satisfied (S4807). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) has elapsed after the opening and closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 has been opened, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, a total of 10 balls) are provided in the V winning device 900. When a prize is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  The closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have entered the V winning port 900a.

  In the process of S4807, if the closing condition of the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the V entrance solenoid is set to OFF to close the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 ( In step S4808, the staying solenoid 209a is turned off to end the operation of the staying member (S4809), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is not satisfied (S4808: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S4810). Specifically, it is determined that the timing of the end of the small hit is reached after a predetermined time has elapsed (3 seconds in the present control example) after the above-described V inlet closing condition is satisfied. Thus, the small hitting end processing (turning off of the flow path solenoid) can be executed after the operation of the staying member 900n is finished, so that the game balls staying in the distribution destination area 900h3 are transferred to the V winning switch 900e3. The ball can be surely entered.

  In the process of S4810, if it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S4810: Yes), the small hit flag 203w2 is set to off (S4811), the small hit end command is set (S4811), and each solenoid is opened. The scenario is cleared (S4813), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4810, when it is not the timing of the end of the small hit (S4810: No), the present processing is ended as it is.

  Here, the small hit end processing (S4812) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the small hit end processing (S4812). The small hit end process (S4812) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is time to end the small hit.

  In the small hit end processing (S4812), first, the flow path solenoid 900k is set to off (S4901), and it is determined whether the V flag 203x2 is on (S4902). In the processing of S4902, when it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is ON (S4902: Yes), it is a case where the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hitting game. A process for starting the execution of the jackpot game based on the passing of the winning switch 900e3 is performed.

  Specifically, an opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4903), and the start of the jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4904). Next, the big hit start flag 203v1 and the big hit flag 203v2 are set on (S4905), the V flag 203x2 is set off (S4906), and the process shifts to S4908.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4902 that the V flag 203x2 is not turned on (S4902: No), a large hit is given to the small hit game ball because the game ball has not passed through the V winning switch 900e3. In order to end without executing, a small hit end command is set (S4907), and the flow shifts to the process of S4909.

  The small hit end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot end command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects a jackpot end effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a big hit end command for display corresponding to the selected big hit end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display jackpot end command is received by the display control device 114, the effect of the jackpot end is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S4906 or S4907 is completed, the value of the jackpot type value 203x1 at the time of passing V is cleared (S4908), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that processing based on reception of a hit-related command is executed in command determination processing 2 (S1530). Other parts are the same, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the command determination process 2 (S1530) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1530). The command determination process (S1511) is a process for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main control device 110, as in the first control example described above.

  In the command determination process 2 (S1530), the processes of S1601 to S1610 are executed as in the first control example. Thereafter, in the processing of S1609, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1609), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1641), and the process proceeds to S1619. Move on to processing. On the other hand, when the winning information command has not been received (S1640: No), it is determined whether or not a hit-related command has been received (S1642). When a hit-related command is received (S1643: Yes), a hit-related process is executed (S1643), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S1619. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S1642: No), the process of S1643 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1619.

  In the process of S1619, similarly to the first control example, a process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1619), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 144, the hit-related processing (S1643) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S1643). The hit-related process (S1643) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 143) that a hit-related command has been received.

  In the hit-related process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit start command has been received (S5001). If it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S5001: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S5002), and this processing ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect (for example, FIG. 125 (b), FIG. 127) indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5001: No), it is next determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5003). In the processing of S5003, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number accumulation counter 223k (S5004). Thereafter, the display round number command is set based on the round number accumulation counter 223k (S5005), and the process ends.

  In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S5003: No), it is determined whether or not a jackpot end command has been received (S5006). If it is determined in the process of S5006 that the jackpot end command has been received (S5006: Yes), a display jackpot end command is set (S5007), and then it is determined whether or not the continuation determination counter 223m is 0. (S5008).

  In the process of S5008, when it is determined that the continuation determination counter 223m is 0 (S5008: Yes), it means that the jackpot D has been executed twice consecutively, and it is the timing to end the jackpot continuation. The round accumulation counter 223k is set to 0 (S5009), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuation determination counter is not 0 in the process of S5008 (S5008: No), the present process ends.

  In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S5006: No), it is determined whether a small hit start command has been received (S5010).

  In the process of S5010, if it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S5006: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set based on the small hit type (S5011), and then the small hit to be started It is determined whether or not the game is a small hit C (S5012). In the process of S5012, if it is determined that the small hit game to be started is the small hit C (S5012: Yes), then the big hit game based on the big hit C is given. The continuation determination counter 223m for counting is initialized (set to 2) (S5013), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5012 that the small hit is not the small hit C (S5012: No), then it is determined whether the small hit is the small hit D (S5014). In the processing of S5014, if it is determined that the small hit D (S5014: Yes), then a big hit game based on the big hit D is given, so the continuation determination counter for counting the number of consecutive executions of the big hit D 223m is decremented by 1 (S5015), and this processing ends. In the processing of S5014, if it is determined that the small hit is not the small hit D (S5014: No), the present processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S5010 that the small hit start command has not been received (S5010: No), it is determined whether a small hit end command has been received (S5016).

  If it is determined in the processing of S5016 that the small hit end command has been received (S5016: Yes), a display small hit end command is set to execute an effect indicating the end of the small hit game (S5017). Then, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5016 that the small hit end command has not been received (S5016: No), it is determined whether or not a V entrance passage command has been received (S5018).

  In the process of S5018, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S5018: Yes), 1 is added to the V entrance passage counter 223j (S5019). The V entrance passage counter 223j added here is referred to in the later-described V passage process to determine the number of game balls entering the V prize device 900 during the small hitting game.

  When the processing of S5109 is completed, a display V entrance passage command is set in order to execute an effect (for example, see FIG. 125 (a)) based on the ball entry into the V winning device 900 during the small hit game (S5020). ), End this processing.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5018, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S5018: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received (S5021).

  If it is determined in the processing of S5021 that the V-pass command has been received (S5021: Yes), the V-pass processing is executed to execute the processing based on the ball entry into the V-win switch 900e3 of the V-win apparatus 900. (S5022), and ends this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5021 that the V-pass command has not been received (S5021: No), the processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 145, the V passing process (S5022) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S5022). This V-pass processing (S5022) is processing executed when it is determined in the hit-related processing (see FIG. 144) that a V-pass command has been received.

  In the V passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit game being executed is the small hit C (S5101). In the process of S5101, when it is determined that the small hit C (S5101: Yes), it is next determined whether or not there is a hit in the hold (S5102).

  If it is determined in the processing of S5102 that there is no hit (S5102: No), there is no big hit or small hit based on the holding ball, but a big hit C is given based on the passage of the V winning switch 900e3. is there. Here, the big hit C is a big hit with a time saving, and the probability of becoming a small hit C or D (that is, becoming a big hit C or D thereafter) in the time saving game is “397/399”. Therefore, after that, in order to execute a 2V effect which is an effect suggesting that the probability of the jackpot game being given for two consecutive times is high, a 2V effect command for display is set (S5105), and the process shifts to S5106.

  The 2V effect command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the 2V command for display, the display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect indicating that the probability that the jackpot game is awarded for two consecutive games is high.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5102 that there is a hit (S5102: Yes), a big hit C is given based on the passage of the V winning switch 900e3, and a big hit or a small hit based on the holding ball is given. This is the case. In other words, there is a high probability that the jackpot game will be executed for two consecutive times, and the jackpot game will be executed based on the small hit in the hold. Therefore, the probability that the jackpot game will be given for three consecutive times is high.

  Here, in the processing of S5102, when it is determined that there is a small hit in the hold (S5102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103).

  In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103: Yes), an effect indicating that the probability of the jackpot game being given for three consecutive times is high (for example, FIG. 127 (b) )), A display 3V effect command is set (S5104), and the flow shifts to the process of S5106. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103: No), the game ball is inserted into the V winning device 900, for example, the game ball is not sufficiently fired during the small hit game. The ball is not enough. In this case, in the present control example, the processing of S5105 is executed to shift to the processing of S5106 in order not to display an effect suggesting that there is a high probability that the jackpot game is given for three consecutive games. Thereby, even when the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the V-prize device 900 is small, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to cause the V-prize device 900 to enter a game ball.

  The 3V effect command for display set in the process of S5015 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display 3V command, the display control device 114 displays an effect (for example, see FIG. 127 (b)) on the third symbol display device 81 indicating that the probability that the jackpot game is given for three consecutive times is high. I do.

  In the process of S5101, when it is determined that the small hit game being executed is not the small hit C (S5101: No), it is determined whether or not the hold is a hit (S5107). If it is determined in the processing of S5107 that there is a hit (S5107: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a small hit C (S5108).

  In the process of S5108, when it is determined that there is the small hit C in the hold (S5108: Yes), the big hit game based on the V passing is executed, and the small hit C is given based on the hold ball (that is, 2). It is likely that a continuous jackpot game will be given). Therefore, in this case, in order to execute an effect (for example, refer to FIG. 127 (b)) indicating that the probability of the jackpot game being given for three consecutive times is high, a display 3V effect command is set (S5109), It moves to the process of S5106.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5108 that the hold is not the small hit C (S5108: No), the big hit game based on the V passing is executed, and the small hit D is given based on the hold ball (ie, , 1 jackpot game is given). Therefore, in this case, in order to execute an effect that suggests that the jackpot game is to be given for two consecutive times, a 2V effect command for display is set (S5110), and the process shifts to S5106.

  In the process of S5107, if it is determined that there is no hit (S5107: No), it is not the case that the jackpot game is continuously executed after the execution of the jackpot game based on the V pass, so the big hit based on the V pass is performed. In order to execute an effect that suggests that the display has been set, a display V effect command is set (S5111), and the flow shifts to the process of S5106.

  The display V effect command set in the process of S5111 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display V command, the third symbol display device 81 gives an effect indicating that the big hit game is given based on the passing of the game ball through the V winning switch 900e3 in the small hit game. indicate.

  When the processing of S5104, S5105, S5109, S5110 or S5111, is completed, the V entrance passage counter is set to 0 (S5106), and this processing ends.

<Control processing executed by display control device in fifth control example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 152. The fifth control example is different from the first control example in that a hit-related command process is executed when a hit-related command is received. Since the other parts are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the command determination process (S2302) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing (S2302). The command determination process (S2302) is a process for determining a command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and performing a process according to the determined command.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the processes of S2401 to S2413 are executed as in the first control example described above. Next, in the process of S2412, if it is determined that there is no command indicating a long press (S2412: No), it is determined whether there is a hit-related command (S2440).

  In the process of S2440, when it is determined that there is a hit-related command (S2440: Yes), a hit-related command process is executed (S2441), and the process returns to S2401. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2440 that there is no hit-related command (S2440: No), other command processing is executed (S2419), and the processing returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S2441) will be described with reference to FIG. The hit-related command process (S2441) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 146) that there is a hit-related command.

  In the hit-related command processing (S2441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display big hit start command (S5201). If it is determined in the process of S5201 that there is a display hit start command (S5201: Yes), the big hit start command process is executed (S5202), and the flow shifts to the process of S5203.

  Here, the details of the jackpot start command process (S5202) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S5202). The jackpot start command process (S5202) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 147) that there is a display jackpot start command. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot start command processing (S5202), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). Thereafter, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot start display data table (S5303), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), and the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S5305). This processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5201, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5203. After the processing of S5201 or S5202, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S5203). If it is determined in step S5203 that there is a display round number command, round number command processing is executed (S5204), and the flow advances to step S5205.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S5204) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (b). FIG. 148 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S5204). This round number command process (S5204) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 147) that the round number command for display has been received, and the number of rounds in the big hit game is updated. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the effect when the game is performed.

  In the round number command process (S5204), first, a round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5405), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5203 that there is no display round number command (S5203: No), the process proceeds to S5205. When the process of S5203 or S5204 is completed, it is determined whether or not a display jackpot end command has been received (S5205).

  If it is determined in the process of S5205 that there is a display jackpot end command (S5205: Yes), a jackpot end command process is executed (S5206), and the process shifts to S5207.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing (S5206). The jackpot end command process (S5206) is a process executed when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the command determination process (FIG. 147), and an effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is displayed in the third symbol display. This is a process for displaying on the device 81.

  In the jackpot end command processing (S5206), first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the big hit end display data table (S5503). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5505), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S5205 that there is no display jackpot end command, the process skips step S5206 and shifts to step S5207.

  When the processing of S5205 or S5206 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S5207). In the process of S5207, when it is determined that there is a small hit start command for display (S5207: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S5208), and the process shifts to the process of S5209.

  Here, the details of the small hit start command processing (S5208) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (b). FIG. 149 (b) is a flowchart showing the small hit start command processing (S5208). The small hit start command process (S5208) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that the small hit start command has been received, and an effect indicating the start of the small hit game is provided. This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit start command processing (S5208), first, a small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5602). Thereafter, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table (S5603), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), and the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S5605). Then, the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5207, when it is determined that there is no small hit start command for display (S5207: No), the process of S5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5209.

  When the processing of S5207 or S5208 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S5209). If it is determined in the processing of S5209 that there is a small hit end command (S5209: Yes), the small hit end command processing is executed (S5210), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5211.

  Here, the small hit end command processing (S5210) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 150A is a flowchart showing the small hit end command processing (S5210). The small hit end command process (S5210) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that the small hit end command has been received, and an effect indicating the end of the small hit game. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit end command processing (S5210), first, a small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5705), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5209, if it is determined that the display small hit end command has not been received (S5209: No), the process of S5210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5211.

  When the processing of S5209 or S5210 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S5211). In the process of S5211, when it is determined that there is a display V entrance passage command (S5211: Yes), the V entrance passage command process is executed (S5212), and the process shifts to S5213.

  Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S5212) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 (b) is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage command processing (S5212). This V entrance passage command processing (S5212) is processing executed when it is determined in the command determination processing (FIG. 147) that a V entrance passage command has been received, and to the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. This is a process for displaying an effect based on the entry of a game ball on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V entry passage command processing (S5212), first, a V entry passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5801). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5802), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V entrance passage display data table (S5803). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5804), the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5805), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5211, when it is determined that there is no display V entrance passage command (S5211: No), the process of S5212 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5213.

  After the processing of S5211 or S5212, it is determined whether or not there is a display 3V effect command (S5213). In the processing of S5213, when it is determined that there is a display 3V effect command (S5213: Yes), 3V effect command processing (S5214) is executed, and the process proceeds to S5215.

  Here, the details of the 3V effect command processing (S5214) will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (a). FIG. 151 (a) is a flowchart showing the 3V effect command processing (S5214). The 3V effect command process (S5214) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that a 3V effect command for display has been received. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect suggesting that the third symbol is continued).

  Specifically, as described above, the 3V effect command for display gives a big hit and a big hit C when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. This is to be received from the sound lamp control device 113 when the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists.

  In the 3V effect command processing (S5214), first, a 3V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5902), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the 3V effect display data table (S5903). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5904), the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5905), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5213, when it is determined that there is no display 3V effect command (S5213: No), the process of S5214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5215.

  When the processing of S5213 or S5214 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display 2V effect command (S5215). In the processing of S5215, when it is determined that there is a 2V effect command for display (S5215: Yes), 2V effect command processing is executed (S5216), and the process proceeds to S5217.

  Here, the details of the 2V effect command processing (S5216) will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (b). FIG. 151 (b) is a flowchart showing the 2V effect command processing (S5216). The 2V effect command process is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that a 2V effect command for display has been received, and 2V (two big hits) at the end of the small hit game. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect suggesting that “continuation” is to be performed.

  Specifically, as described above, the 2V effect command for display gives a big hit and a big hit D when the gaming ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. This is to be received from the sound lamp control device 113 when the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists.

  In the 2V effect command processing (S5216), first, a 2V effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, the transfer data table buffer is cleared (S6002), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the 2V effect display data table (S6003). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6005), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5215, when it is determined that there is no 2V effect command for display (S5215: No), the process of S5216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5217.

  After S5215 or S5216, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S5217). In the processing of S5217, when it is determined that there is a display V effect command (S5217: Yes), the V effect command processing is executed (S5218), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5217 that there is no display V effect command (S5217: No), there is no command to be executed as a hit-related command, so this processing is terminated as it is.

  Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S5218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing (S5218). The V effect command process (S5218) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that a display V effect command has been received, and a V prize is won at the end of the small hitting game. This is a process for displaying an effect indicating that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900e3 on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V effect command processing (S5218), first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S6103). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6105), and the process ends.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to a state where the lottery of the second special symbol is easily received (a time-saving game state) based on the result of the lottery of the first special symbol. (2) The gaming ability that provides the jackpot by opening the V winning device 900 based on the result of the special symbol drawing and passing through a specific area (special discharge channel 900e2) in the V winning device 900 (passing the V winning switch 900e4). It has.

  The pachinko machine 10 having such playability has a plurality of technical configurations for preventing game balls from entering or passing through various devices in a sequence other than the proper game order.

  First, in the normal game state (game aiming at the left side of the game board 13), the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not provided on the left side of the game board 13 so that the second winning opening 640 is not opened. Provided only on the right side of. Secondly, in the normal gaming state, based on the passing of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the state where the game ball can easily be won in the second winning opening (the electric accessory 640a is opened). Also, a time (0.2 seconds) during which the game ball is difficult to enter is set as the time during which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state in the normal game state. Third, a game ball falling area a for receiving a game ball flowing down (naturally falling) to the electric accessory 640a and a game ball rolling from the game ball falling area a are received and guided to the second winning port 640. A game ball guiding area b is provided in which balls that fall naturally from the game board 13 and do not buffer are provided, and it is necessary for the game balls to roll in the game ball guiding area b and win the second winning port 640. The opening time of the electric accessory 640a is set shorter than the time. Fourth, as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol by the main control device 110, if a so-called small hit is selected, which is not a big hit but the V winning device 900 is opened, a special discharge flow provided with the V winning switch 900e4. In order to prevent the game balls from flowing down to the road 900e2, two switching members 900h and staying members 900n are provided. Such a configuration. By using all or a part of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent game balls from entering or passing through various devices in an order other than the proper game order.

  In the fifth control example, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a second winning port 640 (electrically-operated accessory 640 a), a V winning device 900, and a first variable winning device 65 are arranged from the upstream of the flow path of the game ball. (Specific winning opening 65a), but the arrangement of various devices provided on game board 13 may be changed as appropriate. In order to prevent an unexpected situation from occurring due to a game ball entering the second winning opening 640 or the V winning device 900 during the right-hitting jackpot game, a normal symbol starting port (through) (Gate) 67, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 may be provided on the upstream side of the game ball flow path from all or a part of the V winning device 900. With this configuration, during the jackpot game, the launched game ball enters the first variable prize device 65 on the upstream side of the downflow path of the game ball, so that the ball is sent to various devices provided downstream thereof. It is possible to prevent a ball from entering and prevent a game ball from entering or passing into various devices in an order other than the proper game order. In order to prevent this more reliably, the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 provided on the upstream side of the game ball flow-down path is opened, so that the entrance or passage of various devices provided on the downstream side is opened. It is good to block. In the unlikely event that a game ball enters or passes through various devices in an order other than the proper game order, based on detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls provided in various devices and the current game state. It is good to inform. Regarding the content of the notification at that time, when a game ball is detected in the V winning device 900 directly related to the jackpot game in the normal game state, the abnormality notification is made, and in the normal game state, the passing of the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is performed. By changing the state notification and the urgency of the notification when the detection is detected, the game shop clerk can quickly detect a situation that may be disadvantageous for the game hall. In addition, as the abnormality notification, a notification is made with a sound that is louder than the game volume and a signal is also output to the outside. Conceivable.

  Further, in the present control example, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a second winning port 640 (electrically-powered accessory 640 a), a V winning device 900, and a first variable winning device 65 (specifically) from the upstream of the flow path of the game ball. Although the winning opening 65a) is arranged, the V winning device 900 is positioned above the second winning opening 640 (electrically-operated accessory 640a) in order to smoothly enter the game ball into the V winning device 900 during the small hitting game. May be provided. With such a configuration, even if the electric accessory 640a is variably operated and is opened during the small hitting game, it does not affect the entry of the game ball into the V winning device 900. Further, the V winning device may be provided above the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the passing of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 during the small hitting game, so that the electric accessory 640a performs the variable operation during the small hitting game. Can be suppressed, and the entry of the game ball into the V winning device 900 is not affected.

  Further, in this control example, a configuration in which the flow of the game ball is delayed on the game ball rolling surface on the upper portion of the V winning device 900 and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 900f1 is used, and the game ball in the V winning device 900 at the time of the small hit game is used. In addition, for example, a rotating body provided with ten pockets in which one game ball can be placed in a V winning device, one of which is provided on the game board 13. A configuration in which the V-pocket provided with an opening communicating with the special discharge path 900e2, the game ball that entered the 10th ball at the start of the small hitting game is stored in the V-pocket, A configuration may be adopted in which a storage space is provided, and a predetermined number (10) of the game balls stay in the space so that the game balls pass through the V winning switch 900e3 for the first time. Further, a control and configuration may be used in which game balls rolling on the electric accessory 640a are collectively entered into the V winning device 900 by using the forward / backward movement of the electric accessory 640a.

  It should be noted that by setting a limit on the number of times the normal symbols can be shortened, the game balls may smoothly enter the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. More specifically, the normal symbol fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operating time of the electric accessory 640a (for example, 2 seconds) during the time reduction than the fluctuation time (for example, 22 seconds) of the second special symbol whose lottery result is a small hit. The range in which the total time (for example, 5 seconds) is reduced may be set as the number of time savings (the number of time savings is four in the case of the above example). With such a configuration, the time-saving game of the ordinary symbol is completed at the start of the small hitting game, so that the time during which the electric accessory 640a is variably operated during the small hitting game can be shortened. In addition, when the small hitting game is started, control may be performed to extend the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, prohibit the variable operation of the electric accessory 640a, and change the operation to the short-time opening (0.2 seconds). Then, when the reserved memory of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit, the control is performed to extend the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, prohibit the variable operation of the electric accessory 640a, and change it to open for a short period (0.2 seconds). May be performed. In addition, in addition to the control to end the time reduction game internally and return to the normal game, the time reduction of the normal symbol here is to shorten the variation time only for the first predetermined number of times in the time reduction game of the normal symbol, After a predetermined number of times, the variable time is set to be long, or only at the first predetermined number of times, the variable operation time of the electric accessory 640a is set to be long, and after the predetermined number of times, the variable operation time is set to be short, up to a predetermined number of controls. This is a concept including all controls in a state where a game ball easily enters the second winning opening 640.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example has a holding storage function (special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) for holding the lottery of the second special symbol. Since the hold storage is an important configuration for maintaining the playability of the present control example, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example has a plurality of technical configurations for storing the hold storage.

  First, the development of the story displayed in the effect area of the third symbol display device 81 in the time reduction game state is performed based on the winning in the second winning opening 640. Secondly, the variation time of the second special symbol, 10 seconds (FIG. 120D), at which the lottery result during the time reduction game is a small hit, is made longer than the variation time of the ordinary symbol, 3 seconds (S620). Such a configuration. By using all or a part of such a configuration, it is possible to store the pending storage. Note that, in the second configuration described above, in the present control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is fixed regardless of whether or not the time reduction game is being performed, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the time reduction game is other than during the time reduction game ( (During normal game). However, in this case, it is necessary to set the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in which the lottery result during the time-saving game is a small hit to be longer than the normal symbol fluctuation time during the normal game. That is, generally, in the pachinko machine, during the big hit game, the time saving function is canceled and the normal symbol fluctuates in a fluctuating time based on the normal game state. Therefore, in the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game, the electric accessory 640a does not operate unless the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol during the normal game elapses at the maximum, and the game ball can enter the second winning opening. I cannot do it. In the meantime, if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is determined and a large hit occurs via the small hit, a problem that the reserved memory of the second special symbol, which is a feature of this control example, cannot be stored. Will occur. In order to solve such a problem, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol are set to the above-mentioned time.

  In the above description, the change time of the special symbol is set to be longer than the change time of the ordinary symbol, but the change time of the second special symbol and the small hit game (V The total time (until the game ball is detected by the winning switch 900e4) may be set to be longer than the normal symbol fluctuation time during the normal game. This is because during the small hitting game, the player is in a time saving game state. However, in this case, it is necessary to continue the small hitting game for a predetermined period by using a configuration such as retaining the ball flowing down to the special discharge path 900e2 in the V winning device as in this control example. In the event that the number of retained special symbols in the second special symbol becomes 0 during the time reduction game, the first special symbol may start to fluctuate. It is preferable that highlighting is performed so that a hit is performed, or voice guidance is performed using the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the lottery result of the second special symbol includes some big hits and misses, but all of them may be allotted to small hits. By doing so, the reserved storage portion of the special symbol is always a jackpot through the V winning device, so that the speed of the game can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this control example, the first variable prize device 65 (specific prize port 65a) that is opened when a big hit game is played and the V prize device 900 are provided in different configurations. The device 900 may have it. In this case, during the big hit game, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 900 is caused to flow down to the normal discharge channel as shown in FIG. 113 (a) by using the switching member 900h. By doing so, the number of devices can be reduced, and it is possible to reduce cost and space. Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not to provide the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game by using the normal discharge channel 900e1 and the special discharge channel 900e2 in the V winning device 900. In this case, when the game ball flows down to the special discharge channel 900e2, a time saving is given. The switching control of the switching member 900h in this case may be predetermined based on the first special symbol or the lottery of 2, or the discharge flow may be performed by moving the switching member 900h regularly at regular intervals. The road may be switched. Also, a configuration may be used in which it is determined in combination with the technical configuration of the above-described first to fourth control examples whether or not to apply a probability change.

  Further, the number of discharge channels in the V winning device 900 is not limited to two, but may be three or more according to the number of functions. Further, the switching member for switching each discharge channel is not limited to the configuration of the present control example, and may be any configuration that can switch the channels.

  In the present control example, the number of rounds provided by the jackpot based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning switch 900e4 is fixed to 16 rounds. A small (for example, two rounds) jackpot with no time saving may be set. By doing so, it is possible to provide a gaming ability (a so-called time-saving fall function) in which the time-saving is completed without obtaining a large number of payouts. Further, in the present control example, a configuration is adopted in which, when a game ball is thrown into the V prize device 900 which is in an open state during a time-saving game, a big hit is always made. However, it is distributed to a small hit E (see FIG. 119 (C)). May be provided.

  By using each of the above-described configurations, it is possible to add a pattern in which the number of payouts is small and the time saving ends or a pattern in which the time does not become a big hit can be added to the result of the ball being hit into the V winning device 900 during the time saving game, so that the big hit game is obtained. When this happens, the player can feel delighted.

  In addition, in the present control example, the determination as to whether or not to grant the time saving game after the end of the big hit is made based on the small hit type (in the case of the large hit type in the case of writing). Depending on the current playing state (whether or not during the time savings), no time saving is always given after the end of the jackpot, and if a big hit occurs during non-time saving games, a time saving is always given after the end of the jackpot. Alternatively, control may be performed to determine whether or not a time saving is given after the end of the jackpot. Even with such control, it is set based on the lottery result (small hit or miss) of the second special symbol whether or not the time-saving game is given after the big hit.

  It should be noted that the number of lotteries that can hold the second special symbol can be set as appropriate, and various games can be set by changing the number of lottery reservations of the second special symbol and the small hitting lottery probability of the second special symbol. It is possible to have the property.

<Modification of Fifth Control Example>
Hereinafter, a modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this modification, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol that can be held and stored is increased (for example, four), and the probability per special 2 based on the lottery of the second special symbol is reduced (for example, 1/6). 117 (C), the value C1 corresponding to the small hit determination value is reduced, and the number of outliers is increased). By doing so, the guarantee that the special 2 hit occurs twice is lost, but since the lottery of the second special symbol having a higher jackpot expectation than the first special symbol can be received more, it depends on the lottery result. , It is possible to increase the possibility of acquiring a series of villas, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by pre-reading the result of the lottery stored and stored, it is possible to provide a blissful effect for the player, such as a quadruple villa fixed effect.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. In the sixth control example, the detour member 660 is arranged above the first variable winning device 65, and when the game ball is fired (shot right) in the right side of the game area, the door 65f1 is closed. In one case, the difference is that the game ball is configured to roll up to about 12 balls on the opening / closing door 65f1. Further, the first control example is different from the first control example in that the internal configuration of the first variable winning device 65 is changed from that of the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 154 is an enlarged perspective view in which a part of the game board 13 (a part where the detour member 660 is arranged) is enlarged. The detour member 660 is inserted into an opening formed in the game board 13, and is fixed to the game board 13 with screws in a state where a flow path through which game balls can flow down is projected on the front side of the game board 13. . The detour member 660 includes a flow path wall 660a facing the game board 13 in the front-rear direction.

  The flow path wall 660a includes a front flow path wall 660a1 and a rear flow path wall 660a2. The front flow path wall 660a1 and the rear flow path wall 660a2 are Partially connected and integrally formed. As shown in FIG. 154, the front side wall portion 660a1 is arranged with three rearwardly protruding wall portions each separated by an interval of two or more game balls (2.5 game balls in the present control example). ing. Further, the rear side wall portion 660a2 is formed with three protruding wall portions on the front side, and the interval between the respective wall portions is configured similarly to the front side wall portion.

  The front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 are such that the protruding wall portion of the front side wall portion 660a1 is inserted into the center between the protruding wall portions of the rear side wall portion 660a2, and the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 It is arranged at a position where a game ball can pass between them. The detour member 660 has a bottom surface that is slightly inclined downward from right to left, and the bottom surface is closed when the opening and closing door 65f1 is in a closed state, so that a game ball bypasses the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. The road member 660 rolls while meandering in the front-rear direction of the game board 13. Further, a connecting portion 660k that connects the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 at the bottom surface connects the respective wall portions to the rear side wall portion 660a2 from the entrance portion of the detour member 660 and each protruding wall of the front side wall portion 660a1. It is formed as follows. Even when the door 65f1 is in the closed state, the connecting portion 660k slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the door 65f1 to form a step, so that the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the door 65f1 is reduced.

  The rolling speed of the game ball is reduced by the connecting portion 660k, and the game ball is meandered and rolled from the front side to the rear side of the game board 13 by the detour member 660, so that the game ball is placed on the opening / closing door 65f1. Can be increased. In the detour member 660 in the present control example, the distance between the front side wall 660a1 and the rear side wall 660a2 is constituted by 2.5 game balls. Here, two game balls enter the first detour channel portion 660c2 formed by being surrounded by a wall portion protruding from the front side wall portion 660a1 and a wall portion protruding from the rear side wall portion 660a2. It is composed of a channel. Since five similar channels are formed in communication with each other, a maximum of 12 game balls can be rolled in the detour member 660.

  Thereby, when the big hit game is started and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, the game ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 65f1 can be configured to enter the first variable prize device 65. Game balls in a short time. Further, as will be described later, in the first variable winning device 65 in the present control example, each time a game ball passes through the normal discharge channel 65e1 by one ball, the rotating piece 650a is rotated to set the special discharge channel 65e2. The opening piece 650i to be closed is gradually moved in the direction (left direction in FIG. 155) to open the special discharge channel 65e2. When nine game balls pass through the normal discharge channel 65e4, the open piece 650i is moved to a position where the game balls can pass through the special discharge channel 65e2. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened in a state in which nine or more game balls are rolling on the detour member 660, a state in which the game balls can flow down to the special discharge path 65e2 can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to allow the game ball to pass through the probable change switch 65e3, and to impart a probable change game state to the player. As a result, at the timing of the start of the jackpot game, the player moves a large number of game balls from before the start of the jackpot so that a larger number of game balls are rolling on the bypass member 660. The game can be performed so as to be fired toward 660. Therefore, even if it is a big hit game in which the opening time of the opening / closing door 65f1 is set to a short time, the player can cause a large amount of game balls to be consumed and play the game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the profit on the game store side. Furthermore, even if it is a short-time jackpot game, it is possible to increase interest.

  Next, the first variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. In the present control example, a point that the first variable winning device 65 in the first control example is provided with a channel opening device 650 instead of the switching member 65h and the channel solenoid 65k that moves the switching member 65h. Is different.

  Here, the details of the channel opening device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a perspective view showing a schematic view of the channel opening device 650. The flow path opening member 650 includes an opening piece 650i for opening and closing the special discharge flow path 65e2, a spring wire 650h for moving the opening piece 650i, a rotating drum 650b for rotating and winding the spring wire 650h, and a rotating drum 650b. And a movable solenoid 650c for moving a regulating piece 650d for regulating the rotation of the rotating drum 650b in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 155, the opening piece 650i is formed in a door shape so as to close the upstream opening of the special discharge channel 65e2, and is held by the first variable winning device 65 so as to be slidable left and right. Further, one end of a spring wire 650h is attached to one end of the open piece 650i. The spring wire 650h is made of a stainless steel ultrafine wire, and is made up of a coiled spring in the middle. The coil spring 650h is attached so that the opening piece 650i always urges the direction in which the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed. The other end of the coil spring 650h is attached to the wire attachment portion 650f of the rotating drum 650b, and the rotating drum 650b rotates in the direction of winding up the spring wire 650h (the right-hand rotating direction in FIG. 156), so that the spring wire 650h is rotated. The opening piece 650i wound around the rotating drum 650b is pulled by the spring wire 650h, and the opening piece 650i is moved by a predetermined amount.

  The rotating piece 650a is always disposed so as to protrude into the normal discharge channel 65e4. The rotating piece 650a is engaged with the shaft of the rotating drum 650b, and has a one-way clutch structure in which the rotating drum 650b rotates only in the direction of winding up the spring wire 650h. When the game ball comes into contact with the rotating piece 650a and rotates the rotating piece 650a downward (see FIG. 155), the rotating drum 650h is wound up by a predetermined angle (90 degrees in the present control example) by the spring wire 650h. After rotating in the direction, it is configured to rotate and return to a position (a position shown in FIG. 155) before contacting the game ball by an urging force applied to the rotating piece 650a. When the rotating piece 650a is reversed and returned, only the rotating piece 650a is rotated without rotating the rotating drum 650b. As shown in FIG. 156, stopper members 650e1 to e4 protruding rearward (rearward of the pachinko machine 10) are attached to the rotating drum 650b. The stopper members 650e1 to e4 are respectively attached to the outer peripheral side of the rotating drum 650b every 90 degrees. The stopper members 650e1 to e4 are configured to abut on the restricting pieces 650d. When the restricting pieces 650d abut on any of the stopper members 65e1 to e4, the direction opposite to the direction in which the rotating drum 650b winds up the spring wire 650h. Restrict rotation. On the other hand, when the rotating drum 650b rotates in the direction of winding up the spring wire 650h, the regulating piece 650d changes in the rotating direction by contacting the stopper members 650e1 to e4, and the stopper members 65e1 to e4 move to the left of the regulating member 650d. (See FIG. 156), and restricts the rotation in the direction opposite to the direction in which the wire is wound up with the stopper members e1 to e4 positioned on the left side.

  As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the normal discharge flow path 65e4 rotates the rotating piece 650a, and when the rotating drum 650b is rotated by 90 degrees by the rotating piece 650a, the stopper members 650e1 to e4 are restricted. The rotation drum 650h is held at the rotated position by being restricted by the rotation position by 650d. The same operation is repeated as the next game ball flows down the normal discharge channel 65e4, and the spring wire 650h is further wound up by the rotating drum 650b. In the present control example, at the timing when the opening / closing door 65f1 is changed to the closed state, the movable solenoid 650c is also excited, and the regulating member 650d is moved toward the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (in a direction away from the stopper members 650e1 to e4). Accordingly, the engagement between the stopper members 65e1 to e4 and the regulating member 650d is released, the rotating drum 650d is rotated in the direction opposite to the winding direction by the urging force of the spring wire 650h, and the opening piece 650i is moved to the closed position. It is movable by sliding.

  Therefore, in the first variable winning device 65 in the present control example, it is possible to determine whether or not to give a certain change based on the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, even after the big hit game is started, the player can play the game with an interest in whether or not the certain change game is given. In addition, it is possible to vary the rate of giving a certain variation game depending on the opening time of one round of the first variable winning device 65, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the rotating piece 650a is arranged in the normal discharge channel 65e4. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The opening piece 650i may be configured to be movable. With this configuration, at the timing when the tenth game ball enters the ball, the opening piece 650i is in the open state, so that it is possible to easily flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2. Therefore, it is possible to provide a configuration in which a certain change is surely given by entering more balls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the open pieces 650i are configured to be in the open state by winning nine pieces, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured with another number. Further, the present invention is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and the game ball may win the first variable winning device 65, thereby rotating the sprocket, and in the tenth game ball, the winning hole provided on the sprocket may win. It may be configured to face a desired position.

<About the seventh control example>
A seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The seventh control example is different from the first control example in that a continuous chance effect described later, which is not included in the first control example, is executed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description and illustration are omitted.

  First, the continuous chance effect will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present control example, unlike the first control example, the order of the change of the special symbol is changed in the order in which the game balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 and the reserved balls are stored. It is configured to: FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing a maximum of eight retaining balls including the retaining balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the variation pattern selected for each retaining ball. The type is indicated by a symbol. In the seventh control example, in the pre-reading process 2 (FIG. 166, S450), it is possible to determine the type of the selected variation pattern (one of short-range, long-range, reach, super reach, and special reach). Have been.

  In an example in which the reserved balls shown in FIG. 157 (a) are stored, six reserved balls including the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored, and the sixth reserved ball is stored. In this case, a continuous chance effect is set by the winning information processing (S1651 in FIG. 168) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 described later. As will be described in detail later, if the winning information command transmitted when a hold ball is generated from the main control device 110 is a super reach or a special reach, whether or not to execute a continuous chance effect by lottery is determined. Is determined. When it is determined to perform the continuous chance effect, the number of times to execute the continuous chance effect is determined within the range of the already stored ball. The number of times is determined by the number of times including the reserved ball determined to execute the continuous chance (in this example, the sixth reserved ball). For example, if the number of the reserved balls is six as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the lottery is determined by lottery up to six times.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 158 (a) to 159 (a), an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a continuous chance effect will be described. FIG. 158 (a) shows the execution of the continuous chance effect determined by the winning information command for the sixth reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (a). Is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a variable display of a first special symbol when execution of the first special symbol is set.

  In the effect in which the execution of the continuous Chang effect is set, at the start of the change of the special symbol, an effect in which the symbol trembles while the special symbol is still stopped in the previous change display is executed. Then, as a background image, the characters "continuous chance !!" are displayed simultaneously with the change of the special symbol. Here, the symbol ha indicated by five “black circles” displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 indicates the number of currently stored balls. Here, the reserved symbol ha1 is the second reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (a), the reserved symbol ha2 is the third reserved ball, the reserved symbol ha3 is the fourth reserved ball, and the reserved symbol ha4 is the reserved ball. The fifth ball and the reserved symbol ha5 correspond to the sixth retained ball.

  FIG. 158 (b) shows the special symbol stopped after the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special symbol shown in FIG. 158 (a) (the fluctuation corresponding to the first holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (a)) has elapsed. The display mode in the case of displaying is shown. In this continuous chance effect, when a continuous chance effect is also set for the fluctuation with respect to the next pending ball, in the previous continuous chance effect, a combination of specific main symbols called a chance eye (in the present control example, “341” )) Is displayed. In addition, the chance eyes are set with a symbol different from the symbol indicating the big hit (displayed as a double eye), and it is notified that it is out of place. By displaying this chance, the player can not only recognize that the lottery result is out of order, but also recognize that the continuous chance effect is continuously performed for the next change. Then, the character of “continuous chance effect !!” displayed on the background image is continuously displayed even when the change of the special symbol is stopped, and is displayed over the start of the change of the next special symbol.

  FIG. 159 (a) shows an example of a special symbol change display mode corresponding to the hold symbol ha1 (see FIGS. 158 (a) to (b)) which is the change of the second hold shown in FIG. 157 (a). FIG. In FIG. 159 (a), the reserved symbol ha2 is a reserved ball for which the super-reach variation pattern is selected as shown in FIG. 157 (a) (the second reserved ball in FIG. 157 (a)). The display mode when a reach state is reached after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation is shown. Here, since the result of the determination as to whether or not the variation is out of range, the display is stopped and displayed in the out of combination as shown in the special symbol combination shown in FIG. 159 (b).

  Here, returning to FIG. 157 (a), the latent effect in the continuous chance effect will be described. As described above, the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the winning information command corresponding to the sixth reserved ball, and the execution of the continuous chance effect from the first reserved ball is determined. In this case, it is determined based on the first to fifth pieces of prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a whether or not a reserve sphere that is a super reach or a special reach is stored. When the reserved ball that becomes the super reach or the special reach is stored as in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a) (the second reserved ball is the super reach), the continuous chance effect is ended once with the reserved ball. The setting of the effect to make it appear as if it were performed is executed, and one or more consecutive reserved balls among the subsequent reserved balls (in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the third reserved ball to the fifth reserved ball). Is set for a pending ball that performs a latent effect on the ball.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), the latent effect is an effect displayed at the start of the change of the special symbol, in a state where the symbol in the last stop state of the special symbol is stopped, and trembling. . Similarly, at the start of the continuous chance production, after the stop symbol is shaken and displayed, the display indicating that it is a continuous chance production is displayed at the same time as the fluctuation, but in this latent production, the stop symbol is displayed with shaking. After that, even if the change is started, the background display indicating that it is a continuous chance effect is not displayed. By configuring the hiding effect in this way, the player can have an expectation that a continuous chance effect will be started when the stop symbol is displayed trembling. The same effect as the latent effect is configured to be selected and executed even when the execution of the continuous chance effect is not determined or when the normal special symbol changes. Therefore, the player recognizes that the display of the latent production does not necessarily mean that the continuous chance production is always performed in the production of the special symbol corresponding to the holding, and the continuous production of the latent production. Game can be performed in expectation of the execution of the game.

  In FIG. 157 (a), of the third to fifth reserved balls, the fifth reserved ball is obtained by the processing in S1726 of the winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. Up to (the third to fifth reserved balls), execution of the latent effect has been determined (it has been determined). As a result, in the variation of the special symbol for the third to fifth reserved balls, the latent effect shown in FIG. 159 (b) is executed at the start of the variation time. Therefore, although the final fluctuation in the continuous chance production has been deviated by the second holding ball, the player may not start the continuous chance production again, or in fact, the continuous chance production is hidden. You can have the expectation that you will continue just because you are. Then, in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the continuous chance effect is executed again in the variation of the special symbol of the sixth reserved ball.

  In the present control example, the number of times that the latent effect is continuously performed, but there is no guarantee that the continuous chance effect is subsequently performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, three or more latent effects may be continuously performed. In such a case, the configuration may be such that the continuous chance effect is always executed thereafter. With such a configuration, when the hiding effect is executed, the player can be interested in the number of times that the hiding effect has been performed, and this has the effect that the interest can be further improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 157 (b), the number of reserved balls to be established is determined after the reserved ball that triggered the execution of the continuous chance effect, and the number of reserved balls is set to the maximum. A description will be given of a case where the execution of the latent effect is set. In the example shown in FIG. 157 (b), six reserved balls have been established, and the winning information command output when the sixth reserved ball has been established provides a continuous chance effect from the third reserved ball. This shows a case where execution is determined. FIG. 157 (c) shows a case in which the digestion of the reserved ball has progressed from the state of FIG. 157 (b), and the third reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (b) has been shifted to the first reserved ball. This is the state shown. In this state, at the timing when the first reserved ball (the first reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (c)) starts to change, the reserved ball (FIG. 157 (c) In), the number of executions of the concealment effect is determined by maximizing the number of retained balls established after the fourth retained ball). In this case, the latent effect is executed with the number of consecutive times in which the above-described latent effect is determined for the fluctuation of the retained ball that has been changed after the fourth variation of the retained ball has been completed.

  Thereby, even after the final change in the continuous chance effect (in this control example, the change of the special symbol for the fourth holding ball) is completed, the latent effect is executed, so that the continuous chance effect is further continued. We can expect that we are doing it. Furthermore, since the latent production is configured to be executed within the range of the reserved ball established at the start of the first continuous chance production, the super reach or special reach of the winning ball to the established reserved ball is won. The fluctuation is stored, and it can be expected that a continuous chance effect or a latent effect is being executed.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of the present control example, super-reach or special reach is performed on a reserved ball established at the start variation of the continuous chance production (reserved ball stored after the final variation of the continuous chance production). If there is, set to execute the latent effect of the pending ball up to the change, and perform the continuous chance effect again with the change of super reach or special reach, so that the player can have more latent effect It is possible to increase the expectation of the continuous chance effect when displayed. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the continuous chance effect is started with the reserved ball stored before the reserved ball that becomes the special reach or the super reach.

  In the present control example, the notification mode is configured to be displayed in the background with respect to the continuous chance effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific character may be displayed. The color may be changed to a different color, or the type of BGM or a special sound effect may be output. Furthermore, the chance eyes displayed in the continuous chance effect are not limited to the configuration of the present control example, but may be other combinations, and may be variably displayed as a non-normal symbol, for example, a symbol of “continuation”. It may be configured so as to be variably displayed on a symbol such as a character, and may be appropriately changed in a special disengagement mode (big hit (double-eye) , Etc.) may be configured to be displayed in a different form).

  Next, an electrical configuration in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163. Only the differences from the first control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the first control example are changed, and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are changed. The difference is that it has been changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The details of the variation pattern selection table 202a in the present control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (c). First, with reference to FIG. 160, the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example will be described. The ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the 113 MPU 221 will be described. FIG. 160A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The ROM 222 in the seventh control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a continuous chance count table 222d and a latent count table 222e are added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The continuous chance count table 222d in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. This continuous chance count table 222d is different from the winning continuous chance count table 202d (see FIG. 162 (a)) which is referred to when the win / fail determination result indicated by the received winning information command is a win. It is composed of a consecutive chance count table 222d for departure referred to in a certain case (see FIG. 162 (b)). The continuous chance number table 222d is a data table for determining whether or not to execute the continuous chance effect, and for determining the number of times to execute the continuous chance effect.

  FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning consecutive chance count table 222d. In the winning consecutive chance count table 222d, the continuous chance effect is not executed for each current reserved ball count, and the current reserved ball count is set as a maximum value. ) Are set. When the number of reserved balls is one, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), a value of “0 to 160” is set as the determination value of the content of determination that the continuous chance effect is not executed. Then, the determination values “161 to 198” are set as the determination values for one continuous chance effect. Here, based on the obtained value of the number-of-times determination counter 223n, the determination content set to the matching determination value is selected by collating with the determination value of the consecutive chance number table 222d. Here, if the non-execution is selected, the continuous chance effect is not executed. When the number of times of one continuous chance effect is determined, a continuous chance effect is set for the execution of the first reserved ball. The number of executions set in the continuous chance number table 222d is the holding ball that triggered whether or not to execute the continuous chance effect (the sixth holding ball in the example of FIG. 157 (a)). Indicates the number of the reserved balls that are continuously stored before that. For example, when the lottery of the continuous chance effect is executed for the sixth holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (a), and the number of times of execution is selected by the continuous chance number table 222d, three pieces are executed. A continuous chance effect is started from the eye's reserved ball, and a continuous chance effect is continuously performed up to the sixth reserved ball.

  Similarly, the reference value to be referred to is set from the continuous chance count table 222d based on the number of balls retained when the winning information command is received. In the present control example, it is set so that the greater the number of reserved balls at the time of receiving the winning command, the more easily the continuous chance effect is executed. Further, as is apparent from comparison with the consecutive chance count table 222d for departure shown in FIG. 162 (b), when the result of the hit determination is a hit, the continuous chance effect is produced for all the reserved balls. Is set to have a high probability of being executed. Accordingly, the execution of the continuous chance effect is easily set for the winning information command indicating the super reach or the special reach in which the result of the determination is a hit. Furthermore, since the continuous chance effect is set to be more easily determined as the number of the retained balls is larger, the continuous chance effect is more easily performed for a change in a larger number of the retained balls, and the player is also able to perform the change for the deviation. Can play games with a high expectation of jackpots.

  In addition, as shown in the consecutive chance count table 222d for departure, even when the number of reserved balls is six or more, if the result of determination as to whether or not a hit is deviated, a maximum of six consecutive chance effects are produced. The judgment value has been set. Thus, when the sixth consecutive chance effect is started, the player can recognize early that the result of the determination as to whether or not the hit is a big hit by continuing the first consecutive chance effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of consecutive chance effects, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 163, a description will be given of the latency count lottery table 222e in the seventh control example. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latency count lottery table 222e. When the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the above-mentioned continuous chance number table 222d, the latent number lottery table 222e indicates a lottery opportunity of the continuous chance effect among the reserved balls corresponding to the determined number of consecutive chance effects. It is determined whether or not the reserved ball other than the reserved ball (retained ball that becomes the super reach or the special reach) stores the reserved ball that becomes the super reach or the special reach, and becomes the super reach or the special reach. It is a lottery table for determining the number of times the latent effect is executed with the reserved ball and the reserved ball up to the reserved ball that triggered the continuous chance production when the reserved ball is stored.

  In the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), when the sixth reserved ball is established, a continuous chance effect of six executions is determined, and the first to sixth reserved balls are used for the continuous chance. It is determined that the effect is performed. Therefore, if it is determined whether the first to fifth reserved balls have a super-reach or special reach ball, in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the second reserved ball is a super-reach or special reach. Therefore, it is possible to execute a maximum of three latent effects from the third reserved ball to the fifth reserved ball. Here, with reference to the latent frequency lottery table 222e, the content of the table to be selected is set for each of the hit determination results for the sixth retained ball, and the latent frequency described later for each maximum latent frequency. A determination value corresponding to the decision counter 223o is set. In the example of FIG. 157 (a), assuming that the hit determination result of the sixth retained ball is a hit, the determination value of the maximum number of latencies of 3 in the hit table content is referred to. Here, if the value of the acquired latency counter 223o is "0 to 50", the latency is one, if "51 to 149" is two, the latency is two, if "150 to 198", the latency is three. Times are set. Here, when the number of times of concealment is determined twice, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), the continuous chance effect of the third and fourth reserved balls is not executed, and the above-described concealment effect is executed. Is done. The continuous chance effect is started again with the fifth reserved ball, and is continuously executed up to the sixth reserved ball. In addition, the number of latent effects after the continuous chance effect shown in FIG. 157 (c) is similarly determined by the latent frequency lottery table 222e. In addition, the holding ball (in the example of FIG. 157 (c), which corresponds to the fourth holding ball) and the holding ball (in the example of FIG. If there is no reserved ball that becomes a super-reach or a special reach in the (reserved balls of the 7th to 7th), the table contents corresponding to the departure from the latent frequency lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) are referred to.

  In the latent frequency lottery table 222e, as shown in FIG. 163, when the result of the hit determination is out of the range, the latent performance is limited to a maximum of three latent performances regardless of the number of reserve balls that can be hidden. I have. Thus, when the third latent effect is executed, the player can recognize that if the latent effect is executed in the next holding ball, a big hit will be made in the subsequent consecutive chance effect. Therefore, the player can be interested in the continuous number of the hidden effects, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the seventh control example. The RAM 223 in the seventh control example is different from the first control example in that a number-of-times determination counter 223n, a latent number of times determination counter 223o, and a continuous chance storage area 223p are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The number-of-times determination counter 223n is a counter for determining the number of times of execution, non-execution, and execution of the continuous chance effect. The number-of-times determination counter 223n is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although illustration is omitted, the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 adds and updates one by one at predetermined intervals. Note that the effect counter 223f and the latent frequency determination counter 223o described later are set to have different update periods, and are configured not to be synchronized. The number-of-times determination counter 223n is programmed to start updating from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

  The concealment frequency determination counter 223o is a counter for determining the number of times of performing the concealment production in the continuous chance production from the concealment frequency lottery table 222e (FIG. 163). The latency count determination counter 223o is a counter that is repeatedly added and updated one by one in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated at predetermined intervals by a main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. It is added and updated one by one. The latency count determination counter 223o is programmed to start updating from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

  The continuous chance storage area 223p is a storage area for storing data indicating the content of the effect to be performed for each reserved ball when the continuous chance effect is executed. The continuous chance storage area 223p includes a storage area corresponding to eight reserved balls and one execution area. When the continuous chance effect is determined, the data representing the determined effect is stored in the area of the corresponding reserved ball, and is shifted to the area corresponding to the previous reserved ball as the reserved ball is consumed. The ball that starts to fluctuate is shifted to the execution area. Thereby, the continuous chance effect can be reliably executed.

  The continuous chance storage area 223p is configured to be backed up at the time of power failure, and is restored to the state at the time of power failure when the power is turned on again. Therefore, even if a power interruption occurs, the continuous chance effect can be continuously executed.

  Next, the variation pattern selection table 202b set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern table 202d is a data table used to determine the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. A plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined in the variation pattern table 202d. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161, the variation pattern table 202d1 for the jackpot (see FIG. 161 (a)), the variation pattern table 202d2 for the removal (normal) (see FIG. 161 (b)), and the variation pattern table 202 At least a (variable) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 161 (c)) is defined. Although illustration is omitted, a variation pattern table and the like in the time-saving gaming state are also set.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds) are “0 to 50”, and the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds) are “51 to 179” and various special reach (90 seconds). As for the fluctuation pattern of (1), “180 to 198” are set as the judgment values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a variation pattern in which a special symbol lottery result is a big hit, determines the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1 is set to the big hit. Is selected from the change pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 161 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type of the fluctuation pattern to be selected (the fluctuation time) is set when the special symbol lottery result is out of order. If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", out of reach is set.

  Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is completely out of range, a short out (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long out (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  Also, for the out-of-reach, “0-149” is set for the out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), and “150-197” is set for the out-of-range super reach (60 seconds). For each type (90 seconds), “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal game state, and obtains the fluctuation obtained from the out-of-office (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 161 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be released when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 differs in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by a stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "90-99", the out-of-reach is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal game state is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from being prolonged at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot is prolonged from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is prolonged in the probable change game state in which the big hit is likely to occur and the player feels bored.

  In this control example, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is configured as described above, and the timing fluctuation type counter CS1 in which the game ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to determine before the start of the change up to the change type selected at the time of winning. Further, the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the present control example. Even when the change type selected according to the number of reserved balls at the start of the change is different as shown in the first control example, the change type assigned to the super reach or the like may be used. By assigning the value of the counter CS1 to a constant value even when the number of reserved balls is variable, it is possible to determine the type of change at the time of winning.

<Control Process of Main Control Device 110 in Seventh Control Example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 166. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example is different from the first control example in that the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) is replaced with the special symbol variation process (FIG. 164, S104). The difference is that the start-on processing (FIG. 66, S105) is changed to the start-on winning processing (FIG. 165, S105). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 164, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the content of the special symbol change process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 164, S104) in the seventh control example is different from the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) in the first control example in that the processes of S203 to S204 and S208 to S209 are S250 to S252. In that the processing has been changed to Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S202: No), the process of S250 is executed. In the processing of S250, it is determined with reference to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b whether or not the reserved sphere having the reserved order of 1 is stored (S251). Although details will be described later, in the seventh control example, when the first prize port 64 or the second prize port 640 is won, the change of the special symbol is started in a winning order in which both are won. I have. Note that the maximum number of holdings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four as in the first control example. When a reserved ball is generated, it is stored in the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and in that case, information indicating a winning order is stored. In this winning order, an order obtained by adding 1 to the total winning number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stored. Then, based on the one-ball digestion (change start) of the reserved ball, the winning order is also subtracted by one and updated.

  In the processing of S251, it is determined whether the winning order determined in S250 is the second special symbol (second winning opening 640) (S251). Here, if the winning order stored in the reserved area 1 stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a is 0, it is determined that the second special symbol is the winning order in which the fluctuation starts next. You. If it is determined that the order of the next change start is the second special symbol by the processing of S251 (S251: Yes), the processing of S205 is executed. Note that the processes in S205 to S207 are the same as those in the first control example, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S251, when it is determined that the order of the next variation start is not the second special symbol (S251: No), it is determined whether the order of the next variation start is the first special symbol (S252). Next, when it is determined that the winning order in which the change starts is the first special symbol (S252: Yes), the process of S210 is executed. Since the processes in S210 to S212 are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the winning order is not the first special symbol, that is, that the reserved ball is not stored (S252: No), the process ends. Other processing is omitted for the first control example.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165, a description will be given of the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 165) in the seventh control example is different from the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 66) in the first control example in that the process of S406 is replaced with S420 and the process of S412 is replaced with S430. And the pre-reading process (S413) is changed to the pre-reading process 2 (S450). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the processing of S420 and S430, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is added to the first control example, and the value obtained by adding 1 to the sum of the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is added. The difference is that the information of the winning order is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. With this configuration, in the present control example, when a prize is won, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired, so that the variation type (short or long, long) selected by the prefetch processing 2 (FIG. 166, S450) described later. Out of the vehicle, any of normal reach, super reach, and special reach), and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning information command.

  If No is determined in the process of S407 or after the process of S430 is performed, the pre-read process 2 is performed (S450). After executing the prefetching process 2 (S450), the process ends.

  This prefetching process 2 (S450) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the content of the prefetching process 2 (S450). The prefetch process 2 (S450 in FIG. 166) in the seventh control example is different from the prefetch process (S413 in FIG. 67) in that the process in S510 is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the processing of S503 or S504 is executed, the processing of S510 is executed. In the process of S510, the variation pattern is determined based on the lottery result (win / fail determination) based on the winning information (each counter value) acquired in S503 or S504 and the acquired values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1. The type of change selected from the selection table 202d is determined (S510). Thereafter, a winning information command indicating the jackpot determination result and the variation type determined in S510 is set.

  As described above, in the present control example, it is also possible to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the selected change type by the winning information command. Therefore, in the present control example, it is possible to execute a continuous chance effect, which is a special effect that spans a plurality of changes, triggered by the storage of the reserved ball on which the specific change pattern is executed by the sound lamp control device 113. . In the present embodiment, the main controller 110 pre-reads and determines the variation type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A winning information command indicating information on each acquired counter value is set, and the sound lamp controller 113 Each data that can be determined may be set, and the type of change or the like may be determined.

<Regarding Control Process by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Seventh Control Example>
With reference to FIGS. 167 to 170, a description will be given of a control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example. In the seventh control example, the command determination processing (FIG. 81, S1511) is different from the first control example in the command determination processing 3 (FIG. 167, S1540), and the variable display setting processing (FIG. 82, S1512) is variable display. The difference is that the setting process is changed to the setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550). As for the other processes, the same processes as those in the first control example are executed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The command determination process 3 (S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination processing 3 (S1540). The command determination process 3 (S1540 in FIG. 167) in the seventh control example is different from the command determination process (S1511 in FIG. 81) in that the processes of S1650 to S1651 are added. . As for the other processes, the same processes as those in the first control example are executed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  If it is determined that the notification command has not been received in the process of S1609 (S1609: No), the process of S1650 is executed. In the process of S1650, it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from main controller 110 (S1650). When a winning information command is received (S1650: Yes), winning information processing is executed (S1651). After executing the winning information processing, the processing of S1619 is executed.

  Here, the winning information processing (S1651) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information processing (S1651). In this winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651), first, it is determined whether or not a continuous chance effect is being set (S1721). It is determined whether or not the continuous chance effect is being set, when it is determined that the continuous chance effect is set to determine whether or not the information on the continuous chance effect is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p (S1721: Yes). , And this process ends. As described above, since a new continuous chance effect is not set while the continuous chance effect is set, it is possible to suppress such a problem that the effect is overwritten during the execution of the continuous chance effect. .

  In the process of S1721, if it is determined that the continuous chance effect is not set (S1721: No), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a winning information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722). . If the received winning information command is not a winning information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1722 that the received prize information command is a prize information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722: Yes), the values of the number-of-times determination counter 223n and the latent number of times determination counter 223o are changed. It is acquired (S1724).

  Based on the acquired number determination counter 223n, the received prize information command, and the current number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to the received prize information command), the continuous chance number table 222d (FIGS. 162 (a) to (b)). ) (Information on the number of times of execution or non-execution) is obtained (determined). The information acquired in S1724 determines whether or not the number of executions of the continuous chance effect, that is, whether or not it is the execution of the continuous chance effect (S1725). If the execution of the continuous chance effect has not been determined (S1725: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1726 that the execution of the continuous chance effect has been determined (S1725: Yes), the hold ball corresponding to the determined number of consecutive chance effects becomes super reach or special reach. It is determined from the winning information storage area 223a whether or not the holding ball (excluding the holding ball that has received the winning information command (the remaining ball that becomes the final change of the continuous chance effect) is stored (S1726). Although illustration is omitted, similarly to the first control example, when a prize information command is received, data corresponding to the information indicated by the received prize information command is stored in the prize information storage area 223a corresponding to the reserved ball. Is done. Note that, with the expiration of the reserved ball, the data is shifted to the area of the corresponding retained ball, and the data of the winning information corresponding to the next reserved ball is overwritten when the fluctuation starts.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1726 that the reserved ball serving as the super reach or the special reach is not stored, the processing of S1728 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1726, when it is determined that there is a reserved ball that becomes a super reach or a special reach (S1726: Yes), the winning / non-permission determination result indicated by the winning information command received from the latent number lottery table 222e, the processing of S1726 In the processing of S1723, the number of concealable times, which is the number of reserved balls up to the reserved ball stored immediately before the reserved ball corresponding to the winning information command received from the reserved ball that is the super reach or the special reach determined in step S1723, The number of latencies is determined based on the value of the acquired latency number determination counter 223o (S1727). Thereafter, based on the determined content of the continuous chance effect, the effect to be executed for each Ryukyu ball is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p for each holding ball. In the continuous chance storage area 223p, storage areas are respectively set corresponding to the eight reserved balls, and for each reserved ball, the start of the continuous chance effect, the end of the continuous chance effect, the hidden effect, the continuous effect, and the like. Data that can identify a re-entry of a chance effect or the like is stored (S1728). Each data stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p is shifted to an area corresponding to the corresponding reserved ball every time the reserved ball is consumed. When the continuous chance effect ends, all the stored data is cleared, so it can be determined whether or not the continuous chance effect has been set based on whether data is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p. When the processing in S1728 is executed, this processing ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S1550). In the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) in the seventh control example, a rear latency setting process (S1750) is added to the variable display setting process (FIG. 82, S151) in the first control example. Differ in that Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the processing of S1709 is performed, the subsequent latency setting processing is performed (S1750). Note that the subsequent latency setting process (S1750) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the contents of the subsequent latency setting process (S1750).

  In the rear latency setting process (FIG. 170, S1750), first, it is determined whether or not the start variation of the continuous chance effect is based on the data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p (S1751). Here, it is determined whether or not the data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p corresponding to the suspended ball that starts to fluctuate is data indicating the start of the continuous chance effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S1751 that the start chance of the continuous chance effect has not been changed (S1751: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start fluctuation of the continuous chance effect (S1751: Yes), the information of the current reserved ball is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a (S1752). With respect to the acquired information on the reserved balls, it is determined whether or not the reserved balls that are super-reach or special reach are stored with respect to the reserved balls stored after the final change of the continuous chance effect (S1753). When it is determined that the reserved ball serving as the super-reach or the special reach is stored (S1753: Yes), the reserved ball stored next to the reserved ball corresponding to the final variation of the continuous chance effect is superimposed. The number of reserves up to the reserve ball stored immediately before the reserve ball serving as the reach or the special reach is determined as the maximum value (the number of latent times) (S1754). Based on the value of the concealment number determination counter 223o and the value of the value, the result of determining whether or not the ball is a super reach or a special reach, and the number of concealable times determined in S1754, the number of concealment times is determined from the number of concealment lottery table 222e. Is determined (S1755). Based on the number of times of hiding determined in S1755, a continuous chance effect is determined. Here, the reserved balls for performing the continuous chance effect are set from the reserved balls stored after the reserved balls for the number of times of concealment to the reserved balls that become the super reach or the special reach. After the processing of S1756, the processing of S1758 is executed.

  In the processing of S1753, when it is determined that there is no reserved ball that becomes a super reach or a special reach (S1753: No), the value of the number-of-latency determination counter 223o is obtained and stored after the final change of the value and the continuous chance effect. The number of concealment is determined from the number of concealment lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) based on the number of possible concealment that is the number of reserved balls (S1775). Thereafter, the processing of S1758 is executed. In the process of S1775, the number of times of concealment is determined based on the data for which the result of the determination as to whether or not the hit is out of order.

  In the processing of S1758, it is set in the continuous chance storage area 223p based on the information of the continuous chance effect and the latent effect determined in the processes of S1755 to S1756 and S1775 (S1758). After that, this processing ends.

  As described above, even at the start of the continuous chance production, a latent production and a new continuous production are set for the held ball that has been established from the time the decision is made until the start, so that the player has a variety of continuous productions. You can entertain the production. In addition, the continuous chance effect is an effect that is performed in advance with respect to the fluctuation display of a plurality of continuous reserved balls by reading the determination result of the established reserved ball in advance. With this, when the continuous chance production is started, the reserved ball that is a super reach or a special reach is established among the retained balls established at that time, and the lottery result is not a hit. Have the expectation that Here, in the present control example, since the continuous chance effect and the latent effect are set for the reserved ball established at the start timing of the continuous chance effect, the player is expected to have more reserved balls. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to continuously maintain expectations with respect to the hiding effect on the reserved ball after the end of the continuous chance effect.

  In the present control example, the latent effect is an effect of shaking the design. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute a sound effect, display of a character, or the like at the start of a change. Further, the special symbol pattern or the like may be changed to a different pattern from the normal pattern and displayed.

<Eighth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 177. The eighth control example is different from the first control example in that the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is changed according to the type of jackpot.

  More specifically, in this control example, the external output terminal plate 261 has an accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on based on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a jackpot 1 terminal for indicating a jackpot state or type. Is provided.

  Then, when the jackpot based on the jackpot F (16R probability variable lottery existence / hour savings jackpot) is executed, at the time when the jackpot game is started, one jackpot of the external output terminal board 261 is off, When the game ball passes through the certainty changing switch 65e3, control is performed so that one jackpot terminal is turned on. On the other hand, when the jackpot based on the jackpot G (16R probability variable lottery no / time saving jackpot) is executed, one jackpot of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on at the time when the jackpot game is started. In addition, when a jackpot based on the jackpot H (16R probability variable lottery no / time saving no jackpot) is executed, one jackpot terminal is controlled to remain off. Furthermore, regardless of these jackpot types, when a jackpot game is executed, control is performed such that the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of each jackpot game (see FIGS. 174 and 175).

  Therefore, the hall computer 262 which detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261 compares the timing of turning on each of the signal of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the signal of one jackpot to obtain the big hit. The type can be determined. Thereby, the jackpot type can be determined in the hall computer 262 without providing the terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 for each jackpot type (jackpot F, G, H), and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine is reduced. Can be.

  In the present control example, the configuration described above is added to the first control example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be added to each control example described above. In the following description, differences from the first control example will be described. The same parts as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine in Eighth Control Example>
First, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The eighth control example is different from the first control example in that the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 is provided with an external output terminal board 261. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same part is omitted.

  In this control example, an external output terminal board 261 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. The external output terminal plate 261 is provided with at least one of an accessory continuous operation terminal, one jackpot, and two jackpots.

  The accessory continuous operation terminal is a terminal indicating whether or not the continuous bonus item operation device is operated and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened and closed, that is, a period in which the jackpot game is being executed. When the accessory continuous operation terminal is on, it indicates a period during which the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened and closed, that is, a period during which the jackpot game is executed, and when it is off, the other period (the jackpot game) Is not executed). This accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON when it is determined in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 that the jackpot game has been started (see S7002 in FIG. 177). When it is determined that the big hit game is ended, the game is set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

  The jackpot 1 terminal is a terminal indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being performed. When it is on, it indicates that a jackpot game is being performed, and when it is off, it indicates that a jackpot game is not being performed. However, unlike the above-described jackpot continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal is not set to ON at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability change lottery with time savings jackpot) and the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3. Is set to ON when passing through.

  Specifically, the jackpot 1 terminal is determined to be a jackpot game in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), and the jackpot related to the jackpot game When it is determined that the type is the jackpot G (S7003 in FIG. 177: Yes), one jackpot terminal is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177). When it is determined (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177) and the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is the jackpot F (S7003 in FIG. 177: No), it is further determined that the probability change setting flag 203h is on. In this case (S7005 in FIG. 177: Yes), it is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when it is determined that the big hit game is finished (S7001: No in FIG. 177), the game is set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

  The jackpot 2 terminal is a terminal indicating whether the state of the gaming machine is any of a jackpot game state, a probable change game state, and a time saving game state, which are advantageous for the player. In some cases, this indicates an advantageous state for the player described above, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not. However, like the jackpot 1 terminal described above, the jackpot is not set to ON at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability change lottery / time saving jackpot), and is set to ON when the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3. Is what is done.

  Specifically, in the external output process executed in the main process of the main control device 110, the jackpot two terminals are determined to be in a jackpot game (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), and the jackpot related to the jackpot game is determined. When it is determined that the type is the jackpot G (S7003 in FIG. 177: Yes), two jackpots are set to ON (S7004 in FIG. 177). In this process, if it is determined that a jackpot game is being played (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), and if the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is the jackpot F (S7003 in FIG. 177: No), furthermore, When it is determined that the probable change setting flag 203h is on (S7005 in FIG. 177: Yes), it is set on (see S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when it is determined that the probable change state or the time saving state, which is an advantageous state for the player, has been completed (S7008: No in FIG. 177), it is set to off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  The external output terminal board 261 is provided with other terminals (for example, a prize ball terminal or the like), and outputs signals output from the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111. Reception is enabled. The other terminals are configured so that the received signal can be detected by the hall computer 262, and are already known configurations, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110.

  FIG. 172 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. For the first control example described above, a first hit type selection table 202f for selecting a big hit type is shown. Is newly provided. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same part is omitted.

  In the present control example, unlike the above-described first control example, a jackpot F, a jackpot G, and a jackpot H are provided as types of jackpots. These jackpot types are a first jackpot type selection table 202f (see FIG. 172 (b)) in which a jackpot F and a jackpot G jackpot H are respectively selectable, and a first jackpot type counter value C2. And is selected based on

  The details of the first hit type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the first hit type selection table 202f and the first hit type counter value C2. In the first hit type selection table 202f, the value "0-33" of the first hit type counter C2 is determined as the jackpot F determination value, "34-66" is determined as the jackpot G determination value, and the jackpot H determination value is determined. “67 to 99” is set. In the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 65) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery result is obtained (see S303 in FIG. 65), and the first hit type selection table 202f and The big hit type is selected based on the first hit type counter value C2. The big hit game is executed based on the big hit type selected here.

  In the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability change lottery with time savings jackpot), the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the jackpot game, and the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a becomes a jackpot that can pass to the probability change switch 65e3. ing. Based on the passing of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change game is provided after the end of the jackpot game. Also, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot G (16R probability change lottery no / time savings jackpot), the flow path solenoid 65k does not operate in the jackpot game, and the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a enters the probability change switch 65e3. There is no jackpot. After the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot G, a time reduction game is provided. Further, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot H (16R probability change lottery no / time saving no jackpot), similarly to the jackpot G described above, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a does not enter the probability change switch 65e3. It is. Further, after the end of the big hit game based on the big hit H, the time-saving game is not given and the game shifts to the normal game state.

  Furthermore, the special jackpot type selected here is referred to when the lottery result is determined to be a large jackpot at the time of stoppage of the fluctuation (S216: Yes in FIG. 176) in the special symbol variation process of the main controller 110, and the large jackpot type is determined. , An opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set (see S217 in FIG. 176), or stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260 in FIG. 176), and referred to in an external output process (see FIG. 177) described later. Or will be.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of RAM 203 of main controller 110. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example is different from the RAM 203 of the first control example in that a jackpot type storage area 203α is provided. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same part is omitted.

  The jackpot type storage area 203α is for determining the jackpot type related to the jackpot game being executed, and stores a value corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot F, G, H). The jackpot type storage area 203α is set when the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol change process (FIG. 176) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 (FIG. 176). (See S260 in FIG. 176).

  Then, it is referred to in the external output processing executed in the main processing of the main control device 110, and when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot F and not the jackpot G (S7003 in FIG. 177: No), the probability change setting flag 203h Is ON (S7005 in FIG. 177: Yes), the output of the V winning terminal, one jackpot, and two jackpots of the external output terminal board 261 is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 176). On the other hand, in the process, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot G (S7003 in FIG. 176: Yes), the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is set to ON as it is (FIG. 177). See S7004). When the jackpot type is the jackpot H, it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot G, similarly to the case where the jackpot type is the jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177). However, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot H, since the game ball does not pass through the probability change winning switch 65e3 and the probability change setting flag 203h is not turned on (S7005: No in FIG. 177), the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot The two terminals are not set to ON.

  Therefore, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to determine the type of the jackpot game by comparing the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal plate 261 with the output of the jackpot 1 terminal. Become. Specifically, when both the jackpot continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, it can be determined that the jackpot is the G jackpot, while the jackpot continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game. If the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that the jackpot F or the jackpot H is set, and during the jackpot game, the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on the V prize (the passing of the game ball to the probability changing switch 65e3). If it is, it can be determined to be a jackpot F. On the other hand, if there is no V winning (passing of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game and one jackpot terminal is not turned on, it is determined to be a jackpot H. it can. The jackpot continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal may be compared to determine the jackpot type of the jackpot game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the relationship between the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 174 is a timing chart showing the gaming state of the gaming machine, the passing state of the gaming ball of the probability changing switch 65e3, and the state of the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261.

  FIG. 174 (a) shows the gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 and the passing state of the game ball of the positive change switch 65e3 when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. 4 is a timing chart showing outputs of one jackpot and two jackpots of the external output terminal plate 261.

  Specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are in an off state. Then, when the jackpot game in which the gaming state of the gaming machine is based on the jackpot G is started, in the external output process (see FIG. 177) described later, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to ON. . Thereafter, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G ends, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the time saving state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to off in an external output process described later. (See S7007 in FIG. 177). When the time-saving game ends, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state, and the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  Next, referring to FIG. 174 (b), when the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 and the change of the probability change switch 65e3 are set. It is the timing chart which showed the passing state of a game ball, and the output of one jackpot and two jackpots of the external output terminal board 261. When the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is turned on at the time when the jackpot game is started, as compared with the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. And the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to ON when the game ball passes the probability changing switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (at the time of winning the V).

  More specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the continuous operation terminal for the accessory, one jackpot terminal, and two jackpot terminals of the external output terminal plate 261 are off. Then, when the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot F, the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON in the external output processing described later (see S7002 in FIG. 177). Then, during the jackpot game, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 are set to ON based on the passing of the game ball through the probability changing switch 65e3 (see S7004 in FIG. 177). Thereafter, similarly to the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed, the jackpot game ends and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177), and the probability change provided after the jackpot game ends. When the game is over, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state, and the jackpot 2 terminal is set off (see S7010 in FIG. 177).

  When the jackpot game based on the jackpot H is executed, when the state of the gaming machine becomes the jackpot game state, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, while the game ball passes through the positive change switch 65e3. Therefore, the output of one jackpot terminal and two jackpot terminals remains off. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In the jackpot H, since the probability change game or the time saving game is not given after the execution of the jackpot game, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to be off (see FIG. 175 (b)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175, a case where the jackpot game is continuously executed will be described. FIG. 175 shows the gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the continuous action terminal of the accessory on the external output terminal plate 261, the passing state of the game ball of the positive change switch 65 e 3, and the external output when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. It is the timing chart which showed the output of one big hit and two big hits of the terminal board 261.

  FIG. 175 (a) is a timing chart in a case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed, and FIG. 175 (b) is a jackpot based on each jackpot type in the order of the jackpot H, the jackpot G, and the jackpot F. It is a timing chart in a case where a game is continuously performed.

  First, a case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal gaming state, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminals of the external output terminal board 261 are all set to off. Thereafter, when the lottery result is a jackpot G jackpot and a jackpot game based on the jackpot G is started, all the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to ON (FIG. 177). See S7002 and S7004). Thereafter, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is finished, the time saving game is given, and the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the jackpot game ends. Later, a time-saving game is provided, and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the time-saving game state. Therefore, the jackpot 2 terminal is not set to OFF, and the ON signal is continuously output.

  Then, during the execution of the time-saving game, the jackpot G becomes a jackpot again, and when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON, and the jackpot 2 terminal also continues. It is set to ON (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). After that, when the jackpot game to be executed again is completed, the time saving game is provided, and the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the jackpot 2 terminal is An ON signal is continuously output without being set to OFF. Then, during the execution of the time-saving game, the jackpot does not become a big hit, and when the time-saving game ends, the game shifts to the normal game state and the output of the two jackpots is turned off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175 (b), a case where the jackpot game based on each jackpot type is sequentially executed in the order of the jackpot H, the jackpot G, and the jackpot F will be described. In the normal gaming state, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are all set to off. Thereafter, when the lottery result is a jackpot of the jackpot H, and the jackpot game based on the jackpot H is executed (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177). On the other hand, the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are not set to ON, but remain OFF (S7005: No in FIG. 177). Then, when the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In the jackpot H, since the probability change game or the time saving game is not given after the execution of the jackpot game, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to be off (see FIG. 175 (b)).

  Thereafter, the lottery result is the jackpot G, and when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed (S7001: Yes, S7003: Yes in FIG. 177), the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal is output. It is set to ON (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is finished, a time-saving game is provided, and the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and one jackpot terminal is set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). On the other hand, since the gaming state of the gaming machine is the time-saving gaming state, the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is not set to OFF, and the output remains ON. Thereafter, during the execution of the time-saving game, the jackpot of the jackpot F is achieved. When the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177), and the jackpot 2 terminal is continued. Will be set to on.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177), and the probability change game is provided after the end of the jackpot game. When the jackpot game ends, the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to OFF (S7007 in FIG. 177). On the other hand, after the jackpot game ends, a positive change game is given, so Is not turned off and remains on. Thereafter, when the probable change game ends, the game shifts to the normal game, and the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is set to off.

  As described above, in the present control example, the output timing of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal plate 261 and the output timing of the jackpot 1 terminal are different depending on the jackpot type. This makes it possible to determine the type of the jackpot game by comparing the output timing of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal. Specifically, when both the jackpot continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, it can be determined that the jackpot is the G jackpot, while the jackpot continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game. If the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that the jackpot F or the jackpot H is set, and during the jackpot game, the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on the V prize (the passing of the game ball to the probability changing switch 65e3). If it is, it can be determined to be a jackpot F. On the other hand, if there is no V winning (passing of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game and one jackpot terminal is not turned on, it is determined to be a jackpot H. it can.

  In addition, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the generated jackpot is a continuous jackpot by using one jackpot and two jackpots provided on the external output plate 261. Specifically, at the jackpot 1 terminal, the output is turned off every time the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the jackpot ends, so that the occurrence of the jackpot can be detected, but it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a continuous jackpot. Can not. Here, the continuous jackpot refers to a jackpot during a probability change game or a time-saving game.

  In the case of the jackpot 2 terminal in the present control example, if a jackpot is achieved during a probability change game or during a time saving game, the output is not turned off and the output is continuously turned on (the output on period continues). Therefore, it is possible to determine that the jackpot generated when the outputs of the two jackpots are on (the output of one jackpot is on) is a series of successive jackpots.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Eighth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, a control process of main controller 110 in the present control example will be described. The eighth control example is different from the first control example in that a part of the special symbol change processing and the external output processing is changed, and the other parts are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 176, the details of the special symbol change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). In the eighth control example, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit after the change time elapses (S216: Yes), the big hit type related to the lottery result is the big hit type storage area 203α as compared with the first control example described above. The configuration is different from that of the first embodiment, and the other parts are the same.

  In the special symbol variation process, first, the processes of S201 to S216 are executed as in the first control example. Next, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and the start of the jackpot is set (S218). . Thereafter, a value based on the jackpot type of the lottery result is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260). The value of the jackpot type storage area 203α stored here is referred to in an external output process (see FIG. 177) described later, and the timing of a signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is controlled based on the jackpot type. Become.

  When the process of S260 ends, the process ends. Also, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), the processes of S220 and S221 are executed as in the first control example, and this process ends.

  Next, the details of the external output process (S1001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the external output processing (S1001). This external output process (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and executes a command set in another process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. This is processing for transmitting to the audio lamp control device 113 and the like, processing for outputting a signal to an external output terminal according to the value of each area of the RAM 203, and the like.

  In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine is a big hit (S7001). In the process of S7001, when it is determined that the gaming state of the gaming machine is in a big hit (S7001: Yes), the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal plate 261 is turned on (S7002). , To S7003. The accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the process of S7002 is detected by the hall computer 262. Thus, the hall computer 262 can detect that the gaming machine has shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating the jackpot G (S7003). In the process of S7003, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating the jackpot G (S7003: Yes), the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the output to the jackpot 2 terminal are turned on ( S7004), and the process proceeds to S7010. By the process of S7004, at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot G, the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is turned on, and the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are detected by the hall computer 262. Accordingly, the hall computer 262 detects that the accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the process of S7002 and the jackpot 1 terminal whose output is turned on in the process of S7004 are turned on at the same timing. Then (see FIG. 174 (a)), it is possible to determine that the big hit game with the big hit G has been executed, and to execute a process according to that.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is the value indicating the jackpot F or the jackpot H and is not the value indicating the jackpot G (S7003: No), the process proceeds to S7005. In the process of S7005, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is on. If it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203h is ON (S7005: Yes), it is determined that the game ball has entered the probability change switch 65e3, and it is determined that the probability change game is given after the end of the jackpot game. . In this case, the processing shifts to S7004, the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is turned on (S7004), and the processing shifts to S7010.

  Here, since the jackpot F is a jackpot with a probability change lottery, the flow path solenoid 65k operates during the execution of the jackpot game, and the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. On the other hand, since the jackpot H is a jackpot without a probability change lottery, the flow path solenoid 65k does not operate during the execution of the jackpot game, and the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, if the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on when the probability change switch 65e3 is turned on, the hall computer 262 determines that the jackpot is based on the jackpot F when the output of the jackpot terminal is turned on when the jackpot game is started. It can be determined that the game has been executed, and a process corresponding to that can be performed.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game and thereafter, the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, the jackpot game based on the jackpot H in which the game ball does not pass to the positive change switch 65e3 is executed. Can be determined to have been.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7005 that the probable change setting flag 203h is off (S7005: No), the processing shifts to the processing of S7010.

  In the process of S7001, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in the jackpot (S7001: No), the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is cleared (S7006), and the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot to the jackpot 1 terminal are cleared. The output is turned off (S7007), and the process proceeds to S7008.

  After the processing of S7007 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the gaming state is the probable change gaming state or the time saving gaming state (S7008). Specifically, when the probability change flag 203g is ON, it is determined that the game is in the probability change game state, and when the counter during time reduction is larger than 0, it is determined that the game is in the time reduction game state. If it is determined in the processing of S7008 that the game state is the certainty-change game state or the time-saving game state (S7008: Yes), the process proceeds to S7010 without turning off the output to the jackpot 2 terminal. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7008 that the game state is not the probability-change gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (S7008: No), the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off (S7009), and the processing shifts to S7010.

  By the processing of S7007, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal can be turned off at the end of the jackpot game. Then, at the end of the jackpot game, a probable change game or a time saving game is given, and when the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the probable change game state or the time saving game state (S7008: Yes), the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is not turned off, The output of the jackpot 2 is continuously turned on. On the other hand, when the probability change game or the time saving game is not provided at the end of the jackpot game and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the normal gaming state (S7008: No), the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off.

  In the processing of S7010, other external output processing is executed (S7010), and this processing ends. In the process of S7010, for example, a process of transmitting various commands such as the number-of-remaining-balls command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. . Thereby, information from the main control device 110 can be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111.

  As described above, in the eighth control example, according to the jackpot type of the lottery result, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot type, the timing of the signal transmitted to the terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 is different. It is configured so that Specifically, in the case of the jackpot F, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and thereafter, when the game ball passes through the positive change switch 65e3, one jackpot terminal is turned on. In the case of the jackpot G, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on and one jackpot terminal is turned on. Further, in the case of the jackpot H, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and thereafter, the jackpot one terminal is not turned on until the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off.

  As a result, three types of hall computers 262 that detect the output of the terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 are provided by detecting the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and one jackpot terminal of the external output terminal plate 261. It is possible to determine which jackpot type is used to execute the jackpot game among the jackpot types. Therefore, it is possible to determine the jackpot type without providing terminals corresponding to each jackpot type (three types).

  In addition, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the generated jackpot is a continuous jackpot by using one jackpot and two jackpots provided on the external output plate 261. Specifically, at the jackpot 1 terminal, the output is turned off every time the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the jackpot ends, so that the occurrence of the jackpot can be detected, but it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a continuous jackpot. Can not. Here, the continuous jackpot refers to a jackpot during a probability change game or a time-saving game.

  In the case of the jackpot 2 terminal in the present control example, if a jackpot is achieved during a probability change game or during a time saving game, the output is not turned off and the output is continuously turned on (the output on period continues). Therefore, it is possible to determine that the jackpot generated when the outputs of the two jackpots are on (the output of one jackpot is on) is a series of successive jackpots.

  In the present control example, the jackpot type is determined based on the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is also good. In addition, either one of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal may not be provided, or a terminal for outputting the jackpot may be separately provided on the external output terminal plate 261.

  Further, the present control example is not limited to the above-described example, and a terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 for outputting other information relating to the jackpot game may be provided. For example, a V winning terminal that outputs an ON signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms) may be provided on the external output terminal plate 261 based on the passage of the positive change switch 65e3. Thus, it is possible to detect an illegal act such as passing a game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 even during the execution of the jackpot game of the jackpot H without the probability change lottery. Specifically, the output of the V winning terminal is turned on based on the passing of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3. In the case of the jackpot type H, even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3, the big hit 1 Pin output does not turn on. Therefore, when the output of the V winning terminal is turned on, but the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, the hall computer 262 detects that the game ball has been thrown into the probable change switch 65e3 by cheating and detects the cheating. And be informed.

  In the above-described eighth control example, the accessory continuous operation terminal indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The terminal is not provided, and one jackpot terminal is turned on. The hall computer 262 may be configured to be able to determine the jackpot type based on the difference in time.

  Specifically, when the jackpot game of the jackpot G is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time when the output of one jackpot terminal is turned on is the time of the jackpot game (for example, 120 seconds). When the jackpot game of the jackpot F is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on when the game ball passes to the positive change switch 65e3. Turns off the output of one jackpot at the end. In this case, the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is shorter than the time of the jackpot game, and is the time from the period in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated to the end of the jackpot game (for example, 50 seconds to 30 seconds). . Furthermore, when the jackpot game of the jackpot H is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on at the start of the jackpot game, but is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, one second) at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time during which the output of one jackpot is turned on is a predetermined time (for example, 1 second).

  With this configuration, if the hall computer 262 determines that the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is ON is 120 seconds, the hall computer 262 can determine that the jackpot game by the jackpot G is being executed. it can. If the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is between 50 seconds and 30 seconds, it can be determined that the jackpot game by the jackpot F has been executed. Further, when it is determined that the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is ON is 1 second, it can be determined that the jackpot game by the jackpot H is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can determine the type of jackpot related to the jackpot game executed by the hall computer 262 without providing the accessory continuous operation terminal, and reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. It is to be noted that the time during which the output of one jackpot is on is determined for each jackpot type, and the output of one jackpot is turned on for an on-time specified at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the jackpot). Is also good.

  Further, in the eighth control example, a terminal (winning terminal) of the external output terminal 261 whose output is set to be turned on based on a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a may be provided. As a result, the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, but when the game ball does not enter the specific winning opening 65a because the game ball is not fired, the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Since the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are not turned on, it cannot be detected that the jackpot is F. Therefore, by detecting the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the probability changing switch 65e3 is obtained despite the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a. It can be determined whether or not the game ball has not passed through (the case of the big hit H).

<Ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the ninth control example, as compared with the above-described eighth control example, an external output terminal plate 261 is provided to output a signal in accordance with winning in the specific winning opening 65a, and continuous winning is performed in the specific winning opening 65a. In that it is configured to be able to detect that

  Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled so as to be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when a winning occurs in the gaming machine. Is done. The continuous prize terminal is controlled so that the prize is awarded during the continuous prize output period (2 seconds) after the prize is generated, and the output continues to be turned on when the continuous prize is performed.

  Therefore, the hall computer 262 which detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261 acquires the signal of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal to determine whether or not the generated winning is a continuous winning. Can be determined. Further, the hall computer 262 does not need to calculate the result of acquiring the signal of the winning terminal to determine whether or not a continuous winning has occurred. On the basis of the result of acquiring the signal of the continuous winning terminal, the processing load can be reduced.

  In this control example, the configuration described above is added to the eighth control example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be added to each control example described above. For example, the output of the prize terminal and the continuous prize terminal may be controlled in accordance with the ball entering the V winning device in the fifth control example. In the following description, differences from the eighth control example will be described. The same parts as those in the eighth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine in Ninth Control Example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 178 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of RAM 203 of main controller 110. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example is different from the RAM 203 of the eighth control example in that a prize period counter 203β and a continuous prize period counter 203γ are provided. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same part is omitted.

  The winning period counter 203β is a counter for counting a period for outputting a signal to the winning terminal (winning output period). This winning period counter 203β is used when it is determined in the external output processing executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 that a game ball has entered (winning) the specific winning opening 65a (S8001 in FIG. 180). : Yes), and 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110. Each time the external output process is executed, the prize period counter 203β is 1 or more (see FIG. 180 (S8008: Yes), it is decremented by one (see S8009 in FIG. 180). Then, when the winning period counter 203β becomes 0 (S8004 in FIG. 180: Yes), the output to the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF (see S8005 in FIG. 180).

  Thereby, based on the winning in the specific winning opening 65a, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 can be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds).

  The continuous winning period counter 203γ is a counter for counting a period during which a signal is output to the continuous winning terminal. This continuous prize period counter 203γ is used when it is determined in the external output processing executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 that a game ball has entered (wins) the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 180). S8001: Yes) and 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) are set (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110. Each time the external output process is executed, if the continuous prize period counter 203γ is 1 or more, (S8010 of FIG. 180: Yes) It is subtracted by 1 (refer to S8011 of FIG. 180). Then, when the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the output to the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is set to off. If a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a before the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the continuous winning period counter 203γ is set to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) again (see S8003 in FIG. 18).

  Thus, during the period until the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0 (2 seconds in this control example), while the game ball is entering the special winning device 65a, the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is held. Output can be kept on. If the game ball has not entered the specific winning port 65a until the continuous winning period counter 203γ has elapsed, the output to the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned off (see S8007 in FIG. 180).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the relationship between the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 179 is a timing chart showing a game state of the gaming machine and signals output from the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 when the jackpot game is executed. .

  With reference to FIG. 179 (a), a case where a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 179 (a) shows the gaming state of the gaming machine when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, and the continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal of the accessory on the external output terminal board 261. 6 is a timing chart showing signals output from the ASIC.

  First, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the continuous operation device for the accessory is not operated, the continuous operation terminal for the accessory is turned off, and the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Since there is no ball, the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal are both off.

  Next, the lottery result based on the ball entry into the first winning opening 64 becomes a big hit, a big hit game is started, and when the accessory continuous operation device is activated, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S8012 in FIG. 180). reference). When the accessory continuous operation device is operated, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed, so that a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the detection switch 65c1 detects that the gaming ball has entered (wins) the specific winning opening 65a after the operation of the consecutive actor activation device, the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal is output for a predetermined time (in this control example, It is controlled to be on (for 100 ms and 2 seconds) (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180).

  Then, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after a prize output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed (see S8005 in FIG. 180). On the other hand, the output of the continuous winning device is controlled to remain on until the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) elapses, and is turned off after the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) elapses (S8007 in FIG. 180). After that, when the big hit game ends, the accessory continuous operation device is stopped, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to OFF, and the game shifts to a normal game (or a probable change game or a time reduction game).

  Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 179 (b) in which a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game and a new ball is entered during the continuous winning output period based on the entry. FIG. 179 (b) shows the gaming state of the gaming machine and the external state when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game and a new ball is entered during the continuous winning output period based on the entry. It is a timing chart showing signals output from the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal of the output terminal plate 261.

  First, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, as described above, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal are all off. Next, when the lottery result based on the ball entry into the first winning port 64 becomes a big hit and the big hit game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (see S8012 in FIG. 180).

  When the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the detection switch 65c1 detects that the game ball has entered, and outputs the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds and 2 seconds in this control example). ) Is turned on (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). Thereafter, the output of the prize terminal is turned off after the prize output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed (see S8005 in FIG. 180), and the output of the continuous prize device remains on until the continuation of the prize output period (2 seconds). (S8006 in FIG. 180: Yes).

  When the detection switch 65c1 detects that a new game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a during the continuous winning output period (2 seconds), the output of the winning terminal is turned on for the winning output period (100 milliseconds). (See S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). Also, the output of the winning continuation terminal is reset (updated) so as to be on for the continuous prize output period (2 seconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180), and the output is continuously turned on.

  Then, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after a prize output period based on a new ball entering the specific winning opening 65a (see S8005 in FIG. 180), and thereafter, the continuation is continued after the updated continuous prize period elapses. The output of the winning terminal is set to off (S8007 in FIG. 180). When a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the updated (reset) continuous winning period, the continuous winning period is updated (reset) again, and the continuous winning terminal is continuously operated. The output is set to be turned on.

  When the jackpot game ends, the accessory continuous operation device is stopped, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to OFF, and the game shifts to a normal game (or a probable change game or a time reduction game).

  As described above, in the present control example, it is possible to determine that the game ball is continuously entering (winning) the specific winning opening 65a by the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261. . Thereby, the hall computer 262 which detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261 detects that the game ball has entered (wins) the specific winning opening 65a by the winning terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning is a continuous winning. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, in order to determine whether or not the prize detected from the prize terminal is a continuous prize, the determination is made only by referring to the output of the continuation prize terminal without calculating based on the previous prize information. The processing load on the hall computer 262 can be reduced.

<Control process of main control device in ninth control example>
Next, the control processing of the main control device in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. The ninth control example is different from the above-described eighth control example in that a part of the external output processing is changed. Since other parts are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 180, details of the external output process (S1001) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the external output processing (S1001) in this control example. This external output process (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and executes a command set in another process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. This is processing for transmitting to the sound lamp control device 113 and the like, processing for outputting a signal to an external output terminal according to the value of each area of the RAM 203, and the like.

  In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001). Specifically, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the detection switch 65c1, so that in the switch reading process of the main control device 110, whether the detection switch 65c1 is on or not is determined. Determine.

  In the process of S8001, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001: Yes), the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to ON (S8002). 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds) is set in the winning period counter 203β, and 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) is set in the continuous winning period counter 203γ (S8003), and the process proceeds to S8008.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8001 that the game ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning period counter is 0 (S8004). In the processing of S8004, when it is determined that the prize period counter 203β is 0 (S8004: No), the prize output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific prize port 65a. Therefore, the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to off, and the processing shifts to S8008.

  In the process of S8004, when it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is not 0 (S8004: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006). In the processing of S8006, when it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006: Yes), the continuous winning period (2 seconds) has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific winning opening 65a, Since the game ball does not newly enter the specific winning opening 65a during the continuous winning period (2 seconds), the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF (S8007), and the process of S8008 is started. Move on to processing.

  In the process of S8006, when it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is not 0 (S8006: No), the process proceeds to S8008 as it is.

  Here, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is other than the jackpot gaming state, such as when the ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a and the winning period counter 203β has already become 0, the processing of S8005 is also performed. Is executed. In this case, since the output of the winning terminal on the external output terminal board 261 has already been turned off, the output of the winning terminal is set to be continuously turned off. Since the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a only during the big hit game, the processing of S8001 to S8007 may be executed only during the big hit game.

  This eliminates the need to execute the processing from S8001 to S8007 in a game state other than the jackpot game, and can reduce the processing load. In addition, when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in a state other than during the jackpot game, since a fraudulent activity or an abnormality may occur, an error terminal is separately provided on the external output terminal 261 and the error terminal is provided. By turning on the output of the terminal, it is also possible to configure so that fraudulent activity or occurrence of abnormality can be detected. It is not necessary to use an error terminal for detection of fraud or occurrence of an abnormality. For example, a notification sound for notifying an error may be output, or a display indicating occurrence of an error may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You may make it.

  When the processing of S8003, S8005, S8006 or S8007 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the winning period counter 203β is larger than 0 (S8008). If it is determined in the processing of S8008 that the prize period counter 203β is larger than 0 (S8008: Yes), a game ball enters the special prize port 65a, and the output of the prize terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since the winning output period is 100 milliseconds, the winning period counter 203β for measuring the winning output period is decremented by 1 (S8009), and the process shifts to S8010.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8008 that the prize period counter 203β is 0 (S8010: Yes), it is not necessary to measure the prize output period instead of the prize output period, and the process of S8009 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S8010. In the processing of S8010, it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is larger than 0 (S8010). If it is determined in the processing of S8010 that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is larger than 0 (S8010: Yes), the game ball enters the special winning opening 65a, and the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since the continuous winning output period is (2 seconds), the continuous winning period counter 203γ for measuring the continuous winning output period is decremented by 1 (S8011), and the process proceeds to S8012.

  In the process of S8010, if it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8010: No), the process of S8011 is skipped because it is not necessary to measure the continuous winning output period instead of the continuous winning output period. Then, the process proceeds to S8012.

  In the processing of S8012, other external output processing is executed (S8012). The other external output processing is, for example, an external output terminal indicating a period in which the accessory continuous operation device operates, that is, a period in which a jackpot game is executed, similarly to the external output processing in the above-described eighth control example. For example, a process of turning on the accessory continuous operation terminal of the plate 261 at a predetermined timing is executed. When the processing in S8012 ends, the present processing ends and the process returns to the main processing.

  As described above, in the ninth control example, the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261 determines that the game ball is continuously entering (winning) the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible. Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled so as to be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when a winning occurs in the gaming machine. Is done. On the other hand, the continuation prize terminal is controlled so that the prize is provided during the continuation prize output period (2 seconds) after the prize is generated and the output is kept on when the continuation of the prize is performed.

  Thereby, the hall computer 262 which detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261 detects that the game ball has entered (wins) the specific winning opening 65a by the winning terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261. It can be determined from the output of the continuous winning terminal whether or not the winning is a continuous winning. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, in order to determine whether or not the prize detected from the prize terminal is a continuous prize, the determination is made only by referring to the output of the continuation prize terminal without calculating based on the previous prize information. The processing load on the hall computer 262 can be reduced.

  Note that the present control example is not limited to the above-described example, and may be configured so that the output of the continuous winning terminal is continued only at the time of a specific jackpot type. As a result, a device that detects the output of the terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 such as the hall computer 262 detects and compares the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal, thereby determining the type of the jackpot that has become the jackpot. Can be made possible.

  Further, the period during which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is turned on (winning output period) may be made different for each big hit type based on the entry of a game ball into the specific winning opening 65a. For example, when the jackpot type is the jackpot F, the prize output period is 50 milliseconds, when the jackpot is G, the prize output period is 100 milliseconds, and when the jackpot is H, the prize output period is 150 milliseconds. Thereby, the hall computer 262 detects the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 and measures the period during which the output of the winning terminal is on (winning output period), thereby obtaining the jackpot of the jackpot game being executed. The type can be determined. Therefore, for the purpose of discriminating the jackpot type, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of discriminating the jackpot type without providing a separate terminal on the external output terminal board 261 and reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

  Further, in the ninth control example, during the winning output period in which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is turned on based on the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a, the game ball is transferred to the specific winning opening 65a. It is necessary to set shorter than the interval between entering. If a new game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period, the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 will be continuously turned on, and the hall computer 262 will not be able to accurately detect the winning number. It is. When the winning output period is shortened, it is necessary to shorten the interval of detecting the winning terminal by the hall computer 262 correspondingly. If the output of the prize terminal is not detected within the prize output period, the output of the prize terminal is turned off, and the number of prizes cannot be accurately detected.

  Therefore, when the interval at which the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a is very short (for example, 10 milliseconds), the hall computer 262 needs to detect the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 at the very short interval. However, there is a problem that the processing load on the hall computer 262 increases.

  Therefore, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the prize output period, a period during which the output of the prize terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is turned off after the prize output period ends (a prize output suspension period). ), And after the prize output suspension period (for example, 50 milliseconds) has elapsed, the output of the prize terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on based on a game ball newly entering the specific prize port 65a. It may be.

  Thereby, even if the winning output period in which the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to ON is set to a period (for example, 100 milliseconds) longer than the interval at which the game ball enters, a new winning output period is set in the winning output period. Since the output based on the played game ball can be executed after the winning output suspension period (for example, 50 milliseconds), the hall computer 262 can accurately detect the winning (do not miss the winning). Further, the hall computer 262 does not need to detect the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 at an interval (for example, 5 milliseconds) shorter than the interval at which the game ball enters, thereby reducing the processing load of the hall computer 262. Can be reduced.

  Here, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is turned on when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in the jackpot game. The big hit game is configured such that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened and a state (round) in which a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). I have. This round ends when a predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the specific winning opening 65a, and after that, an interval between rounds (for example, 2 seconds) elapses. The next round is about to begin. Therefore, even if the winning output period is set to be longer than the interval at which the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the external output terminal is set based on all the incoming balls (for example, 10 balls) during the interval between rounds. The output of the winning terminal of the plate 261 can be output.

  Specifically, when 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a continuously at very short intervals (for example, 10 milliseconds), the game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a (10 balls). It is necessary to set the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 to a total of ten times based on the minutes) and to turn on the winning output period (100 milliseconds). Here, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the prize output period, after the prize output period ends and the output of the prize terminal is turned off, after the prize output suspension period (50 milliseconds), It is assumed that the next winning output period is configured to start. In this case, the time required to output the signals based on all the incoming balls to the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is the number of times the output of the winning terminal is turned on (10 times) and the winning output period (100 milliseconds). ) Is multiplied by the product of the number of prize output periods required after the output of the prize terminal (9 times) and the prize output period (50 milliseconds), which is 1450 milliseconds. Since this time is shorter than the inter-round interval (2 seconds), the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is completed based on all the incoming balls (for example, 10 balls) during the inter-round interval. Becomes possible.

  Therefore, even if the prize output period in which the prize terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to ON is set to a period longer than the interval at which the game ball enters (for example, 100 milliseconds), a new prize ball is input during the prize output period. Since all the outputs based on the game balls can be executed in the period of the subsequent inter-round interval, the hole computer 262 can detect the winning (do not miss). In addition, during the period between rounds, even if it is not possible to execute all the outputs based on the game balls newly entered during the prize output period, even if the jackpot game is executed and before the next jackpot game is executed, the specific prize is won. Since there is a period in which the game ball does not enter the mouth 65a (big hit game interval), it may be configured to be able to be executed in the big hit game interval. The specific example described above is an example, and the period such as the winning output period, the winning output suspension period, and the interval between rounds may be appropriately changed.

  In the ninth control example, a V winning terminal that outputs an ON signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) is provided on the external output terminal plate 261 based on, for example, the passing of a game ball to the probability changing switch 65e3. You may do so. Thereby, by comparing the output timing of the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a and the output timing of the V winning terminal, the illegal V winning (the entry of the game ball into the probability changing switch 65e3) is performed. The ball computer 262 can determine whether or not the ball has been played.

  Specifically, although the output of the winning terminal is not turned on, that is, the passing of the game ball to the certainty change switch 65e3 is detected even though the game ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a, When the output of the winning terminal is turned on, there is a high possibility that a V winning has been improperly performed (a game ball has entered the probability changing switch 65e3). Therefore, a case where the V winning terminal is on even though the output of the winning terminal on the external output terminal plate 261 is off can be detected as being illegal or abnormal.

  Further, a predetermined passing time (for example, 1 second) is required for a game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a and for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, by setting the period during which the continuous winning terminal is turned on (continuous winning output period) to the time required for passing (1 second), the V winning terminal is turned off during the period when the continuous winning terminal is turned off (other than the continuous winning output period). When turned on, the hall computer 262 can detect that it is an illegal V winning.

  Specifically, the game ball having entered the specific winning opening 65a is distributed to one of the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e2 after a predetermined passage time (1 second) has elapsed. After a predetermined passage time (1 second) elapses, it does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, if the continuous winning terminal, which is turned on when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a and then is turned off after a lapse of a predetermined passage time (1 second), is turned off, the probability change switch is turned off. The game ball does not pass through 65e3. Therefore, if the V winning terminal is turned on during the period in which the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is off (other than the continuous winning output period), it can be determined that an illegal V winning has occurred.

<Tenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 196. In the tenth control example, when the player operates the frame button 22, a first slide member (hereinafter, referred to as an accessory A) 720, a second slide member (hereinafter, referred to as an accessory B) 740, It is different in that an accessory operation effect driven by a tilting member (hereinafter referred to as accessory C) 460 is executed.

  This character operation effect is an effect that is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). When the player operates (presses) the frame button 22, a plurality of the above-mentioned characters (character A 720 to character C 460) are performed. ) Is a driven effect.

  As described above, in the effect of driving the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the accessory can be driven based on the operation of the player. It was possible to play games.

  In addition, during a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), a bonus item operation effect capable of driving the accessory multiple times based on the operation of the frame button 22 is executed, so that the player Since the accessory operation effect is executed a plurality of times based on the number of times of operation, the player can be more ambitious to play the game.

  However, there is a problem that during the period in which the accessory is being driven during the operation of the accessory, even if the frame button 22 is operated, the accessory cannot be driven, and the effect of the effect of the operation of the accessory is reduced. Was. Here, when the driving period of the accessory performed based on the operation of the frame button 22 is shortened in advance, the period in which the accessory is driven can be shortened. Although it is possible to easily drive the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22, there is a problem that the range in which the accessory is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 is reduced, and the effect is reduced.

  The accessory operation effect performed in the tenth control example solves the above-described problem. Specifically, when a predetermined condition (for example, operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while driving the accessory) is satisfied in the case where the accessory operation effect is executed, the driving pattern of the accessory to be executed next time is established. A drive period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than a normal drive period (for example, 1 second) is set.

  In the gaming machine having such a configuration, when a predetermined condition (for example, operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while the accessory is being driven) is established during the accessory operation effect, the accessory operation to be driven next time is performed. Since a short operation period is set as, for example, when the player continuously operates (presses) the frame button 22, a short driving period is set as the driving period of the accessory, and the player sets the frame button 22 by one. When the operation is performed (pressed) only once, a long driving period can be set as the driving period of the accessory. Therefore, the number of times of driving of the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased during the accessory operation effect performed for the predetermined period, and furthermore, the effect of the single accessory driving effect is prevented from being reduced. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 181 to FIG. 183, the driving contents of the accessory in the present control example will be described. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 181, an outline of the operation of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) used in the accessory drive effect in the present control example will be described. FIG. 181 (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an outline of the operation of the accessory A720 used for the accessory driving effect in the present control example. As shown in FIG. 181 (a), in the accessory driving effect of the present control example, by driving the operation motors (hereinafter, referred to as accessory A motors) 771 and 772, the accessory A 720 is moved in the left-right direction. Drive (see FIG. 40). Specifically, it moves from the retreat position shown in FIG. 40 (a) to the overhang position shown in FIG. 40 (b) (operating period: 0.5 seconds), and then moves from the overhang position to the retreat position ( The operation is performed for a total operation period of 1 second (operation period of 0.5 second).

  FIG. 181 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an outline of the operation of the accessory B740 used for the accessory driving effect in the present control example. As shown in FIG. 181 (b), in the accessory driving effect of the present control example, the operating motor (hereinafter, referred to as the accessory B motor) 773, 774 is driven, so that the accessory B moves in the vertical direction. It is driven (see FIG. 41). Specifically, it moves from the retreat position shown in FIG. 41 (a) to the overhang position shown in FIG. 41 (b) (operation period 1 second), and then moves from the overhang position to the retreat position (operation period). 1 second) is performed for a total operation period of 2 seconds.

  FIG. 181 (c) is a schematic diagram illustrating an outline of the operation of the accessory C460 used for the accessory driving effect in the present control example. As shown in FIG. 181 (c), in the accessory driving effect of the present control example, when the operation motor (hereinafter, referred to as the accessory C motor) 441 is driven, the accessory B 740 is rotationally driven ( 25 and 26). Specifically, it moves from the retreat position shown in FIG. 25A to the overhang position shown in FIG. 26A (operating period 1.5 seconds), and then moves from the overhang position to the retreat position ( The operation is performed for a total operation period of 3 seconds (operation period of 1.5 seconds).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 182, a description will be given of the accessory driving effect in the present control example. FIG. 182 (a) is a schematic diagram showing that each of the characters (the characters A720 to C460) is located at the evacuation position (standby position), and FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows that accessory A720-accessory C460) is located in an overhang position (operation position).

  As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the accessory drive effect in the present control example is performed by operating each of the accessories (accessories A720 to C460) provided around the third symbol display device 81 by operating the frame button 22. This is an effect driven based on. Specifically, when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 once, all of the characters located at the retreat position (standby position) are driven (in the case of FIG. (All the objects A720 to C460 are driven). In this manner, a plurality of accessories can be driven based on one operation of the frame button 22, so that the effect of the accessory-driven effect based on the operation of the player can be enhanced.

  In this character-driven effect, as described above, the operation time of each character (character A720 to character C460) is set to be different, the character A720 has an operation period of 1 second, and the character B740 has an operation period. Two seconds and an operation period of 3 seconds are set for the accessory C460. In this way, by varying the operation period of each of the accessories (accessories A720 to C460), all of the accessories (accessories A720 to C460) are all located at the retreat position (standby position). When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in the state (the state in which the accessory driving effect has been started), all the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) start to be driven. One second later, the accessory A 720 returns to the retracted position (standby position) (completes the operation), and one second later, the accessory B 740 returns to the retracted position (standby position) (completes the operation). The object C460 returns to the retreat position (standby position) (operation is completed).

  Therefore, the timing at which the character is located at the retreat position (standby position) during the character driving effect can be made different, and the character is driven by the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 during the character driving effect. Objects can be made different, and the effect of the character-driven effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 187, in this control example, the period during which the frame button 22 can be operated (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined) in the accessory driving effect is 10 seconds. An object-driven effect (long-stroke effect) and a 5-second character-driven effect (short-stroke effect) can be set. This allows the player to enthusiastically operate the frame button 22 to drive the accessory multiple times within a limited period.

  Each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 is driven to cover the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 182 (b). I do. As described above, by driving the accessory so as to cover the display area P of the third symbol display device, it is possible to make the player surely grasp that the accessory is being driven.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183, an operation of the accessory A720 in the accessory driving effect of the present control example will be described. FIG. 183 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the accessory A720 driven in the accessory driving effect in the present control example, and FIG. 183 (b) is driven in the normal driving pattern in the accessory driving effect in this control example. FIG. 183 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a driving range of the accessory A720 to be driven, and FIG. 183 (c) schematically illustrates a driving range of the accessory A720 driven by the shortened drive pattern in the accessory driving effect in the present control example. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the accessory A 720 is a pair of slide members 720 provided on the left and right sides of the second slide operation unit 700, respectively. The display area P of the third symbol display device 81 is located between the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b of the pair of slide members 720 (see FIG. 2).

  The slide member 720 is configured to be driven based on the operation of the frame button 22. When the drive is started, the pair of slide members 720 (the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720) are respectively driven. It moves toward the center of the second slide operation unit 700 (the direction covering the display area P of the third symbol display device 81).

  As shown in FIG. 183 (b), when the accessory A 720 is driven in the normal drive pattern, the pair of slide members 720 is positioned near the center of the second slide operation unit 700 (the display area of the third symbol display device 81). It is driven to a position close to (in contact with) the center of P). In this normal drive pattern, the movement period from the standby position (the position of FIG. 183 (a)) to the maximum drive position (the position of FIG. 183 (b)) is set to 0.5 seconds, and the drive of the normal drive pattern is performed. The period is set to 1 second (1 second to reciprocate in a 0.5 second movement period).

  As described above, the accessory A720 driven in the normal drive pattern is driven so as to cover the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 that the player is gazing at, so that the player can drive the accessory A720. Can be noticed easily and the effect of the production can be enhanced. During the execution of the character drive effect, various images (images of the effect display executed in each of the above-described control examples) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 display the driven character A720. It is displayed at the position to avoid. As a result, it is possible to simultaneously execute the effect of driving the accessory and the effect of displaying on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to further enhance the effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (c), when the accessory A 720 is driven in the shortened drive pattern, the pair of slide members 720 is driven in half the drive range of the normal drive pattern. In this shortened drive pattern, the movement time from the standby position (the position of FIG. 183 (a)) to the shortened drive position (the position of FIG. 183 (b)) is set to 0.25 seconds, and the drive of the normal drive pattern is performed. The period is set to 0.5 seconds (0.5 seconds to reciprocate in a movement period of 0.25 seconds).

  Thus, the driving period of the accessory A720 when the shortened driving pattern is set is about half of the driving period of the accessory A720 when the normal driving pattern is set. Accordingly, the driving period executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be shortened, and the frame button 22 is operated multiple times during the accessory driving effect performed for a predetermined period (5 seconds or 10 seconds). In this case, the accessory A 720 can be easily driven based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  More specifically, if the accessory A 720 is executed in the normal drive pattern, then the actuation of the accessory A 720 based on the operation of the frame button 22 is terminated by the drive in the normal drive pattern. When the timing (that is, one second later) is reached, if the accessory A720 is executed in the shortened drive pattern, then the accessory A720 can be driven based on the operation of the frame button 22. Is the timing at which the drive by the shortened drive pattern ends (that is, 0.5 seconds later).

  That is, when the accessory A 720 is driven in the normal drive pattern, the operation of the frame button 22 is treated as invalid for the accessory A 720 for one second after the drive is started, and the accessory A 720 is driven in the shortened drive pattern. In this case, the operation of the frame button 22 is treated as invalid for the accessory A 720 for 0.5 seconds after the driving is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 184, a description will be given of the operation of the frame button 22 and the flow of the operation of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) in the “button continuous effect” which is the accessory-driven effect in the present control example. do. FIG. 184 is a timing chart showing a flow of the accessory driving effect in the present control example. As shown in FIG. 184, when the “button continuous production” is started, an “effective period” in which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is valid is set (for example, 10 seconds). Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 (“button pressed” ON) during the “valid period”, each of the roles (positions A720 to role A) in the stopped state (state located at the standby position) The operation of the object C460) is started (point a in FIG. 184).

  In the present control example, the driving period of the accessory A 720 is set to 1 second, the driving period of the accessory B 740 is set to 2 seconds, and the driving period of the accessory C 460 is set to 3 seconds. . Then, when the frame button 22 is operated again (“button pressed” ON) at the timing when the accessory A 720 is being driven, an invalid flag 223af indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during the invalid period (see FIG. 186). Is set to ON (point b in FIG. 184).

  Thereafter, when the driving period (1 second) of the accessory A 720 elapses and the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the accessory A 720 is in a stopped state (a state where the accessory A is located at the standby position), the driving of the accessory A 720 is performed. The shortened drive pattern is executed as a pattern, and the invalid flag 223af is set to off (point c in FIG. 184). At this point c, the accessory B 740 is in a stopped state and the accessory C 460 is in an operating state. Therefore, based on the operation of the frame button 22 at the point c, the accessory A 720 is driven in the shortened drive pattern, and the accessory B 740 is driven. Are driven in a predetermined drive pattern.

  In the present control example, as described above, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A 720 is being driven, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and the accessory A 720 is set in a state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON. When a new drive is performed, a short drive pattern is set. Thus, a different driving mode of the accessory than usual can be provided to the player who has actively operated the frame button 22 while the accessory A 720 is being driven, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, when the accessory A 720 is newly driven in a state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the shortened drive pattern is configured to be set. When the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times in a short period of time during a certain “button hit effect”, the number of times of driving the accessory A 720 can be increased.

  Next, returning to FIG. 184, a flow when the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times in a short period will be described. At the timing shown at the point d in FIG. 184, each accessory (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) is activated based on the operation of the frame button 22 as in the case of the point a. Then, at the timing when the accessory A 720 started to be driven at the point d is operating (that is, within one second from the point d), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON by operating the frame button 22 (FIG. 184). Point e). Thereafter, the accessory A 720 that has started driving at the point d is in a stopped state, and the timing when the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460 are operating (that is, the period from the lapse of one second to the lapse of two seconds from the point d) ), When the frame button 22 is operated, the accessory A 720 starts operating in the shortened drive pattern (0.5 seconds) (point f in FIG. 184).

  Then, when the frame button 22 is operated again within 0.5 seconds after the operation of the accessory A 720 started to be driven at the point f, the accessory A 720 starts operating in the normal driving pattern (1 second). (Point g in FIG. 184).

  This point g is a timing at which the operation of the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460 that have started driving at the point d has not ended the operation and one second has not elapsed from the point f. In the case of the configuration in which the shortened drive pattern (0.5 seconds) is not set as the drive pattern of A720, at point g, all the accessories (accessories A720 to C460) are in the operating state, and the operation of the frame button 22 is performed. Can not be driven based on the.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, it is possible to drive the accessory A 720 at the point f in the shortened fluctuation pattern (0.5 seconds), and thus, it is possible to stop the accessory A 720 at the point g. As described above, in the present control example, since the shortened drive pattern can be set as the drive pattern of the accessory, the control pattern can be set a plurality of times (for example, point d to point g in FIG. 184) multiple times (for example, point d to point g in FIG. 184). (Four times) when the frame button operation is executed, it is possible to increase the number of times the accessory is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22.

<Electrical Configuration in Tenth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The tenth control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 185 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that the configuration of signal output control to each drive motor (771, 772, 773, 774, 441) is different. Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 185, an input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A drive motor group is connected to the input / output port 225. The drive motor group includes motors for accessory A (motors for the first slide member) 771, 772, motors for accessory B (motors for the second slide member) 773, 774, and motors for accessory C (tilting members). 441) and other motors.

  Each of the above-mentioned motors is composed of a stepping motor and a motor driver, and an operation command (operation (rotation) speed (pps), operation step) for setting operation contents for each motor driver from the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. The number and a command that can specify the operation (rotation) direction are output. The motor operation command output from the audio ramp control device 113 is set with reference to the contents specified in the operation scenario table 222ab stored in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 186 to 188. FIG. 186 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example. The ROM 222 in the tenth control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a continuous-hit effect selection table 222aa and an operation scenario table 222ab are added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, referring to FIG. 187 (a), the continuous-stroke effect selection table 222aa will be described. FIG. 187 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous-hit effect selection table 222aa. The continuous-stroke effect selection table 222aa is a table for determining the execution or non-execution of the continuous-stroke effect, and selecting the type of the continuous-stroke effect when executing the continuous-stroke effect. The fluctuation pattern output from the main control device 110 has a normal reach. It is referred to when the above is true (that is, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more).

  As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the continuous-stroke effect selection table 222aa is a table for selecting the type of the continuous-stroke effect based on the result of determining whether the special figure changes this time and the value of the effect counter 223f. "Long continuous striking effect" in which 10,000 milliseconds (10 seconds) is set in the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab which sets a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective, and a continuous striking effect start time of 10,000 milliseconds (10 seconds) In), one of “short continuous striking effect” in which 5000 milliseconds is set in the continuous striking effective timer 223ab for setting a period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective, and “-” in which the continuous striking effect is not executed are selected.

  The continuous-stroke effect selection table 222aa is referred to in a variable display setting process 3 (S1512 in FIG. 190) described later (S1762). Specifically, when the result of the current hit determination is “hit” and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “0 to 9”, “long continuous impact effect” is selected as the continuous impact effect type, and the effect counter 223f is selected. When the value is "10 to 19", "short-stroke effect" is selected as the continuous-stroke effect type, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is "20 to 198", "-" is selected as the continuous-stroke effect type. .

  On the other hand, when the result of the current pass / fail determination is “out” and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “0 to 4”, “long continuous impact effect” is selected as the continuous impact effect type, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “ In the case of "5 to 19", "short-stroke effect" is selected as the continuous-stroke effect type, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is "20 to 198", "-" is selected as the continuous-stroke effect type.

  As described above, in the continuous-stroke effect selection table 222aa in the present control example, the ratio (approximately 10%) of selecting the continuous-stroke effect is the same when the hit / failure determination result is “hit” and “out”. However, when the hit / fail judgment result is "hit", the ratio at which "long-stroke effect" is selected as the continuous hit effect type is set higher than when the hit / fail judgment result is "out". (“Hit” = 50%, “out” = 25%). This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation of hitting when the “long continuous hitting effect” is executed as the continuous hitting effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the time at which the continuous-stroke effect is executed (continuous-stroke effect start time). Since the “long-stroke effect” and the “short-stroke effect” are the same (10000 milliseconds), the continuous-stroke effect executed this time is “long-stroke effect” or “short-stroke effect” depending on the timing at which the continuous-stroke effect is started. It is suppressed that a player grasps whether it is. Thus, when the continuous-stroke effect is started, it is possible to make the player expect the effect to be continued for a long time, so that there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, the operation scenario table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (b). FIG. 187 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the operation scenario table 222ab. The operation scenario table 222ab is a table in which the operation scenario of each accessory in the continuous hitting effect is stored, and each of the accessory action timers 223ac that is set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the continuous hitting effect. Operation commands corresponding to the values of .about.223ae are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (b), in the operation scenario table 222ab, a character A 720 scenario table 222ab1, a character B scenario table 222ab2, and a character C scenario table 222ab3 in which the operation scenario of the character A 720 is set. Is defined, and when driving each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460), the corresponding scenario table is referred to.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 188 (a) to (c), the contents of each scenario table respectively corresponding to the accessory A720 to the accessory C460 defined in the operation scenario table 222ab will be described.

  First, the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory A scenario table 222ab1. The accessory A scenario table 222ab1 is a table in which an operation scenario for the accessory A720 to be executed during the continuous hit production is set, and is an operation scenario (normal operation scenario) executed when the operation type is “normal”. And an operation scenario (shortened operation scenario) to be executed when the operation type is “shortened”.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 shows the elapsed time from when the frame button 22 was operated (pressed) during the continuous hit effect and the accessory A 720 was determined to be drivable. A set value (operating speed) set for the accessory A motor (the accessory A motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario in accordance with the value of the A operation timer 223ac. (Pps), the number of operation steps, and the operation direction).

  Specifically, when the action type is “normal”, the action pointer value “01H” is set corresponding to the value “1000” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. In the operation pointer “01H”, “100 pps” is set as the operation speed, “50” is set as the number of steps, and “forward direction” is set as the operation direction. Thereafter, the value of the action pointer is set to “02H” corresponding to the value “500” of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. The operation pointer “02H” defines “100 pps” as the operation speed, “50” as the number of steps, and “negative direction” as the operation direction.

  Then, the value of the operation pointer is set to “03H” in accordance with the value “0” of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. The operation pointer “03H” defines information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario.

  In other words, when the accessory A operation whose operation type is “normal” is executed, the motors 771 and 772 for the accessory A are set in the “forward direction” (the forward direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, the left slide member 720a) for 0.5 seconds. The right slide member 720b is driven in a direction in which the right slide member 720b approaches each other (see FIG. 183 (b)), and thereafter, in the "negative direction" (return direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member) for 0.5 seconds. An operation of driving in a direction (see FIG. 183 (b)) apart from each other is performed (that is, an accessory operation whose entire operation period is 1 second).

  When the action type is “shortened”, the action pointer value “01H” is set corresponding to the value “500” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The operation pointer “01H” defines “100 pps” as the operation speed, “25” as the number of steps, and “forward direction” as the operation direction. Thereafter, the value of the action pointer is set to “02H” corresponding to the value “250” of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. The operation pointer “02H” defines “100 pps” as the operation speed, “25” as the number of steps, and “negative direction” as the operation direction.

  Then, the value of the operation pointer is set to “03H” in accordance with the value “0” of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. The operation pointer “03H” defines information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario.

  In other words, when the accessory A operation whose operation type is “shortened” is executed, the motors 771 and 772 for the accessory A are set in the “forward direction” for 0.25 seconds (the forward direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, The right slide member 720b is driven in a direction in which the right slide member 720b approaches each other (see FIG. 183 (b)). An operation of driving in a direction in which the respective 720b are separated from each other (see FIG. 183 (b)) (that is, an accessory operation in which the entire operation period is 0.5 seconds) is executed.

  As described above, the operation content of the accessory A720 during the continuous hitting effect includes an operation scenario having a long operation period (1 second) (normal driving pattern) and an operation scenario having a short operation period (0.5 second) (short driving pattern). ) Are defined, and one of the driving patterns is selected and executed in accordance with the situation when the driving of the accessory A 720 is started (the setting situation of the shortening flag 223ag).

  As will be described later in detail, the shortening flag 223ag is a flag that is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the timing when the accessory A 720 is operating. With the shortening flag 223ag turned on, the operation of the accessory A 720 is started (the operation of the accessory A when the shortening flag 223ag is set on ends, and the operation of the next accessory A 720 is started. ), The operation type “shortened” is set. Therefore, when the player actively operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the continuous hitting production, a shortened driving pattern having a short operation period is set. The number of times the A720 is operated can be increased.

  In addition, since a normal drive pattern is set for a player who does not operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the continuous-stroke effect, the effect of effecting the single accessory operation can be enhanced. In this manner, by changing the operation pattern (operation period) of the accessory based on the operation (pressing) state of the frame button 22 during the continuous hitting effect, the player can operate according to the operation (pressing) state of the frame button 22. This makes it possible to execute the character-driven drive effect, and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

  Next, the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (b). FIG. 188 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory B scenario table 222ab2. The accessory B scenario table 222ab2 is a table in which an operation scenario for the accessory B 740 to be executed during the continuous hit production is set, and is an operation scenario (normal operation scenario) executed when the operation type is “normal”. Only has been set.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (b), in the accessory B scenario table 222ab2, similarly to the above-described accessory A scenario table 222ab1, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the continuous hit effect, and the accessory B 740 can be driven. In correspondence with the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad indicating the elapsed time from the determination, the motor for the accessory B (for the accessory B motor) is provided for each operation pointer value indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario. A setting value (operation speed (pps), operation step number, and operation direction) set for the driver is defined.

  Specifically, when the action type is “normal”, the action pointer value “01H” is set corresponding to the value “2000” of the accessory B action timer 223ad. The operation pointer “01H” defines “100 pps” as the operation speed, “100” as the number of steps, and “forward” as the operation direction. Then, the value of the action pointer is set to “02H” in accordance with the value “1000” of the accessory B operation timer 223ad. The operation pointer “02H” defines “100 pps” as the operation speed, “100” as the number of steps, and “negative direction” as the operation direction.

  Then, the value of the action pointer is set to “03H” in accordance with the value “0” of the accessory B operation timer 223ad. The operation pointer “03H” defines information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario.

  In other words, when the accessory B operation whose operation type is “normal” is executed, the motor 773 and 774 for the accessory B move in the “forward direction” for one second (the forward direction of the reciprocating operation, ie, the upper slide member 740a and the lower slide member 740a). The member 740b is driven in a direction in which the members 740b approach each other, and thereafter, the operation is performed in a “negative direction” (return direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, an operation in which the upper slide member 740a and the lower slide member 740b are separated from each other). , The entire operation period is 2 seconds).

  Next, the accessory C scenario table 222ab3 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (c). FIG. 188 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory C scenario table 222ab3. The accessory C scenario table 222ab3 is a table in which an operation scenario for the accessory C460 to be executed during the continuous hit production is set, and is an operation scenario (normal operation scenario) executed when the operation type is “normal”. Only has been set.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (c), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the continuous hit effect in the accessory C scenario table 222ab3, as in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 and the accessory B scenario table 222ab2. In correspondence with the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae indicating the time elapsed since the determination that the accessory C 460 is drivable, a value for the accessory C is set for each value of the operation pointer indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario. Set values (operating speed (pps), number of operating steps, and operating direction) set for the motor (driver for the accessory C motor) are defined.

  Specifically, when the action type is “normal”, the action pointer value “01H” is set corresponding to the value “3000” of the accessory C action timer 223ae. The operation pointer “01H” defines “100 pps” as the operation speed, “150” as the number of steps, and “forward” as the operation direction. After that, the value of the action pointer is set to “02H” corresponding to the value “1500” of the accessory C operation timer 223ae. The operation pointer “02H” defines “100 pps” as the operation speed, “150” as the number of steps, and “negative direction” as the operation direction.

  Then, the value of the operation pointer is set to “03H” in accordance with the value “0” of the accessory C operation timer 223ae. The operation pointer “03H” defines information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario.

  That is, when the accessory C operation of the operation type “normal” is executed, the accessory C motor 441 is moved in the “forward direction” for 1.5 seconds (in the forward direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, in the direction in which the inclining member 460 is inclined). Driving, and thereafter, a "negative direction" for 1.5 seconds (an operation in which the reciprocating operation returns, that is, an operation in which the inclination of the tilting member 460 is restored (that is, a character operation in which the entire operation period is 3 seconds)) Is executed.

  As described above, in this control example, the operation type “shortened” is set only in the accessory A scenario table 223ab1. This is to shorten the operation of the accessory (accessory A720) having the shortest operation period among the plurality of accessories (accessory A720 to accessory C460) driven during the continuous hit production, and thereby to perform the normal role. This is to increase the number of times the accessory is operated during the continuous-stroke effect while suppressing the effect of the effect in the object operation.

  The operation type “shortened” is not set in each of the scenario tables corresponding to the above-described accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460 (the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 and the accessory C scenario table 222ab3). May be set.

  Returning to FIG. 186, the description will be continued. FIG. 186 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example. The RAM 223 in the tenth control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a continuous-hit effect type storage area 223aa, a continuous-hit effective timer 223ab, a character A operation timer 223ac, and a character B operation timer 223ad. The difference is that an object C operation timer 223ae, a far side flag 223af, and a shortening flag 223ag are added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The continuous-stroke effect type storage area 223aa is an area for storing a continuous-stroke effect type selected with reference to the continuous-stroke effect selection table 222aa. In the continuous-stroke effect type storage area 223aa, when it is determined that the normal reach or more (the fluctuation time is 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) or more) in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 190) (S1761: Yes), the continuous hit is performed. The continuous-hit effect type (S1762 in FIG. 190) selected with reference to the effect selection table 222aa is set (S1763 in FIG. 190). Then, when the change of the special figure ends (the continuous-stroke effect ends), the set information (continuous-stroke effect type) is cleared.

  The continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is a timer for measuring a period during which the operation on the frame button 22 is effectively determined in the continuous hitting effect. This interlocking validity timer 223ab is used in the continuous hitting button process (S1857 in FIG. 192) executed in the frame button input monitoring / setting process 3 (see FIG. 191) when it is determined that the continuous hitting effect start time has been reached, that is, When it is determined that the continuous-stroke effect start time (elapsed 10,000 milliseconds from the start of the fluctuation) set in the operation scenario table 223ab corresponding to the continuous-stroke effect executed this time has been reached (s1902: yes in FIG. 192), The value of the continuous hitting valid timer 23ab set in the operation scenario table 223ab corresponding to the continuous hitting effect currently executed is set (S1903 in FIG. 192). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not it is a period in which the continuous hit button effect can be executed (S1906 in FIG. 192), and every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) is executed (every millisecond). , 1 (S2211 in FIG. 193) until the value becomes 0 (S2212 in FIG. 193).

  The accessory A operation timer 223ac is a timer that counts the operation scenario of the accessory A 720 in the continuous hitting performance, and corresponds to the operation scenario defined in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 corresponding to the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. Based on this, the operation of the accessory A 720 is controlled.

  In the continuous hitting button process (see FIG. 192), when the continuous hitting effect start time has been reached (S1902 in FIG. 192: Yes), the accessory A operation timer 223ac is cleared to 0 (S1904 in FIG. 192) and the continuous hitting is enabled. When the value of the timer 223ab is larger than 0 (S1906 in FIG. 192: Yes) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908 in FIG. 192: Yes), the accessory A operation setting process (FIG. 194) ), A value corresponding to the state is set (S3704, S3705 in FIG. 194).

  Specifically, when the accessory A 720 is driven in the normal drive pattern, the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to “1000” (S3704 in FIG. 194). “500” is set as the value of the object A operation timer 223ac (S3705 in FIG. 194).

  The value set in the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ), 1 is subtracted until the value becomes “0” (S2213 in FIG. 193: Yes) (S2214 in FIG. 193).

  The accessory B operation timer 223ad is a timer that counts the operation scenario of the accessory B 740 in the continuous hitting performance, and corresponds to the operation scenario defined in the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 corresponding to the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad. Based on this, the operation of the accessory B 740 is controlled.

  In the continuous hitting button process (see FIG. 192), when the continuous hitting effect start time has been reached (S1902 in FIG. 192: Yes), the accessory B operation timer 223ad is cleared to 0 (S1904 in FIG. 192) and the continuous hitting is enabled. When the value of the timer 223ab is larger than 0 (S1906 in FIG. 192: Yes) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908 in FIG. 192: Yes), the accessory B operation setting process (FIG. 195) In (a), “2000” is set as the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad (S3802 in FIG. 195 (a)).

  The value set in the accessory B operation timer 223ad is set every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ), 1 is subtracted until the value becomes “0” (S2215 in FIG. 193: Yes) (S2216 in FIG. 193).

  The accessory C operation timer 223ae is a timer that counts the operation scenario of the accessory C460 in the continuous hitting production. The operation scenario defined in the accessory C scenario table 222ab3 corresponding to the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae. Based on this, the operation of the accessory C460 is controlled.

  In the continuous hitting button process (see FIG. 192), when the continuous hitting effect start time has been reached (S1902: Yes in FIG. 192), the accessory C operation timer 223ae is cleared to 0 (S1904 in FIG. 192), and the continuous hitting is enabled. When the value of the timer 223ab is larger than 0 (S1906 in FIG. 192: Yes), and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908 in FIG. 192: Yes), the accessory C operation setting process (FIG. 195) In (b), “3000” is set as the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae (S3902 in FIG. 195 (b)).

  The value set in the accessory C operation timer 223ae is set every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ), 1 is subtracted until the value becomes “0” (S2217 in FIG. 193: Yes) (S2218 in FIG. 193).

  As described above, since each of the characters (characters A720 to C460) driven based on the operation on the frame button 22 during the continuous hitting effect is provided with the operation scenario and the operation timer, Can be independently driven. Furthermore, in this control example, since the value of the operation timer set for each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is different, the operation of driving each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is performed. Periods are different. Thus, it is possible to drive only the accessory that is not driven when the frame button 22 is operated (the accessory whose operation timer value is “0”). Therefore, according to the operation status of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460), the movement of the entire accessory when the frame button 22 is operated can be given a variety, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. it can.

  In addition, of each of the roles (positions A720 to C460), for an action A720 whose operation period is shorter than that of the other properties (position B740 and role C460), an operation scenario (operation scenario (short) that has a shorter operation period. Since the shortened drive pattern can be set, all of the characters (characters A720 to C460) are simultaneously driven during the continuous hitting effect (all characters (characters A720 to C460)). The period of time when the value of the operation timer is not “0”) can be shortened, and the drive effect of the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be easily executed.

  The invalidity flag 223af is a flag for determining that the frame button 22 has been operated while the accessory A 720 is operating (the value of the accessory A operation timer is not “0”). Is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation. When the driving of the accessory A 720 is started in a state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, an operation scenario (shortened driving pattern) in which the operation period is shorter than usual is set.

  The invalid flag 223af is set to OFF (S1902 in FIG. 192: Yes) when the continuous-stroke production start time has been reached in the continuous-stroke button processing (see FIG. 192) (S1905 in FIG. 192), and the continuous-stroke effective timer 223ab is set. If the value is larger than 0 (S1906 in FIG. 192: Yes) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908 in FIG. 192: Yes), the accessory A operation setting process (see FIG. 194) is executed. If the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0” (S3701 in FIG. 194: No), it is set to ON (S3702 in FIG. 194).

  Then, in the accessory A operation setting process (see FIG. 194), when the accessory A operation timer 223ac value is “0” (S3701 in FIG. 194: Yes) and the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (FIG. 194). (S3703: Yes), the operation scenario that is the shortened drive pattern is set (S3705 in FIG. 194), and then set to off (S3706 in FIG. 194).

  Note that, in the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A 720 is operating, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and the timing at which the next continuous-stroke effect is started or the timing of the next accessory A 720 Although the configuration is not set to off until the operation is executed, a condition for setting the invalid flag 223af to off may be further provided. For example, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the invalid flag 223af may be set to OFF. Good.

  As a result, only the player who continuously operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times can execute the shortened drive pattern in which the operation period is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a character effect corresponding to the operation state of the frame button 22. In this case, the period during which the invalid flag 223af is set to be off may be set to the operation period (3 seconds) of the longest-moving accessory (combination C460) among the combinations that can be driven in the continuous-stroke effect. With such a configuration, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which all the characters (the characters A720 to the characters C460) are not driven in the continuous hitting effect, the shortened driving pattern of only the character A720 is changed. Setting can be prevented.

  Further, in the present control example, if the frame button 22 is operated once while the accessory A 720 is operating, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON. However, another condition for setting the invalid flag 223af to ON is another. A condition may be set, for example, a condition in which the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times (for example, three times) while the accessory A 720 is operating may be set as an ON condition, or a continuous hitting production period When the remaining period (the remaining period of the continuous tapping effective timer) becomes a predetermined period (for example, within 3 seconds), the condition may be set as ON.

  In addition, in the present control example, the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF when the operation scenario that is the shortened drive pattern is set. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON once. Once set, the invalid flag 223af may not be set to off until the continuous-stroke effect ends.

  The shortening flag 223ag is a flag for determining the operation type of the accessory A720, and is set to ON when the operation type “shortened” is selected. This shortening flag 223ag is used when the invalid flag 223af is determined to be turned on in the accessory A operation setting process (see FIG. 194) executed in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) (see FIG. 194). Is turned on (S3703 in FIG. 194).

  Then, in the accessory operation process (FIG. 196), the operation type is referred to when selecting an operation type in the accessory A scenario table (S2512 in FIG. 196). When the operation type is selected and an operation scenario is set (S2514), It is set to off (S2515 in FIG. 196).

<Control processing in the tenth control example>
Next, a control process in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the control process of the tenth control example, the contents of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from those of the first control example. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the tenth control example, the variable display setting processing (S1512 in FIG. 82) is changed to the variable display setting processing 3 (S1512 in FIG. 190) with respect to the main processing (see FIG. 80) of the first control example. The point, the point that the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1507 in FIG. 83) is changed to the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S1560 in FIG. 191), and the accessory operation processing (S1561 in FIG. 196) is changed. It differs from the newly added point.

  First, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing in the tenth control example. When the main process is executed, the processes of S1501 to S1506 are executed in the same manner as the main process of the above-described first control example (see FIG. 80), and when the process of S1506 is completed, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 83, a frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1560) is executed. This frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1560 in FIG. 191) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1560 is completed, the processing of S1508 to S1510 is executed in the same manner as the main processing (see FIG. 80) of the above-described first control example, and when the processing of S1510 is completed, next, the accessory operation processing (S1512) Execute A detailed description of this accessory operation process (S1561) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the processing of S1561 is completed, next, the command determination processing (S1511) is executed in the same manner as the main processing (see FIG. 80) of the above-described first control example, and thereafter, instead of the variable display setting processing (S1512). , The variable display setting process 3 (S1512) is executed. A detailed description of the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the processes in S1513 to S1517 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 80) of the above-described first control example, and this process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S1512). The variable display setting process 3 (S1512) is different from the variable display setting process (S1512 in FIG. 82) in the first control example in that a process for executing a continuous hit effect is added. Other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) is executed, the processes of S1701 to S1703 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process of the first control example (S1512 in FIG. 82). Then, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of S1703 is equal to or longer than the normal reach (whether the fluctuation time of the extracted fluctuation pattern is 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) or longer) (S1761).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1761 that it is equal to or greater than the normal reach, then a continuous-stroke effect type is selected based on the continuous-stroke effect selection table 222aa and the value of the effect counter 223f (S1762), and the selected continuous-stroke effect is selected. The type is set in the continuous-hit effect type storage area 223aa (S1763).

  When the process of S1763 is completed, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted in S1703 and the continuous production type set in the continuous production type storage area 223aa in S1763 (S1704). On the other hand, in the process of S1761, if it is determined that the variation pattern extracted in the process of S1703 is not equal to or higher than the normal reach (S1761: No), the processes of S1762 and S1763 are skipped, and based on the variation pattern extracted in S1703. Then, a display variation pattern command is set (S1704).

  When the processing of S1704 is completed, the processing of S1706 to S1709 is executed in the same manner as the above-described variable display setting processing of the first control example (S1512 of FIG. 82), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 191, frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S1560) in this control example will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1560). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S1560) is different from the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1507 in FIG. 83) in that a continuous hit button processing (S1857) is added.

  When the frame button input monitoring / producing process 3 (S1560) is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1816 are executed in the same manner as the above-described frame button input monitoring / producing process (S1507 of FIG. 83) of the first control example. , A continuous hit button process is executed (S1851). Then, when the processing of S1851 ends, this processing ends.

  Here, the continuous hit button processing (S1851) executed in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S1560) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous hit button process (S1851). In the continuous hitting button process (S1851), the operation content of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) to be executed based on the operation (pressing) on the frame button 22 executed during the continuous impact production is determined. Is performed.

  When the continuous hit button process (S1851) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous hit effect type (“long continuous hit effect”, “short continuous hit effect”) is set in the continuous hit effect type storage area 223aa (S1901). In the process of S1901, if it is determined that the continuous-stroke effect type is not set, that is, if the continuous-stroke button effect is not executed in the current fluctuation (S1901: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous-stroke effect type is set (S1901: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the continuous-stroke effect start time is reached (S1902). In the process of S1902, it is determined whether 10 seconds (10000 milliseconds) have elapsed since the start of the continuous-stroke effect (see FIG. 187 (a)).

  In the process of S1902, when it is determined that the continuous-stroke production start time is reached (S1902: Yes), the continuous-stroke effect timer 223ab sets the value (““ "10000" in the case of "long continuous production" and "5000" in the case of "short continuous production" (S1903), and each of the accessory operation timers (the accessory A operation timer 223ac, the accessory B operation timer 223ad, The accessory C operation timer 223ae is cleared to 0 (S1904), and the invalid flag 223af is set to off (S1905). Thereafter, the flow shifts to S1906.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1902 that the current time is not the continuous-stroke production start time (S1902: No), the processing skips the initial processing of S1903 to S1905 and proceeds to S1906.

  In the processing of S1906, it is determined whether the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is greater than “0” (S1906). Here, when it is determined that the value of the continuous-stroke effective timer 223ab is not larger than “0” (“0”), that is, in the fluctuation in which the continuous-stroke effect is executed, during the period in which the continuous-stroke effect is not started. If there is (S1906: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1906 that the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is greater than “0” (S1906: Yes), then a button timer subtraction process is executed (S1907). Here, the button timer subtraction process (S1907) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button timer subtraction processing (S1907). This button timer subtraction process (S1907) is for subtracting various timers (continuous hit valid timer 223ab, accessory A operation timer 223ac, accessory B operation timer 223ad, and accessory C operation timer 223ae) set during the continuous hit effect. This is the process.

  When the button timer subtraction process (S1907) is performed, first, it is determined whether the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is greater than “0” (S2211), and if it is determined that the value is greater than “0” (S2211: Yes). Then, the value of the continuous hit timer 223ab is decremented by 1 (S2212), and the flow shifts to the process of S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not larger than “0” (is “0”), the process skips S2212 and shifts to the process of S2213.

  Next, in the processing of S2213, it is determined whether the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is greater than “0” (S2213). If it is determined that the value is greater than “0” (S2213: Yes), the operation of the accessory A is performed. The value of the timer 223ac is decremented by 1 (S2214), and the flow shifts to the process of S2215. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S2213: No), the process of S2214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2215.

  In the process of S2215, it is determined whether the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is greater than “0” (S2215). If it is determined that the value is greater than “0” (S2215: Yes), the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is determined. The value is decremented by 1 (S2216), and the flow shifts to the process of S2217. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S2215: No), the process of S2216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2217.

  In the process of S2217, it is determined whether the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is greater than “0” (S2217), and if it is determined that the value is greater than “0” (S2217: Yes), the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is determined. The value is decremented by 1 (S2218), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S2217: No), the process of S2218 is skipped and the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 192, the description will be continued. When the button timer subtraction process (S1907) is completed, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) (S1908). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1908: Yes), each of the characters Are performed as a process for driving the character, an accessory A operation setting process (S1909), an accessory B operation setting process (S1910), and an accessory C operation setting process (S1911), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1908 that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1908: No), this processing ends as it is.

  Next, the accessory A operation setting process (S1909) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process (S1909). In the accessory A operation setting process (S1909), a process for starting the operation of the accessory A 720 during the continuous hit effect and a process for setting the operation type ("normal", "shortened") of the accessory A 720 are performed. Be executed.

  When the accessory A operation setting process (S1909) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3701). If it is determined that the value is “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is not operating (S3701: Yes), then the invalid flag 223af is set. It is determined whether it is set to on (S3703), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (set to off) (S3703: No), the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to “1000”. Is set, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3701 that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is operating. (S3701: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3702), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3703 that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3703: Yes), the value of the accessory operation A timer 223af is set to “500” (S3705). Then, the invalid flag 223af is set to off (S3706), the shortening flag 223ag is set to on (S3707), and the process ends.

  Next, the accessory B operation setting process (S1910) will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (a). FIG. 195 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process (S1910). In the accessory B operation setting process (S1910), a process for starting the operation of the accessory B 740 during the continuous hit effect is executed.

  When the accessory B operation setting process (S1910) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0” (S3801). If it is determined that the value is “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is not operating (S3801: Yes), the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is set. The value is set to “2000”, and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3801 that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is operating. (S3801: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  FIG. 195 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory C operation setting process (S1911). In this accessory C operation setting process (S1911), a process for starting the operation of the accessory C460 during the continuous hitting effect is executed.

  When the accessory C operation setting process (S1911) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is “0” (S3901). If it is determined that the value is “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory C 460 is not operating (S3901: Yes), the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is determined. The value is set to "3000" and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3901 that the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory C460 is operating. (S3901: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the accessory operation process (S1561) executed in the main process (see FIG. 189) of this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 196. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory operation process (S1561). In the accessory operation process (S1561), the accessory A operation setting process (S1909), the accessory B operation setting process (S1910), and the accessory C operation setting performed in the above-described continuous hit button process (S1851 in FIG. 192). Based on the various timers and flags set in the process (S1911), a process for setting the operation command of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is executed. The operation command set in this process is output to a drive motor (motor driver) for driving each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460).

  When the accessory operation processing (S1561) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is greater than “0” (S2511). If the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not greater than “0” (when determined to be “0” (S2511: No)), the processing (S2512-S2514) for the accessory A720 is skipped and shortened. The flag 223ag is set to off (S2515), and the flow shifts to the process of S2516.

  In the process of S2511, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is greater than “0” (S2511: Yes), it is determined whether the shortening flag 223ag is set to ON (S2512). If it is determined that the shortening flag 223ag is set to ON (S2512: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type “shortening” defined in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 is read (S2513). The process moves to the process of S2516.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the shortening flag 223ag is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2512: No), it corresponds to the operation type “normal” defined in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1. The content of the operation to be performed is read (S2514), and the process proceeds to S2516.

  In the process of S2516, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is greater than “0” (S2516). If the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not greater than "0" (when determined to be "0" (S2516: No), S2517 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2518. When it is determined that the value of the object B operation timer 223ad is larger than “0” (S2518: Yes), the operation content of the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 is read (S2517), and the process proceeds to S2518.

  In the process of S2518, it is determined whether the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is greater than “0” (S2518). If the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is not greater than “0” (when determined to be “0” (S2518: No), S2519 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2520. When it is determined that the value of the object C operation timer 223ae is greater than “0” (S2518: Yes), the operation content of the accessory C scenario table 222ab3 is read (S2519), and the process proceeds to S2520.

  Then, an operation command is set based on each operation content read in the above-described processing of S2513, S2514, S2547, and S2519 (S2520), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, all of the drivable accessories (accessories A720 to C460) are driven based on one operation (pressing) of the frame button 22. It is configured to: Therefore, it is possible to drive a plurality of accessories by a single operation (pressing) of the frame button 22, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the accessory driving effect performed based on the operation of the player.

  In addition, since the operation period is different for each of the characters (characters A720 to C460), each of the drivable characters (characters A720 to R600) can be driven according to the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated. Object C460) can be different. This makes it possible to diversify the driving modes of the accessory when the frame button 22 is operated, so that the effect of the accessory driving effect executed based on the operation of the player can be enhanced.

  Further, if the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory (the accessory A 720) is operating, a short drive pattern in which the operation period of the accessory is short is set when the accessory is driven next time. The number of times the accessory is driven based on the operation on the frame button 22 can be increased for a player who is willing to operate the button 22 a plurality of times. In addition, for a player who does not operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times, the accessory is not driven in the shortened drive pattern and the accessory is driven for a long operation period, so that the effect of the single accessory operation is achieved. Can be increased.

  In other words, in the accessory driving effect in the present control example, the player's frame button operation is performed by changing the driving pattern of the accessory according to the situation in which the player operates the frame button 22 (single operation, continuous hit operation). There is an effect that it is possible to execute an accessory-driven effect according to.

  In the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation of the accessory A 720, the invalid flag 223af, which is a condition for executing the shortened driving pattern, is set to ON. However, another condition may be set as a condition for setting the invalid flag 223af to ON (that is, a condition for executing the shortened drive pattern as a drive pattern different from the normal drive pattern). For example, the accessory A720 The condition may be satisfied when the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times (for example, three times) while the is operating, or the remaining period of the continuous-stroke effect period (the remaining period of the continuous-stroke effective timer) The condition may be satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, within 3 seconds) has been reached, or the condition may be satisfied based on the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct.

  Furthermore, instead of the cumulative value of the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during one role action, the action is performed a plurality of times (for example, the action is performed during a time when one role driving effect is performed). A configuration may be adopted in which the number of times the frame button 22 is operated across the character operation) is accumulated.

  In addition, in the above-described tenth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation of the accessory A720, the invalid flag 223af, which is a condition for executing the shortened driving pattern, starts the next continuous striking effect. At this time, the setting is not set to off until the next operation of the accessory A 720 is executed. However, a condition for setting the invalid flag 223af to off may be further provided. For example, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the invalid flag 223af may be set to OFF. Good.

  As a result, only the player who continuously operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times can execute the shortened drive pattern in which the operation period is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a character effect corresponding to the operation state of the frame button 22. In this case, the period during which the invalid flag 223af is set to be off may be set to the operation period (3 seconds) of the longest-moving accessory (combination C460) among the combinations that can be driven in the continuous-stroke effect. With such a configuration, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which all the characters (the characters A720 to the characters C460) are not driven in the continuous hitting effect, the shortened driving pattern of only the character A720 is changed. Setting can be prevented.

  Further, in the present control example, the shortened drive pattern can be set only for the accessory A720, but the shortened drive pattern can be set for other accessories (the accessory B740 and the accessory C460). May be enabled.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, in order to vary the operation pattern (drive pattern) of the accessory (variable from the normal drive pattern to the shortened drive pattern) in a series of the accessory drive effect, a frame during the accessory drive effect is provided. Although a configuration in which the variable condition is satisfied based on the operation of the button 22 (the invalid flag 223af is set to ON) is used, for example, a period before a series of the accessory driving effect is executed is also used. The operation pattern of the accessory may be changed in advance based on the operation status (the number of operations, the operation interval, and the like) of the frame button 22 in.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to set the shortened drive pattern in the first role action in a series of the role driving effects, and to operate the frame button 22 in the sequence of the role driving effects. It is possible to easily increase the number of times the accessory operation is executed.

  In the above-described control example, a single shortened operation pattern (shortened drive pattern) having a shorter operation period than the normal operation pattern is used, but a plurality of shortened operation patterns having different operation periods are provided. One of a plurality of shortened operation patterns is set based on the operation state of the frame button 22 (the number of operations, the operation interval, and the like), the remaining period of the effect, and the game state (the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is accepted). May be configured.

<Eleventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The eleventh control example is different from the above-described tenth control example in that control for changing the driving timing of the accessory in the accessory driving effect is added.

  Specifically, in the above-described tenth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory driving effect, each of the accessories (the accessory A720 to the role A720) located at the evacuation position (standby position). Although the object C460) is configured to be driven at the same time, in the eleventh control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the timing at which the accessory B 740 is driven with respect to the accessory A 720 is determined. It is set so as to be delayed by 0.1 second and to delay the timing of driving the accessory C460 with respect to the accessory A720 by 0.2 seconds (0.1 second with respect to the accessory B740).

  In this way, by making the timing at which each of the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is driven in response to the operation of the frame button 22 different, all the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) are simultaneously made. It is possible to shorten the driving period, and it is possible to easily drive any one of the respective accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory drive effect. In this way, it is possible to enhance the production effect during the role-driven production.

  Further, if the frame button 22 is operated while the driving timing of the accessory is delayed (for example, the driving timing of the accessory C460 is delayed by 0.2 seconds), the delayed state is released. It is set so that the drive of the target accessory (accessory C460) is started based on the operation of the frame button 22. Thereby, it is possible to easily drive any of the respective accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect during the accessory drive effect.

  As described above, in the case of using the control for varying the driving timing of the character in the character driving effect, a process of delaying the driving timing for a character having a longer operation period set among a plurality of characters. (Delay processing) may be performed. With such a configuration, the driving of the accessory having a short operation period is performed during the delay period, so that the period in which each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is simultaneously driven can be efficiently shortened. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 197, a delay operation in the accessory driving effect of the present control example will be described. FIG. 197 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a state in which each of the driven objects (accessories A720 to B740) is located at the retreat position (standby position) in the accessory driving effect in the present control example. FIG. 197 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory driving effect, and the accessory A 720 starts driving. ) Is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the accessory B 740 in which delay processing has been executed in the accessory driving effect has started operating.

  As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the accessory A720 and the accessory B740 located at the retreat position (standby position) are arranged around the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the tenth control example described above. Is done. Although the accessory C460 is not shown in FIG. 197 for convenience of explanation, the accessory C460 is actually provided at the same location as in the above-described tenth control example (see FIG. 182 (a)).

  In this control example, when the accessory driving effect is started and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), first, as shown in FIG. 197 (b), the accessory A 720 starts operating. Specifically, an operation of the operation type “normal” (operation period of 1 second) (see FIG. 188 (a)) is executed. Then, 0.1 seconds later, the accessory B 740 starts operating as shown in FIG. 197 (c). Specifically, an operation of the operation type “normal” (operation period of 2 seconds) (see FIG. 188 (b)) is executed.

  As described above, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in a state where the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 are drivable (a state in which the accessory A is located at the retreat position (standby position)) (see FIG. 197 (a)). In this case, the actor B 720 starts the operation with a delay (see FIG. 197 (b)) with respect to the start of the operation of the accessory A 720 (see FIG. 197 (b)). Thus, a plurality of characters can be driven at different timings. Therefore, there is an effect that the accessory can be driven at various timings with respect to the operation of the frame button 22, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, a period from the state shown in FIG. 197 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 197 (c), that is, a period from when the accessory A 720 operates to when the accessory B 740 starts operating (delay period If the frame button 22 is operated during), the accessory B 740 starts operating without waiting for the delay period to elapse. Thereby, it is possible to easily drive any one of the respective accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22, and it is possible to enhance the production effect during the accessory drive effect. it can.

  In this control example, as described above, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the configuration is such that the accessory B 740 starts operating without waiting for the delay period to elapse. Even if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the operation of the accessory B 740 may not be started until the delay period elapses. In this case, the accessory cannot be driven based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the delay period, but since the accessory B 740 starts driving after the delay period has elapsed, the player is delayed by the player. It can be assumed that the driving of the accessory B 740 has been executed (started) based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 198, a description will be given of the operation of the frame button 22 and the flow of the operation of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) in the “button continuous hitting effect” which is the accessory driving effect in the present control example. do. FIG. 198 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory driving effect in the present control example. In the present control example, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) while the specific accessory (the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460) is operating, and then the specific accessory (the accessory B 740) is determined. Or, when the driving of the accessory C460) is executed, the operation start timing is delayed.

  Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while either the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 is operating, an invalid flag 223af described later is set to ON. When the operation of the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 is started in a state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, a delay process for delaying the operation start timing is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 198, when the player operates the frame button 22 (“button pressed” ON) during the valid period of the “button continuous staging effect”, the player is positioned in the stop state (state in the standby position). The operation of each of the other accessories (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is started (point a in FIG. 198).

  In this control example, the driving period of the accessory A 720 is set to 1 second, the driving period of the accessory B 740 is set to 2 seconds, and the driving period of the accessory C 460 is set to 3 seconds, as in the tenth control example described above. It is driven for a predetermined period. Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (“button pressed” ON) at the timing when the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 is being driven, the invalid flag 223af indicating that the frame button 22 is operated during the invalid period is turned on. (Point b in FIG. 198).

  Thereafter, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the timing when the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 are stopped (a state where the accessory A is located at the standby position), the ordinary operation of the accessory A 720 is executed, and the accessory A 720 is executed. In B740, a delay process (delay period: 0.1 second) is executed (point c in FIG. 198). In addition, at this point c, since the accessory C460 is being driven, the invalid flag 223af is continuously set to ON.

  More specifically, in this control process, after completing the operation setting process for the accessory B 740 (the accessory B operation setting process (S1910 in FIG. 203)), the operation setting process for the accessory C 460 (the accessory C operation setting process) (S1911 in FIG. 204)), the invalid flag 223af is once set to OFF in the accessory B operation setting process by operating the frame button 22 at the point c in FIG. 198. Thereafter, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON again in the accessory C operation setting process, so that the invalid flag 223af is continuously set to ON.

  Then, after the delay period has elapsed (after 0.1 second), the operation of the accessory B 740 (operation period of 2 seconds) is executed (point d in FIG. 198). Thereafter, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the operation of the accessory C460 has been completed (point e in FIG. 198), the ordinary operation of the accessory A720 is executed, and the accessory C460 performs the delay processing (delay period 0). .2 seconds) (point e in FIG. 198). At this point e, since the delay processing is performed on the accessory C460, the invalid flag 223af is set to off. Then, after the elapse of the delay period (after 0.2 seconds), the operation of the accessory C460 (the operation period is 3 seconds) is executed (point f in FIG. 198).

  Thereafter, at the timing of the point g in FIG. 198, that is, in the state where the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF, and when the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 are in a stopped state (a state where they are at the standby position), When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the object C460 is in the operating state (operating state), the operations of the accessory A720 and the accessory B740 are executed, and the invalid flag 223af is set to ON.

  Then, at the timing of the point h in FIG. 198, that is, in a state in which the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and all of the accessory A720, the accessory B740, and the accessory C460 are in a stopped state (positioned at the standby position). When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing of (the state of being in), the operations of the accessory A 720 and the accessory C 460 are executed, and the delay process is executed on the accessory B 740.

  This is because, as described above, in the present control example, after the operation setting process for the accessory B 740 (the accessory B operation setting process (S1910 in FIG. 203)), the operation setting process for the accessory C 460 (the accessory C operation) Since the setting process (S1911 in FIG. 204) is configured to be executed, the operation of the frame button 22 at the point h in FIG. 198 turns off the invalid flag 223af in the accessory B operation setting process. After that, in the accessory C operation setting process, the operation content of the accessory C460 is set.

  As described above, by operating the frame button 22 while any of the plurality of accessories (the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460) is operating, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and the invalid flag 223af is set to ON. When any of the plurality of characters (the character B 740 and the character C 460) performs an operation in the state in which the operation is performed, the process of performing the delay processing and setting the invalid flag 223af to OFF is performed by the character B 740 and the character By executing in the order of C460, if the operation of the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460 is performed in a state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the delay processing is performed only for the accessory B 740. Become.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the delay processing from being simultaneously performed on a plurality of characters (character B 740 and character C 460).

  Next, the flow of the operation of each accessory when the frame button 22 is operated during the delay processing will be described with reference to the points h and i in FIG. 198. If the frame button 22 is operated while the delay processing (0.1 seconds) is being performed on the accessory B 740 at point h in FIG. 198 (0.08 seconds after the delay processing is performed) ( At the point i) in FIG. 198, the delay processing being executed is terminated, and the accessory B 740 executes the operation based on the frame button operation at the point i in FIG. 198.

  As described above, when the frame button 22 is operated while the delay processing is being executed, the delay processing is stopped and the accessory is driven, whereby the character based on the frame button operation during the “button continuous hit effect” is operated. The number of operations can be increased.

  Note that, in the present control example, the invalid flag 223af is set to the initial state (set to off) at the timing when the “button continuous production” is started. However, another configuration may be used. , May be set to off at the timing when the “valid period” of the “button continuous production” ends, or may be set to off at the timing when the “button continuous production” ends.

<Electrical Configuration in Eleventh Control Example>
Next, the contents of the RAM 223 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eleventh control example. The RAM 222 in the eleventh control example is different from the RAM 222 in the tenth control example in that an accessory B delay timer 222ba and an accessory C delay timer 222bb are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The accessory B delay timer 223ba is a timer for counting the delay period when the delay processing is performed on the accessory B 740, and the value (for example, “100”) set to this timer is 1 It is decremented every millisecond, and the delay processing ends when the value of the timer becomes “0”. This accessory B delay timer 223ba determines that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0” in the accessory B operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 203) executed in the continuous hit button rendering process 2 (see FIG. 200). (S3811 in FIG. 203: Yes), when the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3813 in FIG. 203: Yes), a value of “100” is set, and in the continuous hitting button effect processing 2 (see FIG. 200). Every time the executed delay timer subtraction process (see FIG. 201) is executed, 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S2352 in FIG. 201).

  Then, in the accessory B operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 203), when the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is not “0”, the timer value is set to “0”. Is set.

  The accessory C delay timer 223bb is a timer for counting a delay period when the delay processing is performed on the accessory C460, and a value (for example, “200”) set to this timer is 1 It is decremented every millisecond, and the delay processing ends when the value of the timer becomes “0”. You. This accessory C delay timer 223bb determines that the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is “0” in the accessory C operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 204) executed in the continuous hit button rendering process 2 (see FIG. 200). (S3911: Yes in FIG. 203), when the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3913: Yes in FIG. 203), a value of “200” is set, and in the continuous hit button effect processing 2 (see FIG. 200). Every time the executed delay timer subtraction process (see FIG. 201) is executed, 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S2354 in FIG. 201).

  Then, in the accessory C operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 204), when the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is not “0”, the timer value is set to “0”. Is set.

  As described above, the above-described accessory B delay timer 223ba and the accessory C delay timer 223bb are each configured to have a delay period (0.1 second for the accessory B 740, C460 is a timer for counting 0.2 seconds).

  Further, in each of the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460, when the frame button 22 is operated while the delay processing is being executed (while the delay period is being counted), each delay timer (the accessory The values of the B delay timer 223ba and the accessory C delay timer 223bb) are set to “0”. Thereby, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the delay period, the accessory can be driven based on the operation on the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to easily drive the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory driving effect (during the continuous hit effect), and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect during the accessory driving effect. .

<Control Process in Eleventh Control Example>
Next, a control process in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the control processing of the eleventh control example, the contents of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed from those of the tenth control example. Other processes are the same as those in the tenth control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the eleventh control example, the continuous hit button processing (see FIG. 192) in the tenth control example is changed to the continuous hit button processing 2 (see FIG. 200), and the accessory operation processing (see FIG. 196) is a personal accessory. The difference is that operation processing 2 (see FIG. 205) is changed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 200, the continuous hit button processing 2 (S1851) executed in the frame button input monitoring / production processing 3 (S1560) will be described. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous hit button processing 2 (S1851). In the continuous hitting button process 2 (S1851), the operation of each of the characters (characters A720 to C460) executed based on the operation (pressing) on the frame button 22 during the continuous hitting effect (“button continuous hitting effect”). A process for determining the content is executed.

  Each process of the continuous hit button process 2 (S1851) in the eleventh control example is different from the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) in the tenth control example in that a delay timer subtraction process (S1921) is added. I do.

  When the continuous hitting button process 2 (S1851) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1907 are executed in the same manner as the continuous hitting button process of the above-described first control example (see FIG. 192), and then the delay timer subtraction process is performed. (S1921) Then, the processing of S1908 to S1911 is performed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the delay timer subtraction process (S1921) in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the contents of the delay timer subtraction processing (S1921). When the delay timer subtraction process (S1921) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is greater than “0” (S2351). If it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is greater than “0” (“1” or more) (S2351: Yes), the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is subtracted by 1 (S2352). The process moves to the process of S2353.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is “0” (S2351: No), the process of S2352 is skipped, and the process shifts to S2353.

  In the process of S2353, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is greater than “0” (S2353). When it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2353: Yes), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is decremented by 1 (S2354). This processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is “0” (S2353: No), the process of S2354 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, the accessory A operation setting process 2 (S1909) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process 2 (S1909). The eleventh control example is different from the tenth control example in that the accessory A operation setting process (see FIG. 194) is changed to the accessory A operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 202).

  When the accessory A operation setting process 2 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3711). If it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0” (“1” or more) (S3711: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3712), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3711 that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3711: Yes), “1000” is set as the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac (S3713). ), End this processing.

  That is, in the above-described accessory A operation setting process 2 (S1909), it is determined whether or not the current operation state of the accessory A 720 is operating by referring to the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac, and the operation is in progress. In this case, the invalid flag 223af indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during the operation is set to ON, and if it is not operating (if it is in the stop state (standby state)), the operation of the accessory A 720 is executed. Therefore, a process of setting a value of “1000” (corresponding to one second) to the accessory A operation timer 223ac is executed.

  Next, the accessory B operation setting process 2 (S1910) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process 2 (S1910).

  The present eleventh control example is different from the tenth control example in that the accessory B operation setting process (see FIG. 195 (a)) is changed to the accessory B operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 203).

  In the accessory B operation setting process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0” (S3811). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0” (is “1” or more) (S3811: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3812), and the process ends. I do.

  On the other hand, if the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0” (S3811: Yes), it is determined whether the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3813). When it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3813: No), it is determined whether the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is “0”. (S3814). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is not “0” (is “1” or more) (S3814: No), the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is set to “0” ( S3815), and shifts to the processing of S3816. On the other hand, in the process of S3814, when it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is “0” (S3814: Yes), the process of S3815 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3816.

  In the process of S3816, the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is set to “2000” (S3816), and the process ends.

  Also, in the process of S3813, when it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (is ON) (S3813: Yes), the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is set to “100” ( (S3817), the invalid flag 223af is set to off (S3818), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the accessory B operation setting process 2 (S1910 in FIG. 203), the accessory B 740 can be operated or delayed based on the operation timing of the frame button 22, and the delay can be performed. When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing during the processing (the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is “1” or more), the processing for terminating the delay processing and operating the accessory B 740 is executed.

  Next, the accessory C operation setting process 2 (S1911) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process 2 (S1911).

  The eleventh control example is different from the tenth control example in that the accessory C operation setting process (see FIG. 195 (b)) is changed to the accessory C operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 204).

  In the accessory C operation setting process 2 (S1911), first, it is determined whether or not the accessory C operation timer 223ae is “0” (S3911). If it is determined that the accessory C operation timer 223ae is not “0” (“1” or more) (S3911: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3912), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is “0” (S3911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the invalid flag 223af is turned on (S3913). When it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3913: No), it is determined whether the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is “0” (S3914). ).

  In the process of S3914, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is not “0” (“1” or more) (S3914: No), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is set to “0”. The setting is made (S3915), and the process proceeds to S3916. On the other hand, in the process of S3914, if the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is “0” (S3914: Yes), the process of S3915 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3916.

  In the processing of S3916, the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is set to “3000” (S3916), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3913 that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3913: Yes), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is set to “200” (S3917), and the invalid flag 223af is set. Is set to off (S3918), and this process ends.

  Next, the accessory operation processing 2 (S1561) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory operation process 2 (S1561).

  The present eleventh control example is different from the tenth control example in that the accessory operation processing (see FIG. 196) of the tenth control example is changed to the accessory operation processing 2 (see FIG. 205).

  In the accessory operation processing 2 (S1561), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S2531). If it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2531: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type “normal” in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 is determined. Reading (S2532), the process proceeds to S2533. On the other hand, when the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is determined to be “0” in the process of S2531 (S2531: No), the process of S2532 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2533.

  In the process of S2533, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is larger than “0” (S2533). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is greater than “0” (“1” or more) (S2533: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is greater than “0”. It is determined (S2534). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2534: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type of the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 is read ( S2535), and the process proceeds to S2536.

  On the other hand, if the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is determined to be “0” in the processing of S2533 (S2533: No), or the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is determined to be “0” in the processing of S2534. If it has been performed (S2534: No), the process of S2535 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2536.

  In the process of S2536, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is greater than “0”. In the process of S2536, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2536: Yes), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is set to “ It is determined whether it is greater than "0" (S2537).

  In the process of S2537, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2537: Yes), the operation corresponding to the operation type of the accessory C scenario table 222ab3. The content is read out (S2538), and the flow shifts to the process of S2539.

  On the other hand, if the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is determined to be “0” in the processing of S2536 (S2536: No), or the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is determined to be “0” in the processing of S2537. If (S2537: No), the process skips step S2538 and shifts to the step S2539.

  In the processing of S2539, an operation command is set based on the read operation contents (S2539), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, since the timing at which each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is driven in response to the operation of the frame button 22 is made different, all of each accessory (accessory) is used. It is possible to shorten the period during which the A720 to the accessory C460) is simultaneously driven, and any one of the respective accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory driving effect. Can be easily driven, and the effect of the effect during the accessory drive effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present control example, if the frame button 22 is operated while the driving timing of the accessory is delayed (for example, the driving timing of the accessory C460 is delayed by 0.2 seconds), a delay occurs. It is set so that the state is released and the driving of the target accessory (accessory C460) is started based on the operation of the frame button 22. Thereby, it is possible to easily drive any of the respective accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect during the accessory drive effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the delay processing is executed for the accessory B 740 (operating period of 2 seconds) and the accessory C 460 (operating period of 3 seconds) whose operating period is longer than the accessory A 720 (operating period of 1 second). It is configured as follows. That is, when a plurality of characters are driven at the same time, the delay processing is performed on the character having a long operation period. Accordingly, while the delay processing is being performed, the operation of the accessory having a short operation period is performed, so that it is possible to further reduce the period in which a plurality of accessories simultaneously operate. .

  In this control example, a configuration is used in which when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the operation of the accessory in which the delay process is being performed is started without waiting for the delay period to elapse. However, even if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the operation of the accessory B may not be started until the delay period elapses.

  In this case, the accessory cannot be driven based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the delay period, but since the accessory starts to operate after the delay period elapses, the player is informed of the delay period. It can be assumed that the action of the accessory is executed (started) based on the operation (pressing) of the middle frame button 22.

  Further, in the present control example, while the delay processing can be executed for a plurality of characters (character B 740 and character C 460), the delay processing can be simultaneously performed for the plural characters by one frame button operation. Since it is configured not to be executed, it is possible to suppress the delay processing from being executed simultaneously for a plurality of characters (character B 740 and character C 460). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the delay processing is simultaneously performed on the plurality of characters and the period in which the plurality of characters simultaneously operate is not shortened.

  Further, in the present control example, the delay period set in the delay processing is made different for each accessory, so that it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the period during which a plurality of accessories simultaneously operate is not shortened. it can.

  In this control example, the period delayed in the delay processing is set to a short period (0.1 seconds or 0.2 seconds). However, the length of the delay period is not limited to this. A delay period longer than the operation period in which the accessory operates may be set. By doing so, it is possible to further suppress simultaneous operation of a plurality of characters.

  Further, in the present control example, only one type of period to be delayed in the delay processing is defined for each accessory, but a plurality of types of delay periods may be set for each accessory. In this case, it is preferable to determine the simultaneously-executed accessory and select the delay period based on the determination result. With such a configuration, there is an effect that a period in which a plurality of characters simultaneously operate can be further reduced.

  Further, in the present control example, in order to execute the delay process in a series of the accessory driving effect, the delay condition is established based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory driving effect (the invalid flag 223af is set to ON). However, in addition to the above, for example, based on the operation status of the frame button 22 (the number of operations, the operation interval, and the like) in a period before a series of the accessory driving effects is executed, the combination is performed. A configuration in which the object operation is delayed in advance may be used.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to set a delay pattern in the first role action in a series of role-driven effects, and in a sequence of role-driven effects, a role corresponding to an operation on the frame button 22. It is possible to easily increase the number of times the object movement is executed.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The twelfth control example is different from the above-described tenth control example in that a control for changing an operation command to a running character in the role driving effect is added in the middle.

  Specifically, in the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory driving effect, a predetermined driving pattern (a normal driving pattern or a shortened driving pattern) is set, and the setting is performed. The configuration is such that each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is operated based on the performed drive pattern.

  On the other hand, in the twelfth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the operating status of each of the active accessories (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) is determined, and the operating role is determined. When the object (the accessory A 720 or the accessory B 740) satisfies a predetermined condition (when it is determined that the accessory is being driven in the forward direction), the accessory is turned from the current position to the standby position ( An operation command to be operated (toward the negative direction) (hereinafter, referred to as repetitive operation) is set.

  As described above, the operation command for the running accessory (the accessory A 720 or the accessory B 740) is changed in the middle and the repetitive operation is executed, thereby shortening the operation period of one accessory operation. It is possible to make it easy to operate any of the respective accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory-driven effect. The effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, since it is configured to execute the repetitive operation only when it is determined that the operation state is driving in the forward direction, it is possible to surely shorten the operation period of the accessory in which the operation command is changed in the middle. Can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the repetitive operation in the accessory driving effect of the present control example will be described. FIG. 206 (a) schematically shows an operation (drive) range (maximum drive range) and a repetitive operation possible range (repeatable range) of the accessory A720 operated in the accessory drive effect in this control example. FIG. 206B schematically illustrates a state in which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory driving effect, and the accessory A 720 is operating in the forward direction (forward operation). FIG. 206 (c) is a repetitive operation in which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is operating in the positive direction, and the accessory A 720 is operated in the negative direction (return operation). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory A720 in which was performed.

  The accessory A720 located at the retreat position (standby position) as shown in FIG. 206A is arranged around the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the tenth control example described above. Note that for convenience of explanation, FIG. 206 (a) does not show the accessory B740 and the accessory C460, but actually, the accessory B740 and the accessory are placed in the same location as in the above-described tenth control example (see FIG. 182 (a)). An object C460 is provided.

  The accessory A720 of this control example is set so as to be driven by the same operation command as the operation command specified for the operation type “normal” of the above-described tenth control example (the operation period is 1 second (the forward operation time of 0. 1). 206, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b of the accessory A 720 are moved to near the center of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 206 (a). It is configured to overhang (maximum drive range).

  As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the left-hand slide member 720a and right-hand slide member 720b of the accessory A720 are respectively driven by the accessory A motors 771, 772, as shown in FIG. The movement of the third symbol display device 81 toward the substantially central direction is started (driven in the forward direction). FIG. 206B shows a state in which the accessory A 720 starts driving in the forward direction and 0.25 seconds have elapsed. In the state shown in FIG. 206 (b), when the operation is executed based on the normal operation command, the rest operation is executed for 0.25 seconds, and then the return operation is executed for 0.5 seconds.

  When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in the state shown in FIG. 206 (b), as shown in FIG. 206 (c), the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated (the forward movement is 0.25 At a timing of the second execution), a return operation (operation period of 0.25 seconds) is executed (a repetitive operation is executed).

  Thereby, the operation of the accessory A 720, whose operation period is normally 1 second (forward operation 0.5 seconds, return operation 0.5 seconds), is changed to 0.5 seconds (forward operation 0.25 seconds). , Return operation 0.25 seconds) (repetitive operation), and any one of the respective accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory drive effect. Can be easily operated, and the effect of the effect during the accessory driven effect can be enhanced.

  Note that FIG. 206 shows an example of a repetitive operation when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) when 0.25 seconds elapse after the forward operation is executed. When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the period of (movement in the forward direction), a repetitive operation is executed. Therefore, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the timing when the forward operation is executed for 0.1 second, the return operation is executed for 0.1 second, and the operation period of the accessory A 720 is set to 0. .2 seconds.

  In FIG. 206, the repetitive operation of this control example is described using the accessory A 720. However, the accessory B 740 is also configured to be able to execute the repetitive operation in the same manner, and the operation period of the accessory B 740 (2 seconds) ), The frame button 22 is operated during the period in which the forward operation (1 second) is being executed (for example, the timing when the forward operation is executed for 0.5 second), and then the return operation for 0.5 second is performed. Is executed. As a result, it is possible to normally change the accessory operation during the operation period (2 seconds) to the operation period (1 second).

  As described above, in the twelfth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation of the accessory that operates based on the operation on the frame button 22, the operation content of the active accessory is operated. (Operating period) can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of action of the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  In the present control example, the configuration is such that the operating period of the driven accessory is shortened by operating the frame button 22 in a state where the accessory that operates based on the operation on the frame button 22 is driven. ing. This makes it easier for the accessory to be located at the evacuation position (standby position), so that the number of times the accessory is operated based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased.

  Further, in the present control example, it is determined whether or not the accessory is moving in the forward direction (from the retreat position to the overhang position), and it is determined that the accessory is moving in the forward direction. In such a case, the operation content of the accessory is changed so that the accessory moves in the negative direction (toward the retreat position), so that the operation period of the accessory can be reliably reduced.

  In the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the accessory is operating, the operation (repetition operation) for shortening the operation period is executed. A configuration may be used. For example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the movement of the operating accessory is temporarily stopped (the counting of each of the accessory operation timers is stopped), and then the frame button 22 is operated. When the is operated, the operation of the accessory may be restarted (the count of the accessory operation timer is restarted). With such a configuration, it is possible to change the operation mode of the accessory in operation based on the operation of the frame button 22, and it is possible to increase the number of accessory operations based on the operation of the frame button 22. Further, instead of temporarily stopping the movement of the accessory during the operation, an operation of returning to the return direction (negative direction) by a predetermined amount (for example, 10 ms) may be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 207, a description will be given of the operation of the frame button 22 and the flow of the operation of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) in the “button continuous effect” which is the accessory drive effect in the present control example. do. FIG. 207 is a timing chart illustrating a flow of the accessory driving effect in the present control example. Note that detailed description of the same contents as in FIG. 185 of the above-described tenth control example is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 207, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in the “button continuous hit effect”, each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) starts operating similarly to the tenth control example described above. (See point a and point b in FIG. 207). Next, the flow of the repetitive operation in this control example will be described with reference to points c to g in FIG.

  When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the point c in FIG. 207, the operation of the accessory B 740 located in the stop state (standby state) is executed (operation period is 2 seconds). Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 0.8 seconds after the point c, the operation of the accessory A 720 is started (point d in FIG. 207). This point d is 0.8 seconds after the accessory B 740 starts operating, and is a period in which the accessory B 740 is operating in the positive direction. An operation command to move for 8 seconds is set.

  Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 0.25 seconds after the point d, a repetitive operation is performed on the accessory A720, and an operation command for moving in the negative direction for 0.25 seconds is set. At the point d, since the accessory B 740 operates in the negative direction, the operation content does not change based on the operation (operation) of the frame button 22.

  Then, the accessory A 720 that has performed the repetitive operation 0.25 seconds after the point e completes the operation (point f in FIG. 207), and the attribute B 740 that has performed the repetitive operation 0.8 seconds after the point d. Completes the operation (point g in FIG. 207).

  Further, after the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at a timing (point h in FIG. 207) at which both the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 can execute an operation, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 0.6 seconds later. ), The accessory A 720 is in a state in which half of the operation period (1 second) has elapsed (moving in the negative direction), so that the repetitive operation is not performed, and the accessory B 740 is in the operation period. Since it is a state in which half of (2 seconds) has not elapsed (moving in the forward direction), a repetitive operation (a repetitive operation in which the total operation period is 1.2 seconds) is executed (point i). ). Then, 0.6 seconds after the point i, the repetitive operation of the accessory B 740 is completed.

<Control processing in twelfth control example>
Next, a control process in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process in the twelfth control example is different from the tenth control example in that a continuous hit button process 3 (see FIG. 208) is executed instead of the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192). Is the same as in the tenth control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 208, the continuous hit button processing 3 (S1851) will be described. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous hit button processing 3 (S1851). When the continuous hitting button processing 3 (S1851) is executed, the processing of S1901 to S1908 is executed in the same manner as the continuous hitting button processing of the tenth control example (see FIG. 192), and thereafter, the accessory A operation setting processing 3 is executed. Execute (see S1909 in FIG. 209), execute the accessory B operation setting process 3 (see S1910 in FIG. 210), execute the accessory C operation setting process 3 (see S1911 in FIG. 211), and end this process. I do.

  Next, the accessory A operation setting process 3 (S1909) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process 3 (S1909). When the accessory A operation setting process 3 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3721). If the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is determined to be “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is not operating (S3721: Yes), Next, the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to “1000” (S3723), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3721, if it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0” (“1” or more), that is, if the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A 720 is operating. If (pressed) (S3721: No), it is determined whether the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is greater than "500" (S3724), and if the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is equal to or less than "500". If it is determined (S3724: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is greater than “500” (S3724: Yes), a value obtained by subtracting the accessory A operation timer 223ac from “1000” is used as the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. The value is set to a value (S3726), and this processing ends.

  That is, according to the accessory A operation setting process 3 (S1909), when the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac has not reached half (“500”) of the set value (“1000”), that is, the accessory If it is determined that A is operating in the forward direction (direction moving away from the standby position), the current value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set from the set value (“1000”) of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. By setting the subtracted value (that is, the value for performing an operation in the negative direction corresponding to the amount of operation already performed in the positive direction) in the accessory A operation timer 223ac, the repetitive operation is performed using the accessory A scenario table 222ab1. Can be performed.

  Note that, as in the present control example, when performing control for changing the operation period by changing the value of a timer (counter) that advances the operation scenario table without changing the operation scenario table for operating the accessory. It is preferable to provide a position detection sensor for detecting the actual operation position of the accessory.

  Next, the accessory B operation setting process 3 (S1910) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210A is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process 3 (S1910). When the accessory B operation setting process 3 (S1910) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0” (S3821). If the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is determined to be “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is not operating (S3821: Yes), The value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is set to "2000" (S3823), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3821 that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is operating. (S3821: No), it is determined whether the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is greater than "1000" (S3824), and if it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is less than "1000" ( S3824: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is greater than “1000” (S3824: Yes), a value obtained by subtracting the accessory B operation timer 223ad from “2000” is used as the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad. The value is set to a value (S3826), and this processing ends.

  Next, the accessory C operation setting process 3 (S1911) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210B is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory C operation setting process 3 (S1911). In the twelfth control example, the accessory C operation setting process (see FIG. 195) of the tenth control example is changed to the accessory C operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 210), and the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is changed. Is set to “500” (S3922), and the other processing is the same as in the tenth control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the twelfth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation of the accessory that operates based on the operation on the frame button 22, the operation content of the active accessory is operated. (Operating period) can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of action of the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  In the present control example, the configuration is such that the operating period of the driven accessory is shortened by operating the frame button 22 in a state where the accessory that operates based on the operation on the frame button 22 is driven. ing. This makes it easier for the accessory to be located at the evacuation position (standby position), so that the number of times the accessory is operated based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased.

  Further, in the present control example, it is determined whether or not the accessory is moving in the forward direction (from the retreat position to the overhang position), and it is determined that the accessory is moving in the forward direction. In such a case, the operation content of the accessory is changed so that the accessory moves in the negative direction (toward the retreat position), so that the operation period of the accessory can be reliably reduced.

  In the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the accessory is operating, the operation (repetition operation) for shortening the operation period is executed. A configuration may be used. For example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the movement of the operating accessory is temporarily stopped (the counting of each of the accessory operation timers is stopped), and then the frame button 22 is operated. When the is operated, the operation of the accessory may be restarted (the count of the accessory operation timer is restarted). With such a configuration, it is possible to change the operation mode of the accessory in operation based on the operation of the frame button 22, and it is possible to increase the number of accessory operations based on the operation of the frame button 22.

<Thirteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 216. In the thirteenth control example, in contrast to the above-described tenth control example, all of the characters (characters A720 to C460) that operate based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the character driving effect are all generated at a specific timing. The difference is that control for positioning at the evacuation position (standby position) is added.

  In the configuration of the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated during the accessory driving effect, the control for operating the operable accessory (the accessory located at the evacuation position (standby position)) is controlled by the frame button. The operation is executed during a period (valid period) in which the operation 22 is determined to be valid. Here, for example, in the last stage of the above-described role-driven effect, an effect is to be set in which all the effects (the effects A720 to C460) are operated simultaneously as a role effect for notifying the jackpot expectation. In the tenth control example, the operation of the accessory C460, which is performed at different timings and in different operation periods, until the operation of each of the accessories (accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is completed. It is necessary to set the period (3 seconds) as a period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is not determined to be valid (invalid period).

  In this way, if the same invalid period is set for each of the bonuses (the bonuses A720 to the bonuses C460), there is a possibility that the player may erroneously recognize that the bonus-drive effect has ended. However, there has been a problem that the effect of the entire character-driven effect is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the thirteenth control example, it is possible to set an invalid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalidated for each of the characters (characters A720 to C460) having different operation periods. The invalid period to be set is configured to be set in accordance with the operation period of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460).

  As described above, by setting the invalid period corresponding to the operation period for each of the bonuses (the bonuses A720 to the bonuses C460), that is, each of the driven items based on one operation of the frame button 22 is set. By setting a different invalid period for the character (character A720 to character C460), the invalid period set during the character-driven effect (the invalid period set for all characters) is shortened. Thus, there is an effect that the effect of the entire accessory driven effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 211, an operation mode of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) in the accessory drive effect of the present control example will be described. FIG. 211 (a) shows a period in which each of the characters (characters A720 to C460) is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 set at the beginning of the character-driven effect (hereinafter, referred to as a free motion period). FIG. 212B is a schematic diagram illustrating a point c in FIG. 212 described below as an example of the operation of each of the bonuses (the bonus A720 to the bonus C460) in FIG. Schematic diagram schematically showing a simultaneous operation in which each of the accessories (accessories A720 to C460) operates simultaneously with the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) intentionally positioned at the evacuation position (standby position). It is.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (a), during the free motion period, each of the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is operated at a different timing. Therefore, at a point c in FIG. The slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b) are moving in the negative direction (a state where about 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation), and the accessory B 740 (the upper slide member 740a and the lower slide member 740b) is moved in the negative direction. (A state in which about 1.1 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation), and the accessory C460 has not started the operation.

  As described above, during the free motion period, each of the characters (characters A720 to C460) starts to operate at different timings depending on the operation timing of the frame button 22, and further, each character (characters A720 to character). C460) performs operations in different operation periods, so that each of the characters (characters A720 to C460) rarely ends the operation at the same timing.

  With such a configuration, during the free motion period, various character action effects can be executed in response to the player's frame button operation, and the player is prevented from getting tired of the game early. ing.

  FIG. 211 (b) shows the simultaneous operation set at the end of the accessory driving effect. In this simultaneous operation, all the accessories execute the operation at the same timing, and by simultaneously operating a plurality of accessories (accessories A720 to C460) provided in the pachinko machine 10, the player is given a simultaneous action. It is a production that gives an impact.

  In the accessory drive effect having such a free motion period and a period in which the simultaneous operation is executed, for example, in the third symbol display device 81, a display effect indicating whether or not a special symbol has won a big hit is provided. During the execution period, the third symbol is in the reach state (for example, of the three third symbols, two third symbols are stopped at the same symbol, and one remaining third symbol is fluctuating). State), the free motion period is set as the accessory driving effect, and the simultaneous operation is performed on the third symbol display device 81 near the timing at which the third symbol fluctuating in the reach state stops. It is good to be configured to be set.

  As a result, it is possible to execute various accessory operations according to the free operation period as a flutter during the reach state, and to execute the simultaneous operation at a timing indicating the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

  As described above, according to the present control example, the free operation period is executed in the early stage of the accessory-driven effect, and the simultaneous operation can be executed in the final stage of the accessory-driven effect. When the transition from the free operation period to the simultaneous operation period is performed, the invalid period of the period corresponding to the operation period of each of the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is set. , It is possible to reduce the period during which all of the respective bonuses (the bonuses A720 to the bonuses C460) are inoperable.

  In this control example, the operation period of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is fixed. However, as in the above-described tenth control example, control for shortening the operation period of the accessory may be used. The control for delaying the operation timing of the accessory may be used as in the above-described eleventh control example, or the control for changing the operation content of the operating accessory as in the twelfth control example may be performed. May be used. Further, the controls used in the above-described control examples may be combined. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the free driving operation executed at the beginning of the accessory driving effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the simultaneous operation performed at the end of the character-driven effect is configured to be executed based on the frame button operation of the player, but the predetermined period of the character-driven effect (for example, The simultaneous operation may be automatically executed when the remaining period is 1 second).

  Further, in the present control example, the operation timing of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is set to be the same as the simultaneous operation. For example, the operation range of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is the maximum. May be set to be the same (the timing at which the accessory is most separated from the standby position).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 212, a description will be given of the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation flow of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) in the “button continuous effect” which is the accessory-driven effect in the present control example. do. FIG. 212 is a timing chart showing a flow of the accessory driving effect in the present control example. Note that detailed description of the same elements as those in the above-described timing chart of the tenth control example (see FIG. 185) is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 212, the “button continuous staging effect” in the present control example is a free operation period in which each of the accessories (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 at the beginning of the effective period. At the end of the validity period, a simultaneous operation period for simultaneously operating each of the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is set.

  Then, at the timing when the free motion period ends (point h in FIG. 212), each of the personal effects (positions A720 to C460) is moved to the retreat position (stop state). An invalid time is set for each of the (accessory A720 to the accessory C460). Specifically, for the accessory C460 whose operation period is 3 seconds, the same invalid period of 3 seconds as the operation period is set (the period from the point d to the point h in FIG. 212), and the operation period is 2 seconds. The same two-second ineffective period as the operation period is set for the accessory B 740 (the period from the point f to the point h in FIG. 212), and the operation is performed for the accessory A 720 whose operation period is 1 second. The same one-second invalid period as the period is set.

  As described above, in order to position each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) at the evacuation position (standby position) at the point h, a different invalid period is set for each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460). By setting, the length of the invalid period in which all of the respective accessories (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) are not driven by the operation of the frame button 22 is set to the operation period (3 seconds) of the accessory C 460 having the longest operation period. ), The operation period (1 second) of the accessory A720 having the shortest operation period can be set.

  Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the invalid period is set for the accessory C460 (point e in FIG. 212), the accessory A720 and the accessory B740 can be driven, and the "button It is possible to enhance the effect of "continuous production".

  Then, the frame button 22 is operated during the simultaneous operation period (points h to j in FIG. 212) in which each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is located at the evacuation position (standby position). The accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) can be operated simultaneously (point j in FIG. 212).

  In this control example, at the timing when the simultaneous operation period is started (point h in FIG. 212), only the control for positioning each of the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) at the retreat position (standby position) is used. However, for example, each of the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) such that the end timing of each of the accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) driven at the end of the free motion period becomes close (identical). May be configured to control the operation period and the operation start timing. The period from the timing when the frame button 22 is operated to the start of the simultaneous operation period and the period from the time when the invalid time is set are set. The action may be determined, and the operation content of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) may be determined based on the determination result.

  For example, the batch stop timing is set as a predetermined timing (for example, the timing between the point d and the point h in FIG. 212) before the timing when the simultaneous operation period starts (the point in FIG. 212), and the frame button is pressed. The driving period of the accessory drive that is executed when the user operates the button 22 is compared with the remaining period until the simultaneous operation period starts or the remaining period until the invalid time is set. If the operation period) is stopped and displayed at a location apart from the collective stop timing described above, the drive start time of the accessory is shifted or the drive content of the accessory is varied (extended or shortened). Accordingly, it is possible to select the operation content of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) in a direction that matches the collective stop timing.

<Control processing in thirteenth control example>
Next, a control process in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 216. In the control process of the thirteenth control example, the contents of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from those of the tenth control example. Other processes are the same as those in the tenth control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The thirteenth control example is different from the tenth control example in that the continuous hitting button process (see FIG. 192) is changed to a continuous hitting button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

  First, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous hit button processing 4 (S1851) in the thirteenth control example. The same portions as those in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) in the tenth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. Only different portions will be described.

  When the continuous hit button process 4 (S1851 in FIG. 213) is executed, the processes in S1901 to S1908 are executed in the same manner as the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) in the above-described tenth control example. When it is determined that 22 is on (S1908: Yes), the accessory A operation setting process 4 (S1909), the accessory B operation setting process 4 (S1910), and the accessory C operation setting process 4 (S1911) are executed. Then, the present process ends. It should be noted that for the detailed description of the accessory A operation setting process 4 (S1909), the accessory B operation setting process 4 (S1910), and the accessory C operation setting process 4 (S1911), refer to FIGS. 214 to 216, respectively. It will be described later.

  Next, the accessory A operation setting process 4 (S1909) in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process 4 (S1909). When the accessory A operation setting process 4 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than “1000”, that is, whether or not the simultaneous operation period (see FIG. 212). (S3731). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hit timer 223ab is not less than or equal to "1000" (greater than "1000"), that is, if it is determined that it is not the simultaneous operation period (S3731: No), then the continuous hit timer 223ab Is determined to be less than or equal to “2000”, that is, whether or not it is during the invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3732). If the value of the continuous hitting timer is equal to or less than “2000” (S3732: Yes), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the continuous hitting button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3732 that the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is not smaller than "2000" (S3732: No), the flow shifts to step S3733. Also, in the process of S3731, if it is determined that the value of the continuous hit timer 223ab is equal to or less than "1000" (S3731: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S3733.

  In the process of S3733, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3733). If the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is operating (S3733: No), the process ends as it is. I do. On the other hand, if the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is not operating (S3733: Yes), the accessory A The value of the operation timer 223ac is set to “1000” (S3734), and thereafter, the present processing is ended, and the flow returns to the continuous hit button processing 4.

  Next, the accessory B operation setting process 4 (S1910) in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process 4 (S1910). Note that the same portions as those of the accessory B operation setting process (see FIG. 195 (a)) in the tenth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and only different portions will be described.

  When the accessory B operation setting process 4 (S1910) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than “1000”, that is, whether or not the simultaneous operation period (see FIG. 212). (S3831). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hit timer 223ab is not equal to or less than “1000”, that is, if it is determined that the time is not the simultaneous operation period (S3831: No), then, is the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab equal to or less than “3000”? It is determined whether or not, that is, during the invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3832). If the value of the continuous tapping valid timer is equal to or less than "3000" (S3832: Yes), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the continuous tapping button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3832, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is not equal to or less than "3000" (S3832: No), the process proceeds to S3833. Also, in the process of S3831, if it is determined that the value of the continuous hit timer 223ab is equal to or less than "1000" (S3831: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S3833.

  In the process of S3833, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0” (S3833). If the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is operating (S3833: No), the process ends as it is. I do. On the other hand, if the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is not operating (S3833: Yes), the accessory B The value of the operation timer 223ad is set to "2000" (S3834), and thereafter, the present processing is ended, and the flow returns to the continuous hit button processing 4.

  Next, the accessory C operation setting process 4 (S1911) in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory C operation setting process 4 (S1911). Note that the same portions as those of the accessory C operation setting process (see FIG. 195 (b)) in the tenth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and only different portions will be described.

  When the accessory C operation setting process 4 (S1911) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than “1000”, that is, whether or not the simultaneous operation period (see FIG. 212). (S3931). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hit timer 223ab is not equal to or less than "1000", that is, if it is determined that it is not the simultaneous operation period (S3931: No), then, is the value of the continuous hit timer 223ab equal to or less than "4000"? It is determined whether or not, that is, during the invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3932). If the value of the continuous hitting timer is equal to or less than "4000" (S3932: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the continuous hitting button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3932 that the value of the continuous hit timer 223ab is not smaller than "4000" (S3932: No), the flow shifts to step S3933. Also, in the process of S3931, if it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than “1000” (S3931: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S3933.

  In the process of S3933, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is “0” (S3933). If the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is not “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory C 460 is operating (S3933: No), the process ends as it is. I do. On the other hand, if the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory C 460 is not operating (S3933: Yes), the accessory C The value of the operation timer 223ae is set to "3000" (S3934), and thereafter, the present processing is ended, and the flow returns to the continuous hit button processing 4.

  As described above, according to the thirteenth control example, the invalid period corresponding to the operation period is set for each of the characters (characters A720 to C460). By setting different invalid periods for each of the characters (characters A720 to C460) operated based on the operation of the frame button 22, the invalid period (all characters) set during the character-driven effect is set. (Invalid period set for an object) can be shortened, and the effect of the entire character-driven effect can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the present control example, the free operation period is executed in the early stage of the accessory-driven effect, and the simultaneous operation can be executed in the final stage of the accessory-driven effect. When the transition from the free operation period to the simultaneous operation period is performed, the invalid period of the period corresponding to the operation period of each of the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is set. , The period during which all of the respective accessories (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) cannot be driven can be shortened.

  In this control example, the operation period of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is fixed. However, as in the above-described tenth control example, control for shortening the operation period of the accessory may be used. The control for delaying the operation timing of the accessory may be used as in the above-described eleventh control example, or the control for changing the operation content of the operating accessory as in the twelfth control example may be performed. May be used. Further, the controls used in the above-described control examples may be combined. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the free driving operation executed at the beginning of the accessory driving effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the simultaneous operation performed at the end of the character-driven effect is configured to be executed based on the frame button operation of the player, but the predetermined period of the character-driven effect (for example, The simultaneous operation may be automatically executed when the remaining period is 1 second).

  Further, in the present control example, the operation timing of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is set to be the same as the simultaneous operation. For example, the operation range of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is the maximum. May be set to be the same (the timing at which the accessory is most separated from the standby position).

  In this control example, at the timing when the simultaneous operation period is started (point h in FIG. 212), only the control for positioning each of the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) at the retreat position (standby position) is used. However, for example, each of the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) such that the end timing of each of the accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) driven at the end of the free motion period becomes close (identical). May be configured to control the operation period and the operation start timing, and determine the period from the timing when the frame button 22 is operated to the start of the simultaneous operation period and the period until the invalid time is set. Then, based on the determination result, the operation content of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) may be determined.

  For example, the batch stop timing is set as a predetermined timing (for example, the timing between the point d and the point h in FIG. 212) before the timing when the simultaneous operation period starts (the point in FIG. 212), and the frame button is pressed. The driving period of the accessory drive that is executed when the user operates the button 22 is compared with the remaining period until the simultaneous operation period starts or the remaining period until the invalid time is set. If the operation period) is stopped and displayed at a location apart from the collective stop timing described above, the drive start time of the accessory is shifted or the drive content of the accessory is varied (extended or shortened). Accordingly, it is possible to select the operation content of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) in a direction that matches the collective stop timing.

<14th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 225. In the fourteenth control example, the motor driver MD1 (see FIG. 219) configuring the accessory A motors 771, 772 outputs to the stepping motor M1 (see FIG. 219), in contrast to the tenth control example described above. The difference is that a plurality of output signals are provided, and that a control for changing the operation content of the accessory A 720 based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 in the accessory driving effect is added.

  In the above-described tenth control example, an operation command for each of the characters (characters A720 to C460) is set based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the character-driven effect, and the character corresponding to the operation command is set. By executing the operation, the effect of the accessory driven effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 is enhanced.

  However, the rotation speed of the stepping motor (for example, M1) driven based on the set operation command is always constant (see, for example, FIG. 188), and the operation speed of the accessory becomes constant. Improvement of the effect was required.

  On the other hand, in the fourteenth control example, as an output signal to be output from the motor driver MD1 to the stepping motor M1, a strong output signal for rotating the stepping motor M1 at a high speed (200 pps) and a high-speed (200 pps) A weak output signal that is rotated at a lower speed (100 pps) than the output signal can be output.

  Thereby, the operating speed of the accessory A720 can be varied by the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 when operating the accessory A720. That is, when the signal output from the motor driver MD1 is a strong output signal, the amount of movement during the same period can be doubled as compared with the case where the signal is a weak output signal. In other words, the time required to travel the same distance can be halved.

  Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the effect mode of the accessory in the accessory drive effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the type (strong output signal or weak output signal) of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). I have. Specifically, when the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is within a predetermined period (within 3 seconds), a weak output signal is output and the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is set at a predetermined period. If it is longer than 3 seconds, a strong output signal is output.

  With this configuration, when the player operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times at short intervals (intervals within 3 seconds), the character effect based on the weak output signal is executed a plurality of times, and the long interval ( When the operation is performed at an interval longer than 3 seconds), a bonus effect is performed based on the strong output signal, and accordingly, the bonus effect is performed based on the operation content (operation interval) of the frame button 22 performed by the player. Can be varied, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

  In this control example, the period during which the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a fixed period (1 second) regardless of the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1. Thus, by changing the type of the output signal for driving the accessory without changing the period in which the accessory operates, it is possible to execute various accessory operations while reducing the control load of the accessory operation. it can.

  Further, the period during which the accessory is operated based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a certain period (1 second), and the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is set as the accessory operation performed during the certain period. In the case of within the predetermined time period (in the case of less than 3 seconds), if the character action based on the weak output signal is longer than the predetermined time period (in the case of longer than 3 seconds), Since the configuration is such that the accessory operation based on the strong output signal is executed, for example, for a player who operates the frame button 22 only once during the accessory driving effect, the accessory operation having a large operation range is performed. Is performed, and the character operation having a small operation range is performed a plurality of times for the player who has operated the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the character-driven effect. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the accessory operation corresponding to the content of the operation performed on the frame button 22 by the player, and to allow the player to actively participate in the game.

  In the present control example, a configuration is used in which the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22, but other configurations may be used. The type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 may be changed based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the effect. In this case, for example, the strong output signal may be set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) or more during the accessory driving effect.

  As a result, as the number of times the player operates the frame button 22 increases, the accessory operation can be increased (the operation speed is increased and the operation range is increased), and the player is eagerly involved in the game. be able to.

  In the present control example, the types of output signals output by the motor driver MD1 are two types (strong and weak). However, more types may be output.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the action of the accessory A in the accessory driving effect of the present control example will be described. FIG. 217 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a driving range of the accessory A720 when a weak output signal is output from the motor driver MD1, and FIG. 217 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a strong output from the motor driver MD1. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the drive range of the accessory A720 when a signal is output.

  When the weak output signal is output as shown in FIG. 217 (a), the operation range of the accessory A720 (the operation range in the operation period of 1 second) is the maximum operation range of the accessory A720 (see FIG. 183 (b)). When the strong output signal is output as shown in FIG. 217 (b), the operating range of the accessory A720 (operating range during one second of operation) is the maximum operating range of the accessory A720 (FIG. 183). (Refer to (b))).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the flow of the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) in the “button continuous hitting effect” which is the accessory driving effect in the fourteenth control example. Will be described. FIG. 218 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory driving effect in the present control example.

  As shown in FIG. 218, when the “button continuous production” is started, an “effective period” in which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is valid is set (for example, 10 seconds). Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 (“button pressed” ON) during the “valid period”, the player is in a stopped state (a state in which the player is in the standby position) as in the tenth control example described above. The operation is started for a certain accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) (point a in FIG. 218). During the period from the start of the “button continuous production” to the time when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the value of the timer for measuring the operation interval of the frame button 22 (the character A interval timer 223ca) is set to “0”. ”, A strong output signal is output to the accessory A 720 (point a in FIG. 218).

  Next, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (point b in FIG. 218), the interval from the previous operation (pressed) of the frame button 22 (point a in FIG. 218) is determined (T1 = (3.6 seconds), since the determination result exceeds a predetermined value (3 seconds in the present control example), a strong output signal is output to the accessory A 720 (point b in FIG. 218).

  Further, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the “valid period” of the “button continuous production” (point c in FIG. 218), the timing when the frame button 22 was operated (pressed) last time (point b in FIG. 218) ) Is determined (T2 = 2.2 seconds), and since the determination result does not exceed a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example), a weak output signal is output to the accessory A720 (FIG. 218, point c).

  Hereinafter, similarly, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) to operate the accessory A720, the character is output to the accessory A720 based on the interval between the previous timing when the frame button 22 was operated (pressed). The type of the output signal is determined.

  Next, the flow of control when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A 720 is operating will be described with reference to points d to f in FIG. First, when the frame button 22 is operated at the point d in FIG. 218, the interval (T4 = 3.2 seconds) from the previous frame button operation timing exceeds a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example). Therefore, a strong output signal is output to the accessory A720.

  When a new frame button operation is performed (point e in FIG. 218) while the accessory A 720 is operating based on the frame button operation (pressing) of the point d, the operation is performed based on the frame button operation. The operation of the accessory A 720 is not executed, and the value of the timer (the accessory A interval timer 223ca) that measures the operation interval of the frame button 22 is continuously measured without being reset.

  Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in a state where the operation of the accessory A 720 based on the frame button operation (pressing) of the point d in FIG. 218 is completed (point f in FIG. 218), the point in FIG. Based on the interval (T5 = 4.8 seconds) with respect to d, a strong output signal is output to accessory A720. That is, in the present control example, the type of the output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the accessory A 720 is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22. The interval does not include the operation of the frame button 22 that does not operate the accessory A 720 (that is, the operation of the frame button 22 during the operation of the accessory A).

  With this configuration, the type of the output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the accessory A 720 is set based on the frame button operation interval corresponding to the interval at which the accessory A 720 actually operates. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand effect can be provided to the player.

  In this control example, the operation interval of the frame button 22 is determined without including the operation of the frame button 22 that does not operate the accessory A 720 (that is, the operation of the frame button 22 during the operation of the accessory A). Is used, but other configurations may be used. For example, the operation intervals of the frame buttons 22 may be determined for operations on all the frame buttons 22.

  In the present control example, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the accessory A 720 is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22, but under other conditions. The type of the output signal may be set. For example, an interval at which the accessory A actually operates (an interval at which an operation command is output to the accessory A 720) may be determined, and the type of the output signal may be set based on the determination result. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as in the present control example can be obtained.

  Further, the type (strong output signal or weak output signal) of the output signal to be output to the accessory A 720 is set based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the “valid period” of the “button continuous production”. Alternatively, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the accessory A 720 may be set based on the special symbol lottery result. Further, the type of the output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the accessory A 720 may be set based on the operation interval with another accessory (the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460).

<Electrical Configuration in Fourteenth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 221. The fourteenth control example is different from the tenth control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 are changed, and is connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. The difference is that the contents of the drive motor group have been described in detail. Other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the drive motor group connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drive motor group. In FIG. 219, the same elements as those in the above-described tenth control example of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially omitted.

  The accessory A motors 771 and 772 provided in the drive motor group in this control example have a motor driver MD1 and a stepping motor M1. More specifically, the accessory A motor 771 includes a motor driver MD1 and a stepping motor M1, and the accessory A motor 772 includes a motor driver MD2 (not shown) and a stepping motor M2 (not shown). It is composed of

  In this control example, the accessory A motor 771 and the accessory A motor 772 differ only in the rotation direction of the motor, and are configured to be driven in response to the same operation command. Only the description of 771 will be given, and the detailed description of the accessory A motor 772 will be omitted. Also, the configurations of the accessory B motors 773 and 774, the accessory C motor 441, and the other motors are the same as those of the accessory A motor 771, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the motor driver MD1 provided in the accessory A motor 771 will be described. The motor driver MD1 controls at least the rotation direction (forward rotation / reverse rotation), rotation speed (acceleration / deceleration), and rotation amount (number of steps) of the stepping motor M1 based on the operation command output from the audio ramp control device 113. When receiving an operation command corresponding to the contents of the operation scenario table 222ab defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, the stepping motor M1 performs driving corresponding to the operation scenario. This is to output power to the stepping motor M1 to execute.

  In this control example, one motor driver MD1 is provided for a single stepping motor M1, but operation can be set for a plurality of drive motors (stepping motors) with a single motor driver. May be adopted. In this case, an operation command such as the number of rotation steps may be output including information for specifying the type of the drive motor (stepping motor).

  The stepping motor M1 is a known stepping motor, and detailed description thereof is omitted. However, the rotation control (rotation direction, rotation speed, rotation amount) of the motor is controlled by the number of pulses of a fixed angle (basic step angle) and the frequency thereof. The motor to be controlled is configured so that the higher the frequency of the output signal output from the motor driver MD1, the higher the rotation speed of the motor. The accessory A720 is operated based on the driving mode of the stepping motor M1.

  As described above, in the present control example, the accessory operation for operating the accessory A 720 at high speed (high-speed accessory operation) and the accessory operation for operating the accessory A 720 at low speed (low-speed accessory operation) are performed by the motor driver. Since it is configured to be controllable according to the type of the output signal output from the MD1, for example, it is possible to change the operating speed of the accessory by switching between a high-speed drive motor and a low-speed drive motor. As a result, the number of parts used for the accessory operation can be reduced, and the space of the apparatus can be saved. In addition, the operation control contents related to the accessory operation can be simplified.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221. FIG. 220A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example. The ROM 222 in the fourteenth control example is different from the ROM 222 in the tenth control example in that a second operation scenario table 222ab is provided instead of the operation scenario table 222ab. Other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the second operation scenario table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second operation scenario table 222ab. The second operation scenario table 222ab is different from the operation scenario table 222ab of the tenth control example described above (see FIG. 187 (b)) in that the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 is provided instead of the accessory A scenario table 222ab1. And the other elements are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 will be described with reference to FIG. 221 (b). FIG. 221 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4. The accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 is a table in which an operation scenario for the accessory A720 to be executed during the “button continuous hit effect” in the present control example is set, and the operation speed of the accessory A720 is slow (100 pps). ) An operation scenario and an operation scenario in which the operation speed of the accessory A 720 is high (200 pps) are set.

  Specifically, the operation scenario (weak operation scenario) executed when the value of the accessory A selection value 223cb is “1” (the operation type is “weak”), and the value of the accessory A selection value 223cb is “ 2 "(the operation type is" strong "), an operation scenario (weak operation scenario) to be executed is set.

  Here, the accessory A selection value 223cb is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 operated during the "button continuous rendering effect", and the operation interval of the frame button 22 is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (3 In the case of (seconds or more), "2" is set as the selection value, and in the case of less than the predetermined period (less than 3 seconds), "1" is set as the selection value. Note that the details of the accessory A selection value 223cb will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The contents defined in the action type “weak” in the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 are the contents specified in the action type “normal” in the accessory A operation scenario table 222ab1 of the tenth control example described above. It is the same, and the detailed description is omitted. On the other hand, in the content specified by the operation type “strong”, information that the operation speed (rotation speed) of the stepping motor M1 is faster than the content specified by the operation type “weak” is specified.

  Specifically, the value “01H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “1000” of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. The operation pointer “01H” defines “200 pps” as the operation speed, “100” as the number of steps, and “forward direction” as the operation direction. Thereafter, the value of the action pointer is set to “02H” corresponding to the value “500” of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. The operation pointer “02H” defines “200 pps” as the operation speed, “100” as the number of steps, and “negative direction” as the operation direction.

  Then, the value of the operation pointer is set to “03H” in accordance with the value “0” of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. The operation pointer “03H” defines information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario.

  That is, in the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4, an operation scenario for operating the accessory A 720 for one second is defined regardless of the operation type (“weak” or “strong”). The information is defined such that the operation range of the character A operation whose operation type is “strong” is twice (the number of steps is twice) that of the character A720 operation.

  Returning to FIG. 220, the description will be continued. FIG. 220 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example. The RAM 223 in the fourteenth control example is different from the RAM 223 in the tenth control example in that a character A interval timer 223ca and a character A selection value 223cb are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The character A interval timer 223ca determines that the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated (the interval at which the character A 720 operates) in the character driving effect (“button continuous effect”) is within a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example). This timer is referred to when determining whether there is a timer, and is a timer that is decremented every millisecond after a value indicating a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example) is set. This accessory A interval timer 223ca sets a predetermined value (“3000”) after the value of the accessory A operation timer is set to “1000” in the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224) (S3745). Is set (S3746), and is subtracted until the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca becomes “0” in the interval timer subtraction process (S1931 in FIG. 223) of the continuous hit button process 5 (S1851 in FIG. 222) (FIG. 223). S2362), which is referred to when the accessory A selection value 223cb described later is selected in the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224).

  The accessory A selection value 223cb is referred to when one operation scenario is selected from the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 of the second operation scenario table 222ab. If the value of the character A interval timer 223ca is determined to be “0” in the character A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224), the character A selection value 223cb is set to “2”. When it is determined that the value of the object A interval timer 223ca is not “0” (“1” or more), “1” is set. Then, in the accessory operation process 3 (S1561 in FIG. 225), the information set is referred to when the operation scenario of the accessory A720 is read (S2551 in FIG. 225), and the information set when the operation of the accessory A720 is completed. It is cleared (S2554 in FIG. 225).

  As described above, in the present control example, the value of the accessory A selection value 223cb is set based on the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca, and the combination is set based on the set value of the accessory A selection value. A strong operation scenario or a weak operation scenario is set as the operation scenario of the object A720. With such a configuration, the operation content of the accessory A720 can be changed based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 (the operation interval of the accessory A720).

<Control Processing in Fourteenth Control Example>
Next, a control process in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 225. In the control process of the fourteenth control example, the contents of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from those of the tenth control example. Other processes are the same as those in the tenth control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the fourteenth control example, the continuous hit button processing (see FIG. 192) of the tenth control example is changed to the continuous hit button processing 5 (see FIG. 222), and the accessory operation processing (see FIG. 196) is a personal accessory. The difference is that operation processing 2 (see FIG. 225) has been changed.

  First, the consecutive hit button processing 5 (S1851) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous hit button processing 5 (S1851). When the continuous hit button process 5 (S1851) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1907 are executed in the same manner as the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) of the above-described tenth control example. An interval timer subtraction process (S1931) is executed. This interval timer subtraction process (S1931) is a process of subtracting the value set in the above-mentioned accessory A interval timer 223ca, and a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S1931, the processes of S1908 to S1911 are executed similarly to the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) of the above-described tenth control example, and this process ends.

  Here, the interval timer subtraction process (S1931) executed in the continuous hit button process 5 (S1851 in FIG. 222) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the contents of the interval timer subtraction process (S1931). This interval timer subtraction processing (S1931) is provided in the main processing of the sound ramp control device 113, and the processing interval is set to 1 millisecond. That is, every time this process is executed, a process of subtracting “1” corresponding to 1 millisecond from the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is executed.

  When the interval timer subtraction process (S1931) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2361). In the process of S2361, if it is determined that the value is greater than “0” (“1” or more) (S2361: Yes), the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is decremented by 1 (S2362), and the process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is not greater than “0” (“0”) (S2361: No), the process of S2362 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224) executed in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909). In the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909), when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the operation content of the accessory A 720 is set, and the operation (pressing) interval of the frame button 22 (accessory A 720) is set. A process of setting a predetermined value ("3000") to the accessory A interval timer 223ca, which is referred to when it is determined that the operation interval is within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

  When the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0”, and it is determined that the value is not “0” (“1” or more). If this has been done (S3741: No), this process ends without performing new operation settings because the accessory A 720 is operating.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3741: Yes), the accessory A 720 ends its operation and is in the retracted position (operation Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is “0” (S3742). In the process of S3742, if it is determined that the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is “0” (S3742: Yes), a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed since the previous frame button operation (operation of the accessory A). Since it has passed, the character A selection value 223cb is set to “2” (S3744), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3745.

  In the process of S3742, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is not “0” (is “1” or more) (S3742: No), the previous frame button operation (operation of the accessory A) Since the predetermined period (3 seconds) has not elapsed since (the interval is short), the character A selection value 223cb is set to “1” (S3743), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3745.

  Then, in the process of S3745, the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to “1000” (S3745), and then the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is set to “3000” (S3746). The process ends.

  In the above-described accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224), when setting the operation content of the accessory A 720, is the interval between the previous frame button operation (the accessory A operation) within a predetermined value? Whether or not it is determined is determined by referring to the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca, and based on the determination result, the current operation content (strong operation, weak operation) of the accessory A 720 is set. Thereby, it is possible to execute the accessory (accessory A720) operation corresponding to the frame button operation of the player, and it is possible to provide the player with a variety of accessory operations.

  Next, the accessory operation process 3 (S1561 in FIG. 225) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the content of the accessory operation process 3 (S1561). When the accessory operation process 3 (S1561) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2511). Is also large (“1” or more) (S2511: Yes), it is determined whether the character selection value 223cb is set to “1” (S2551).

  In the process of S2551, if it is determined that the accessory selection value 223cb is set to “1” (S2551: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type “weak” of the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4. Is read (S2552), and the flow shifts to the process of S2516.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2551 that the treasure selection value 223cb is not set to “1” (set to “2”) (S2551: No), the accessory A second scenario table The operation content corresponding to the operation type “strong” of 222ab4 is read (S2553), and the flow shifts to the process of S2516. Also, in the process of S2511, if it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S2511: No), then the accessory selection value 223cb is cleared (reset) (S2554). , To S2516.

  When the process proceeds to S2516, the processes from S2516 to S2520 are executed in the same manner as the accessory operation process (see FIG. 196) of the tenth control example described above, and the process ends.

  As described above, according to the fourteenth control example, as the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 to the stepping motor M1, a strong output signal for rotating the stepping motor M1 at a high speed (200 pps) and the stepping motor M1 are output. A weak output signal that is rotated at a lower speed (100 pps) than at a higher speed (200 pps) can be output.

  Thereby, the operating speed of the accessory A720 can be varied by the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 when operating the accessory A720. That is, when the signal output from the motor driver MD1 is a strong output signal, the amount of movement during the same period can be doubled as compared with the case where the signal is a weak output signal. In other words, the time required to travel the same distance can be halved.

  Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the effect mode of the accessory in the accessory drive effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the type (strong output signal or weak output signal) of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). I have. Specifically, when the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is within a predetermined period (within 3 seconds), a weak output signal is output and the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is set at a predetermined period. If it is longer than 3 seconds, a strong output signal is output.

  With this configuration, when the player operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times at short intervals (intervals within 3 seconds), the character effect based on the weak output signal is executed a plurality of times, and the long interval ( When the operation is performed at an interval longer than 3 seconds), a bonus effect is performed based on the strong output signal, and accordingly, the bonus effect is performed based on the operation content (operation interval) of the frame button 22 performed by the player. Can be varied, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

  In this control example, the period during which the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a fixed period (1 second) regardless of the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1. Thus, by changing the type of the output signal for driving the accessory without changing the period in which the accessory operates, it is possible to execute various accessory operations while reducing the control load of the accessory operation. it can.

  Further, the period during which the accessory is operated based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a certain period (1 second), and the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is set as the accessory operation performed during the certain period. In the case of within the predetermined time period (in the case of less than 3 seconds), if the character action based on the weak output signal is longer than the predetermined time period (in the case of longer than 3 seconds), Since the configuration is such that the accessory operation based on the strong output signal is executed, for example, for a player who operates the frame button 22 only once during the accessory driving effect, the accessory operation having a large operation range is performed. Is performed, and the character operation having a small operation range is performed a plurality of times for the player who has operated the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the character-driven effect. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the accessory operation corresponding to the content of the operation performed on the frame button 22 by the player, and to allow the player to actively participate in the game.

  In the present control example, a configuration is used in which the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22, but other configurations may be used. The type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 may be changed based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the effect. In this case, for example, the strong output signal may be set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) or more during the accessory driving effect.

  As a result, as the number of times the player operates the frame button 22 increases, the accessory operation can be increased (the operation speed is increased and the operation range is increased), and the player is eagerly involved in the game. be able to.

  In the present control example, the types of output signals output by the motor driver MD1 are two types (strong and weak). However, more types may be output.

  Furthermore, in this control example, in order to simplify the accessory operation control, a configuration is used in which a fixed accessory operation period is always set regardless of the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1. The accessory operation period may be made different according to the type of the output signal output by the driver MD1. For example, when a strong output signal (200 pps) is output, the accessory operation period is set to 0. If it is set to 5 seconds and a weak output signal (100 pps) is output, the accessory operation period may be set to 1 second. Thereby, the operating range of the accessory is made constant regardless of the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1, and the operating period of the accessory is variable (the operating period of the strong output signal is changed to that of the weak output signal). Can be shortened to half), and the effect can be enhanced.

  When the above-described configuration is used in the present control example, when the operation interval of the frame button 22 is short, the motor driver MD1 outputs a strong output signal, and when the operation interval is long, the motor driver MD1 outputs a weak output signal. It is good to be constituted so that.

  As described above, in the tenth control example to the fourteenth control example, various control processes for the accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) operated based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player have been described. Alternatively, some or all of the configurations of the control examples may be combined. For example, in a configuration capable of executing the shortened operation pattern of the tenth control example, the delay processing of the eleventh control example, the repetitive operation of the twelfth control example, and the operation speed variable processing of the thirteenth control example, Contents to be executed based on the player's operation contents (operation timing, number of operations, operation intervals, etc.) for the button 22 and the game state (whether or not a special symbol or a normal symbol is accepted, whether there is a probable change state, whether there is a time saving state, etc.) Should be different. Thereby, more various effects can be executed.

  Further, in the configuration capable of executing the shortened operation pattern of the tenth control example, the delay processing of the eleventh control example, the repetitive operation of the twelfth control example, and the operation speed variable processing of the thirteenth control example, The content to be played may be configured to be selectable by the player.

  In each of the above-described control examples, a configuration is used in which each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) provided on the pachinko machine 10 is operated based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. Any configuration may be used as long as the production mode is variable based on the operation of the player. For example, when the player operates predetermined operation means (the frame button 22 or the like), the audio mode output from the audio output device 226 May be used, a light effect in which the light emission mode of the lamp display device 227 is changed, or a display effect in which the display mode displayed on the display device such as the third symbol display device 81 may be changed. You may make it the structure which combined each aspect.

  Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, the configuration of the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. However, other configurations may be used, for example, when the player touches or approaches. A sensor device that detects and reacts, a dial device that can be rotated by the player, a lever device that can be operated by the player in the forward, backward, left, and right directions may be used. Further, the number of means for the player to operate is not limited to one, and a plurality of operation means may be provided. In this case, when the plurality of operation means are operated, the effect mode can be changed so that the player can participate in the effect enthusiastically.

  In addition, as a configuration having the same effect as the above-described tenth control example to fourteenth control example, the operation status (whether or not in operation, the remaining operation period) of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is determined. A possible accessory operation status determination unit and a storage unit for storing the determination result are provided, and the operation of a predetermined accessory (any one of the respective accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460)) is executed. In doing so, a configuration may be used in which the operation pattern of the accessory is set based on the driving state of the other accessory.

  This configuration will be described by taking as an example control of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) used in the above-described tenth control example. When the accessory A720 is operated, the other accessories (the accessory B740 and the accessory B740) are used. It may be determined whether or not the accessory C460) is operating, and if it is determined that another accessory is operating, the operation of the accessory A720 may be set to the shortened operation pattern. Thereby, it is possible to shorten the period during which all the accessories (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) are operating.

  In addition, when another accessory is operating, the operation remaining period of the operating accessory is determined, and the operating time of the operating accessory is shorter than the operation period of the shortened operation pattern of the currently executed accessory. It is preferable to set the shortened operation pattern only when the operation remaining period is long.

  Furthermore, a priority may be set for a plurality of characters, and in a state where the plurality of characters can be driven at the same time, a character that changes an operation pattern may be determined based on the priority. In this case, for example, the priority order may be set to a plurality of characters in association with the effect pattern executed by the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the display effect and the accessory operation performed by the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without discomfort.

  In addition, as a method of setting the priority for a plurality of characters, other methods may be used. For example, the priority may be set depending on the length of the operation period of the character, or a plurality of characters may be set. The priority may be set based on the arrangement of the objects (front and rear positions), or the priority may be set based on the driving speeds set for a plurality of characters.

  Further, a description will be given by taking as an example the control on each of the accessories (accessory A720 to accessory C460) used in the eleventh control example. In the case where at least two or more of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) are operated simultaneously In addition, it may be set to delay the operation of the accessory (the accessory C460 if the accessory A720 and the accessory C460 operate at the same time) for which the set operation period is long. Thereby, it is possible to shorten a period during which a plurality of simultaneously operated accessories are operating together. In addition, the same control as that described in the tenth control example with respect to the control of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) may be executed, or the respective controls may be combined.

  Further, a description will be given of an example of control of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) used in the twelfth control example. When at least two or more of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) are operated at the same time In addition, when the repetitive operation is executed, it may be set so that the repetitive operation is executed only for the accessory having a short operation period until returning to the standby position. Thus, it is possible to suppress unnecessary execution of the repetitive operation. In addition, the same control as described in the above-described control examples of the respective control items (accessory A720 to accessory C460) in the tenth control example and the eleventh control example may be executed, or each control may be performed. They may be combined.

  In the tenth control example to the fourteenth control example described above, a configuration is used in which a plurality of characters simultaneously operate based on the operation of the frame button 22. However, each character (character A720 to character C460) is used. The operating conditions may be set differently. For example, the accessory A 720 may be operated each time the frame button 22 is operated (the operating condition is one button operation), and the accessory B 740 may be set to the frame. The operation may be performed when the button 22 is operated twice (the operation condition is the button operation twice), and the accessory C460 may be set to operate when the frame button 22 is operated five times. By making such settings, various accessory operations can be executed based on the operation content of the frame button 22.

  Further, the following configuration may be used as a configuration having the same effects as the above-described tenth control example to fourteenth control example.

<Modified example that determines the priority order of the characters that are shortened / delayed according to the type of continuous hit production>
The main movable auditorium may be determined in accordance with the type of the continuous-stroke effect, and the operation of the main movable auditorium may not be shortened or delayed. That is, an operation other than the main movable role may be shortened or delayed. With this, in the continuous hit production that is being performed (or executed), the operation of the main character of the production is not shortened or delayed, so that the operation of the character is shortened without impairing the production effect. Can be delayed.

  More specifically, as the types of the continuous-stroke effects, “continuous-stroke effect A” in which character A is defined as the main movable character, “continuous-stroke effect B” in which character B is defined as the main movable character, and character C Is set as the main movable character. When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the continuous hit effect A is configured to be easily selected, and when the result of the hit determination is out of order, the continuous hit effect C is easily selected. Thereby, a continuous-hit effect in which the main movable character is the character A is displayed, so that it is possible to indicate that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In each continuous striking effect, during the button pressing effective period, each time the frame button 22 is pressed five times, the accessories A to C are moved in a predetermined order. For example, in the continuous-stroke effect A, when the frame button 22 is pressed five times, first, the movement of the main character A, which is the main movable character, is started. When the frame button 22 is further pressed five times, the movement of the accessory B starts. Thereafter, when the frame button 22 is further pressed five times, the movement of the accessory C is started. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is pressed 15 times in a short period, all of the accessories A to C are in a movable state.

  As described above, in each of the continuous-stroke effects in this modification, it is necessary to execute the continuous-stroke operation in the continuous-stroke effect in order to determine which of the main objects A to C is in the continuous-stroke effect. Can be enthusiastically executed, and the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

<Fifteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The fifteenth control example differs from the first control example in that the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, and the solenoid 209 (the general-purpose solenoid 209d, the open solenoid 65f2, The difference is that the control content of the road solenoid 65k) is changed, and that the content of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed.

  In the first embodiment described above, the operation and the holding of the solenoid are executed based on a constant output as the operation control of the solenoid for driving various electric accessories. In such operation control of the solenoid, since the state of the solenoid is maintained by using electric power necessary for starting (sucking) the solenoid, electric power is used more than necessary and power consumption increases. However, there is a possibility that heat is excessively generated.

  On the other hand, in the fifteenth control example, it is possible to supply power according to the state (suction state, holding state) to a solenoid for driving various electric auditors. As a result, it is possible to reduce the power used when holding the solenoid. Further, by suppressing excessively used electric power, it is possible to prevent the solenoid from generating excessive heat.

  First, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. Note that the same components as those of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 226, in the present control example, a first winning opening 64 is provided in an area below the gaming board 13 (below the third symbol display device 81), and a second winning opening 640 and a second winning opening are provided on the lower right side thereof. An electric accessory 640a attached to the mouth 640 is provided. The electric accessory 640a is opened in a predetermined pattern when the result of the second symbol winning lottery (general figure lottery) executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is a winning. The electric accessory 640a is driven by a general-purpose solenoid 209d.

  Further, in the same place as in the first embodiment described above, that is, in the game balls fired on the game board 13, on the downstream side of the area where the game balls pass beyond the center frame 86 (the so-called right-handed area), A variable winning device 65 is provided. Since the variable winning device 65 has the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 49 to 51), a detailed description thereof is omitted, but the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is omitted. Is driven by the open solenoid 65f2, and the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is driven by the flow path solenoid 65k.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is provided with the general-purpose solenoid 209d, the open solenoid 65f2, and the flow path solenoid 65k as solenoids for which the main control device 110 performs drive control. A control signal corresponding to the game state is output to the solenoid.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifteenth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration according to a fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifteenth control example, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the input / output port 205 and the solenoid 209 of the main control device 110 are connected to a solenoid drive circuit. This is different in that the connection is made via 1200. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 227, in this control example, a solenoid drive circuit 1200 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110.

  The solenoid drive circuit 1200 is configured to output various solenoids 209 (general solenoids) based on the types of output signals for solenoid control output from the main controller 110 (output signals for strongly operating and weakly operating each solenoid). 209d, an open solenoid 65f2, and a flow path solenoid 65k). The details of this solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229.

  Next, referring to FIG. 228 and FIG. 229, various solenoids 209 (general-purpose solenoid 209 d, open solenoid 65 f 2, flow path solenoid 65 k) are switched on and off based on an instruction from MPU 201 of main controller 110. The electrical configuration will be described.

  FIG. 228 shows an input / output port 205 connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via the bus line 204, a solenoid drive circuit 1200 connected to the input / output port 205, and a connection to the solenoid drive circuit 1200. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various solenoids 209 (a solenoid for general use 209d, an open solenoid 65f2, and a flow path solenoid 65k).

  As shown in FIG. 228, various solenoids 209 (universal solenoid 209d, open solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) are connected to input / output port 205 of main controller 110 via solenoid drive circuit 1200. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 227). The input / output port 205 drives the solenoid drive circuit 1200 by switching the output signal of the MPU 201, and can switch on and off various solenoids 209.

  Specifically, a solenoid driving IC 1201 provided in the solenoid driving circuit 1200 is connected to the input / output port 205. Here, the solenoid driving IC 1201 is an IC capable of outputting a signal input to the input port from the output port at the rising edge of the clock, and thereafter holding the output of the output port until a clear signal is input. is there.

  The solenoid driving IC 1201 has input terminals (ports) D1 to D6, output terminals (ports) Q1 to Q6, a clock input terminal CK, a clear signal input terminal CLR, a power input terminal Vcc, and a ground terminal GND.

  By applying a voltage of 2 to 6 V between the power input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND, the solenoid driving IC 1201 becomes operable. In this control example, a voltage of 5 V is applied between the power input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND by connecting the power supply 5 V to the power input terminal Vcc and connecting (grounding) the GND to the ground terminal GND. It is composed. Note that a capacitor C1 having a capacitance of 10 μF is provided on a circuit between the power input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND. The capacitor C1 can remove noise from an external power supply for the solenoid driving IC 1201, and can suppress (prevent) the destruction and malfunction of the solenoid driving IC 1201. The capacitance of the capacitor C1 may be changed as appropriate.

  In a state where 5 V is applied between the power supply input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND, the input signals to the clock input terminal CK and the clear signal input terminal CLR are controlled so that the signals are input to the input ports D1 to D6. Signals can be output from the output ports Q1 to Q6. Specifically, a rectangular wave (clock signal) having a frequency of 10 kHz is input to the clock input terminal CK, and an ON signal (5 V) is input to the clear signal input terminal CLR. In this case, at the rising of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK, the signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 are output to the output ports Q1 to Q6. Since the frequency of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK is 10 kHz, the input signals to the input ports D1 to D6 are referred to once every 0.1 ms, and the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are updated. Will be done. In the present control example, the frequency of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK is set to 10 kHz. However, the frequency is not limited to 10 kHz, and may be set to 5 kHz or 20 kHz. Instead of inputting a periodic clock to the clock input terminal CK, a signal may be input to the clock input terminal CK only at the timing of updating the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6.

  On the other hand, even if a clock signal with a frequency of 10 kHz is input to the clock input terminal CK, if the OFF signal (0 V) is input to the clear signal input terminal CLR, the signal input to the input ports D1 to D6 Irrespective of this, the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are OFF (0 V). Therefore, by inputting an OFF signal (0 V) to the clear signal input terminal CLR, the solenoid driving IC 1201 can be made inactive and the operation of various solenoids 209 can be stopped.

  The plus terminal of the capacitor C2 is connected in the middle of a signal line connecting the input / output port 205 and the clear signal input terminal CLR, and the minus terminal of the capacitor C2 is connected to GND (grounded). This capacitor C2 can reduce noise mixed in the signal line connecting the input / output port 205 and the clear signal input terminal CLR, and can suppress (prevent) the solenoid drive IC 1201 from erroneously operating.

  The input ports D1 to D6 are ports to which signals are input from the input / output port 205, and receive either an OFF signal (0V) or an ON signal (5V). The signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 are transmitted as serial data from the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to the input / output port 225 via the bus line 224. The input / output port 225 performs serial-parallel conversion. A signal is input to each of the input ports D1 to D6 based on the serial data.

  As described above, when the solenoid driving IC 1201 is in the operating state, the output port Q1 is output based on the signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 at the rising timing of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK.出力 Q6 are updated.

  The output port Q1 corresponds to the input port D1, the output port Q2 corresponds to the input port D2, the output port Q3 corresponds to the input port D3, the output port Q4 corresponds to the input port D4, and the output port D5. Q5 corresponds, and output port Q6 corresponds to input port D6. If the signal input to the input port is an OFF signal (0 V), the signal output from the corresponding output port is an OFF signal (0 V), and the signal input to the input port is an ON signal (5 V). If so, the signal output from the corresponding output port is an ON signal (5 V).

  As described above, the output of the output ports Q1 to Q6 is changed based on the input signals input to the input ports D1 to D6. At the rising timing of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK, the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are updated based on the signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 and input to the clock input terminal CK. At the falling timing of the clock signal, the updated output signal is held. That is, the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are held until the rising timing of the clock signal input to the next clock input terminal CK.

  Here, the general-purpose solenoid driving circuit 1202 connected to the output ports Q1 and Q2 and the general-purpose solenoid 209d driven by the general-purpose solenoid driving circuit 1202 will be described.

  The output ports Q1 and Q2 are connected to the gate terminals of the FET1-1 and the FET1-2 of the solenoid driving circuit for ordinary use 1202, respectively. Here, the FET1-1 and the FET1-2 are constituted by n-channel FETs (Field Effect Transistors), and a predetermined voltage (5V) is applied to the gate terminal to change the drain terminal to the source terminal. Is turned on (conduction state). On the other hand, when no voltage is applied to the gate terminal, no current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal (non-conduction state).

  One terminal of a general-purpose solenoid 209d is connected to the drain terminals of the FET1-1 and FET1-2, and a 5V power supply is connected to the other terminal of the general-purpose solenoid 209d. The source terminals of the FET1-1 and the FET1-2 are connected to GND (grounded). Therefore, when the FET1-1 or the FET1-2 is turned on, a current flows from the 5V power supply connected to the GND through the solenoid 209d to the GND, and the current flows through the solenoid 209d. Will be. As a result, the ordinary power solenoid 209d is turned on, and the ordinary electric accessory 640a is moved.

  The FET 1-1 becomes conductive because an ON signal is input from the input / output port 205 to the input port D1 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, and the output of the output port Q1 is output at the rising timing of the signal input to the clock input terminal CK. This is the case when it is turned ON. That is, by inputting an ON signal from the input / output port 205 to the input port D1 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, the general power solenoid 209d can be driven to the ON state using the FET1-1.

  The ON state of the FET 1-2 is that the ON signal is input from the input / output port 205 to the input port D2 of the solenoid driving IC 1201 and the output port Q2 is turned on at the rising timing of the signal input to the clock input terminal CK. This is the case where the output is turned on. That is, by inputting an ON signal from the input / output port 205 to the input port D2 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, the general power solenoid 209d can be driven to the ON state using the FET1-2.

  Here, the drain terminal of the FET1-1 is directly connected to the common solenoid 209d, while the drain terminal of the FET1-2 is connected to the common solenoid 209d via the resistor R1. That is, the resistor R1 is connected in series between the drain terminal of the FET1-2 and the general-purpose solenoid 209d. The resistance value of the resistor R1 is 10 ohm, which is the same as the resistance value of the ordinary solenoid. Therefore, when a current flows through the common solenoid 209d due to the variable state of the FET1-1, a voltage of 5 V is applied to the common solenoid 209d. On the other hand, when a current flows through the solenoid 209d for general use due to the fact that the FET1-2 is changed to the conductive state, the same voltage (2.5 V) is applied to the resistor R1 and the solenoid 209d for general use. become.

  This makes it possible to provide a difference in driving force between the case where the general-purpose solenoid 209d is driven using the FET1-1 and the case where the general-purpose solenoid 209d is driven using the FET1-2. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 229, in the present control example, the case where the ordinary electric accessory 640a that needs to increase the driving force of the ordinary power solenoid 209d is changed to the open state, The driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d is changed depending on whether or not the variable ordinary electric accessory 640a having no problem even if the driving force of the solenoid 209d is weak is held in the open state. As a result, the driving force of the universal power solenoid 209d can be suppressed to a necessary minimum, so that the power required for driving the universal power solenoid 209d can be suppressed.

  In addition, a freewheel diode D1 is provided in parallel with the solenoid for general use 209d. The cathode terminal of the reflux diode D1 is connected to the terminal side connected to the power supply side of the common solenoid 209d, and the anode terminal is connected to the ground side (FET1-1 or FET1-2 of the common solenoid 209d). Side). Therefore, no current flows from the power supply side of the ordinary power solenoid 209d to the ground side, but current flows from the ground side to the power supply side. As a result, when the FET1-1 or the FET1-2 is turned off, the current generated by the back electromotive force of the common solenoid 209d is consumed by the common solenoid 209d through the freewheeling diode D1. It is possible to suppress (prevent) the FET1-1 and the FET1-2 from being destroyed by the back electromotive force of 209d.

  It should be noted that a switching element such as an FET may be employed instead of the freewheeling diode D1, and the switching element may be turned on when a back electromotive force is generated in the solenoid 209d. Further, a configuration may be employed in which the back electromotive force of the solenoid 209d is stored in a capacitor or the like. Power consumption can be reduced by using the stored energy of the capacitor for the operation of the next solenoid 209d or for driving other solenoids and motors. If a capacitor having a low voltage with respect to the back electromotive force of the solenoid 209d is used, the energy of the solenoid 209d is immediately stored in the solenoid 209d, so that the energy of the solenoid 209d can be immediately reduced, and the response performance of the solenoid 209d ( Operating speed of the OFF operation).

  As described above, the input signals are input to the input ports D1 and D2 of the solenoid driving IC 1201 from the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and the general-purpose solenoid driving circuit 1202 is driven, so that the general-purpose solenoid 209d is connected to the input port. Are driven by two kinds of driving forces according to the above. This makes it possible to change the ordinary electric accessory 640a that needs to increase the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d to the open state, and to change the driving force without any problem even if the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d is weaker than that. When the ordinary electric accessory 640a is held in the open state, the driving force of the solenoid 209d can be changed and the driving force of the solenoid 209d can be minimized. Electric power required for driving the solenoid 209d can be suppressed.

  The open solenoid drive circuit 1203 is a circuit driven by output ports Q3 and Q4 updated based on signals input to the input ports D3 and D4 of the solenoid drive IC 1201. When the open solenoid drive circuit 1203 is driven, the open solenoid 65f2 is driven. The open solenoid drive circuit 1203 has the same configuration as the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202, and can drive the open solenoid 65f2 with two types of driving forces. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the ordinary power solenoid drive circuit 1202, the detailed description is omitted.

  The flow path solenoid driving circuit 1204 is a circuit driven by output ports Q5 and Q6 updated based on signals input to the input ports D5 and D6 of the solenoid driving IC 1201. When the flow path solenoid driving circuit 1204 is driven, the flow path solenoid 65k is driven. The flow path solenoid drive circuit 1203 has the same configuration as the ordinary power solenoid drive circuit 1202, and can drive the flow path solenoid 65k with two types of driving forces. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the ordinary power solenoid drive circuit 1202, the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 229, the relationship between the input / output signals in the solenoid driving IC 1201 and the operation of the ordinary solenoid 209d with respect to the output signal of the solenoid driving IC will be described.

  In the present control example, when the normal electric solenoid 209d is changed, a normal electric power is controlled by a suction period in which the electric accessory 640a is changed from the closed state to the open state and a holding period in which the electric accessory 640a is held in the open state. A difference is provided in the driving force for driving the solenoid 209d. Specifically, in the case where the electric accessory 640a is changed from the closed state to the open state, when the electric accessory 640a is maintained in the open state, less energy is required. Therefore, by driving the electric accessory 640a with a large driving force (strong operation) in the suction period and driving the electric accessory 640a with a small driving force (weak operation) in the subsequent holding period, power consumption is reduced. Has been reduced.

  First, immediately after the power is turned on, if the input signal to the clear signal input terminal CLR of the solenoid driving IC 1201 is OFF (0 V), even if the ON signal is input to the clock input terminal CK, the input port D1, The output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are not updated based on the input signal to D2, and the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are both OFF (0 V). By setting the input signal to the clear signal input terminal CLR to OFF (0 V), even if an ON signal is input to the clock input terminal CK due to the influence of noise or the like, the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are output. Does not become ON (5V), so that the malfunction of the solenoid 209d for general use can be prevented (suppressed).

  Thereafter, the input signal of the clear signal input terminal CLR of the solenoid driving IC 1201 is turned ON (5 V), so that the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are updated based on the input signals to the input ports D1 and D2. Becomes

  In this case, when the signal of the clock input terminal CK rises from OFF (0 V) to ON (5 V), the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are updated based on the input signals to the input ports D1 and D2. When driving the general-purpose solenoid 209d, that is, when opening the electric accessory 640a, first, the input signal of the input port D1 is turned ON (5V). When the input signal of the input port D1 turns ON (5V), the output signal of the output port Q1 is updated to ON (5V) at the rising timing of the clock signal to the clock input terminal CK.

  When the output signal of the output port Q1 is turned on (5V), the FET1-1 (see FIG. 228) is driven, and the 5-electrode solenoid 209d is driven by strong operation (2.5W) by applying 5V. . Since the input signal of the input port D1 is kept ON (5V) for 80 ms, the ordinary power solenoid 209d is driven by the strong operation (2.5 W) for 80 ms. The period of 80 ms is called a suction period, and the electric accessory 640a is changed from the closed state to the open state in the suction period.

  During the suction period, since the input signal to the input port D2 remains OFF (0 V), the output signal of the output port Q2 also remains OFF (0 V), and the FET 1-2 (see FIG. 228) is not driven.

  After the end of the suction period of 80 ms, a transition is made to a holding period in which the general-purpose solenoid 209d is kept open for 320 ms. When shifting to the holding period, first, the input signal to the input port D1 is turned OFF (0 V). Then, after a predetermined period (after 2 ms in this control example), the input signal to the input port D2 is turned ON (5 V). When the input signal of the input port D2 is turned ON (5 V), the FET1-2 is driven, and the ordinary solenoid 209d is driven. As described above with reference to FIG. 228, in the case where the ordinary solenoid 209d is driven by using the FET1-2, the voltage applied to the ordinary solenoid 209d is low because the resistor R1 is provided on the circuit. (2.5 V), and the current flowing through the general-purpose solenoid 209 d decreases (0.25 A). Accordingly, the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d decreases (0.625 W), and the power consumed by the general-purpose solenoid 209d decreases. Thereby, power consumption can be reduced by minimizing the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d during the holding period.

  In a predetermined period (2 ms) from the time when the input signal to the input port D1 is turned OFF to the time when the input signal to the input port D2 is turned ON, the period is sufficiently short. It is not changed to the closed state. The frequency of the input signal input to the clock input terminal CK is 10 kHz, and the input signal to the input port can be referred to at 0.1 ms intervals and reflected on the output of the output port. The output of the output port Q2 can be turned on after a lapse of a predetermined period (2 ms) after the input signal to D1 is turned off (that is, after the output of the output port Q1 is turned off).

  In this control example, the input signal to the input port D2 is turned on after the input signal to the input port D1 is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the input signal to the input port D2 may be turned on at the same time as the input signal to the input port D1 is turned off, or the input signal to the input port D2 may be turned on before the input port D1 is turned on. May be turned off. When the input signal to the input port D2 is turned on after the input signal to the input port D2 is turned on and the input signal to the input port D2 is turned off, the FET1-1 and the FET1-2 are simultaneously turned on. It is driven. In this case, the voltage applied to the ordinary solenoid 209d is lower than the voltage (5V) when only the FET1-1 is driven, and is the voltage (2.5V) when only the FET1-2 is driven. Higher than. Accordingly, when the state where the FET 1-1 is driven and a high voltage is applied to the universal solenoid 209d is shifted to the state where the FET 1-2 is driven and a low voltage is applied to the universal solenoid 209d, the FET 1 -1 and the FET1-2 are simultaneously driven, so that the voltage applied to the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be smoothly reduced. As a method of changing the voltage applied to the general-purpose solenoid 209d, a method of performing switching operation of the FET and changing the applied voltage by changing the period of the switching operation, that is, so-called PWM control may be employed. Of course good.

  In this control example, a periodic clock signal is input to the clock input terminal CK, and the output signal of the output port is updated at the rising cycle of the clock signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . When the input signal to the input port is changed, the output signal of the output port may be updated by inputting a pulse signal to the clock input terminal CK. In this case, the input signal to the input port is varied, and thereafter, the input signal to the input port is monitored to check whether the input signal is the specified input signal, and then the pulse signal is input to the clock input terminal CK. By doing so, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the output signal of the output port from becoming unintended and various solenoids malfunctioning.

  After the elapse of the holding period of 320 ms, the input signal to the input port D2 is changed to OFF (0 V), and the drive of the FET1-2 is stopped, thereby changing the common solenoid 209d from the open state to the closed state. , End the opening operation of the electric accessory for a total of 0.4 seconds.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the flow of the operation of the ordinary power (electric powered accessory) in this control example will be described. FIG. 230 is a timing chart showing a flow of the operation of the gaming state (the time reduction state and the normal state) and the normal power (electric accessory) 640a.

  In the present control example, as the opening operation of the general electric (electrical accessory) 640a, a short operation to open the general electric (electrical accessory) 640a for 0.08 seconds in one operation and a long open to open the general electric (electric accessory) 640a for 0.4 seconds. Are provided, and if the gaming state is a time reduction state, a long opening is set, and if the gaming state is a normal state, a short opening is set.

  Then, when the vehicle is open long during the working hours, a signal output to the general-purpose solenoid 209d is set based on the operation interval of the general-purpose (electrically-operated character) 640a. When the operation interval of the object 640a is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 300 milliseconds), a strong output signal for strongly operating the general-purpose solenoid 209d is output during the open period (400 milliseconds) (point a in FIG. 230). If the operation interval of the electric train (electric accessory) 640a is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 300 milliseconds) (see points a and b in FIG. 230), the electric train (electric accessory) 640a A strong output signal is output during a period (80 milliseconds) during which the power is released (suction period) (see points c and d in FIG. 230), and thereafter, a weak output signal is output to open the electric power (electric accessory) 640a. Keep state It is output during the lifting period (320 ms) (see point d and the point e of FIG. 230).

  With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the electric power for maintaining the open state when the ordinary power (electric accessory) 640a operates frequently. In the present control example, the pachinko machine 10 has a game state (a game state in which the long opening is performed, that is, whether or not the time is short) as an open state of the ordinary electric (electric accessory) 640a, and an operation interval. Is determined so that the type of the signal output to the general-purpose solenoid 209d is switched based on the determination result. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is generally When it is determined that the gaming state in which the electric (electric powered accessory) 640a is frequently opened and closed, the type of output signal may be switched, or the total of the ordinary (electrically powered accessory) 640a per unit time may be changed. The type of output signal may be switched based on the open period.

  Further, a thermistor capable of detecting the temperature of the general-purpose solenoid 209d may be provided, and when the temperature of the general-purpose solenoid 209d exceeds a predetermined temperature (for example, 60 degrees), the type of the output signal may be switched.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifteenth control example. The RAM 203 in the fifteenth control example is different from the RAM 203 in the first control example in that a weak output standby timer 203da, a standby completion flag 203db, a weak output timer 203dc, a strong output timer 203dd, and a normal power interval timer 203de. They differ in that they are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The weak output standby timer 203da is a timer for counting a period until a weak output signal is output to the ordinary power solenoid 209d when the ordinary power (electric accessory) 640a performs the opening operation. The value set in the timer (for example, “40”) is subtracted every 2 milliseconds, and a weak output signal is output to the general-purpose solenoid 209d when the value of the timer becomes “0”. Have been. The weak output standby timer 203da is determined to be during the working hours reduction in the ordinary power operation setting process (see S654 in FIG. 235) (S711: Yes), and then the value of the ordinary power interval timer 203de is not “0”. Is determined (S712: No), the value of “40” is set, and every time the ordinary power timer subtraction process (see S264 of FIG. 237) is executed, the value of the timer becomes “0”. One is subtracted (S852 in FIG. 237).

  Then, when the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is determined to be “0” in the ordinary power timer subtraction process (S264 of FIG. 237) (S853: Yes), the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON. .

  The standby completion flag 203db indicates a state in which a weak output signal is output to the normal power solenoid 209d when the normal power (electric accessory) 640a performs an opening operation, and the value of the weak output standby timer 203da Is set to on when “0” becomes “0”. This standby completion flag 203db is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is “0” in the ordinary power timer subtraction process (S264 of FIG. 237) (S853: Yes) ( S854), which is referred to when determining whether or not to output a weak output signal in the ordinary power switching process (S263 in FIG. 236) (S813), and it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is "0". In this case (S816: Yes), it is set to off (S820).

  The weak output timer 203dc is a timer that counts a period during which the weak output signal is output to the ordinary solenoid 209d, and a predetermined value (for example, “160”) is set at the timing of outputting the weak output signal, and a predetermined interval ( 1 every 2 milliseconds). The weak output signal is output until the value of the weak output timer 203dc becomes “0”.

  The weak output timer 203dc is set to a value of "160" when it is determined that the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON in the ordinary power opening / closing process (S263 in FIG. 236) (S813: Yes). (S814) Every time the ordinary power timer subtraction process (see S264 in FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S856 in FIG. 237).

  The strong output timer 203dd is a timer that counts a period during which a strong output signal is output to the ordinary solenoid 209d, and a predetermined value (for example, “40”) is set at a timing when the strong output signal is output, and a predetermined interval ( 1 every 2 milliseconds). The strong output signal is output until the value of the strong output timer 203dd becomes “0”.

  This strong output timer 203dd is set to a value of “200” when the value of the normal power interval timer 203de is determined to be “0” in the normal power operation setting process (S654 of FIG. 235) (S712: Yes). Is performed (S716), and when it is determined that the value of the ordinary power interval timer 203de is not “0” (is “1” or more) (S712: No), a value of “40” is set (S714). .

  Every time the normal power timer subtraction process (S264 in FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes "0" (S858 in FIG. 237), and the normal power open / close process In (S263 of FIG. 236), if it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is “0” (S811: Yes), the output of the strong output solenoid signal is stopped (set to OFF) (S812). ).

  The normal power interval timer 203de is a timer for counting an interval at which the opening operation of the normal power (electric accessory) 640a is executed. It is referred to when setting the type (strong output signal or weak output signal) of the output signal to 209d and the output period.

  In the ordinary power opening / closing process (S263 in FIG. 236), the ordinary power interval timer 203de sets the value of “200” (S819) after setting the ordinary symbol to the standby state (S818), and performs the ordinary power timer subtraction process. Every time (S264 in FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the value of the timer becomes “0” (S860 in FIG. 237).

  Then, in the ordinary power operation setting process (S654 in FIG. 235), the type and the output period of the output signal to be output to the ordinary power solenoid 209d are referred to (S712).

<Control Process in Fifteenth Control Example>
Next, a control process in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the control process of the fifteenth control example, the contents of the main control device are changed from those of the first control example. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fifteenth control example is different from the first control example in that a normal symbol control process (see S155 in FIG. 232) is executed instead of the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 63) in the timer interrupt process. I do. Since other points are the same, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 232, a description will be given of a timer interrupt process executed by main controller 110MPU 201 of pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt process in the fifteenth control example. Note that the same parts as those of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  When the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 232) is executed, the processes of S101 to S105 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process of the first control example (see FIG. 63), and thereafter, the ordinary symbol control process (see FIG. 232). S155) is executed. This normal symbol control processing (S155) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the normal symbol control process (S155) is completed, the processes of S107 to S109 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process of the first control example (see FIG. 63), and the process ends.

  Next, the normal symbol control process (S155) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary symbol control process (S155). In the normal symbol control process (S155), the normal symbol (second symbol) is changed when the normal symbol (second symbol) variation process 2 (S262) is executed, and the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is released. Electric power opening / closing processing (S263) for opening / closing the electric accessory (generic power) 640a, and various timers (weak output standby timer 203da, weak output timer 203dc, strong output) set when executing the electric power opening / closing processing A general-purpose timer subtraction process (S264) for subtracting the timer 203dd) is performed.

  When the normal symbol control process (S155) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the present is a normal symbol (S261). If it is determined in the process of S261 that the player is not hit (they are changing or on standby) (S261: No), then the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (S262) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S261 that the player is hitting (S261: Yes), then, the ordinary power opening / closing process (S263) is executed, and then the ordinary electricity timer subtraction process (S264) is executed. The process ends.

  Here, the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (S262). This ordinary symbol variation process 2 (S262) is different from the above-described ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 68) of the first control example in that the variation time of the ordinary symbol is changed, The difference is that a normal power operation setting process (S625) for setting the operation content of 640a is provided. Note that the same parts as those in the ordinary symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 68) of the above-described first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  When the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (S262 in FIG. 234) is executed, the processes in S602 to S611 are executed in the same manner as the ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 68) of the first control example described above. In the process of S608, when it is determined that the working hours are reduced (S608: Yes), after the process of S610 is performed, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 0.1 second (S652), and the process proceeds to S612. The process proceeds to execute the processes of S612, S613, and S618 in the same manner as the above-described ordinary symbol change process of the first control example (see S106 of FIG. 68), and ends this process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S608 that the time is not reduced (S608: No), after performing the processing of S611, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 0.5 seconds (S653), and the processing of S612 is performed. Move on to processing.

  In the process of S602, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol is changing (S602: Yes), S622 to S624 are performed in the same manner as the ordinary symbol variation process of the first control example (see S106 of FIG. 68). After executing the normal power operation setting process (S654), the present process is terminated.

  Next, the ordinary power operation setting process (S654) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary power operation setting process (S654). In the ordinary power operation setting process (S654), a process of setting an output solenoid signal to be output to the ordinary power solenoid 209d based on the gaming state (whether or not during the working hours) and the ordinary power operation interval is executed.

  When the normal power operation setting process (S654) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current time is working (S711). If it is determined that the current time is working (S711: Yes), It is determined whether the value of the power interval timer 203de is “0” (S712), and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary power interval timer 203de is not “0” (is “1” or more) (S712: No), “40” is set as the value of the weak output standby timer 203da (S713), and the process shifts to S714. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S711 that the time is not working (S711: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S714.

  In the process of S714, the value of the strong output timer 203dd is set to "40" (S714), and then a strong output solenoid signal is output (turned on) (S715), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S712, when it is determined that the value of the normal power interval timer 203de is “0” (S712: Yes), the value of the strong output timer 203dd is set to “200” (S716), and S715 Move to the processing of.

  Next, the ordinary power switching process (S263) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary power switching process (S263). When the ordinary power switching process (S263) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the strong output timer 203dd is “0” (S811), and it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is “0”. If (S811: Yes), the output of the strong output solenoid signal is stopped (turned off) (S812), and the process proceeds to S813. On the other hand, in the process of S811, when it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is not “0” (“1” or more) (S811: No), the process of S812 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S813. .

  In the process of S813, it is determined whether the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S813), and if it is determined that the standby completion flag 203db is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S813: No), the process is continued. This processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S813, when it is determined that the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S813: Yes), the value of the weak output timer 203dc is set to “160” (S814). The weak output solenoid is output (set to ON) (S815).

  After the process of S815, it is determined whether the value of the weak output timer 203dc is “0” (S816). If the value of the weak output timer 203dc is determined to be “0” (S816) : Yes), then, the output of the weak output solenoid signal is stopped (set to OFF) (S817), the ordinary symbol is set to the standby state (S818), and the value of the ordinary power interval timer 203de is set to "200". This is set (S819), the standby completion flag 203db is set to off (S820), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S816, if it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is not “0” (S816: No), the processes of S814 to S816 are skipped, and this process ends.

  FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary power timer subtraction processing (S264) executed in the ordinary symbol control processing (S155 in FIG. 233). In the normal power timer subtraction process (S264), a subtraction process of various timers set when executing the control process of the ordinary symbol is performed.

  When the ordinary power timer subtraction process (S264) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is greater than “0” (S851). In the process of S851, if it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S851: Yes), the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is decremented by 1 (S852). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted weak output standby timer 203da is “0” (S853). In the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is “0” (S853: Yes), the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S854), and the process proceeds to S855. On the other hand, in the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is not “0” (“1” or more) (S853: No), the process of S854 is skipped and the process proceeds to S855. Transition. In the process of S851, if it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is not larger than “0” (“0”), the process directly proceeds to the process of S855.

  In the process of S855, it is determined whether the value of the weak output timer 203dc is greater than “0” (S855). In the process of S855, when it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S855: Yes), then, the value of the weak output timer 203dc is subtracted by 1 ( S856), and the process proceeds to S857. On the other hand, in the process of S855, if it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S855: No), the process of S856 is skipped and the process of S857 is performed. Move to.

  In the process of S857, it is determined whether the value of the strong output timer 203dd is greater than “0” (S857). In the process of S857, if it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S857: Yes), then the value of the strong output timer 203dd is subtracted by 1 (S858). ), And proceeds to the process of S859. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is not greater than “0” (“0”) in the process of S857 (S857: No), the process of S858 is skipped and the process of S859 is skipped. Move on to processing.

  In the process of S859, it is determined whether the value of the ordinary power interval timer 203de is larger than “0” (S859). In the process of S859, when it is determined that the value of the normal power interval timer 203de is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S859: Yes), the value of the normal power interval timer 203de is decremented by one. (S860), and terminates this process. On the other hand, in the process of S859, when it is determined that the value of the ordinary power interval timer 203de is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S859: No), the process of S860 is skipped, and The process ends.

  As described above, according to the fifteenth control example, it is possible to supply power to the solenoids for driving the various electrically-operated accessories according to the states (the suction state and the holding state). As a result, it is possible to reduce the power used when holding the solenoid. Further, by suppressing excessively used electric power, it is possible to prevent the solenoid from generating excessive heat.

  Further, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured to output a control signal corresponding to a game state to each solenoid, for example, the general electric (electric accessory) 640a is frequently opened. The type of output signal to the solenoid can be varied between a gaming state (for example, a time reduction state) and a gaming state (normal state) in which the electric power (electric accessory) 640a is not frequently opened.

  In the present control example, when the ordinary power (electric accessory) 640a operates frequently, the power for maintaining the open state can be suppressed. In the present control example, the pachinko machine 10 has a game state (a game state in which the long opening is performed, that is, whether or not the time is short) as an open state of the ordinary electric (electric accessory) 640a, and an operation interval. Is determined so that the type of the signal output to the general-purpose solenoid 209d is switched based on the determination result. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is generally When it is determined that the gaming state in which the electric (electric powered accessory) 640a is frequently opened and closed, the type of output signal may be switched, or the total of the ordinary (electrically powered accessory) 640a per unit time may be changed. The type of output signal may be switched based on the open period.

  With such a configuration, in a state where there is a possibility that various solenoids (the ordinary solenoid 209d, the open solenoid 65f2, and the flow path solenoid 65k) generate excessive heat, the output is performed before the excessive heat is generated. The type of signal can be switched.

  In this control example, although a push-type solenoid is used in which power is supplied and an exciting current flows to protrude a movable iron core, other configurations may be used.For example, power is supplied and an exciting current flows. Accordingly, a pull-type solenoid in which the movable iron core is buried may be used.

  In the fifteenth control example described above, a circuit capable of outputting a strong output signal for strongly operating the solenoid and a weak output signal for weakly operating the solenoid is used as the solenoid drive circuit 1200 (see FIG. 228). A configuration may be used. For example, a configuration illustrated in FIG. 238 (a) may be used.

  Next, another example of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a second solenoid drive circuit which is another example of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 of the fifteenth control example described above. The description of the same elements as those of the above-described solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (a), the second solenoid drive circuit is configured to vary the supply voltage during energization in order to vary the power of the ordinary solenoid 209d. In a state where the switch (SW) 2 is turned on (closed), the solenoid for general use 209d operates (strongly operates) at a voltage of 30 V, the switch (SW) 1 is turned on (closed), and the switch (SW) 2 is turned on. Is off (open), the solenoid 209d for general use operates at a voltage of 20V (weak operation 1), the switch (SW) 1 is turned off (open), and the switch (SW) 2 is turned on (closed). ), The ordinary power solenoid 209d operates (weak operation 2) at a voltage of 10V.

  The switches (SW1, SW2) provided in the above-described second solenoid drive circuit are configured to be turned on and off based on a signal output from the main control device 110, and the contents thereof are described above. Since this is the same as the solenoid drive circuit 1200 described above, detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 238 (b), an operation mode of the ordinary solenoid 209d when the above-described second solenoid drive circuit is used will be described. FIG. 238 (b) is a timing chart showing the relationship between the second solenoid drive circuit and the ordinary solenoid 209d.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (b), when both the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are on, the general-purpose solenoid 209d performs a strong operation, and the switch (SW) 1 is on and the switch (SW) is on. When the switch 2 is off, the ordinary solenoid 209d performs the weak operation 1 (L1), and when the switch (SW) 1 is off and the switch (SW) 2 is on, the ordinary solenoid 209d performs the weak operation 2 (L2). Is executed, and when the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are both off, the general-purpose solenoid 209 d does not execute the operation.

  By configuring the solenoid drive circuit as in the present modified example, for example, when opening the electric power (electric accessory) 640a, both the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are turned on, and the electric power solenoid is turned on. When the 209d is executed in the strong operation and the open state of the power (electric accessory) 640a is maintained, the weak operation 1 and the weak operation 2 can be selectively used.

  As a method of selectively using the weak motion 1 and the weak motion 2, in a state where the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640 (for example, in a time saving state), the electric shock due to the ball entering the second winning opening 640 causes the normal operation. Since there is a possibility that a force opposing the holding force of the solenoid 209d may be generated, the weak motion 1 is set. On the other hand, in a state where the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640 (for example, in a non-time saving state), the weak motion 2 may be set. As a result, power consumption can be suppressed, and generation of excessive heat in the general-purpose solenoid 209d can also be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 239, an operation of the general-purpose solenoid 209d using the second solenoid drive circuit which is a modified example of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be described. FIG. 239 is a timing chart showing a flow of the operation of the ordinary solenoid 209d when the second solenoid drive circuit is used. Note that detailed description of the same elements as those in the operation flow of the ordinary solenoid 209d in the fifteenth control example (see FIG. 230) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 239, in the opening operation (long opening) of the general-purpose solenoid 209d when the gaming state is during the time reduction (hours-saving operation), a strong output signal (switch ( SW) 1), the weak output signal (switch (SW) 2) is both turned on (80 ms) (see the points c and d in FIG. 239), and the open state of the ordinary power (electric accessory) 640a is maintained. The case where only the strong output signal (switch (SW) 1) is turned on and the case where only the weak output signal (switch (SW) 2) is turned on (see the points d and e in FIG. 239) Are executed alternately. Thus, it is possible to prevent the circuit that conducts for operating the general-purpose solenoid 209d from being biased.

  In addition, as a method of selectively using the weak motion 1 and the weak motion 2, in a state where the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640 (for example, in a time saving state), the impact of the ball entering the second winning opening 640 may be used. Since there is a possibility that a force opposing the holding force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d may be generated, the weak motion 1 is set. On the other hand, in a state where the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640 (for example, in a non-time saving state), You may comprise so that weak operation 2 may be set. As a result, power consumption can be suppressed, and generation of excessive heat in the general-purpose solenoid 209d can also be suppressed.

  As described above, in the present control example, the same standard is used for a plurality of solenoids, but the specifications of the solenoids may be determined as appropriate according to the operating environment of each solenoid.

  Further, in the present control example, the configuration has been described using the solenoid drive circuit of the general-purpose solenoid 209d, but the drive circuits of the other solenoids (open solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) also have the same configuration. It is.

<Variations of character-driven production>
Each of the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) used in the accessory drive effect executed in the above-described tenth to fourteenth control examples is operated by operating the operation means (the frame button 22 or the like). The accessory operation is performed by driving a driving means (solenoid or the like) based on. On the other hand, the present modified example is different in that the driven auditors 725 and 726 that move in accordance with the operations of the above-mentioned respective auditors (the auditoriums A720 to C460) are provided. Other configurations are the same as those used in the accessory drive effect performed in the above-described tenth to fourteenth control examples. Therefore, the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As in the present modified example, by providing the driven role members 725 and 726, the movement of each of the role components (the role products A720 to the role product C460) that are executed by the driving of the driving unit (motor or the like) is performed. As a result, it is possible to move the accessory (the driven accessory 725, 726), so that it is possible to execute an accessory operation with a high staging effect, and to make each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460). Since it is possible to operate the accessory (the driven accessory 725, 726) at a timing different from the operation timing, the player operating the operating means (the frame button 22) a plurality of times is provided with the operating means. Based on the operation of the (frame button 22), it can be assumed that the accessory (the driven accessory 725, 726) has operated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the configuration and operation flow of the driven members 725 and 726 used in the present modification will be described. FIG. 240 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the driven members 725, 726, and FIGS. 240 (b) and (c) show the movement of the driven members 725, 726 following the operation of the character A 720. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 240 (a), the driven members 725, 726 are provided with a driven member 725 on the left slide member 720a of the character A720, and provided with a driven member 725 on the right slide member 720b. . Here, the configuration of the driven part 725 will be described.

  The driven member 725 is fixedly supported on the left slide member 720a by a shaft support portion 725a provided at the upper end thereof, and when the left slide member 720a stops operating (see FIG. 240 (b)), the inertia is reduced. It is configured to be rotatable around the shaft support 725a by force.

  Furthermore, when the driven member 725 provided on the left slide member 720a and the driven member 726 provided on the right slide member 720b rotate together, the leading end 725b of each driven member comes into contact. A magnet is provided at the tip 725b of the driven member 725 as holding means for holding the driven members (the driven member 725 and the driven member 726) in contact with each other. I have. Note that the holding means is not limited to a magnet as long as it can hold a state in which the driven members (the driven member 725 and the driven member 726) are in contact with each other. For example, the tip portion 725b may be made of an adhesive material or a material having a high friction coefficient.

  Further, the left slide member 720a is provided with a regulating member 725c for regulating the turning operation of the driven member 725. The restricting member 725c is variable by a driving means (solenoid or the like) (not shown) between a protruding position for restricting the turning operation of the driven member 725 and an immersing position (permissible position) for permitting the rotating operation of the driven member 725. When the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a special symbol is won by a jackpot), the driven member 725 is configured to be changed to an allowable position where the driven member 725 can rotate. I have.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 240 (b) and (c), the flow of operation of the driven members 725, 726 will be described. As shown in FIG. 240 (b), when the operation of the accessory A stops (or suddenly decelerates), the driven members 725 and 726 rotate around the respective shaft supports 725a and 726a due to the inertial force. Then, when the tip portions 725b and 726b come into contact with each other, a substantially V-shaped shape (combined character combination) is formed at a position covering the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the accessory combining form is held by holding means (a magnet or the like) provided at each of the tip portions 725b and 726b. Further, the regulating member 725c is configured to be changed to the allowable position when the operation of the accessory A is executed, but the operation of the accessory A is performed while the accessory A is performing the forward operation. The propulsive force generated thereby restricts the turning operation, and the accessory A is turned when it stops (or suddenly decelerates).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 240 (c), by performing an operation in the direction in which the accessory A separates (by executing the return operation), the tip portions 725b, 726b of the driven auditors 725, 726 separate. Then, the driven members 725 and 726 return to the standby position (the position shown in FIG. 240A) due to their own weight. Note that, since the regulating member 725c is configured to be changed to the regulation position at the timing when the driven members 725, 726 return to the standby position, the driven member 725, 726 is caused to recoil by returning to the standby position. Again, jumping out of the accessory A720 is suppressed.

  The configuration of the present modified example described above may be combined with the configuration of each control example described above. For example, in combination with the repetitive operation in the twelfth control example described above, the player operates the operating means (frame button 22). The restriction member 725c, 726c may be changed to the allowable position when the operation is performed and the accessory A 720 starts the repetitive operation. Accordingly, the driven accessory does not rotate in the normal accessory operation, and the driven accessory can be rotated only when the repetitive operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new accessory operation based on the player operating the operation means (frame button 22), and to motivate the player to operate the operation means (frame button 22). There is an effect that can be.

  In addition, in combination with the configuration of the fourteenth control example described above, only when the accessory operation (strong operation) in which the operation speed of the driving means (motor or the like) is increased is stopped (or abrupt deceleration), the driven accessory 725, 726 is activated. You may comprise so that it may rotate.

  In this modification, the rotation of the driven members 725 and 726 is regulated by changing the regulating member 725b. However, as another configuration, for example, the driven members 725 and 726 are positioned at the standby position. A holding member (magnet) or the like may be provided on each of the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b as a member for holding the operation. In this case, it is possible to hold that the driven members 725 and 726 are located at the standby position by holding means (magnets or the like) provided at the distal ends 725b and 726b of the driven members 725 and 726. Therefore, it is possible to use the holding means provided at the distal ends of the driven members 725 and 726 both for holding the standby position and for holding the completed role form, thereby reducing the number of parts. Becomes possible.

  Further, it is preferable that the driven role members 725 and 726 be provided on the back side of the role item A720 (at a position where it is difficult for the player to see). Thereby, the driven role members 725 and 726 located at the standby position can be covered with the role item A720, so that even if the driven role components 725 and 726 swing near the standby position, the player is not noticed. The effect can be suppressed from being reduced. Note that a configuration that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the driven role members 725 and 726 located at the standby position may be provided, and a configuration other than the role item A 720 may be used.

  Further, when a configuration in which the regulating member is variably controlled as in the present control example is used, both the driven members 725 and 726 can be made rotatable, or one of them can be made rotatable. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect. For example, when the special symbol is won at the jackpot, both the driven members 725 and 726 are made rotatable (both the regulating members 725c and 726c are changed to the allowable position), and the completed role form is formed. If the special symbol has not been won at the jackpot (if it is not notified that it has been won), only one of the driven members is allowed to rotate, and an effect that fuels the player is executed. You can do so.

  In the above-described modified example, the driven accessory 725 and 726 are provided in the accessory A720. However, the driven accessory other than the accessory (the accessory B740 and the accessory C460) may be provided. In the present control example, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b are operated at the same timing, but may be operated at different timings. As described above, by complicating the operation of the accessory driven by the driving means (motor or the like), the operation of the driven accessory can be more complicated, and the effect of producing the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present modification, the configuration using the inertial force and the gravity has been described as the driven member that performs the operation without using the driving unit. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the restoration of the elastic member. The driven member may be configured using force.

  All or some of the embodiments and the control examples described above may be combined.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<An example of the technical idea of the moving member that is moved only by the urging force>
An urging device for generating an elastic urging force in one direction, and the display area of the liquid crystal display device from a retracted position located outside a display area of the liquid crystal display device by the urging force generated by the urging device. A movable member formed to be movable to a predetermined position located on the front side of the vehicle, a position regulating device formed to be able to regulate the movement of the movable member at the retracted position, and a release for releasing regulation by the position regulating device A gaming machine A1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed so as to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a drive motor for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, There is a gaming machine provided with the game machine (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-120640). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the moving member is moved by the motor drive, it is easy to gradually accelerate the moving member and increase the speed, but it is difficult to move the moving member at a high speed from the start. There was a problem that it was difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the moving member formed to be movable from the retreat position to the predetermined position by the urging force in one direction is restricted from moving by the position restricting device at the retreat position (stopped). ). Then, when the restriction by the position restricting device is released by the releasing device, the moving member is started to move by the biasing force accumulated by being disposed at the retracted position.

  Therefore, the force applied to the moving member can be formed to the target value from the time of starting the movement of the moving member from the retracted position, and the moving member can be started at a high speed.

  Examples of the biasing device include a device using a repulsive force of a magnet and a device using spring elasticity. As the release device, a driving device that applies a driving force to mechanically move the position regulating device, And a device for releasing the electromagnetic attraction of the position regulating device.

  In the gaming machine A1, a driving device having a function of generating a driving force for moving at least the moving member from the predetermined position to the retreat position is provided, and the release device is configured by the driving device. Gaming machine A2.

  Here, when the moving member is moved by the urging force in one direction, a device for generating a driving force for returning the moving member against the urging force is required in order to repeatedly perform the effect. Therefore, a space for disposing a device for generating a driving force is required. However, since the space for disposing the moving member and the driving device inside the gaming machine is limited, there is a possibility that a space for disposing the moving member may not be sufficiently secured by adding the driving device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the release device is constituted by the driving device, so that the driving device is released from the restriction of the moving member and the retreat position from the predetermined position of the moving member. Can also be used for returning to. Therefore, as compared with a case where a driving device is separately prepared, a space for disposing the release device and the driving device can be reduced.

  After the moving member has moved from the retracted position to the predetermined position, the moving member can be moved to the retracted position by the driving force of the driving device, so that the effect by the moving member can be repeatedly performed.

  In addition, a motor, an air cylinder, etc. are illustrated as a drive device.

  In the gaming machine A2, the moving member is rotatably supported at a base end side, and the position regulating device is configured to protrude from the first rotating body that is rotated about a first axis and the first rotating body. A pin member positioned eccentrically to the first shaft, the pin member being connected to the moving member at the base end side of the moving member, the moving member being disposed at the retracted position. Wherein the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member is orthogonal to the direction connecting the rotation shaft and the pin member formed on the base end side of the moving member. .

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the pin member of the position control device is connected to the moving member, and connects the first shaft and the pin member when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. The direction is formed so as to be orthogonal to the direction connecting the rotation axis and the pin member formed on the base end side of the moving member.

  Therefore, by moving the moving member to the retracted position, the pin member can be automatically positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the first rotating body and the moving member, and the moving member is mechanically held at the retracted position. it can. Thus, for example, a structure that detects that the moving member is located at the retracted position and operates the position regulating device to regulate the moving member becomes unnecessary.

  In addition, since the moving member is mechanically held by the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotating shaft on the base end side of the moving member, and the pin member, the moving member is moved to the retracted position without driving force such as a driving motor. A large regulating force can be secured. Therefore, a large urging force accumulated in the urging device can be secured, and the effect of starting the moving member at a high speed can be remarkable.

  In the gaming machine A3, the moving member includes a guide portion for guiding the pin member, and a straight line connecting the pin member and the first axis of the position regulating device at at least one of the retracted position and the predetermined position. And a direction in which the guide portion extends is coincident with the direction in which the position regulating device is engaged with the driving device and a driving force generated by the driving device is transmitted. The gaming machine A4, wherein the pin member is formed so as to be movable along the guide portion by being rotated.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, when the moving member starts to rotate from the state where the moving member is located at the retreat position or the predetermined position, the moving direction of the pin member and the extension of the guide portion are extended. Since the directions coincide with each other, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the pin member receives from the guide portion when the first rotating body starts rotating.

  Therefore, when the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotating shaft on the base end side of the moving member, and the pin member is shifted (to rotate the position restricting device) in order to release the restriction of the position restricting device with respect to the moving member. The driving force of the driving device can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, an engagement state in which the position regulating device and the driving device are engaged with each other and a non-engagement state in which the position regulating device and the driving device are disengaged are formed. The gaming machine A5, wherein the non-engaged state is formed at least when the moving member starts from the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, when the moving member starts from the retracted position, the position restricting device and the driving device form the disengaged state, so that the resistance applied to the position restricting device is increased. , And as a result, the resistance at the time of starting the moving member can be reduced. In this case, the resistance applied to the position regulating device by forming the engaged state between the driving device and the position regulating device does not occur when the moving member starts from the retracted position. Therefore, even if a large-sized driving device is selected to oppose the urging force of the urging device, a high speed at the time of starting the moving member can be secured, so that the degree of freedom in designing the urging device can be improved. That is, it is possible to select an urging device having a larger urging force.

  As a mode of forming the disengaged state by the position restricting device and the driving device, for example, a gear is engraved on a side surface of the first rotating body of the position restricting device, and a gear meshed with the gear is partially formed. Is formed in the driving device, and the driving force of the driving device is transmitted by the meshing of the gears of the first and second rotating members. A magnetic body is formed on a side surface of the one rotating body, and a second rotating body in which a magnetic body to be adsorbed by the magnetic body is partially formed is provided in the driving device, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are provided. And a case where the driving device is transmitted by the suction of the driving force.

  More specifically, in the case where the first rotating state and the second rotating body transmit the driving force by the meshing of the gears, at least one gear of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is partially formed. As a result, the position regulating device and the driving device form an engaged state in the region where the gear meshes, and the position regulating device and the driving device form in the region where the gear mesh is released (region where no gear is formed). The device forms a disengaged state.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A5, there is provided an effect member which is pivotally supported by the moving member and which is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is arranged at least in a predetermined position. The member extends from the base end side to a swing end side which is an end opposite to the base end side, and is formed in a mode in which the extending direction is a longitudinal direction, and the base end side is the liquid crystal. The production member is pivotally supported outside the display area of the display device, and the effecting member has a length in a first direction longer than a length in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction. In the retracted position, the retracted position takes a posture in which the first direction is along the longitudinal direction of the moving member, and at the predetermined position, the first direction is the tangential direction of the rotational path of the moving member. And one of the first directions Gaming machine A6 but characterized by taking the posture that projects on the opposite side of the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the effecting member is disposed at the retracted position, the effecting member moves the first direction in the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It is assumed to be along the posture. For this reason, even when it is difficult to sufficiently form a space in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, the rendering member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It can be easily installed.

  Further, when the effecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the posture is changed so that the first direction is directed to a tangential direction of the rotation direction of the moving member, and one end of the effecting member in the first direction is the effecting end. Since it is sandwiched and protrudes to the opposite side of the retreat position, the effect can be performed by effectively using the display area of the liquid crystal display device.

  Note that a case where it is difficult to sufficiently form a space in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member outside the liquid crystal display device is, for example, a case where a retreat position is arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Is done.

  In the gaming machine A6, a first guide portion formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing axis formed on the base end side of the moving member is provided, and the effect member is guided by the first guide portion. A gaming machine A7 including a first projecting portion, wherein the change in the attitude of the effect member occurs when the first projecting portion is guided by the first guide portion.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, since the change in the attitude of the effecting member is caused by the projection of the effecting member being guided by the first guide portion, the design of the attitude change of the effecting member is designed. The degree of freedom can be improved.

  That is, for example, in a case where the change in the attitude of the effecting member is a change in which the effecting member is tilted by the moving member being moved upward, whether the effecting member is gradually tilted in the process of moving the moving member upward. It can be arbitrarily selected whether or not the staging member is suddenly tilted when the moving member is disposed at the rising moving end, depending on the design of the first guide portion.

  In addition, as the first guide portion, a slot formed as a through-hole and formed in a mode having a long direction, a groove formed as a recess having a long direction, and the like are exemplified. The first projection may be slid on the first guide, the rotator may be provided on the first projection, and the rotator may be rolled on the first guide. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first guide portion is configured such that a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swing axis of the moving member and a center of movement of the swing member of the moving member. And a concentric portion extending along a circle defined as above, wherein the concentric portion is formed on the predetermined position side, and the posture change portion is formed on the retreat position side. Gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period during which the effecting member changes its attitude with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the effecting member can be changed without changing the attitude with respect to the moving member. It is possible to lengthen the period of moving as one.

  That is, since the posture changing portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end of the production member is guided by the posture changing portion, the end of the production member and the production end The distance from the circle formed by the movement trajectory of the shaft portion is greatly changed, and the posture change of the effecting member with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member can be increased.

  On the other hand, since the concentric portion extends along the circle around the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first projecting portion of the rendering member is guided in the concentric portion, the first projecting portion of the rendering member, The effecting member is moved in a state where the relative positional relationship between the member and the moving member with respect to the pivotal position is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the effect member with respect to the moving member.

  In this case, since the concentric portion is formed at the predetermined position side, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the effect member and the moving member integrally over a long period of time during the rotational movement of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first guide portion is configured such that a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swing axis of the moving member and a center of movement of the swing member of the moving member. A gaming machine A9, comprising: a concentric circle portion extending along a circle defined as above, wherein the posture change portion is formed on the predetermined position side.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period during which the effecting member changes its attitude with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the effecting member can be changed without changing the attitude with respect to the moving member. It is possible to lengthen the period of moving as one.

  That is, since the posture changing portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end of the production member is guided by the posture changing portion, the end of the production member and the production end The distance from the circle formed by the movement trajectory of the shaft portion is greatly changed, and the posture change of the effecting member with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member can be increased.

  On the other hand, since the concentric portion extends along the circle about the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first projecting portion of the effecting member is guided by the first guide portion, the first projecting portion of the effecting member and The effect member is moved in a state where the relative positional relationship between the effect member and the pivotal support position of the moving member is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the effect member with respect to the moving member.

  In this case, since the posture changing portion is formed on the predetermined position side, the posture of the effecting member can be quickly changed while the effecting member is visually recognized by the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, the moving member includes a second guide portion formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing axis of the moving member and extending along a rotation locus of the moving member. The member includes at least one second protrusion guided by the second guide, and the second protrusion is formed integrally with the moving member, and the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position. The second projecting portion is in contact with one end of the second guide portion.

  Since the moving member is moved by the urging force of the urging device, the motor cannot be stopped to reduce the momentum of the moving member as in the case of driving the motor, and the stopper is used to reduce the momentum of the moving member. A mechanism needs to be formed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, the second projecting portion contacts the end of the second guiding portion. The contact makes it possible to reliably stop the movement of the moving member at the predetermined position.

  Further, since the second protrusion is guided by the second guide extending along the rotation locus of the moving member, the second guide and the second protrusion optimize the rotation of the moving member, The wobble of the moving member in the swing axis direction can be suppressed.

  Here, the first projecting portion and the first guide portion of the effect member can be brought into contact with each other to have a role as a stopper, but since the effect member is rotatably supported by the moving member, the shaft support portion is provided. Minute strength problems arise. On the other hand, since the second protruding portion is integrally protruded from the moving member, the problem of strength is small, and the reliability as the stopper can be improved.

  In addition, by forming a plurality of sets of the second protruding portion and the second guide portion, a force required when the moving member reaches a predetermined position can be dispersed. Thereby, the durability of the second protrusion can be improved. Examples of the second guide portion include a long hole formed through and having a long direction, a groove formed as a recess having a long direction, and the like. The second protrusion may be slid on the second guide, or the rotator may be disposed on the second protrusion, and the rotator may be rolled on the second guide. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion has a groove in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction at the one end than at the other end which is an end opposite to the one end. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that it is formed in such a manner that its width is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion is formed in such a manner that the groove width of one end is smaller than that of the other end. That is, since a large gap formed between the second protruding portion and the second guide portion when the moving member is located at the retracted position is ensured, the resistance at the time of starting the moving member can be suppressed. In addition, the gap formed between the second protrusion and the second guide when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position can be reduced, and wobbling of the second protrusion can be suppressed.

  Here, as a mode in which the groove width of the second guide portion is reduced, a case where the groove width is gradually reduced from one end to the other end of the second guide portion, or a case where the second guide portion is reduced. The width of the groove is sharply reduced in a part of the groove (at least two types of groove width are formed).

  In the case where the second guide portion is formed by a through hole, and the second protrusion is inserted into the second guide portion and a retaining member is fastened and fixed to the tip of the second protrusion, the second guide portion is formed with a through hole. Even when the thickness in the installation direction is formed such that one end is reduced in comparison with the other end, the same operation and effect can be obtained. In this case, when the moving member is arranged at the extended position, it is possible to suppress the moving member from wobbling, particularly, in the direction in which the second guide portion is formed.

  In the gaming machine A11, the swinging movement of the moving member from the retreat position to the predetermined position is formed by an ascending movement, and the second guide portion has a small-diameter-side side surface from the one end to the other end. The gap with the second protruding portion is reduced over the vicinity of the portion, and the gap with the second protruding portion is increased at the other end compared with the gap, so that the side surface on the large diameter side The gap with the second protrusion at the one end is reduced, and the gap with the second protrusion from the vicinity of the one end to the vicinity of the other end is smaller than the gap. A gaming machine A12 characterized in that the gap is increased.

  According to the gaming machine A12, since the swing of the moving member from the retreat position to the predetermined position is formed by the ascending movement, when the moving member swings from the retreat position to the predetermined position, the moving member swings. When the shaft slightly moves in the direction perpendicular to the axis due to play with the axis, the second protrusion is likely to abut on the small diameter side of the second guide. Here, on the small diameter side of the second guide portion, the gap with the second protruding portion is reduced in the initial stage of the process in which the moving member swings from the retracted position to the predetermined position. This makes it possible to smoothly swing the movable member from the retracted position to the predetermined position.

  Further, when swinging from the predetermined position to the retracted position, the second protruding portion is likely to abut on the large diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, the gap between the large diameter side of the second guide portion and the second protruding portion is reduced only when the moving member is swung to the predetermined position. Thereby, the frictional resistance received from the second guide portion when the moving member swings from the predetermined position to the retracted position can be reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the driving device can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A6 to A12, the moving member has a main body extending from the base end side to the swing end side and a main body having a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the effect member. A decorative portion is provided at a distance from the front side, and when the orientation member changes posture, at least one of one end in the first direction or the other end opposite to the one end has the main body and the main body. A gaming machine A13 which is housed between a decorative part.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A6 to A12, when the effecting member changes its posture, at least one of both ends of the effecting member in the first direction becomes the main body portion and the decorative portion. Are stored with a slight gap between them. Therefore, when the production member changes its posture, for some reason, if the production member becomes largely movable in the swing axis direction with respect to the main body, the main body and the decorative portion serve as a guide to hinder the movement. In addition, it is possible to restrict a large movement of the effect member in the swing axis direction.

  According to this, it is possible to prevent the effecting member from interfering with another accessory when the effecting member and another accessory are arranged in a stacked relationship.

  In the gaming machine A13, the movement trajectory of any part of the effect member and the movement trajectory of any part of the decoration member are aligned within the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A gaming machine A14 that overlaps when viewed in the moving axis direction.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A13, the effect member can be reliably housed between the main body and the decorative portion inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Thereby, as in the case where the displacement in the front-rear direction is prevented by the fixing plate, as compared with the case where the effect member is housed between the main body portion and the decoration portion for the first time outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device, A guide function for restricting movement of the effecting member in the direction of the swing axis can be exhibited from an earlier stage.

  Thus, when a plurality of moving units are stacked and arranged, not only the interference between the moving members of the moving unit outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device, but also the movement of the moving unit inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Interference between the moving members can be prevented.

<Example of technical concept to suppress wobble of moving member>
A moving member formed to be slidable between a retracted position and a predetermined position, a first drive device for generating a driving force for driving the moving member, a rendering member disposed on the moving member, and the rendering member And a second drive device for generating a driving force for driving the game machine, wherein the retreat position is a position separated from the predetermined position by a predetermined distance in a lateral direction of the gaming machine and from the predetermined position. It is a position separated by a predetermined distance upward in the vertical direction of the gaming machine, at least the predetermined position is the end of movement of the moving member, at least in the state where the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position, the effect member A gaming machine B1 which is driven.

  Here, there is provided a moving member slidably formed, and a rendering member arranged on the moving member and driven independently of the moving member, and the moving member is slid in the horizontal direction. There is a gaming machine (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-085811). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the moving member receives the force due to the reaction of the driving of the effecting member and the moving member is moved in the sliding direction, it is necessary to maintain the moving member in a predetermined position. However, there is a problem in that it is necessary to continuously apply a force that resists the force resulting from the reaction of the driving member to the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the predetermined position at the moving end of the moving member is formed obliquely downward from the retreat position. Therefore, even if the rendering member is driven at a predetermined position by the driving force of the second driving device and the moving member receives a force due to the reaction, the force due to its own weight acts toward the predetermined position, and the moving member is moved to the predetermined position. (For pushing back), the moving member can be maintained at the predetermined position even if the driving force applied to the moving member from the first driving device is unnecessary.

  The vertical direction of the gaming machine means a direction along the vertical direction when the gaming machine is installed in the hall, and the horizontal direction of the gaming machine means a direction substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction of the gaming machine. I do.

  As a method of transmitting the driving force of the first driving device to the moving member, a rack gear is formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the pinion gear meshing with the rack gear is rotated by the driving force of the first driving device. Examples include a method, a method of attaching a belt to the base end side of the moving member, and winding the belt.

  The gaming machine B1 includes an auxiliary member disposed at a predetermined distance in a direction perpendicular to a plane on which the moving member slides, and the moving member is provided with a liquid crystal display at least at the predetermined position. An overhanging portion formed inside a display area of the device, wherein the moving member is arranged at least in the predetermined position, and the overhanging portion is in a direction perpendicular to a plane on which the moving member slides. A gaming machine B2, which is abutted against the auxiliary member when swinging.

  Here, since the projecting portion of the moving member is formed so as to project inward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, it prevents interference with other characters. Therefore, it is required to suppress the swing in the direction perpendicular to the sliding plane.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the auxiliary member is disposed at a predetermined distance in a direction perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides, and the moving member is moved to the predetermined position. When the overhanging portion swings in a direction perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides in the arranged state, the auxiliary member and the overhanging portion of the moving member come into contact with each other. Therefore, the wobbling of the overhanging portion can be suppressed, and the collision of the other overhanging portion with the overhanging portion can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine B2, the overhanging portion has a reduced rigidity at a root side as compared with a tip side.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the rigidity on the root side is weakened as compared with the tip side of the overhanging portion, so that the wobble generated at the tip of the overhanging portion is reduced. The degree of transmission to the root can be reduced.

  Here, examples of the method of weakening the rigidity include a case where the overhang portion is formed of a resin material having partially different rigidity by two-color molding, a case where the thickness of the overhang portion is partially changed, and the like. .

  When the overhang is formed to be thin in a direction substantially perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides, it is possible to prevent the moving member from wobbling in the sliding movement direction due to bending deformation of the overhang.

  Further, when the base side of the overhang portion is formed to be thinner than the front end side, the wobble at the front end side of the overhang portion is converted into bending deformation with the root side of the overhang portion as a fulcrum. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the moving member from being horizontally moved in a direction perpendicular to the plane on which the sliding member moves on the root side of the overhang portion.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the auxiliary member has one end pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end opposite to the one end has a display area of the liquid crystal display device. The gaming machine B4, wherein the auxiliary member is disposed outside a display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is supported by the moving member, and the other end of the auxiliary member is located outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. When the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the auxiliary member is disposed outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, when the moving member is located at the retracted position, the auxiliary member can be retracted from inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device.

  With this, another moving member is disposed on the same layer as the layer on which the moving member is disposed, and when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the other moving member protrudes inward of the liquid crystal display device. It is possible to perform effects, and various effects can be performed in a limited space.

  The auxiliary member may be supported by the base member as a mode in which the auxiliary member is supported by a rotary shaft or a mode in which a projection is inserted through the elongated hole and the projection is guided in the elongated hole. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B4, the overhanging portion extends along a direction from the pivot portion of the one end of the auxiliary member toward the other end in a state where the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B5 comprising an extended contact portion.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B4, the projecting portion of the moving member has an abutting portion, and the abutting portion serves as an auxiliary member when the moving member is disposed at a predetermined position. It extends along the direction from the shaft support at one end to the other end. Therefore, in a state where the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, an area where the moving member and the auxiliary member are in contact with each other can be secured by the contact portion.

  In the gaming machine B5, the overhanging portion has a hand portion bent and extended from the extended tip of the contact portion, and the effect member is disposed at the tip of the hand portion, and The gaming machine B6, wherein as the member slides to the retracted position, the overlapping position of the overhang portion and the auxiliary member moves toward the tip end of the hand portion.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B5, the effecting member is disposed at the tip of the overhang portion, and as the moving member slides to the retreat position, the overhang between the overhang portion and the auxiliary member occurs. The overlapping position is moved to the tip side of the hand portion. Therefore, as the moving member is slid to the retreat position, it is possible to reduce the amount of protrusion (extension distance) of the overhanging portion extending from the auxiliary member to the rendering member. Thus, even if the leading end side of the overhanging portion is wobble due to the drive of the effect member, the overhanging portion can be brought into contact with the auxiliary member from a stage where the wobbling is small. Thereby, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the effect of suppressing the moving member from swaying in a direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides can be remarkable.

  In the gaming machines B4 to B6, the rendering member is disposed below the moving member, and one end is pivotally supported by the moving member so as to swing from the one end to the opposite side. A direction in which the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position is formed as a longitudinal direction in which a direction connecting the other end of the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position as compared with a case where the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. However, the gaming machine B7 has a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the effect member is inclined in the horizontal direction.

  Since the moving member moves diagonally downward toward the predetermined position, even if the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, in order to form the rendering member on the front side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, the moving member must When the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the lower end of the rendering member needs to be disposed at a position raised from the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display by a distance by which the moving member is moved downward from the retracted position toward the predetermined position. Was. Therefore, when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the space below the effect member is dead as a dead space.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3 or B4, the effect member is disposed below the moving member and the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. In the case where the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the angle between the longitudinal direction and the horizontal direction of the effecting member is formed smaller, so that when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the effecting member is Take a posture that falls down horizontally.

  Therefore, when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, even if the effecting member is disposed at the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, the moving member moves downward from the retracted position to the predetermined position even if the lower end of the effecting member is disposed. This distance can be absorbed by the change in the attitude of the effect member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the space below the effect member when the moving member is disposed at the retreat position from being wasted as a dead space, and to form the effect member as a large member longer in the longitudinal direction.

  In the gaming machine B7, the gaming machine B7 further includes a connecting member that connects the other end of the effect member to the auxiliary member, and the auxiliary member is configured to move the moving member as compared with a case where the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that when the member is arranged at the predetermined position, the member takes a posture inclined in the horizontal direction.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the auxiliary member has a horizontal direction when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position as compared with the case where the moving member is arranged at the retreat position. And the other end of the production member is connected to the auxiliary member via the connection member, so that the production member is tilted horizontally as the auxiliary member is tilted horizontally. Can be done.

  In addition, since the effect member is connected not only to the moving member but also to the connecting member via an auxiliary member supported by the moving member, the member is supported by a plurality of members. By dispersing, the effect of suppressing the wobble of the effect member and the moving member can be remarkable.

  In the gaming machine B8, the position of the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the other end side of the effect member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B8, since the position of the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the other end side of the effect member, the weight of the effect member effectively acts on the connecting member. Can be done. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, a force in the direction of tilting the auxiliary member more effectively is applied to the auxiliary member, so that the wobbling of the auxiliary member can be suppressed. As a result, wobbling of the moving member and the effect member connected to the auxiliary member can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine B10, wherein in the gaming machine B8, the position of the center of gravity of the effect member is formed vertically above the position where the effect member is axially supported by the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B8, the position of the center of gravity of the effecting member is formed vertically above the position where the effecting member is supported by the moving member in the vertical direction of the gaming machine. This can be evenly distributed in the horizontal direction with respect to the position of the pivot between the moving member and the effect member.

  Therefore, wobble of the effect member when the effect member is driven by the second driving device can be easily transmitted to the auxiliary member through the connecting member, and as a result, the moving member and the effect member connected to the auxiliary member can be easily transmitted. Wobble can be generated. This makes it possible to produce an effect that the moving member and the effect member are shaken by driving the effect member.

<An example of a technical idea to reduce the number of assembly steps>
A base member having a pair of walls formed so as to protrude in the same direction; a lid member abutting on a protruding end of at least one of the pair of wall portions; A plurality of reflecting members whose parts are rotatably supported, and a light source that emits light toward at least one of the plurality of reflecting members; and at least one of the pair of wall portions The wall portion has a plurality of pivot grooves formed on the end surface of the overhanging end, and the reflection member is pivotally supported by being protruded from the main body portion and fitted into the pivot groove. At least one rotating shaft portion, and the rotating shaft portion fitted into the shaft supporting groove is fitted from open ends of the plurality of shaft supporting grooves, and the open end of the shaft supporting groove is fitted to the lid member. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being axially supported by being closed.

  Here, there is a gaming machine provided with a movable body whose both ends are pivotally supported and whose posture can be changed in order to change the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED light source (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-272332). reference). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of LED light sources are provided, a plurality of movable bodies are also necessary, and the work of inserting the movable body into the hole to support the movable body, In such a case, it is necessary to perform the operation of attaching parts for fixing the movable body so that the movable body cannot be pulled out from the hole by the number of movable bodies, and there is a problem that the number of assembly steps increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a plurality of supporting grooves are formed in the wall of the base member, the rotating shaft of the reflecting member is fitted into the supporting groove, and the open end of the supporting groove is covered by the cover member. By being closed, the plurality of reflecting members can be rotatably supported. By rotating these reflecting members, the direction of light emitted from the light source toward the reflecting members can be changed.

  Therefore, the work of inserting the reflection member into the hole to support the shaft and the work of attaching a component (a screw, a stopper, etc.) for fixing the reflection member so that it cannot be pulled out from the hole afterwards can be omitted, and the reflection member can be eliminated. Can be prevented from increasing the number of assembling steps in proportion to the number of steps.

  In the case where the shaft support groove is formed only in one of the pair of wall portions, for example, a hole is formed in the other of the opposite side, and the shaft portion of the reflecting member is obliquely inserted in the hole. After that, when the reflecting member is tilted, the shaft formed on the other side on the other side is fitted into the shaft support groove, or the shaft pin is protruded on the other side on the other side, and the shaft is formed. After the reflection member is externally fitted to the pin, the reflection member is tilted, so that the shaft formed on the other side on the other side is fitted into the shaft support groove.

  The gaming machine C2, wherein the lid member is fastened to a side surface of the wall in the gaming machine C1.

  Here, when it is desired that the wall of the base member is formed to be thin, for example, when the lid member is fastened and fixed to the projecting end surface of the wall, the diameter of the head of the fastening screw is reduced by the thinness of the wall. It becomes the lower limit, and the degree of freedom in design decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, since the lid member is fastened to the side surface of the wall in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the wall is not limited to the diameter of the head of the fastening screw, and the wall is formed thin. can do.

  In this case, for example, when the wall portion and the display area of the liquid crystal display device are adjacent to each other, the presence of the wall portion can be made inconspicuous, and when the display area of the liquid crystal display device and the reflective member are combined to produce an effect. Effect can be improved.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein in the gaming machine C2, the lid member includes a plurality of shaft support holes that support the rotation shaft portion of the reflection member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, the rotating shaft of the reflecting member is inserted into the shaft support hole formed in the lid member, so that the area supporting the rotating shaft is reduced by the wall. A sufficient area can be ensured by the area corresponding to the thickness supporting the rotating shaft portion and the area corresponding to the formation length of the shaft supporting hole.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, at least one of the pair of wall portions includes an extension portion extending from a space between adjacent shaft support grooves, and the lid member includes the extension member. In a state where the fitting portion is fitted to the installation portion, and the lid member is attached to the base member, the fitting portion is attached to the extension portion at least in a direction adjacent to the shaft support groove, and A gaming machine C4 contacted from the axial direction of the shaft portion.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the fitting portion of the lid member and the extending portion of the wall portion abut on each other in the direction adjacent to the pivot groove. It is possible to easily perform alignment between the wall portion and the lid member in the direction adjacent to the pivot groove.

  Further, since the fitting portion of the lid member and the extending portion of the wall portion are in contact with each other in the axial direction of the rotary shaft portion, the wall portion and the lid member are aligned with each other in the axial direction of the rotary shaft portion, and The rigidity of the portion can be reinforced by the lid member.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a closed state in which a region formed by the respective axes of the pair of wall portions and the pair of adjacent reflective members is closed by the main body of the pair of reflective members. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that, in its closed state, the pair of reflecting members are brought into contact with each other in the rotational direction.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a region formed by the pair of wall portions and the respective axes of the adjacent pair of reflecting members forms a pair of reflecting members. The light emitted from the light source can be blocked by a plurality of reflecting members.

  Further, in the closed state, the surfaces in the rotation direction of the pair of reflecting members are in contact with each other, so that the gap formed between the main body portions of the adjacent reflecting members can be closed, and the gap between the reflecting members can be reduced. Light leakage can be suppressed.

  Here, the suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, sliding a plate-shaped shutter member and disposing the shutter member between the light emitted to the player and the player. In this case, if the shutter member is fully opened, the player can visually recognize the entire irradiated light. However, when the shutter member slides from a state where the shutter member is disposed between the light emitted to the player and the player, the light overlapping the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, the period until the player visually recognizes the entire light becomes longer.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C5, the reflecting member suppresses light leakage in the closed state, and allows light emitted to the player to pass by rotating the reflecting member from the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflecting members can have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, each reflecting member can be formed smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, compared to the case where the shutter member is slid, the case where the reflecting member is rotated can shorten the time until the player visually recognizes the entire light.

  Further, since the end portions of the reflection surfaces of the adjacent reflection members are formed so as to be able to contact each other, the deviation of the posture of the reflection member can be corrected by another reflection member. Therefore, even if there is a reflection member having a poor rotation angle accuracy among the plurality of reflection members, the posture of the reflection member after rotation is corrected by being brought into contact with another reflection member. Therefore, the quality of the effect of the reflecting member can be secured.

  The gaming machine C6, wherein in the gaming machine C5, the reflecting member has a chamfered abutting portion between the surfaces facing each other.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, the abutting portions of the opposing surfaces of the reflecting member are chamfered, so that the reflecting member can be tilted more toward the adjacent reflecting member. Therefore, the surface formed by the plurality of reflection members in the closed state can be made flatter. In this case, for example, when a pattern is formed by combining the side surfaces of the plurality of reflecting members in the rotation direction, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the pattern at the boundary between the reflecting members.

  In addition, as a method of chamfering, a method of shaving on a curved surface (attaching R), a method of shaving on a flat surface, and the like are exemplified.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a driving device that generates a driving force for rotating the plurality of reflecting members, and a transmission member that is slid by the driving device, may be provided. The plurality of reflection members are formed so as to be slidable in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft portion, and the plurality of reflection members each include a transmitted portion abutting on the transmission member, at least one of the pair of rotation shaft portions. A gaming machine C7 comprising: a slide unit configured to slide the transmission member so that the transmission unit and the reflection member are rotatable.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the transmission member moved by the driving device is formed in a manner to be slid in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion. The transmitted portions formed on the rotating shaft portions of the plurality of reflecting members are in contact with the transmitting member. Here, by sliding the transmission member, the transmitted portion is rotated and the reflection member is rotated in conjunction therewith, so that the plurality of reflection members can be rotated by sliding movement of one transmission member. .

  Note that a belt or a rack gear is exemplified as the transmission member. When the transmitting member is a belt, a columnar portion is exemplified as the transmitted portion, and when the transmitting member is a rack gear, a rotating gear-shaped portion is exemplified as the transmitted portion.

  In the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes a rack gear portion having teeth carved on a side surface facing the transmitted portion, and the transmitted portion has teeth that can mesh with the rack gear portion. A gaming machine C8 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes the rack gear portion, and the teeth to be meshed with the rack gear portion of the transmission member are formed in the transmitted portion. Thus, when the transmission member is slid, the transmitted portions of the plurality of reflection members meshed with the rack gear portion are rotated, so that slippage between the transmission member and the reflection member is prevented. Can be. Therefore, a plurality of reflecting members can be rotated synchronously.

  In the gaming machine C8, at least one of the teeth formed on the rack gear portion or the transmitted portion of the transmission member is formed to have a width larger than an interval between adjacent teeth of the transmitted portion or the rack gear portion facing each other. A gaming machine C9 wherein expanded teeth are formed.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C8, at least one of the teeth formed on the rack gear portion or the transmitted portion of the transmission member is larger than the distance between the adjacent teeth of the transmitted portion or the rack gear portion facing each other. Since the expanded teeth formed with a large width are formed, when the expanded teeth are meshed, the transmission resistance of the driving force from the rack gear portion to the transmitted portion can be temporarily increased.

  Thereby, the sliding movement of the transmission member can be mechanically stopped. Therefore, even if the sensor at the moving end of the transmission member becomes abnormal, it is possible to prevent the reflection member rotated by the transmission member from over-rotating.

<An example of the technical idea of moving the mating member with its own drive device>
An inner surface which is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, is formed so as to be reciprocally slidable outside and inside a display region of the liquid crystal display device, and is formed in the moving direction inside the display region. Comprises a pair of moving members formed in a positional relationship capable of contacting each other, and a driving device for driving the pair of moving members, and a movable range of one of the pair of moving members. However, it interferes with the movable range of the other moving member which is the moving member on the opposite side of the one moving member, and abuts the other moving member by moving the one moving member. The gaming machine D1, wherein one of the moving members is moved in the same direction so as to push the other moving member to be movable.

  Here, a pair of characters is moved from outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device toward the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and abuts each other to make the liquid crystal display device invisible. Is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2005-040413). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the operation of the pair of accessories is monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, one moving member abuts the other moving member, and the other moving member is further moved so that the other moving member is formed so as to be movable. It is possible to form an unexpected movement that is difficult to form with only a driving device that drives the moving member.

  For example, when the moving member is driven by a single driving device, a delay associated with the deceleration time occurs when the driving direction is reversed, which causes the moving member to be monotonous. Therefore, as the driving direction of the driving device of one of the moving members is changed, the other moving member is brought into contact with the one moving member, and the other moving member is moved in the same direction. Thus, the driving force of the other moving member can be used as an auxiliary force for moving the one moving member, and the period required for changing the direction of the one moving member can be shortened. Therefore, an unexpected movement, which is difficult to form with only a driving device for driving the other moving member, can be formed.

  In addition, since the pair of moving members can be moved without performing the tuning operation of the driving device that drives the pair of moving members, the power consumption of the driving device can be suppressed and the control load of the driving device can be reduced. .

  In the gaming machine D1, the moving direction of the pair of moving members is substantially vertical.

  Here, when one of the moving members moves downward from the retracted position, the one moving member receives a downward force due to the action of gravity. For this reason, the driving force required when one of the moving members changes direction is increased by the gravity, and it is difficult to reduce the deceleration time of the moving member when changing the direction of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D1, the moving member is formed so as to be slidable in a substantially vertical direction, so that one of the movements abutting in the process of moving downward from the retreat position When the direction of the member is changed, the other moving member that moves upward from the retreat position is brought into contact with one of the moving members, and further, the other moving member is moved in the same direction, thereby changing the direction of the one moving member. Required period can be shortened. The substantially vertical direction is not limited to the vertical direction but means a direction in which a slight horizontal component is allowed.

  In the gaming machine D1, the moving direction of the pair of moving members is substantially horizontal.

  In the case where one moving member abuts on the other moving member in the process of moving and further moves the other moving member by moving one moving member in the same direction, the driving device of one moving member includes a pair of driving devices. Since the moving members are moved together, the burden on the driving device increases.

  Here, when the pair of moving members are arranged vertically, the burden on the driving device that drives the moving member arranged below is more than the burden on the driving device that drives the moving member arranged above. As a result, the life of the driving device is different. Therefore, the replacement cycle of one drive device is shorter than that of the other drive device, and the maintenance schedule is harder to set than when a pair of drive devices are replaced at the same time.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D1, the pair of moving members is formed so as to be slidable in a substantially horizontal direction, so that the difference in the load on the pair of driving devices is reduced. be able to.

  That is, when the movable member is formed to be movable in a substantially horizontal direction, the movable member does not receive a force due to gravity in the movable direction, so that the load on the driving device does not depend on the direction of movement. Therefore, the replacement time can be adjusted for each drive device.

  Note that the sliding direction of the moving member does not need to coincide with the horizontal direction, and the moving member can be inclined from the horizontal direction to such an extent that the moving member can be stopped by the frictional force with the driving device.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a base member provided with the moving member is provided, and a shaft for guiding the moving member so as to be slidable is fixed to the base member. Gaming machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rigidity of the base member can be improved by the shaft fixed to the base member. Further, the shaft has a role of guiding the moving member so as to be slidable.

  Thus, the shaft rod can be used both as a member for guiding the movable member to be slidable and a member for improving the rigidity of the base member.

  In the gaming machine D4, the bogie unit is disposed so as to sandwich the shaft bar, and has a bogie unit having at least both ends thereof a pair of wheel portions formed to be rollable with respect to the shaft bar, and the bogie unit includes the bogie unit, A gaming machine D5 fixed to at least one end of a moving member.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the bogie portion is fixed to at least one end of the moving member, and the bogie portion has a wheel portion that can roll on the shaft, so that frictional resistance generated when the moving member slides is suppressed. can do.

  Further, a pair of the wheel portions are arranged so as to sandwich the shaft, and they are provided at least at both ends of the bogie portion, so that the posture of the shaft and the bogie portion can be maintained constant.

  In the gaming machine D5, when the pair of moving members are in contact with each other, the wheel units respectively provided on the pair of moving members are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D5, the wheels disposed on the pair of moving members abut on each other when the pair of moving members abut. Thereby, the resistance applied to the wheel portion when the pair of moving members abut can be increased, so that the impact at the time of the abutting of the pair of moving members can be reduced.

  Note that a pair of wheel portions that are in contact with each other may be formed to have different diameters. In this case, the resistance applied to the wheel portion can be further increased by sandwiching the small-diameter wheel portion between the large-diameter wheel portion and the shaft rod.

  In the gaming machine D6, the moving member includes a transmission unit to which the driving force of the driving device is transmitted, and is formed to be elongated in a direction perpendicular to an axial direction of the shaft, and one of the longitudinal directions of the moving member. The gaming machine D7, wherein the transmission unit and the bogie unit are disposed at an end of the gaming machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D6, a transmission unit for transmitting the driving force of the driving device is formed at one end of the bogie unit. Since the carriage is slid while being guided by the shaft, the engagement relationship between the transmission unit and the drive device can be optimized.

  That is, since the movable member is formed to be long, it is likely to be bent, and the bent is generated with one end on which the carriage guided by the shaft is disposed as a fulcrum. When the transmitting portion is formed at the other end, which is the end opposite to the one end provided with the bogie portion, the position of the transmitting portion is easily changed by bending of the moving member, and A shift is likely to occur in the engagement relationship between the transmission portion of the member and the drive device. If the engaging relationship between the transmitting portion of the moving member and the driving device is deviated, the resistance generated between the transmitting portion and the driving device when the moving member slides increases, which is a problem.

  On the other hand, if the transmission portion is formed at one end where the bogie portion is provided, both the transmission position of the driving force and the support position of the moving member are formed at one end, and the moving member is Even if flexed, it does not change the position of the transmission part of the moving member. Therefore, the engagement relationship between the transmission unit of the moving member and the driving device can be maintained, and the resistance generated between the transmission unit and the driving device when the moving member slides can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an aspect of the transmission unit, for example, when a rotation gear is formed from the drive device side, a rack gear unit formed at one end is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine D7, the abutting of the pair of moving members occurs on the transmission portion side.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D7, it is not necessary to consider the displacement due to the bending of the moving member in calculating the contact position of the pair of moving members. It can be calculated accurately.

  In the gaming machine D7, the abutting of the pair of moving members occurs at an end opposite to the transmitting section side.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D7, since the contact of the pair of moving members occurs at the end opposite to the transmitting unit, the transmitting unit can be used when the pair of moving members abut. The impact on the side can be reduced. Thus, the load on the driving device due to the contact between the pair of moving members can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines D7 to D9, the moving member extends in parallel with the direction in which the moving member slides, and the other end of the moving member opposite to the one end has the shaft rod. A guide wall portion abutting from a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the moving member, wherein the moving member is rotatably supported at the other end and a pair of abutting abutting the guide wall portion. A gaming machine D10 comprising a rotator, wherein the pair of rotators are provided side by side in the sliding direction of the moving member, and are rotated as the moving member is slid.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D7 to D9, the guide wall portion extends in parallel with the sliding direction of the moving member and is supported by the other end of the moving member. A pair of rotating bodies are in contact with the guide wall.

  Here, when the moving member suddenly stops and the moving member flexes and vibrates largely at one end as a fulcrum, of the pair of rotating bodies pivotally supported by the other end of the moving member, The rotating body on the opposite side to the direction of the bending is pressed against the guide wall. Therefore, resistance is applied in the direction opposite to the direction of the bending vibration of the moving member, so that the bending vibration of the moving member can be more easily suppressed as compared with the case where the other end of the moving member is formed as a free end. .

  In addition, when the moving member is started, the rotating body and the guide wall are in smooth contact with each other, so that the frictional resistance generated between the guide wall and the moving member when the moving member is started can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an aspect of the contact between the guide wall portion and the rotating body, a mode is exemplified in which a rack gear is formed on the guide wall portion, and a gear meshed with the rack gear of the guide wall portion is engraved on a side surface of the rotating body. Is done.

  In the gaming machine D10, the rotating body includes a gear-shaped tooth portion engraved on a side surface, and the guide wall portion includes a rack gear portion meshed with the tooth portion. .

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D10, a tooth portion is formed on the side surface of the rotating body, and a rack gear portion meshed with the tooth portion is formed on the guide wall portion. Therefore, the contact area between the guide wall and the rotating body can be increased, and the bending vibration of the moving member can be further suppressed.

  Any of the gaming machines D1 to D11, including a detecting device capable of detecting the position and speed of the pair of moving members, and the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined based on the detection result of the detecting device. D12.

  Here, for example, when the moving member is moved by the electric motor, the speed of the moving member may become unstable due to the instability of the voltage of the electric motor. As a result, the pair of moving members may collide at an unexpected speed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D11, the gaming machine D12 includes a detecting device capable of detecting the position and speed of the pair of moving members. Since the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined, it is possible to prevent the pair of moving members from colliding at an unexpected relative speed and being damaged.

  For example, the speed of the other moving member is adjusted based on the detection result of the detecting device capable of detecting the position and the speed of one moving member in a state where the pair of moving members are close to each other, so that the pair of moving members hardly A constant speed state can be formed. Thereby, the impact at the time of collision between the pair of moving members can be reduced.

<Feature E group> (Distracts attention from V-guaranteed attacker during V-positive operation)
Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the predetermined lottery result is displayed on the display means. Is displayed, the variable winning means can be changed from a closed state in which the game ball is hard to enter to an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter. Based on the establishment of, the opening and closing means for opening and closing a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning means can enter the ball, ball entry detection means for detecting that a game ball has entered the specific area, A privilege state providing means for providing a privilege state advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game ball by the incoming ball detection means, and a predetermined state when at least the opening / closing means is operated. Directing the production of Gaming machine E1, characterized in that those having a means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the following effects are obtained. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. Based on the display of the identification information indicating the predetermined lottery result, the variable winning means changes the game ball from a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball to an open state where it is easy to enter the ball. In the variable winning means, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning means can enter is opened and closed by the opening and closing means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Then, based on the fact that the entering of the game ball in the specific area is detected by the entering ball detection means, the privilege state providing means gives the privilege state which is advantageous to the player. Further, when at least the opening / closing means is operated, a predetermined effect is performed by the effect executing means. Thereby, the operation of the opening / closing means can be made inconspicuous by the predetermined effect. Therefore, there is an effect that a sense of discomfort in the game can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine E2, wherein the effect execution means causes the display means to display a specific display mode.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, since a specific display mode is displayed on the display means by the effect execution means, there is an effect that the player's attention can be distracted from the opening / closing means.

  The gaming machine E3 of the gaming machine E1 or E2, wherein the effect executing means notifies a notification mode indicating that a hand is held over the front side of the variable winning means as the effect.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, a notification mode indicating that a hand is held over the front side of the variable winning means as a performance is notified by the performance execution means, so that the opening / closing means There is an effect that it is difficult for the player to determine the action.

  The gaming machine E4 according to any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, wherein the effect executing means is executed at least over a period in which the opening / closing means is operated from a predetermined time before the opening / closing means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, at least the effect execution unit is executed over a period in which the opening and closing unit is operated from a predetermined period before the opening and closing unit is operated. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to notice the operation of the opening / closing means.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable winning means includes an opening through which a game ball can enter, a state in which the opening is in the closed state, a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and an opening in the open state. A restricting member that changes to a possible state, wherein the opening and closing means includes a short opening time shorter than a time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area, and A gaming machine E5 characterized by executing one of a long opening time longer than a time required for a game ball to flow down to a specific area based on a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effect is achieved. In other words, the variable winning means includes an opening through which a game ball can enter, and a regulating member that changes the opening into a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and an open state in which the game ball can enter. Then, either the short opening time shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area, or the long open time longer than the time required for the game ball to flow from the opening to the specific area. The opening / closing means is executed based on a predetermined condition. This makes it possible to control with a simple configuration whether or not a game ball is to enter the opening. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the game can be easily configured.

  In the gaming machine E5, a special game execution means for executing a special game for changing the variable winning means to the open state based on the fact that the specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, and the lottery means When the lottery is determined to be a specific lottery result, a type determining means for determining the type of the special game, and the opening and closing means is based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means A game machine E6 for determining one of the short opening time and the long opening time.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E5. That is, when a special game in which the variable winning means is changed to an open state is executed by the special game execution means based on the fact that the result is a specific lottery result by the lottery means, the special game is determined by the type determination means. The type is determined. In the opening / closing means, one of the short opening time and the long opening time is determined based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. Thereby, the privilege given to the player can be easily changed according to the type of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair game can be provided to the player.

<Characteristic F group> (One attacker forms a V-like route)
Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating a specific lottery result on the display means Is displayed, the variable winning means that can be changed from a closed state in which the game ball is hard to enter to an open state in which it is easy to enter, and the probability that the lottery means lottery of the predetermined lottery result is a normal time. A probability setting means for setting one of a normal probability and a special probability which is a higher probability than the normal probability. Possible opening, first specific area through which a game ball entering the opening can pass, a second specific area different from the first specific area, the first specific area, and the second specific area To either one of the areas Distributing means for distributing a game ball entering the mouth, wherein the probability setting means sets the special probability on condition that the game ball has passed through the first specific area. A gaming machine F1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the following effects are obtained. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. When identification information indicating a particular lottery result is displayed on the display means, the variable winning means changes the game ball from a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball to an open state where it is easy to enter the ball. Then, the probability setting means sets one of a normal probability at normal times and a special probability which is higher than the normal probability as a lottery probability of a predetermined lottery result by the lottery means. In the variable winning means, the game ball is distributed by the sorting means to one of a first specific area in which the game ball which is in the open state and the game ball entered into the opening can pass and a second specific area different from the first specific area. Is sorted. Further, the probability setting means sets a special probability on condition that the game ball passes through the first specific area. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the special probability is set by the variable winning means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine F1, based on the display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result, a special game for easily changing the variable winning means to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A special game execution means to be executed, and a type determination means for determining a type of a special game executed by the special game execution means when the specific lottery result and the specific lottery result are selected by the lottery means, Based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means in one of a first state in which game balls are easily distributed to the first specific area and a second state in which game balls are easily distributed to the second specific area. A gaming machine F2 comprising: a distribution setting unit that is set during the period of the one special game.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. In other words, based on the display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result, the special game is executed by the special game execution means so that the variable winning means is easily changed to the open state until the predetermined condition is satisfied. You. Then, when a specific lottery result and a lottery are selected by the lottery means, the type of the special game executed by the special game execution means is determined by the type determination means. One of the first state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the first specific area and the second state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second specific area is determined based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. It is set by the distribution setting means within the period of one special game. Thus, the distribution means can be controlled according to the type of the special game determined by the type determination means, so that control can be easily configured. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the game can be performed more simply.

  In the gaming machine F1, the distribution setting means sets a first time shorter than a time required for a game ball to reach from the opening to the first specific area as the second state from the open state, A gaming machine F3, wherein a second time that is equal to or longer than a time required for a game ball to reach from the opening to the first specific area is set as the first state from the open state.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the distribution setting means sets the first time shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening to the second state. The second time, which is equal to or longer than the time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening, is set from the open state as the first state. This makes it possible to easily control whether to set the special probability. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of the game can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the variable winning means is changed to the open state a plurality of times when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed. The gaming machine F4, wherein the gaming machine F4 is operated for a predetermined period in a state where game balls are distributed to the second specific area in a predetermined open state among the plurality of open states.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the variable winning means, when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed, the variable winning means is changed to the open state a plurality of times. Then, the distributing means is operated for a predetermined period of time in a state of distributing the game ball to the second specific area in the predetermined open state among the plurality of open states. Thereby, it is possible to make the player expect that the game ball is distributed to the second specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the game machine has payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to a player based on the game balls passing through the first specific area or the second specific area. A gaming machine F5 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a predetermined number of gaming balls are given to the player based on the passing of the gaming balls through the first specific area or the second specific area. Since the payout is made by the payout means, there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the game.

<Feature G Group> (Long press production)
Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, an effect execution means for executing an effect based on a lottery result by the lottery means, an operation means capable of being operated by a player, and the operation thereof A signal output unit that outputs an operation signal based on the operation of the unit, a determination unit that determines whether the operation signal output by the signal output unit is received, and the operation signal is output by the determination unit. Effect varying means for varying the effect executed by the effect executing means based on a release timing at which it is determined that the operation signal has not been received after being determined to have been received. Gaming machine G1.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the following effects are obtained. In other words, the effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the lottery result of the executed lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. Further, based on the operation of the player by the operation means, the operation signal output by the signal output means is determined by the determination means to have received the operation signal, and thereafter, it is determined that the operation signal has not been received. The effect executed by the effect executing means is varied by the effect varying means based on the release timing. Thereby, the effect can be varied in various ways by the operation of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, the effect varying means determines whether or not the release timing is within a predetermined allowable period, and when the release timing is within the allowable period, it is more than when the release timing is outside the allowable period. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that the effect is changed to an effect that is advantageous to a player.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the effect varying means determines that the release timing is within the predetermined allowable period as compared to when the release timing is outside the allowable period. Since the effect is changed to an effect that is advantageous to the player, there is an effect that the player can be interested by operating the operation means.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, when the determining means determines that the operation signal is received, the gaming machine G3 has a notifying means for notifying the timing of the allowable period. .

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the timing of the allowable period is notified by the notifying means when it is determined that the operation signal is received by the determining means. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player play the game easily.

  In the gaming machine G3, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the notifying unit notifies the permissible period in a special notification mode that is easier to identify than other lottery results. Gaming machine G4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the notifying means has a special notification mode in which the allowable period is easier to identify than other lottery results. , The player can predict the lottery result by the notification mode and play the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the effect varying unit may be configured to receive the operation signal after determining that the operation signal has been continuously received for a predetermined period or more after the determination unit has received the operation signal. The gaming machine G5, wherein the effect is changed when the game machine runs out.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the effect varying means continuously receives the operation signal for a predetermined period or more after the determination means receives the operation signal. Is determined, and then, when it is determined that the operation signal is no longer received, the effect is changed, so that there is an effect that the operation of the operation means can be more enjoyed.

<Characteristic H group> (SW production)
Display means for displaying a game effect; operating means operable by a player; operation determining means for determining that the operating means has been operated; and the effect based on a determination result by the operation determining means. Effect change means for changing the effect, effect setting means for setting the effect content changed by the effect change means at the timing of operating the operation means, and an advantage for the player based on the operation of the operation means. Period setting means for setting at least a first period in which the effect contents are set, and a second period in which the effect contents disadvantageous to the player are set more than the first period; and the first period and the second period. The first notification mode for notifying the two periods and the second notification mode for notifying the first period and the second period in a different notification mode from the first notification mode are at least the same. Period Gaming machine H1, characterized in that the informing means for informing, and has a.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the effect of the game displayed by the display means is varied by the effect varying means based on the determination result of the player's operation by the operation means determined by the operation determining means. Next, based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means, the effect contents changed by the effect changing means are set by the effect setting means. Then, based on the operation of the operation means, a first period in which the effect content that is advantageous to the player is set, and a second period in which the effect content that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first period is set Are set at least by the period setting means. A first notification mode that notifies the first period and the second period in a distinguishable manner, and a second notification mode that notifies the first period and the second period in a different notification mode from the first notification mode. Are notified by the notification means at least during the same period. Thereby, the player can easily understand the game by the notification of the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy to understand for the player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine H1, the period setting means sets a plurality of the first periods within a valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the period setting means sets a plurality of first periods within a valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid, so that the operation is performed in the first period more. There is an effect that it can be easily configured.

  In the gaming machine H2, the first notification mode is to change and display a symbol of a transition of a period according to a predetermined rule, and to notify a set current period. H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, in the first notification mode, the transition of the period is displayed with a variable pattern according to a predetermined rule, and the set current period is notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game easily.

  The gaming machine H4 according to any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, wherein the second notification mode is configured to notify a change of a period by changing a symbol based on a rule set at random.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, in the second notification mode, the transition of the period is notified by changing the symbol based on a rule set at random. There is an effect that a variety of effects can be provided to a person.

<Feature I group> (Overflow control)
Based on the entrance where a game ball can enter, an information acquisition unit for acquiring information based on that a game ball enters the entrance, and the information acquired by the information acquisition unit. Lottery means for performing a lottery upon the establishment of the lottery condition, display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, A dynamic display mode determining unit for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by a dynamic display unit; and a player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display unit. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of the information acquired by the acquiring means until the lottery condition is satisfied; and The first where game ball is easy to enter Ball entry variable means for changing between a state and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, and the ball entry variable means is set to the first state so as to be more easily changed than the normal state in a normal state. A state setting means for setting a special state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, wherein the dynamic display mode determination means determines the special display state based on the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means. The dynamic display mode is determined so that the dynamic display period of the identification information is easily changed. When the special state is set, at least the information stored in the storage unit is equal to or less than a predetermined number. In the case of (1), the gaming machine I1 has a delay means for delaying establishment of the lottery condition for a predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the following effects are obtained. That is, information is acquired by the information acquiring means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance. Based on the information, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means on which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed when the lottery condition is satisfied. The dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. When the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. Next, until the lottery condition is satisfied, the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit up to a predetermined number. Further, the first state in which the game ball easily enters the entrance hole and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state are changed by the ball entry changing means. Then, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, a special state that is more easily changed to the first state than the normal state in the normal state is set by the state setting unit. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode based on the number of information stored in the storage means so that the dynamic display period of the identification information is easily changed, and sets the special state. In the case where the setting is set and at least the information stored in the storage unit is equal to or less than a predetermined number, the establishment of the lottery condition is delayed by the delay unit for a predetermined period. Thus, since the delay is delayed by the delay unit, the dynamic display period can be determined in a state where more information is stored in the storage unit. Therefore, there is an effect that a stable game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine I1, when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage unit is equal to or less than a set number, the dynamic display mode determining unit sets the dynamic display mode having a long dynamic display period to be smaller than the set number. Gaming machine I2, characterized in that it is easier to determine than when more are stored.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the dynamic display mode determination means stores more information than the set number when the number of information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the set number. Since the dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display period is more easily determined than the case where the dynamic display is performed, the period during which the dynamic display is not performed can be set shorter.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the delay unit delays a period longer than a period in which the incoming ball variable unit is changed from the second state to the first state. .

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the delay means delays a period longer than the period during which the variable-ball-entry means is changed from the second state to the first state. There is an effect that the dynamic display period can be determined in a state where much information is stored.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, when the ball is changed to the first state, the ball changing unit is configured to store the information in the storage unit in a period during which a predetermined number or less of game balls can be ball-filled. A gaming machine I4 characterized by being maintained in the first state below.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the ball entry changing means, when changed to the first state, stores a predetermined number or less of games whose information is stored in the storage means. Since the ball is maintained in the first state for a period of time equal to or less than the period in which the ball can enter, there is an effect that the game can be played more efficiently.

<Feature J group> (Hiding fluctuation fluctuation)
Lottery means for executing a lottery, display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display means A dynamic display mode determining unit for determining a dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed, and executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display unit. The identification information indicates a lottery result by the lottery means by a combination of a plurality of identification symbols, and is dynamically determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. The display mode includes a pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed again as the dynamic display of one lottery result. In when said identification symbols is temporarily stopped, the gaming machine is characterized in that with a stationary symbol display means for displaying overlapping the stationary pattern to the front side of the identification symbols J1.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means on which the identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means is displayed. The dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Then, when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The identification information indicates a lottery result by the lottery means by a combination of a plurality of identification symbols. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means includes a pseudo continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed again as a dynamic display of one lottery result. When the identification symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous dynamic display mode, the static symbol is displayed in a superimposed manner by the static symbol display means on the front side of the identification symbol. Thereby, it is possible to make it appear as if the temporarily stopped identification symbol is fixedly stopped by the stationary symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine J2 is characterized in that, when temporarily stopped, the display position is slightly changed periodically and dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, the display position is slightly changed periodically and dynamically displayed. Has the effect of being able to notify the user easily.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the stationary symbol is displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbol, and is hidden before the identification symbol starts dynamic display again. A gaming machine J3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, a stationary symbol is displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbol, and is hidden before dynamic display of the identification symbol is started. Therefore, there is an effect that the identification symbol can be easily viewed by the player.

  The gaming machine J4, wherein in any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, since the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determining means determines one of the dynamic display modes based on a result of the lottery performed by the lottery means. A gaming machine J5, which is set to be easily determined when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine J5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4. That is, in the dynamic display mode determining means, one dynamic display mode is determined based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In the pseudo continuous display mode, the lottery result is set to be easily determined when the lottery result is a specific lottery result. Therefore, the pseudo continuous display mode allows the player to expect a specific lottery result. effective.

<Characteristic K>
A ball entry opening through which a game can be entered, a first entry state in which a game ball can easily enter the entry opening, and a second entry state variable means that can be changed into a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. Acquiring means for acquiring information based on a game ball having entered a game ball in the entrance, lottery means for executing a lottery based on the information acquired by the acquiring means, and the lottery means A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination that the result is a specific lottery result by the game machine. And an opening variable means for changing the opening into an open state in which a game ball can enter and a difficult closed state, wherein the privilege game execution means sets the variable means in the open state. The period is variable, and the opening and the entrance are in front of each other. When the opening is in the closed state and the entrance is in the first state, game balls entering the opening are arranged at positions where the game balls easily enter the entrance. A gaming machine K1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine K1, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the information of the obtaining means obtained based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the determination by the lottery means that the result is a specific lottery result, a privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The first state in which the game ball easily enters the entrance and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state are varied by the variable ball entry means. The opening portion is changed by an opening variable means for changing between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a difficult closed state, and in the privilege game execution means, the variable means is changed to an open state for a predetermined period. Furthermore, when the opening is in the closed state, and the opening is in the first state, the game ball entering the opening easily enters the opening. It is arranged in each position. Thereby, a game can be played efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine K1, the opening variable means is constituted by a wall member capable of opening and closing the opening, and in the closed state, receives the game ball on an upper surface of the wall member and plays a game toward the entrance. A gaming machine K2 configured to guide a ball.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the opening variable means is constituted by a wall member capable of opening and closing the opening, and receives the game ball on the upper surface of the wall member in the closed state. Since the game ball is guided to the mouth side, the game ball can be easily entered and there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  A gaming machine K3, wherein the gaming machine K2 is provided with a guiding means for guiding a game ball from the wall member to the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K2, there is an effect that a game ball can be more efficiently made to enter the entrance.

Launching means for launching said gaming ball to a game area in any of the gaming machines K1 to K3;
Firing force adjusting means capable of adjusting the firing force of a game ball fired by the firing means based on an operation of a player; and in the game area, a game ball fired by the firing means. At least a first area in which the game ball can flow down and a second area different from the first area are formed, and the opening is located at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area can enter the ball. And the ball entrance is arranged at a position where game balls flowing down any of the first area and the second area can enter the ball in common. Gaming machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines K1 to K3, the state of entering the ball can be changed by the firing force adjusting means, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K4, a special entrance where a game ball flowing down the second area can enter, and a privilege grant that gives a benefit advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the special entrance. Means, a first setting state in which the game ball flowing down the second area is easily guided to the opening, and is difficult to be guided to the special entrance, and a game ball which is difficult to be guided to the opening, to the special entrance. A setting means that can be set to one of a second setting state that is easily guided.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K4, there is an effect that the state of the game can be varied and a game with freshness can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine K5, the setting means is configured to be able to be set from outside the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5, there is an effect that the setting can be changed by the setting means and the taste of the game can be adjusted.

  In any one of the gaming machines K4 to K5, the game ball flowing down the second area is easily guided to the opening, the first adjustment state where it is difficult to be guided to the entrance side, and the game ball is hard to be guided to the opening. A gaming machine K7, which has an adjusting means that can be adjusted to a second adjustment state in which it is easily guided to the entrance side. According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K4 to K5, there is an effect that the gambling of the game can be adjusted by adjusting the adjusting means.

<Characteristic L group> (loop twice with V attacker)
First ball entry means into which game balls can enter; second ball entry means capable of changing from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls can easily enter; First judging means for making a judgment based on the entry of a game ball into the means, and based on that the judgment result of the first judging means is the first judgment result, Special state setting means for setting a special state that is easily changed to a state, second determination means for making a determination based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means, and a determination result of the second determination means In the case of the second determination result, the third ball entry means capable of entering the ball, a specific area through which the game ball entered the third ball entry means can pass, and the game ball passing through the specific area A bonus game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result, and the special state setting means. A right storage unit capable of storing at least two rights for which a determination is made by the second determination unit; and whether the special state is set by the special state setting unit based on a determination result of the second determination unit. And a determining means for determining whether or not the gaming machine L1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines that display various effect images including a variable effect on a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game have been known. The fluctuating effect is an effect that is performed when a starting condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning (starting winning) is established in a starting opening. For example, three or three or three in the effective display area are displayed in the effective display area. A total of nine symbols and the like displayed in the × 3 square are displayed in a variable manner, and when the variable display is stopped, the symbols and the like stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a jackpot is given to the player.

  Many of such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability change) in which the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot is provided by satisfying a predetermined condition is high. Then, a predetermined game value such as a jackpot may be given to at least two times (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-140880), thereby improving the interest of the game.

  However, the above-mentioned gaming machine is only novel in that once it enters the probability change, it hits twice, and the other gaming characteristics are not different from the conventional gaming machine, and there is a demand for further improvement in the interest of the gaming machine. Was.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine L1 provides a special state in which the first judgment result is selected by the first judgment means, so that the judgment by the second judgment means can be easily performed. After the predetermined second determination result is selected, by passing the game ball through the specific area, a jackpot is provided for the first time, and then the determination by the second determination means is executed. By storing the right to perform the determination, the stored determination by the second determination unit can be performed even if the state has once transitioned from the special state to the normal state. Therefore, when the gaming state is far from the jackpot (shifted from the special state to the normal state), at least once again a jackpot chance is given, the player can enjoy while expecting the jackpot to the end, This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L1, the second ball entry means is arranged on the upstream side of the third ball entry means, and in at least a part of a period in which a game ball can enter the third ball entry means. , The gaming machine L2 being changed to the first state.

  In the above-described gaming machine L1, in the special state, in order to surely make the determination by the second determination means, the second ball entry means is controlled to be in the second state in which it is easy to enter the ball. A problem has emerged in that the second ball entry means in the state prevents entry into the third ball entry means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, by closing the second ball entry means (retreat state) during the period when the third ball entry means can enter the ball. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to smoothly carry out the ball entry into the third ball entry means without hindering the entry.

  In the gaming machine L2, a third determination means for determining whether or not the second ball entry means can be changed to the second state, and a display capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result of the third determination means. Means, and a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, wherein the dynamic display period determining means has the special state set. A gaming machine L3 characterized in that a dynamic display period shorter than usual is set so as to be easily determined until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The gaming machine L2 described above can smoothly enter the game ball into the third ball entry means, but in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, in addition to the above, the second special during the special state At the same time, it was necessary to achieve a configuration for securing the reserved memory of the symbols.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine L3, the control for setting the period of the dynamic display for changing the second ball entry means to the second state in the special state is shorter than that in the normal state.

  By this control, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L2, predetermined conditions (for example, opening of the third ball entry means, lapse of a predetermined time, entry of a predetermined number of balls into the second ball entry means, reaching the upper limit of hold memory, and the like) Until is established, it is possible to give priority to the entry of game balls to the second entry means, and after the predetermined conditions are established, give priority to entry of game balls to the third entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played smoothly.

  In the gaming machine L2, a third determination means for determining whether or not the second ball entry means can be changed to the second state, and a display capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result of the third determination means. Means, a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means elapses, When the identification information indicating the determination result to change to the second state is displayed, the variable control means to change the second entering means to the second state, the variable control means, A gaming machine L4 characterized in that the second ball entry means is changed to the second state for a longer period of time than usual until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the setting of the special state.

  In the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, there is provided a control for varying the second ball entry means as the second state for a long period until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The same effect as that of the machine L3 can be obtained.

  The gaming machine L5, wherein in the gaming machine L3 or L4, the predetermined condition is satisfied before the third entering means can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3 or L4, the predetermined condition can be surely satisfied before the third ball entry means can enter the ball. The ball can be smoothly entered into the means.

  In any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a determination result of the second determination means on the display means, and the second dynamic display means Second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period in which the second identification information is dynamically displayed, wherein the second dynamic display period determining means determines at least a first time after the special state is set. The gaming machine L6, wherein a period longer than the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is set for the dynamic display.

  With the above-described gaming machine L5, a smooth game can be performed with respect to entering the third entering means. However, in the gaming machine of the present technical concept, at least two rights for the determination by the second determination unit can be stored in the game in the special state, but the determination of each determination unit in the special state is possible. A new problem has emerged in that at least two rights at which the determination by the second determination unit is executed cannot be stored depending on the timing. In other words, if a jackpot based on the determination result of the second determination means is provided before the second ball entry means is set to the second state as a determination result of the third determination means during the special state, the special game is played in the third state. (2) Since the ball entry means ends before the second state, the right to be newly determined by the second determination means cannot be stored.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, at least the second dynamic display (first time) since the start of the special game (time reduction game). In order to set the period of the (2 special symbol change display) longer than the dynamic display (normal symbol change display) time, the dynamic display ends by the end of the first second dynamic display. The two ball entry means can be changed to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned new problem and to secure the characteristic gaming property of the gaming machine of the present technical idea.

  In the gaming machines L1 to L6, the third ball entry means is such that, when a predetermined number or more of the gaming balls enter, the game balls pass through the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1 to the gaming machine L6, the player can play a game aiming at the third ball entry means until a predetermined number or more of game balls are entered. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the third ball entry means ends immediately and the player is aroused, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L7, the third ball entry means allows the game ball to pass through the specific area when the predetermined number or more game balls are entered in the state 1 in which the ball can be entered. A gaming machine L8 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L1 to L6, the player can play a game aiming at the third ball entry means until a predetermined number or more of game balls are entered. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the third ball entry means ends immediately and the player is aroused, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L7 or L8, the third ball entry means includes a regulation means for regulating a game ball from passing to the specific area, and the regulation means, wherein the predetermined number of game balls enter the ball. A changing means for changing to a release state in which a game ball can pass to a specific area.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L7 or L8, the number of gaming balls entering the third entering means does not pass through the specific area until the number reaches a predetermined number. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is finished immediately and the player gets excited, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6, a variable member that can be changed between an open state in which game balls can enter the specific area and a regulation state in which game balls enter the specific area, Variable control means for varying the variable member, and based on the determination result of the first determination means is a specific determination result, it is possible to enter the third ball entry means, by the first determination means When it is determined that the specific determination result, the variable control means controls to change the variable member to the regulation state for a period during which the third ball entering means can enter the ball, When the second determination result is determined by the second determination means, the variable control means changes the variable member to the open state for a period during which the game ball can enter a specific area. Is Gaming machine L10 characterized and.

  According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6, even if the first determination means makes a specific determination result, it is possible to enter the third ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game of entering the third ball entry means with any of the determination results of the first determination means and the second determination means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L10, the determining unit determines whether or not to set the special state by the special state setting unit based on the second determination result. Gaming machine L11 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L10, when the determination result of the second determining means is the second determination result, it is determined whether or not to set the special state. Therefore, the player can give a sense of expectation to the previous game by knowing that the third ball entry means can enter the ball and that there is a possibility of being in a special state, The interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the second determination means determines any of the second determination result or the determination result that the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means for all the determinations. A gaming machine L12, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine L12, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the state itself in which the determination by the second determination means is performed becomes an advantageous state for the player, which is rich in interest. A gaming machine can be provided.

  The gaming machine L13 according to any one of the gaming machines L1 to L12, wherein the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the result of the first determination.

  According to the gaming machine L13, in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines L1 to L12, even with the first determination result, the award gaming is executed, so that a gaming machine that is full of interest can be provided.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the privilege game executing means may allow the game ball to enter a fourth ball entry means different from the third ball entry means as the privilege game. Gaming machine L14 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine L14, in addition to the effect played by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the effect played by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L13, and a game directed to four ball entry means. Since a game in which a ball is fired is performed, a gaming machine that is rich in interest can be provided.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L14, the second ball entry means may include a ball entry portion in which the game ball can enter, and a guidance position capable of guiding the game ball to enter the ball entry portion. A game machine L15 comprising: a guiding member that can be changed to a non-guiding position where it is difficult for game balls to enter the ball entry section.

  In order to utilize the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine of the present technical concept, there is a problem in the second ball entry means that the first state must be difficult to enter the ball and the second state must be configured to easily enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine L15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L14, a guiding member is provided in the second ball entry means, and the guiding member can be changed between a guiding position and a non-guiding position. By doing so, the first state has a configuration in which it is difficult to enter a ball, and the second state has a configuration in which it is easy to enter a ball, and there is an effect that it is possible to utilize the gaming properties of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine L15, the guide member includes a first region capable of receiving a falling game ball, and a second region capable of rolling a game ball rolling from the first region to the ball-in portion. A gaming machine L16 comprising: a game ball that has rolled into the second area so as to be able to enter the ball entry section.

  According to the gaming machine L16, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine L15, the guiding member is constituted by the first region and the second region, and the ball can enter the ball-entering portion from the second region. Even if the ball is provided at a position where it is difficult for game balls falling on the game board to enter the ball in the non-guiding position, even if the guiding member is in the guiding position, the ball entering the ball entering portion is not allowed to enter the ball. There is an effect that the gaming machine can be easily used and the gaming properties of the gaming machine can be utilized.

  In the gaming machine L16, in the special state, the guide member performs the second state in a period longer than a rolling period required for a game ball received in the first area to enter the ball entry part. The gaming machine L17 is characterized in that when the special state is not set, the state is changed to the second state in a period shorter than the rolling period.

  According to the gaming machine L17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L16, the period in which the guiding member is changed from the non-guiding position to the guiding position is set such that the game ball on the guiding member enters when the special state is set. Since it is possible to set a period in which the ball is easy to enter the ball and a period in which the game ball on the guide member is difficult to enter the ball when the special state is not set, the gaming machine There is an effect that it is possible to make full use of a game.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L17, a second dynamic display unit capable of dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of the determination by the second determination unit, and the second identification display by the second dynamic display unit. A second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a privilege from when the result of the determination by the second determining means becomes the second determination result until the privilege game is executed. A bonus pre-game execution means for executing a pre-game, wherein the second dynamic display period determination means determines a length of the dynamic display period when the judgment result of the second judgment means is the second judgment result. And the sum of the length of the period of the pre-privilege game is determined to be equal to the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is a predetermined determination result other than the second determination result. Is what you do. A gaming machine L18.

  In the gaming machine of the present technical idea, if the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result, the jackpot game is not provided immediately, but the jackpot game is provided only after passing through the specific area. . In such a gaming machine, when dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination unit, there is a problem that the player wants to have expectation as much as possible just before a jackpot game is provided. Surfaced. In other words, if all the determination results of the second determination unit are displayed at the same timing, the determination result of the second determination unit is determined by the second determination unit before executing the pre-privilege game based on the second determination result. There is a problem in that the player recognizes the game and loses interest in the game while performing the pre-privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine L18, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L17, the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determining means is the second determination result, The sum of the lengths of the game periods, that is, the period from the start of the dynamic display based on the second determination result to the provision of the jackpot game, and the determination result of the second determination unit is the second determination result. The length of the dynamic display period when the predetermined determination result is other than the above, that is, the period from the start to the end of the dynamic display based on the determination result (other than the second determination result) of the second determination unit. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the determination result of the second determination means until the timing when the pre-privilege game ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  A second privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game which is advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the first determining means being the first result of the determination; A gaming machine L19, wherein the determination result of the second determining means is a determination result of the execution of the second privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine L19, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L18, it is possible to display the jackpot based on the determination by the second determination means at the same timing, and to allow the player to enjoy the dynamic display to the end. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that by making the bonus given to the player different between the jackpot based on the second determination result and the jackpot based on the predetermined determination result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L19, the game machine L19 includes: an effect execution unit that executes an effect display corresponding to the dynamic display of the second dynamic display unit; and a display body that displays an effect executed by the effect execution unit. The effect execution means is for displaying, on the display, a second determination result effect corresponding to the second determination result and a pre-privilege game effect corresponding to the pre-privilege game, and the second privilege game is executed. A gaming machine L20 characterized by using at least a part of the second determination result effect when displaying an effect corresponding to the determined result on the display.

  Generally, in a gaming machine, an effect display based on identification information indicating a result of various determinations is performed using a display (for example, a liquid crystal device) so that a player can grasp the effect display. The player feels delight while grasping the contents of the effect display displayed on the display. Also in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, there has been a demand for an effect display suitable for gaming characteristics.

  According to the gaming machine L20, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L19, a part of the effect display based on the determination result that the bonus game is to be executed is based on the determination result that the second bonus game is to be executed. By using for the effect display, the player cannot grasp which privilege game will be executed only by a part of the effect contents displayed on the display body, and the effect contents displayed to the player. Has an effect that it is possible to enhance interest in the game and to enhance interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine L20, the second determination result effect is a second determination result dynamic display effect corresponding to the second identification information being dynamically displayed while the second identification information is fixedly displayed. And a second determination result corresponding to the second dynamic play determination effect, and when the effect execution means executes an effect corresponding to the result of the determination that the second privilege game is executed, a part of the A gaming machine L21 characterized in that at least the second determination result dynamic display effect is used.

  According to the gaming machine L21, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L20, when performing an effect corresponding to the determination result that the second privilege game is executed, the effect during the second determination result dynamic display is partially performed. By using this, a common effect is performed for a while after the effect based on the judgment result of the second judging means is started, and the player can use either of the start portions of the effect content displayed on the display body alone. Can not grasp whether the bonus game will be executed, it is possible to interest all of the presentation contents displayed to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. is there. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using a common effect.

  In the gaming machine L20, the pre-privilege game effect includes a pre-privilege game effect during the pre-privilege game is performed, and a privilege game confirmation effect corresponding to a gaming ball passing through the specific area. When the effect corresponding to the determination result that the second privilege game is executed is executed by the effect executing means, at least a part of the effect during the pre-privilege game is used for the effect. Gaming machine L22.

  According to the gaming machine L22, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L20 to L21, when performing an effect corresponding to the determination result of the execution of the second privilege game, the effect during the pre-privilege game is used for a part of the effect. Accordingly, a common effect is performed in the final stage immediately before the result of the determination by the second determining means is displayed, and the player can determine which privilege game is to be performed only in the final stage portion of the effect content displayed on the display. Since it is not possible to grasp whether the game will be executed or not, it is possible to make the player interested in all the presentation contents displayed to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using a common effect.

  In each of the gaming machines L20 to L22, the effect execution means includes a first notification effect for notifying that the determination result by the second determination means is the second determination result, and a determination result by the second determination means being the same. A second notification effect for notifying that the result is the determination of the execution of the second privilege game. The first notification effect or the second notification effect after the effect execution means executes the effect. A game machine L23 characterized by having the same timing for executing the following.

  According to the gaming machine L23, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L20 to L22, the timing at which the effect of notifying the determination result of the second determination unit is displayed is the same, so that the player can grasp the determination result at different timings. It is possible to prevent the game from being played and to improve the interest of the game.

  By providing two or all of the configurations of the gaming machines L21 to L23, more effective effects can be obtained.

<Characteristic M group> (Hidden production performed during Let's Mambo)
An acquisition unit that acquires information based on the first condition being satisfied, an information storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a determination based on the information that is stored in the information storage unit Determining means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determining means on a display means based on satisfaction of a second condition, and identification information indicating a specific determination result on the display means A bonus granting unit that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when is displayed; and a preliminary determination unit that determines information stored in the information storage unit before the second condition is satisfied; Based on the determination result determined by the preliminary determination unit, a specific effect determination unit that determines whether to execute a specific effect in the dynamic display with respect to the information already stored in the information storage unit, Special A determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied with respect to the information determined to perform the specific rendering by the performance determination unit; and a determination unit that determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied by the determination unit. Specific information regulating means for restricting the execution of the specific effect, with respect to the information stored before and the information stored before the information that triggered the execution of the specific effect is determined. A gaming machine M1 characterized in that:

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines that display various effect images including a variable effect on a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game have been known. The fluctuating effect is an effect that is performed when a starting condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning (starting winning) is established in a starting opening. For example, three or three or three in the effective display area are displayed in the effective display area. A total of nine symbols and the like displayed in the × 3 square are displayed in a variable manner, and when the variable display is stopped, the symbols and the like stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a jackpot is given to the player. Many of such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability change) in which the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot is provided by satisfying a predetermined condition is high. Then, a predetermined game value such as a jackpot may be given to at least two times (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-140880), thereby improving the interest of the game. However, the above-described gaming machine only gives the player an interest in the jackpot, and there is a problem that the interest in the game is reduced with respect to a variable display that is out of range. There was a demand for further improvement in the entertainment of the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the information is acquired by the acquiring means based on the establishment of the first condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the information storage means. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the information stored in the information storage unit. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. When the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display unit, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is provided by the benefit providing unit. Before the second condition is satisfied, the information stored in the information storage means is determined by the pre-determination means. Based on the result of the determination made by the preliminary determination means, the specific effect determination means determines whether or not to execute a specific effect with dynamic display of information already stored in the information storage means. With respect to the information determined to execute the specific effect by the specific effect determining means, the determining means determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. The information stored after the information that the predetermined condition is determined to be satisfied by the determination means, and the information stored before the information that triggered the determination of the execution of the specific effect, The execution of the effect is regulated by the specific effect regulating means.

  With this, the execution of the specific effect is restricted for the information stored after the information for which the predetermined condition is satisfied among the information for which the specific effect is determined, so that the specific effect is continuously performed. After the effect to be executed is considered to be finished, the specific effect can be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to provide a surprising effect to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine M1, as a dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, a dynamic display mode determination for determining one dynamic display mode based on the information stored in the information storage unit. Means for determining that the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit. A gaming machine M2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine M2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M1. That is, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit based on the information stored in the information storage unit. When the dynamic display mode determining unit determines that the information is information for determining a specific dynamic display mode, the determining unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, there is an effect that the specific dynamic display mode is displayed, so that it is possible to make the player think that the specific effect has ended.

  In the gaming machine M2, the specific effect determination unit determines the execution of the specific effect based on the determination that the specific dynamic display mode is the information determined by the advance determination unit. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M2, the execution of the specific effect is determined to be a specific effect based on the information that determines the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the preliminary determination unit. Since it is determined by the determining means, when the specific effect is executed, the player is quickly recognized that the specific dynamic display mode is executed due to any one of continuous fluctuations, and the interest of the game is improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, when the specific effect determination means determines to execute the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect is started with respect to the information already stored. A gaming machine M4 having start information determining means for determining information by a predetermined lottery.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, when the specific effect determining means determines to execute a specific effect, the information stored in the already stored information is Since the information for starting the execution of the specific effect is determined by the start information determining means by a predetermined lottery, it is possible to provide the player with various effects by randomizing the number of times the specific effect is continuously executed. This has the effect.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the specific effect restricting means is stored after information determined by the determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and execution of the specific effect is determined. The information stored a predetermined number of times consecutively from the information stored next to the information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition among the information stored before the information that triggered the event. A gaming machine M5 that regulates the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the specific effect regulating means is stored after the information determined by the determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Of the information stored before the information that triggered the determination of the execution of the specific effect, the information stored for a predetermined number of times continues from the information stored next to the information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the specific effect is regulated by the specific effect regulating means with respect to the information stored and stored, the specific effect is restricted consecutively, and it is possible to increase a player's expectation that the specific effect will be executed again. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine M5, the specific effect regulating means determines the predetermined number of times by lottery.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M5, the predetermined number of times is determined by the specific restriction means by lottery, so that the number of times a specific effect is restricted can be randomized, thereby improving the interest of the player. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, there is provided a suggestion effect execution unit that executes a predetermined suggestion effect for a dynamic display of the information in which the specific effect is restricted by the specific effect restriction unit. Gaming machine M7.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine of any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, a predetermined suggestive effect is suggested for a dynamic display for information in which a specific effect is regulated by the specific effect regulating means. Since the execution is performed by the execution means, there is an effect that the player can have an expectation that the specific effect is continuing by the suggestion effect.

<Characteristic N group> (The number of incubations after Let's Mambo is determined by the number of suspensions at the start of Let's Mambo execution)
An acquisition unit that acquires information based on the first condition being satisfied, an information storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a determination based on the information that is stored in the information storage unit Determining means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determining means on a display means based on satisfaction of a second condition, and identification information indicating a specific determination result on the display means A privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when is displayed,
Prior to the establishment of the second condition, a pre-determination unit that determines information stored in the information storage unit, and a pre-determination unit that stores the information in the information storage unit based on a determination result determined by the pre-determination unit. For the information that has been performed, each time the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, a production effect determining unit that determines the execution of a continuous production that performs a specific production, and the production unit performs the continuous production. At a predetermined opportunity until the end of the dynamic display of the determined information, the dynamic display of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the determined information is suggested. A gaming machine N1 comprising: a suggestion effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute an effect.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines that display various effect images including a variable effect on a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game have been known. The fluctuating effect is an effect that is performed when a starting condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning (starting winning) is established in a starting opening. For example, three or three or three in the effective display area are displayed in the effective display area. A total of nine symbols and the like displayed in the × 3 square are displayed in a variable manner, and when the variable display is stopped, the symbols and the like stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a jackpot is given to the player. Many of such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability change) in which the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot is provided by satisfying a predetermined condition is high. Then, a predetermined game value such as a jackpot may be given to at least two times (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-140880), thereby improving the interest of the game. However, the above-described gaming machine only gives the player an interest in the jackpot, and there is a problem that the interest in the game is reduced with respect to a variable display that is out of range. There was a demand for further improvement in the entertainment of the game.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the information is acquired by the acquiring means based on the establishment of the first condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the information storage means. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the information stored in the information storage unit. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. When the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a benefit which is advantageous to the player is provided by the benefit providing means. Prior to the establishment of the second condition, the information stored in the information storage unit is determined by the preliminary determination unit. Based on the result of the determination made by the preliminary determining means, a continuous effect of executing a specific effect every time the dynamic display of the identification information is performed on the information already stored in the information storage means. Is determined by the effect determination means. At a predetermined opportunity until the end of the dynamic display of the information determined to execute the continuous effect by the effect determining means, the movement of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the determined information is performed. Whether or not to execute a suggested effect on the target display is determined by the suggested effect determination unit. Thus, the suggestion effect is performed even after the end of the continuous effect, so that the player can be made to think that the continuous effect is continuing. Therefore, it is possible to make it seem as if the number of continuous productions is larger than the actual number of continuous productions, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine N1, a dynamic display mode in which one dynamic display mode is determined based on the information stored in the information storage unit as a dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit. Determining means for determining whether the specific dynamic display mode is the information determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. A gaming machine N2 characterized by determining that an effect is to be performed.

  According to the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N1. That is, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit based on the information stored in the information storage unit. When it is determined by the pre-determination means that the specific dynamic display mode is the information determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, the continuous production is performed by the production determination means. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to promptly recognize that a specific dynamic display mode is to be executed by starting a continuous effect.

  The gaming machine N3, wherein in the gaming machine N1 or N2, the suggested effect is an effect that is also executed during a predetermined period before the start of the effect of the continuous effect.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the suggested effect is also performed during a predetermined period before the start of the continuous effect production, and thus the continuous effect is started by executing the suggested effect. Has the effect of allowing the player to expect.

  A gaming machine having a number-of-times determining means for determining the number of consecutive times by lottery when any of the gaming machines N1 to N3 determines the execution of the suggested effects by the suggested-effect determining means. N4.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, when the suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect determination means, the number of consecutive times is determined by the number determination means by lottery. Therefore, the number of times that the suggested effect is performed can be made random, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic P group> (a series of presentation modes is started by button operation, and the presentation mode is changed by invalid operation)
Effecting means capable of executing an effect, effect effecting means capable of causing the effecting means to execute a specific effect in a predetermined first effect pattern, operation means operable by a player, Signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, signal determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means, and determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means A possible state determining means for determining whether or not it is possible to cause the effect means to start execution of the specific effect based on the effect performed, and the possible state by the possible state determining means. Based on being determined to be, the effect control means for starting execution of the specific effect by the effect execution means, and in the possible state by the possible state determination means Specific condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied based on information based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, and a first effect of the specific effect based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determining means. A gaming machine P1 comprising: effect varying means for varying a pattern to a different second effect pattern.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a player-driven effect of operating a decorative body from a standby position to a predetermined operation position is performed by a player operating an operation means (effect button or the like). (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97827).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, even if the player operates the operating means (such as a production button) while the decorative body is operating (that is, during the production driving effect), a new production driving effect is produced. There is a problem that the effect of the accessory-driven effect performed based on the operation on the operation means (the effect button or the like) is not performed and the effect is reduced. In addition, there is a problem that the operation of the decorative body (for example, the operation time) cannot be matched to the player's preference, and the interest of the player cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means in the predetermined first effect pattern by the effect means capable of executing the effect, and the player can operate the effect. A predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means, and the signal output by the predetermined signal output means is determined by the signal determination means. Based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means, the variable state determination means determines whether or not it is in a state where it is possible to cause the performance means to start executing the specific performance. The execution of the specific effect by the effect execution means is started by the effect control means based on the variable state determination means determining that the state is the possible state. On the other hand, based on the fact that the specific condition has been established by the specific condition determining means based on the information based on the fact that the possible state determining means has determined that the first state is not in the possible state, the first effect pattern of the specific effect is changed by the effect varying means. It is changed to a different second effect pattern.

  Thus, it is possible to change the effect pattern of the specific effect from the first effect pattern to the second effect pattern based on the determination that the specific effect based on the operation of the operation means cannot be executed. Therefore, based on the operation of the operation means that could not execute the specific effect, the effect pattern of the specific effect to be executed next can be changed, so that the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means can be changed. There is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine P2, wherein in the gaming machine P1, the second effect pattern is set in an effect period shorter than the first effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine P2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P1. That is, since the second effect pattern is set in an effect period shorter than the first effect pattern, the effect period of the specific effect can be shortened by executing the second effect pattern. Therefore, in a single period, it is possible to increase the number of times that the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the effect of the effect performed based on the operation of the operation means can be enhanced. is there. Furthermore, even when the operating means is operated continuously for a short period of time, the chance of starting the execution of the specific effect increases, and the player can start the specific effect by operating the operating means. And the effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect means has a plurality of effect units capable of executing an effect, and the effect pattern is at least two or more of the effect units among the plurality of effect units. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that an effect is executed for the game machine P3.

  According to the gaming machine P3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine P1 or P2. In other words, the effect means has a plurality of directing units capable of executing a directing, and the directing pattern causes at least two or more directing units out of the plural directing units to execute directing. Various effects can be executed based on the operation of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing an effect, and the effect execution means is provided in any effect part of the plurality of effect parts. A gaming machine P4 capable of executing a specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine P4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2. That is, the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing an effect, and the effect effecting means executes a specific effect in an arbitrary effect part among the plurality of effect parts.

  Thereby, various effects can be executed based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine P4, the possible state determination means determines the possible state when there is at least one of the effect parts capable of starting an effect in the effect pattern by the effect execution means. A gaming machine P5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine P5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P4. In other words, when there is at least one effect unit that can start an effect in the effect pattern by the effect execution unit, the possible state is determined by the possible state determination unit.

  Thus, the specific effect can be executed when at least one of the plurality of effect units is in the enabled state. Therefore, in a single period, it is possible to increase the number of times that the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the effect of the effect performed based on the operation of the operation means can be enhanced. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the specific condition is that the number of times that the possible state determination unit determines that the state is not the possible state is set as at least one of the fulfillment conditions. Gaming machine P6.

  According to the gaming machine P6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines P1 to P5. That is, the number of times that the possible state determination unit determines that the state is not the enabled state is set as at least one of the satisfied conditions that satisfy the specific condition.

  Thereby, the specific condition is established based on the number of times that the possible state determination unit determines that the state is not the possible state, that is, the number of times the specific effect is not executed by the effect execution unit despite operating the operation unit. Becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player actively operate the operation means, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P6, the specific condition is that at least one of the number of times that the possible state is determined by the possible state determination unit to be not the possible state within a predetermined period is set as at least one of the fulfillment conditions. A gaming machine P7.

  According to the gaming machine P7, the following effect is achieved in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines P1 to P6. That is, the number of times that the possible state determining unit determines that the state is not the enabled state within the predetermined period is set as at least one of the satisfied conditions that the specific condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, the number of times that it is determined that the state is not possible by the possible state determination unit within the predetermined period, that is, the specific effect is executed by the effect execution unit within the predetermined period even though the operation unit is operated. It is possible to satisfy the specific condition based on the number of times that the condition has not been performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player actively operate the operation means, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, an effect pattern selection for selecting one effect pattern from a plurality of different second effect patterns based on the determination that the specific condition has been satisfied by the specific condition determining means. A gaming machine P8 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine P8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7. That is, based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determination unit, one effect pattern is selected from the plurality of different second effect patterns by the effect pattern selection unit.

  Accordingly, when the effect pattern of the specific effect is variable, a plurality of effect patterns can be executed, so that various effects can be executed based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine P8, the effect pattern selecting means selects a second effect pattern corresponding to information based on the determination that the state is not the possible state.

  According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P8, the second rendering pattern corresponding to the information based on the determination that the gaming device P8 is not in the enabled state is selected. This makes it possible to execute the game in a manner that is easy for the player to understand, and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  The gaming machine P10, wherein in the gaming machine P8 or P9, the plurality of different second effect patterns are set so that at least the effect period is different.

  According to the gaming machine P10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P8 or P9, since a plurality of different second effect patterns are set with at least different effect periods, the specific effect is executed depending on the effect pattern executed. Time periods can be different. This makes it possible to vary the number of times that the specific effect can be executed in a single period, so that the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P10, the effect means has at least a movable member that is movable, and the effect execution means sets the movable member to each of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern. A gaming machine P11 which is movable in a corresponding movable pattern.

  According to the gaming machine P11, the following effect is achieved in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines P1 to P10. That is, the effect means has at least a movable member movable, and the effect executing means moves the movable member in a movable pattern corresponding to each of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern.

  Accordingly, the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern can be executed on the movable member that is movable based on the operation on the operation means, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing an effect, and the effect execution means performs the specific effect for each of the plurality of effect parts. A gaming machine P12 that can be executed, wherein the plurality of effect units are set with different effect periods as the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine P12, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine P1 or P2. That is, the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing an effect, and the effect effecting means executes a specific effect for each of the plurality of effect parts. Different rendering periods are set for the plurality of rendering units.

  This makes it possible to execute a specific effect on a plurality of effect units having different effect periods based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine P12, the gaming machine P12 includes an elapsed period determining unit that determines an elapse of the operation period set in each of the plurality of effect units. A gaming machine P13 characterized in that the effect section in which the operation period has passed is determined by the means to be in the possible state.

  According to the gaming machine P13, the following effects are exerted in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machine P12. That is, the elapse of the effect period set for each of the plurality of effect units is determined by the elapsed period determination unit, and the effect unit determined to have passed the operation period is determined to be in the enabled state by the possible state determination unit. With this, it is possible to start the operation at the timing when the operation means is operated, of the production section in which the operation period has elapsed among the plurality of production sections in which different production periods are set. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the invalid state in which the effect is not executed on the machine side.

<Characteristic Q group> (effect execution timing variable by invalid button operation)
Operation means that can be operated by a player, signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and signal determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means A plurality of effect means capable of executing an effect, and at least one of the plurality of effect means in a predetermined first effect pattern based on the predetermined signal being determined by the signal determining means. An effect execution means capable of causing the two or more effect means to execute a specific effect, wherein the effect execution means is configured to execute the specific effect by the two or more effect means in advance. A predetermined standby period, in which at least one of the two or more effect units is caused to wait for the execution of the effect, and during the standby period, the predetermined signal is output by the signal determination unit. Gaming machine Q1, characterized in that on the basis of the reception of the signals is intended to initiate the execution of the effect for at least 1 of the presentation unit in standby.

  In a gaming machine such as a gaming machine, a pachinko machine, etc., when a player operates an operation means (such as an effect button), an accessory-driven effect of operating a plurality of decorative bodies from a standby position to a predetermined operation position is executed. (For example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, even if the player operates the operating means (such as a production button) while the decorative body is operating (that is, during the production driving effect), a new production driving effect is produced. There is a problem that the effect of the accessory-driven effect performed based on the operation on the operation means (the effect button or the like) is not performed and the effect is reduced. In addition, when the operating means is operated while one of the decorative bodies is operating, the other decorative body may be operated. Even in this case, even if the player operates the operation means (such as the effect button) if all the decorative bodies are operated, for example, the operation of the operation means is performed a plurality of times in a short period of time, There was a problem that it was not possible to execute a new character-driven effect, and it was not possible to improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, a predetermined signal is output from the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player. The signal output by the signal output means is determined by the signal determination means. Based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means, the specific effect is provided to at least two or more of the effect means of the plurality of effect means capable of executing the effect in the predetermined first effect pattern. It is executed by the effect execution means.

  And when performing a specific production by two or more production means, a predetermined standby period, at least one production means of the two or more production means is to wait for the execution of the production, Based on the reception of the predetermined signal by the signal discriminating unit during the standby period, the execution of the effect is started by the effect execution unit for at least one of the effect units in the standby state.

  Thereby, even when the execution of the specific effect is started for the plurality of effect devices by the operation of the operation device, at least one of the effect devices is waiting for the execution of the specific effect, and during the standby period, the operation device is operated. Since the specific effect is executed by ending the standby by being operated, even if the player operates the operating means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid period in which the execution of the specific effect is not started, and the operation is performed. The effect of the effect performed based on the operation of the means can be enhanced. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the standby period is longer than a shortest period in which the signal output unit can output the predetermined signal for each operation when the operation unit is continuously operated. A gaming machine Q2 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, during the standby period, when the operating means is continuously operated, the signal output means can output a predetermined signal for each operation. Since the period is set to be longer than the shortest period, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid period even when the operating means is operated continuously.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, an interval determination unit that determines an interval at which the signal determination unit determines the predetermined signal, a storage unit that can store information determined by the interval determination unit, and a storage unit that stores the information. And a period setting means for variably setting the standby period based on the information thus obtained.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are exerted in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machines Q1 or Q2. That is, the interval at which the signal determination means determines a predetermined signal is determined by the interval determination means. The information determined by the interval determination means is stored by the storage means. The waiting period is variably set by the period setting unit based on the information stored in the storage unit.

  As a result, the interval at which the player operates the operating means differs depending on the player, but the operated interval is determined by the interval determining means, and the information is stored. , Frequency, etc. can be stored. Furthermore, since the standby period is variably set by the setting unit based on the information stored in the storage unit, the standby period is changed in accordance with the situation in which the player operates the operation unit, so that the standby period is adjusted to match the player. It can be in the state of a gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved. In addition. Even if the information is not stored in the storage unit, the setting unit variably sets the standby period based on the information determined by the interval determination unit, and sets a suitable standby period for each operation. Even with such a configuration, there is an effect that it can be set so as to perform more optimal effects.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, a validity period setting means for setting a validity period for validating the discrimination, and a validity period setting means for validating the discrimination signal. A gaming machine Q4 comprising: an invalidity judging means for judging information determined by the signal judging means before a period is set.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination unit, the valid period for which the determination is valid is set by the valid period setting unit. Before the validity period is set by the validity period setting means, information in which a predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means is determined by the invalidity determination means.

  With this, when the operation means is operated, even if the operation is performed before the validity period for determining that the operation is valid is set by the invalidation determination means, the determination is made by the invalidity determination means. Also, there is an effect that it is possible to determine that there is a habit of starting operation of the operation means from before.

  The gaming machine Q5, further comprising a regulation unit that regulates standby by the effect execution unit based on the fact that the information determined by the invalidation determination unit is specific information.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q4, based on the fact that the information determined by the invalidity determining means is the specific information, the standby by the effect executing means is restricted by the restricting means. If the information determined by the means is specific information (for example, invalidity is not determined in a period before a predetermined period (5 seconds, etc.) before the start of the validity period, etc.), the standby is regulated by the regulating unit. It is determined in advance that the player is likely to be a player who does not continuously operate the means, and the specific effect is started by operating the operation means at the same timing without setting the effect means to wait for the specific effect As a result, there is an effect that an effect with a sense of unity can be provided to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the effect means has at least a plurality of movable members movable in a predetermined range, and the effect execution means includes at least two or more movable members among the plurality of movable members. Is capable of being moved based on the first effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5. That is, a plurality of movable members that can move at least in a predetermined range are provided as the production means. At least two or more movable members among the plurality of movable members are moved by the effect executing means based on the first effect pattern.

  Thereby, since a plurality of movable members can be moved by one operation, there is an effect that a powerful effect can be provided to the player.

<Characteristic R group> (Rewind control of a series of production modes by button operation)
Operation means that can be operated by a player, signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and signal determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means And effecting means for performing an effect, and causing the effecting means to execute a specific effect in a predetermined first effect pattern based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determining means. And a possible effect execution means, wherein, when the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, the signal discriminating means discriminates the predetermined signal. A gaming machine R1 comprising effect varying means for causing the effect effecting means to execute the specific effect in a second effect pattern different from the one effect pattern.

  In a gaming machine such as a gaming machine, a pachinko machine, etc., a player-driven effect of operating a decorative body from a standby position to a predetermined operation position by operating an operation means (effect button or the like) by a player is performed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97827).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, even if the player operates the operating means (such as a production button) while the decorative body is operating (that is, during the production driving effect), a new production driving effect is produced. There is a problem that the effect of the accessory-driven effect performed based on the operation on the operation means (the effect button or the like) is not performed and the effect is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, a predetermined signal is output from the signal output unit based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player. The signal output by the signal output means is determined by the signal determination means. Based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means, the specific effect by the effect means capable of executing the effect in the predetermined first effect pattern is executed by the effect execution means.

  Then, when the specific effect is being executed by the effect executing means, based on the fact that the predetermined signal has been determined by the signal determining means, at least the first effect pattern in the reverse direction from the predetermined effect position of the first effect pattern. The effect is changed by the effect changing means so that the effect is executed by the effect executing means in the second effect pattern for executing a part.

  Thus, when the specific effect is executed by the operation of the operating means in the first effect pattern, the specific effect is executed by changing to the second effect pattern even if the operating means is further operated. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid state in which there is no response to the operation, and to enhance the effect of the effect performed based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  The gaming machine R2 in the gaming machine R1, wherein the second effect pattern is an effect pattern that executes at least a part of the first effect pattern in a reverse direction.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1, since the second effect pattern is constituted by an effect pattern that executes at least a part of the first effect pattern in the reverse direction, the effect of the first effect pattern The effect can be executed by setting the data in the reverse direction, so that different effects can be easily executed.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the effect varying means is configured to execute the first effect pattern in a reverse direction from the effect position of the first effect pattern executed at a timing at which the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means. A gaming machine R3 at least partially executed as the second effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1 or R2, in the reverse direction from the rendering position of the first rendering pattern in which the rendering variable means is executed at the timing when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means. Since at least a part of the first effect pattern is executed as the second effect pattern, the first effect pattern is smoothly connected to the second effect pattern at a timing when the operation means is operated, so that a sense of discomfort given to the player can be suppressed. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the effect variable means is configured to execute the specific effect in the second effect pattern, and when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means, The gaming machine R4, wherein the specific effect is executed in the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position executed in the second effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the effect variable means determines whether a predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means when the specific effect is executed in the second effect pattern. Is to execute the specific effect in the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position executed in the second effect pattern, so that the first effect is performed in accordance with the operation of the player. The second effect pattern corresponding to the rewind of the effect pattern ends, and the first effect pattern becomes the first effect pattern in the forward direction. The execution direction of the first effect pattern can be switched by the operation of the player, and the interest of the game can be further improved. This has the effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the second effect pattern is set as a pattern for executing the first effect pattern in a reverse direction during an effect period of a predetermined specific period, and the effect variable. The means, based on the execution of the second effect pattern for the specific period, determines the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position at which the second effect pattern ends. A gaming machine R5 for performing an effect.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the second effect pattern is set as a pattern for executing the first effect pattern in the reverse direction in an effect period of a predetermined specific period, and the effect changing means sets the second effect pattern to the specific period. Based on the execution, the specific effect is executed with the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position where the second effect pattern has ended. There is an effect that the switching to the second effect pattern can be smoothly performed, and an effect can be provided in which the feeling of strangeness is suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, there is provided an execution period determining unit that determines an elapsed period during which the specific effect is being executed by the effect executing unit, and the effect varying unit determines a determination result of the execution period determining unit. A game machine R6 for causing the specific effect to be executed in the second effect pattern based on the second effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the elapsed period during which the specific effect is being executed by the effect executing means is determined by the execution period determining means. Then, the effect varying means causes the specific effect to be executed in the second effect pattern based on the determination result of the execution period determining means, so that it is possible to automatically switch from the first effect pattern to the second effect pattern. Thus, there is an effect that a presentation with fresh taste can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine R6, the effect means is a movable means capable of moving within a predetermined range, and the effect execution means includes, as the specific effect, a predetermined first effect position and a second effect position different from the first effect position. An effect that reciprocates between an effect position and the effect means. The effect variable means causes the execution period determining means to cause the specific effect to move from the first effect position to the second effect position. A gaming machine R7 for causing the specific effect to be executed in the second effect pattern when it is determined that the period is during which the effect is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine R7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R6. That is, the effect executing means causes the movable means to be capable of performing an effect that reciprocates between a predetermined first effect position and a second effect position different from the first effect position as a specific effect. The effect variable means determines that the specific effect is generated in the second effect pattern when the execution period determining means determines that the effect is being performed from the first effect position to the second effect position. Since it is executed, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R6 or R7, when the execution period determining unit determines that the elapsed period during which the specific effect is being executed has not passed the predetermined period, a variable regulation that restricts the execution of the effect varying unit. A gaming machine R8 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R6 or R7, when the execution period determining means determines that the elapsed period during which the specific effect is being executed has not passed the predetermined period, the effect variable. Since the execution of the means is regulated by the variable regulating means, there is an effect that the effect that the effect pattern is frequently switched and the interest of the effect is impaired can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines R5 to R8, the effect executing means executes the specific effect on a plurality of the effecting means, and the effect varying means includes the execution period determination of the plurality of effecting means. A gaming machine R9 characterized by causing at least one of said effect means to execute said specific effect in said second effect pattern based on a determination result by said means.

  According to the gaming machine R9, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines R5 to R8. That is, the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means for a plurality of effect means. The effect varying means causes the at least one effect means to execute the specific effect in the second effect pattern based on the determination result by the execution period determining means among the plurality of effect means.

  Thus, a plurality of effect means can be variably executed as the second effect pattern based on the determination result of the execution period determining means, and various effects can be provided to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R9, the effect executing means executes the specific effect on a plurality of the effecting means, and the effect changing means includes a second effect among the plurality of effecting means. A gaming machine R10 for causing the effect means having a short effect period to be executed as a pattern to execute the specific effect in the second effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine R10, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines R1 to R9. That is, the effect execution means executes a specific effect for a plurality of effect means, and the effect variable means for the effect means having a short effect period executed as the second effect pattern among the plurality of effect means. Since the specific effect is executed in the second effect pattern, there is an effect that an invalid state when the operating means is operated can be suppressed.

<Characteristic S group> (Match multiple movable positions and non-movable execution timing according to the stage of production)
An effect means capable of executing an effect, a specific effect execution means for causing the effect means to execute a specific effect for a predetermined period, an operation means operable by a player, and the operation means are operated A signal output unit that outputs a predetermined signal based on the above, a signal determination unit that determines a signal output by the signal output unit, a plurality of movable members that can move in a predetermined movable range, A moving means for moving at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members based on the predetermined signal being determined by the signal determining means when the specific effect is being executed; and The movable mode of the movable member, which is movable when the effect lapse period of the specific effect executed when the predetermined signal is determined by the determination unit is within the specific lapse period, is variable. And a prohibition means for prohibiting movement by the movable means based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means when the specific elapsed time period is exceeded. A gaming machine S1 characterized by the following.

  In a gaming machine such as a gaming machine, a pachinko machine, etc., a player-driven effect of operating a decorative body from a standby position to a predetermined operation position by operating an operation means (effect button or the like) by a player is performed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97827).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that if the decorative body is operated based on the operation of the operation means regardless of the production lapse period, the game becomes less sharp and the interest of the player cannot be improved. Further, when all of the plurality of decorative bodies are in the operating state, even if the player operates the operation means (such as the effect button), the operation of the new decorative body cannot be executed. There is a problem in that the effect of the effect of operating the decorative body that is executed based on the operation on the means (the effect button or the like) is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in a predetermined period of the effect means capable of executing the effect. A predetermined signal is output by the signal output unit based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player. The signal output by the signal output means is determined by the signal determination means.

  When the specific effect is being executed, at least one of the plurality of movable members is moved by the movable unit based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination unit. The movable mode of the movable member that is movable when the effect lapse period of the specific effect executed when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination unit is within the specific lapse period is changed by the movable mode variable unit. On the other hand, when the predetermined time period is exceeded, the movement by the movable means based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means is prohibited by the prohibition means.

  Thereby, when the effect lapse period of the specific effect is within the specific lapse period, the movable mode of the movable member is changed based on the operation of the operation unit, while when the specific lapse period is exceeded, it is based on the operation of the operation unit. Since the movement of the movable member is prohibited, an effect in which the movable member is effectively moved can be performed only within a specific elapsed time. Therefore, a sharp production can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine S1, when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination unit within the specific elapsed period, the movable mode variable unit moves the plurality of movable members to predetermined predetermined positions. A gaming machine S2 characterized by being movable by movable means.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1, the movable mode variable means determines a plurality of movable members in advance when a predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means within a specific elapsed period. Since it is to be moved by the movable means to each of the predetermined positions, it is possible to cause the movable member to perform a certain operation by operating the operating means within the specific effect period within the specific effect period, There is an effect that a novel impression can be given to the player.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members is determined based on the fact that the predetermined signal is not determined by the signal determination unit even after a predetermined period within the specific elapsed period has elapsed. A gaming machine S3 characterized in that is moved to a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the movable means is based on the fact that a predetermined signal is not determined by the signal determining means even after a predetermined period within a specific elapsed period has elapsed. Since at least one movable member among the plurality of movable members is moved to a predetermined position, even a player who operates the operating means less frequently can effectively enjoy a specific effect. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, a judging means for executing a judgment based on the satisfaction of the judgment condition, and a privilege advantageous to the player based on the judgment made by the judging means as a specific judgment result. A gaming machine S4, comprising: a privilege granting means for granting, wherein the specific effect is a notification effect based on a determination result by the determining device.

  According to the gaming machine S4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines S1 to S3. That is, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. Based on the result of the determination by the determining means, a benefit advantageous to the player is provided by the benefit providing means. The notification effect based on the determination result by the determination means is executed in the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the user can be interested in the notification effect performed in the specific effect, and can increase the interest of the player in the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine S4, the specific effect is such that the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period after the specific elapsed period has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S4, since the specific effect is a notification effect that is performed within a predetermined period after a specific elapsed period has elapsed, the notification effect is performed. There is an effect that the effect by the movable member is executed in synchronization with the timing, and the player can be notified that the notification effect is about to be executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S5, based on the execution of the prohibition by the prohibition means, the moved movable means is moved by the movable means to an initial position before the movement. A gaming machine S6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines S1 to S6, the movable means is moved to the initial position before the movement by the movable means based on the prohibition performed by the prohibiting means. Therefore, it is possible to easily inform the player that the effect using the movable member has been completed.

<Characteristic T group> (Stroke is variable by changing the output for driving by continuous tapping of the button high and low)
Operation means that can be operated by a player, signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and signal determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means A gaming machine comprising: a movable member capable of moving within a predetermined movable range; and a movable means for moving the movable member based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means. In the movable signal output means for outputting a movable signal for varying the amount of movement of the movable member in the unit period by the movable means, and based on the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means, A gaming machine T1 comprising: selecting means for selecting the type of the movable signal output by the movable signal output means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a player-driven effect of operating a decorative body from a standby position to a predetermined operation position is performed by a player operating an operation means (effect button or the like). (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97827).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, since the operation mode of the decorative body is monotonous, there is a problem that the effect of the accessory-driven effect is reduced. Also, even if the player operates the operation means (the effect button or the like) while the decorative body is operating (that is, during the accessory drive effect), no new accessory drive effect is executed. However, there is a problem in that the effect of the accessory-driven effect performed based on the operation on the operation means (the effect button or the like) is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, a predetermined signal is output by the signal output unit based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player. The signal output by the signal output means is determined by the signal determination means. A movable member movable in a predetermined movable range is moved by the movable means based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means.

  A movable signal for varying the amount of movement of the movable member in the unit period by the movable means is output by the movable signal output means. The type of the movable signal output by the movable signal output means is selected by the selection means based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means.

  Thus, based on the operation of the operating means, the type of the movable signal is selected and the movable amount of the movable member is changed, so that the movable mode of the movable member can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine T1 includes an interval determination unit that determines an interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination unit, and the selection unit determines whether the interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the interval determination unit is a predetermined interval. The gaming machine T2, wherein when the distance is equal to or less than the predetermined interval, a movable signal having the smaller movable amount is selected than when the distance is equal to or longer than the predetermined interval.

  According to the gaming machine T2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine T1. That is, the interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining unit is determined by the interval determining unit. When the interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the interval determination unit is equal to or less than the predetermined interval, a movable signal having a smaller amount of movement than when the interval is equal to or greater than the predetermined interval is selected by the selection unit.

  Thereby, when the operation frequency of the operation unit is high, there is an effect that the problem that the movable member is damaged can be suppressed by reducing the movable amount of the movable member.

  In the gaming machine T2, when the specific condition is satisfied, the selecting unit may determine whether the movable signal having the large moving amount is large even if the interval determined by the predetermined signal by the interval determining unit is equal to or less than a predetermined interval. A gaming machine T3.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T2, when the specific condition is satisfied, even if the interval determined by the predetermined signal by the interval determining means is equal to or less than the predetermined interval, the movable amount can be reduced. Since the large movable signal is selected by the selecting means, even if the operation frequency is high, the movable signal having a larger movable amount is selected when the specific condition is satisfied, so that the effect of the movable member becomes monotonous. This has the effect of suppressing

  In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the movable means is constituted by at least a stepping motor, and the movable signal is constituted by a signal constituted by a predetermined frequency. .

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the movable means is constituted by at least a stepping motor, and the movable signal is constituted by a signal constituted by a predetermined frequency. There is an effect that the movable control of can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine T4, the movable signal is such that the movable amount is increased by a high frequency signal, and the movable amount is decreased by a low frequency signal.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T4, since the movable amount is increased by the high frequency signal and the movable amount is reduced by the low frequency signal, the movable amount can be easily controlled. .

  In any one of the gaming machines T3 and T4, the plurality of movable members are provided, and the movable unit capable of moving each of the plurality of movable members is provided, and the movable signal output unit is provided with the signal determination unit. A game machine T6 for determining the movable member to be moved based on a preset movable condition and outputting the movable signal when the predetermined signal is determined by the following.

  According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine T3 or T4, a preset value is set when each of the plurality of movable members is moved by the movable means and a predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means. Since the movable member to be moved is determined based on the set movable condition and the movable signal is output by the movable signal output means, the movable member can be easily controlled.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the movable means is configured by at least a solenoid, and the movable signal is a signal configured with a predetermined power value.

  According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the movable means is constituted by at least a solenoid, and the movable signal is a signal composed of a predetermined power value. There is an effect that it can be easily executed.

  In the gaming machine T7, when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination unit, the selection unit determines a first power value and the first power as a power value of the movable signal output to the movable unit. When at least a second power value lower than a predetermined value is selected and a predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined signal is received by the signal determination unit, the first power value and the second power value are determined. A gaming machine T8, which is alternately selected.

  According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T7, when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination unit, the selection unit determines the first power as a power value of the movable signal output to the movable unit. At least a value and a second power value lower than the first power value, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined signal is received by the signal determination means, the first power value and the second power value are determined. Are alternately selected, so that the movable amount of the movable member can be varied even when the operating means is continuously operated, and the movable member can be variously moved.

<Characteristic U group> (The drive power of the solenoid is varied at the start and after the drive to prevent heat generation)
A driving member that can be driven at least to a first position and a second position different from the first position, and that the driving member is supplied with power equal to or more than a first power value so that the driving member is at least moved from the first position to the second position. A driving unit for driving to the first position when the supplied power value is equal to or less than the second power value, and a power supply for supplying power to the driving unit. Means, when driving the drive member from the first position to the second position, the power value supplied to the drive means by the power supply means to a drive start power not less than the first power value. Controlling, and in a state where the driving member is driven between the first position and the second position, the power value supplied by the power supply unit is equal to or more than the second power value and less than the driving start power. Supply power controlled to power value Gaming machine U1, characterized in that those having a control means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a movable body (such as an accessory) is operated from a standby position to a predetermined operation position by driving a solenoid, and is held at the predetermined operation position (for example, And JP-A-2008-301906).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, the solenoid is driven with the same electric power when the movable body is operated from the standby position to the predetermined operation position and when the movable body is held at the predetermined operation position. In this case, the movable body is moved from the standby position to the predetermined operation state even though the energy (electric power) required to hold the movable body at the predetermined operation position is smaller than to move the movable body from the standby position to the predetermined operation position. The movable body is held with the same energy (power) as when the movable body is moved to the position. As a result, if the holding time of the movable body becomes longer, energy (electric power) is supplied unnecessarily to the solenoid, and there are problems such as an increase in power consumption and heat generation and breakage of the solenoid.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, the driving member is driven from the first position to the second position by supplying power equal to or more than the first power value to the driving unit, and the power supplied to the driving unit is provided. When the value becomes equal to or less than the second power value, the driving member is driven from the second position to the first position. When the driving of the driving member from the first position to the second position is started by the supply power control unit, the power value supplied from the power supply unit to the driving unit is controlled to the driving start power equal to or more than the first power value. In a state where the driving member is driven between the first position and the second position, the power value supplied from the power supply unit is controlled to be equal to or more than the second power value and less than the driving start power.

  Accordingly, when the driving member starts to be driven from the first position to the second position, the driving start electric power equal to or more than the first electric power value at which the driving member is driven from the first position to the second position is increased. Supplied to On the other hand, in a state where the driving member is driven between the first position and the second position, a power value equal to or higher than the second power value and lower than the driving start power at which the driving member is not driven to the first position is transmitted to the driving unit. Supplied. Therefore, the drive member can be driven from the first position to the second position, and the drive member can be held at the second position with less power than the power required for the drive, and power consumption can be reduced. effective.

  In the gaming machine U1, there are provided ball entry means for allowing game balls to enter, and assignment means capable of assigning a predetermined game value based on the entry of game balls into the entry means. When the driving member is driven to the first position, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and when the driving member is driven to the second position, A gaming machine U2 characterized in that it is easier for game balls to enter the ball entry means than when the driving member is driven to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine U2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine U1. That is, a predetermined game value is provided by the providing means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball. When the driving member is driven to the first position, it becomes difficult to enter the ball, and when the driving member is driven to the second position, it becomes easy to enter the ball. Thereby, it can be noticed whether the driving member is driven to the first position or the second position, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the power supply unit includes: a first power supply unit configured to supply the drive start power to the drive unit; and a second power value equal to or more than the second power value and less than the drive start power. A second power supply unit for supplying a power value, wherein the supply power control unit is configured to supply the first power supply when driving the drive member from the first position to the second position. Means for supplying power to the driving means from the second power supply means to the driving means while the driving member is driven between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine U3 characterized in that the gaming machine U3 is controlled to supply the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine U3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine U1 or U2. That is, the power supply means includes a first power supply means for supplying the drive start power to the drive means, and a second power supply means for supplying the drive means with a power value equal to or more than the second power value and less than the drive start power. Means. When driving the driving member from the first position to the second position, power is supplied from the first power supply unit to the driving unit by the supplied power control unit, and the driving member is provided between the first position and the second position. Is driven, power is supplied from the second power supply unit to the drive unit by the supply power control unit. Thus, the supply power control unit may perform control so as to select the power to be supplied to the driving unit so as to be supplied from either the first power supply unit or the second power supply unit as occasion demands. This has the effect that the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine U3, when the holding period for holding the driving member at the second position is shorter than a predetermined period, the supply power control unit supplies power from the first power supply unit to the driving unit. Controlling the power supplied from the second power supply unit to the drive unit to a power value equal to or less than the second power value without controlling the power supply from the second power supply unit to the drive unit. A gaming machine U4.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U3, when the holding period for holding the driving member at the second position is shorter than the predetermined period, the driving power is supplied from the first power supply unit to the driving unit by the supply power control unit. After the power is supplied to the driving unit, the power supplied to the driving unit is equal to or less than the second power value without supplying power to the driving unit from the second power supply unit. Thus, the control of supplying power from the second power supply unit to the driving unit can be omitted, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine U3 or U4, the supply power control unit controls the first power supply unit to supply power to the drive unit, and then supplies power to the drive unit from the second power supply unit. In such a case, the control is performed such that the first power supply unit does not supply power to the drive power unit before the second power supply unit supplies power to the drive unit. A gaming machine U5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U3 or U4, after the power is supplied from the first power supply unit to the drive unit by the supply power control unit, the power is supplied from the first power supply unit to the drive power unit. After the power supply is stopped, the second power supply means supplies power to the drive means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) simultaneous supply of power to the drive unit from the first power supply unit and the second power supply unit, and prevent (suppress) the breakage of the drive unit. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines U3 to U5, the supply power control unit includes: a first instruction unit that outputs an instruction signal for causing the first power supply unit to supply power to the driving unit; A first supply control unit that controls supply of power from the first power supply unit to the drive unit based on an instruction signal from the first power supply unit, and a power supply unit that supplies power to the drive unit from the second power supply unit. A second instruction means for outputting an instruction signal, a second supply control means for controlling power supply from the second power supply means to the drive means based on the instruction signal from the second instruction means, A game comprising: timing instruction means for instructing control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means based on instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means. U6.

  According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines U3 to U5, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on the instruction signal from the first instruction unit, the supply electric power control unit controls the supply of electric power from the first electric power supply unit to the driving unit, and an instruction from the second instruction unit. A second supply control means for controlling the supply of power from the second power supply means to the drive means based on the signal, wherein the control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means is timing Instructed by instruction means. With this, even if the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means are not synchronized (shifted), the first supply control means and the second supply control means are instructed by the instruction by the timing instruction means. The control timing can be synchronized, and the power can be supplied to the driving means at an appropriate timing.

  In the gaming machine U6, the timing instruction means is for instructing the control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means at predetermined intervals.

  According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U6, the control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means is instructed at predetermined intervals by the timing instructing means. Thus, the control timing can be instructed to the first supply control means and the second supply control means at predetermined intervals, so that the control of the first supply control means and the second supply control means can be performed without delay for a predetermined period or more. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine U6 or U7, clear signal output means for outputting a clear signal for instructing forcibly turning off the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means, and the clear signal output means A gaming machine U8 comprising a clearing means for forcibly turning off the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means based on receiving the clear signal.

  According to the gaming machine U8, the following effects are exerted in addition to whether the gaming machine U6 or U7 plays. That is, the clear signal is output from the clear signal output means, and the clear signal is received by the clear means, whereby the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means are forcibly turned off. Thereby, the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means can be turned off collectively, and the control of the first supply control means and the second supply control means can be stopped collectively. is there.

  The gaming machine U9, further comprising a noise removing unit capable of removing noise of a signal output from the clear signal unit to the clearing unit.

  According to the gaming machine U9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U8, it is possible to remove the noise of the signal output from the clear signal unit to the clear unit by the noise removing unit. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the clear unit from malfunctioning due to the noise and the control of the first supply control unit and the second supply control unit from being erroneously stopped.

  In any of the gaming machines U6 to U9, when the voltage of the instruction signal from the first instruction means is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage, the first supply control means may transmit the signal from the first power supply means to the drive means. And the second supply control means, when a voltage of an instruction signal from the second instruction means is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage, the second supply control means A gaming machine U10, which is in a conductive state in which power is supplied to the driving means.

  According to the gaming machine U10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines U6 to U9, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the first supply control unit receives the first instruction signal having a voltage equal to or higher than the predetermined voltage, the first supply control unit is turned on, and power is supplied from the first power supply unit to the driving unit. Is done. Further, when the second supply control means receives the second instruction signal having a voltage equal to or higher than the predetermined voltage, the second supply control means becomes conductive, and power is supplied from the second power supply means to the driving means. Is done. Thus, since the first supply control means and the second supply control means can be controlled by voltage, there is an effect that power required for control for supplying power to the drive means can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U10, the supply power control means operates when a predetermined range of power is supplied, and a control power supply means for supplying power to the supply power control means, A game machine U11 comprising: a noise removing unit capable of removing noise of power supplied from the unit to the supply power control unit.

  According to the gaming machine U11, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines U1 to U10. That is, the noise of the power supplied from the control power supply unit is removed by the noise removal unit with respect to the supply power control unit that is operated by supplying a predetermined range of power. Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the supply power control means from being destroyed by supplying the power supply control means with power in a predetermined range or more. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a predetermined range of power from being supplied to the supply power control unit due to noise, and prevent the supply power control unit from malfunctioning.

  In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U11, the driving unit generates a magnetic force when electric power is supplied, and a coil capable of driving the driving member, and connects one end of the coil to the power supply unit. A power line connected to the other end and a degaussing line connected to the power line in parallel with the coil, wherein the degaussing line extends from the other end of the coil to the one end. A gaming machine U12 comprising a rectifier for rectifying a current in a direction toward the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine U12, in addition to the effects provided by any of the games U1 to U11, the following effects are provided. When power is supplied to the coil of the driving means, a magnetic force is generated, and the driving member is driven. One end of the coil is connected to the power supply means, the other end is grounded, and a degaussing line is connected to the power supply line in parallel with the coil as a power supply line of the driving means. The current flowing through the degaussing line is rectified by the rectifier in a direction from the other end to the one end of the coil. Thus, when power is supplied from the power supply means, power is supplied to the coil without current flowing through the degaussing line, and a magnetic force is generated in the coil. On the other hand, when the power supply to the coil is cut off, the energy of the magnetic force generated in the coil can be consumed as power through the degaussing line, and the supplied power control means is damaged by the energy of the magnetic force generated in the coil. This has the effect of preventing (suppressing).

  In any of the gaming machines U1 to U12, the power supply unit includes a second power supply unit for supplying a power value equal to or greater than the second power value and less than the drive start power, and the second power supply unit. A third power supply unit for supplying a power value that is the driving start power in total with the supplied power value, wherein the supplied power control unit moves the driving member from the first position to the second position. When the drive is started to the second position, control is performed such that both the second power supply unit and the third supply unit supply power to the drive unit, and the first position and the second position are controlled. A gaming machine U13, which controls the second power supply means to supply power to the drive means while the drive member is being driven.

  According to the gaming machine U13, the following effect is achieved in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines U1 to U12. That is, a power value equal to or more than the second power value and less than the drive start power is supplied to the driving unit by the second power supply unit of the power supply unit, and the third power supply unit and the second power supply unit of the power supply unit are connected to each other. An electric power value that becomes the driving start electric power in total is supplied to the driving means. When the driving member starts driving the driving member from the first position to the second position by the supplied power control means, power is supplied to the driving means from both the second power supply means and the third power supply means, and the first position is supplied. When the driving member is driven between the second position and the second position, power is supplied from the second power supply unit to the driving unit. Thereby, the driving member can be driven from the first position to the second position, and the driving member can be held at the second position with less power than the power required for the driving, and power consumption can be reduced. This has the effect.

  The gaming machine Z1 according to any one of the gaming machines in each of the above-described embodiments and control examples, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of the gaming machines in each of the above-described embodiments and control examples, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

The gaming machine Z3 according to any one of the gaming machines in each of the above-described embodiments and control examples, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which an effect of operating a decoration from a standby position to a predetermined operation position is performed by a player operating an operation means (effect button or the like) ( For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-097827).
However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises an operating means operable by a player, and a signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operating means. A signal discriminating means for discriminating a signal output by the signal output means, a plurality of effect means capable of executing an effect, and based on that the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, An effect execution means capable of causing at least two or more of the effect means of the plurality of effect means to execute a specific effect in a predetermined first effect pattern, wherein the effect execution means comprises: In the case where the specific effect is executed by two or more effect means, at least one of the two or more effect means is made to wait for the execution of the effect for a predetermined standby period. Is intended to start the execution of the effect for at least 1 of the presentation means waiting based on the reception of the predetermined signal by the signal discriminating means during said waiting period.
The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein in the standby period, when the operation unit is continuously operated, the signal output unit performs the predetermined operation with respect to each operation. This is set for a period longer than the shortest period in which a signal can be output.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the signal determining means determines the interval at which the predetermined signal is determined, and the interval determining means determines the interval. A storage unit capable of storing information; and a period setting unit that variably sets the standby period based on the information stored in the storage unit.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 has a valid period in which when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means, the determination is valid. Validity period setting means for setting, and invalidity determination means for determining information that the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means before the validity period is set by the validity period setting means. .
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is a gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, wherein the regulation means for regulating standby by the effect executing means is based on the information determined by the invalidity determining means being specific information. Have
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, operating means that can be operated by the player, signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operating means, and signal output thereof A signal discriminating means for discriminating a signal outputted by the means, a plurality of effect means capable of executing an effect, and a predetermined first signal based on the discrimination of the predetermined signal by the signal discriminating means. An effect execution means capable of causing at least two or more of the effect means of the plurality of effect means to execute a specific effect in an effect pattern, wherein the effect execution means comprises: Means for causing the at least one of the two or more effect means to wait for the execution of the effect when the specific effect is executed by the means; It is intended to start the execution of the effect for at least 1 of the presentation means waiting based on the reception of the predetermined signal by the signal discriminating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, during the standby period, when the operating means is operated continuously, the signal output means is turned off by the respective signal output means. The period is set to be longer than the shortest period in which the predetermined signal can be output for the operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the interval judging means judging the interval at which the signal judging means judges the predetermined signal; It has a storage means capable of storing the information determined by the interval determination means, and a period setting means for variably setting the standby period based on the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination unit, a valid period setting unit that sets a valid period for which the determination is valid, and before the valid period is set by the valid period setting unit, Invalid determination means for determining the information from which the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the information executed by the effect executing means is based on the fact that the information determined by the invalidity determining means is the specific information. It has a regulating means for regulating the waiting. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
113 Voice lamp control device (production effect means)

Claims (2)

Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means,
Signal determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means,
A plurality of production means capable of performing the production,
Based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination unit, at least two or more of the plurality of effect units in the predetermined first effect pattern execute a specific effect. Possible effect execution means, and
The effect executing means, when the specific effect is executed by the two or more effect means, executes an effect on at least one of the effect means of the two or more effect means during a predetermined standby period. And causing at least one of the effecting means in a standby state to start executing an effect based on the reception of the predetermined signal by the signal determining means during the standby period. A gaming machine characterized by the following. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute a privilege game which is advantageous to the player.

Images